Home

Agilent 4396B Network/Spectrum/Impedance Analyzer Function

1. Path 2 Port Mneu For calkits 2 For type N calkits 3 For user calkit 5005036 Figure 5 20 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Cal Key for Network Analyzer 1 2 Measurement Block 5 35 DEFINE STANDARD y STD NO I ISHORT 60 STD NO2 OFEN et Sib NOS LOAD ge STD NO 4 SPECIFY IBEL THRUI OFFSET STD NO 5 LOAD LABEL STD TD NO 6 hora STD DONE STD NOT DEFINED SHORT LY STD NO S SHORT OPEN SPECIFY SPECIFY classy OFFSET LABEL STD SPECIEY SUA STD DONE Su DEFINED sue LOAD BELAY SPECIFY Y 522 SPECIFY TER 522 OFFSET 8220 LABEL MORE STD N STD OFFSET SPECIFY DEFINED DONE FWD TRANS 1 REV TRANS nu Ty 1 FWD MATCH i SPECIFY REV MATCH 1 RESPONSE LABEL i RESPONSE sm amp ISON 958 DON EFINED CLASS DONE ISPEC DI Specify Offset Menu ARBITRARY CLASS DONE IMPEDANCE x SPEC DI TERMINAL LABEL IMPEDANCE CLASS LY BE SELECT LETTER SiB 1 SNC BACK LABEL SPACE S
2. SWEEP TIME mal Sweep SWEEP ME y gt MKR STOP m NUMBER of RETUR POINTS NUMBER oF BOWER POINTS COUPLED CH IE EW MORE SWEEP TYPE Y MENU Y SEGMENT SWEEP TYPE START LIN FREQ STOP LOG FREG CENTER LIST FREQ POWER SPAN SWEEP RETURN ERI SEGMENTI LY LOQUI SEGMENT SEGMENT EDI DONE DELETE ADD CLEAR Segment Menu DAE CLEAR LIST gt YES RETURN NO Sweep Menu Clear List Menu Softkey Menus for Network Analyzer CB006011 Figure 6 1 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Sweep Key 6 2 Sweep Block Sweep menu Network Analyzer SWEEP TIME DISPLAY POINTS CHANNEL COUPLING SWEEP TIME AUTO SWEEP TIME NUMBER of POINTS COUPLED ON off SWEEP TYPE MENU SWEEP TYPE EIN FREG LOG FREQ FREG 1 POWER SWEEP EDIT LIST b SEGMENT EDIT HED Meni ABD LIST Mens UST DONE RETURN Figure 6 2 Sweep Menu for Network Analyzer SWEEP TIME AUTO man SWETAUTO ON OFF Toggles between automatic and manual sweep time The automatic sweep time selects the optimum sweep time automatically SWEEP TIME S
3. CONVERSION OFF Meas Z Trans CONVERSION YY Rel i Y Trans 1 6 MORE X CONVERSION 4 PHASE I 8 PHASE I 16 PHASE RETURN T RETURN d C5005005 Figure 5 7 Conversion Menu OFF CONV OFF Turns off all parameter conversion operations Z Refl CONV ZREF Converts reflection data to its equivalent impedance values Z Trans CONV ZTRA Converts transmission data to its equivalent impedance values Y Refl CONV YREF Converts reflection data to its equivalent admittance values Y Trans CONV YTRA Converts transmission data to its equivalent admittance values See Conversion Function in Chapter 12 for more information on the equivalent impedance and admittance 1 S CONV ONEDS Expresses the data in inverse S parameter values Meas MULTIPLE PHASE 4XPHASE CONV MP4 Multiplies phase data by a factor of 4 SxPHASE CONV MP8 Multiplies phase data by a factor of 8 16xPHASE CONV MP16 Multiplies phase data by a factor of 16 For more information on the conversion function see Conversion Note A Y Function in Chapter 12 Measurement Block 5 11 Detection menu Spectrum Analyzer DETECTION gt POS PEAK DETECTION NEG SAMPLE RETURN gt Figure 5 8 Detection Menu POSITIVE PEAK POS DET POS Selects positive peak mode as the
4. m D Spec gt Typical a Z 5 Z 5 T T Z O zd Z 2 N Z A L A wg 1 2a 40 50 B 208 8a 94 1800 110 1280 Input Level dB Figure 10 1 Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy 10 4 Specifications Residual responses QA inputs frequency gt 3 MHz 95 dBm s p c ER input frequency gt 3 MHz lt 70 dBm s p c See EMC under Others in Common to Network and Spectrum Measurement Trace noise A R B R measurement 10 dBm input IFBW 2300 Hz lt 0 002 dB rms s p c Stability 0 01 s p c Phase Characteristics Measurements format Phase format Expanded phase format Frequency response Deviation from Linear Phase A R B R 20 dBm input 28 5 C IFBW lt 3 kHz 100 frequency lt 1 2 frequency gt 1 MHz 6 deg 4 deg s p c 3 deg 2 deg s p c Dynamic accuracy A R B R Input Level Dynamic Accuracy relative to full scale input level 0 dB t3 deg 10 dB 0 6 deg 20 dB to 70 dB 0 3 deg 80 dB 0 7 deg 90 dB lt 2 0 deg 100 dB lt 7 d
5. 30 minutes Non operation Conditions Temperature 20 C to 60 C Humidity wet bulb temperature lt 45 without condensation 15 to 95 RH Altitude 0 to 4572 meters Specifications 10 23 Others EMC Complies with CISPR 11 1990 EN 55011 1991 Group 1 Class A Complies with IEC 1000 3 2 1995 EN 6100 3 2 1995 Complies with IEC 1000 3 3 1994 EN 6100 3 3 1995 Complies with IEC 1000 4 2 1995 EN 50082 1 1992 4 kV CD 8 AD Complies with IEC 801 3 1984 EN 50082 1 1992 3 V m Complies with IEC 1000 4 4 1995 EN 50082 1 1992 1 kV Main 0 5kV Singnal Line Note When tested at 3 V m according to IEC 801 3 1984 the residual response will be within specifications over the full immunity test frequency range of 27 MHz to 1000 MHz except when the analyzer frequency is identical to the transmitted interference signal test frequency This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES 001 Cet appareil ISM est conforme la norme NMB 001 du Canada Power requirements 90 V to 132 V or 198 V to 264 V 47 to 63 Hz 300 max Weight 21 5 kg max Dimensions
6. 2 2 2 222 2 24 2 2 2 2 24 4 2 2 2 40 V Maximum current 20 mA 2 kQ 5 resistor is inserted for DC bias current limiation Measurement Basic Accuracy Supplemental Performance Characteristics Measurement accuracy is specified at the connecting surface of the APC 7 connector of the 43961A under the following conditions Warm up time gt 30 minutes Ambient Temperature 2 28 5 same temperature at which calibration was performed Signal level 50 Q Terminated 6 to 14 dBm Correction 2 2 2 24 2 4 2 24 2 2 42 2 22 ON IFBW doo lt 300 Hz Averaging cal 2 2 4 2 4 2 2 2 2 4 4 2 424 4 272 2 2 gt 8 10 16 Specifications 7 100M o 1G 186 H 3 0 96 15042nF 0 3 m F MHz 15421FX3 0X10 us 10M 100M Test Frequency Hz Figure 10 9 Impedance Measurement Accuracy Z 0 Accuracy Z accuracy Za x Zm x 100 accuracy sin 1 Z 100 Wher
7. Limit Line Entry menu Step Continue Run Pause Stop Edit q ASSIGN Hp4396 OUTPUT Hp4396 ENTER Hp4396 END GOTO LINE RECALL LINE END EDIT COMMAND ENTRY LY SELECT LETTER SPACE BACK SPACE ERASE TITLE DONE CANCEL CAT SAVE RE SAVE GET PURGE INITIALIZE MSI INTERNAL SCRATCH RENumber LIST COMMAND ENTRY Y user define user define CLEAR W O RESE IBASIC Menu BEEP DONE ON off BEEP WARN on OFF RETURN Beeper Menu 008037 Figure B 25 Softkey Menus Accessed from the System Key B 20 Softkey Tree Local SYSTEM CONTROLLER ADDRESS ABLE ONLY SET ADDRESSES H ADDRESS 4396 ADDRESS CONTROLLER RETURN 008001 Figure B 26 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Local Key Softkey Tree B 21
8. GPIB cable External Monitors Discs An GPIB cable is required to interface the analyzer with a computer or other external instrument The following cables are available 10833A 1 m 10833B 2 m 108330 3 m 10833D 0 5 m The analyzer can control the built in LCD and an external monitor simultaneously Color monitors supporting VGA can be used as an external monitor Agilent Technologies disks are listed below m 92192A Box of 10 3 5 inch 720 bye micro flexible disks m 92192X Box of 10 3 5 inch 1 44M byte micro flexible disks Accessories and Options 9 5 10 Specifications These specifications are the performance standards or limits against which the instrument is tested When shipped from the factory the 4396B meets the specifications listed in this section The performance test procedures are covered in the 4396B Performance Test Manual Specifications describe the instrument s warranted performance over the temperature range of 0 C to 40 C except as noted Supplemental characteristics are intended to provide information that is useful in applying the instrument by giving non warranted performance parameters These are denoted as supplemental performance characteristics s p c typical or nominal Warm up time must be greater than or equal to 30 minutes after power on for all specifications Network Measurement Source Characteristics Frequency Characteristics
9. Ap Up 1 Tsw x D S1 x Tsw Tr xS11 x 0 Mis Sa Ms x511 X5S11 m Msw Sra M x8 gt ix8Si gt n Am Um x 811 Subtotal k 1 m n o0 S Combine Random Errors In the space provided enter the appropriate linear values from the list of errors Then combine these errors in an RSS fashion to obtain a total sum of the random errors 3xNi 3x w 3x Ny X811 3x x x Ra 2xRa xSi1 Ra 911 x81 2 x Rr2 X821 X812 x z 4 w x y2 22 x x R Subtotal S R Vr Total Magnitude Errors Erm linear V T g mag x 11 x Erm log 20 Log 1 Erm Si1 20 Log 1 Erp Arcsin V Am Um x Arcsin x y 2 511 811 Tra phase 2 8 deg 1 With IF bandwidth of 10 Hz 11 26 System Performance Table 11 9 Transmission Measurement Uncertainty Worksheet In the columns below enter the appropriate values for each term Frequency Error Term Symbol dB Value Linear Value Crosstalk C Transmission tracking Tt Source match Ms Load match M Dynamic accuracy magnitude 1 Am Dynamic accuracy phase 1 Ap Multiplexer Switching Uncertainty Um magnitude Multiplexer Switching Uncertainty Up phase 511 S11 S21 S21 51
10. 425 W x 285 x 553 D mm 10 24 Specifications 11 System Performance Typical System Performance Introduction The performance of the 4396B Network Spectrum Analyzer analyzer depends not only on the performance of the analyzer but also on the configuration the user selected operating conditions and the measurement calibration This section explains the residual errors remaining in a measurement system after accuracy enhancement It provides information to calculate the total measurement uncertainty of different configurations Graphs at the beginning of the section show examples of the performance that can be calculated using the methods in this section The sources of measurement errors are explained with an error model flowgraph and uncertainty equations Information is provided for conversion of the dynamic accuracy error in dB to a linear value for use in the uncertainty equations The effects of temperature drift on measurement uncertainty are illustrated with graphs Typical system performance tables are provided for an 7 mm and 3 5mm systems using an 850464 test set for 50 Q type N systems using the 85046A and 87512A test sets and 75 Q type N systems using the 85046B and 87512B test sets Procedure and blank worksheets are supplied to compute the total error corrected measurement uncertainty of a system These procedures combine the terms in the tables the uncertainty equation and
11. 5007004 Figure B 20 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Marker Key Softkey Tree B 15 SEARCH NEXT PEAK PEAK NEXT PEAK MI NEXT PEAK RIGHT MULTIPLE SIGANL PEAKS E on OFF THRESHOLD SEARCH BEAK DEF on OFF PEAKS ALL MENU THRESHOLD PEAKS SUB MER VALUE RIGHT gt RETURN PEAKS THRESHOLD LEFT Peak Menu PEAK PER PEAK DEF MENU RETURN SEARCH TRK Peak Definition Menu RETURN PART SREH on SIGANL TRK on OFF MKRA gt SUB MKR 1 SEARCH RNG SEARCH TRK on OFF MKR LEFT RNG SEARCH RANGE MENU RIGHT RNG RETURN Search Menu Search Range Menu Sub Maker Menu CB007018 Figure B 21 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Search Key for the Network Analyzer B 16 Softkey Tree THRESHOLD on OFF NEXT PEAK THRESHOLD NEXT PEAK VALUE LEFT MKH NEXT PEAK THRESHOLD RIGHT PEAK FERTY MERRE SIGANE TRK POS neg en OFF PEAK DEF SEARCH PEAK DEF AX PEAKS ALL PEAKS RIG
12. Range 100 kHz to 1 8 GHz Resolution 2 lt 1 mHz Frequency reference Accuracy 23 5 C referenced to 2396 lt 5 5 ppm year lt 2 5 ppm year 5 Initial achievable accuracy lt 1 0 ppm s p c Temperature stability 23 5 C referenced to 28 C E2ppm s p c Precision frequency reference option 1D5 Accuracy 0 to 40 C referenced to 289C_ lt 0 18 ppm year lt 0 1 ppm year s p c Initial achievable accuracy lt 0 02 ppm s p c Temperature stability O0 C to 40 C referenced to 28 lt 0 01 ppm s p c Output Characteristics Power range 60 dBm to 20 dBm Power Sweep range 20 dB Power sweep linearity 23 5 C 50 MHz relative to stop power 0 5 dB Resolution 2 42 0 1 dB Flatness 23 5 C relative to 50 MHz
13. lt 0 18 ppm year Aging lt 0 1 ppm year s p c Initial achievable accuracy lt 0 02 ppm s p c Temperature stability O0 C to 40 C referenced to 23 C lt 0 01 ppm s p c Resolution bandwidth RBW Range 1 Hz to 3 MHz 1 3 10 step Selectivity 60 dB BW 3 dB BW RBW gt 10 2 2 1 4 422 4 3 4 0202000007000000020 10 QRBW lt 8 2 2 2 2 1272 4 2 72 5 22 2 2 2 2 3 Accuracy RBW gt 10 2 2 4 4 e e s en E2086 RBW lt 3 KHz 2 2 3 2 222222 lt 10 Video bandwidth Range 0 003 Hz to 3 MHz 1 3 10 step 1 lt RBW VBW lt 300 Noise sidebands Offset from Carrier Noise Sidebands gt 1 kHz lt 95 dBc Hz gt 10 kHz lt 105 dBc Hz gt 1 MHz lt 110 dBc Hz 1 Center frequency lt 1 GHz Add 20log frequency GHz for frequency gt 1 GHz Specifications 10 7 Carrier Frequency 1GHz o o dBc Hz Z S 02 o 22 1 10K Frequency Offset Hz
14. TITLE ADJUST LDISPLAY FREQUENCY BLANK RETURN Display Menu SELECT LETTER SPACE BACK SPACE ERASE TITLE DONE CANCEL Title Menu INTENSITY BACKGROUND INTENSITY MODIFY COLORS CH DATA CH1 CH2 DATA I CH3 MEM LIMIT EN EN GRATICULE I WARNINS MORE y TEXT MARKER P IBASIC gt MORE PEN 1 PEN 2 3 4 5 PEN 6 RETURN RETURN RETURN DEFAULT COLORS SAVE COLORS RECALL COLORS RETURN Adjust Display Menu TINT BRIGHTNESS COLOR RESET COLOR RETURN Color Adjust Menu CB005035 Figure 5 11 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Key Measurement Block 5 17 Display menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer DUAL CHAN on OFF DISPLAY DATA MORY DATA and MEMORY DATA MEMORY DATA HOLD OFF TN HOLD or MIN RETURN BATA MATH IDATA DATA MATH BATA DAT
15. 10 17 Y 0 Accuracy 2 6 e ot e 10 18 R X Accuracy Depands 2 10 18 G B Accuracy Depands on D oao a a a a a a a 10 18 D Accuracy 2 4 4 4 4 4s 10 19 L Accuracy Depends on 10 19 C 10 19 Contents 25 Common to Network and Spectrum Measurement 10 20 10 20 Marker 10 20 Storage 10 20 Battery Backup 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 25 25 2 2 10 20 10 20 Parallel interface 2 1021 Probe Power s s s s s 10 21 Specifications When Instrument BASIC Is Operated 10 21 General Characteristics ers e s s s LA Input and Output Characteristics sls sls sv sr sr sr sss 10 21 Operation 10 28 Non operation Conditions c c 10 28 Others 10 24 11 System Performance Typical System Performance 11 1 Introduction 222022202 11 1 Comparison of Typical Error Corrected Measurement Uncertainty 11 1 Reflection Uncertainty of One Port 11 2 Reflection Uncertainty of a Two Port Device 11 3
16. 5907009 SEARCH IN WIDSIN Searches for the cutoff point on the trace that is within the current cutoff points SEARCH OUT WIDSOUT This softkey searches for the cutoff point on the trace outside of the current cutoff points WIDTHS on OFF WIDT ON OFF Turns on the bandwidth search feature and calculates the center sweep parameter value bandwidth Q insertion loss and cutoff point deviation from the center of a bandpass or band reject shape on the trace The amplitude value that defines the passband or reject band is set using the WIDTH VALUE softkey The Amarker is automatically changed to the tracking Amarker when WIDTHS is turned on When WIDTHS is ON the normal Amarker cannot be selected WIDTH VALUE WIDV Sets an amplitude parameter for example 3 dB that defines the start and stop points for a bandwidth search The bandwidth search feature analyzes a bandpass or band reject trace and calculates the center point bandwidth and Q quality factor for the specified bandwidth Bandwidth units are in the units of the current format In the expanded phase mode this function searches for the two cutoff points whose values are WIDTH VALUE and WIDTH VALUE For example when the width value is 45 the cutoff points values are 45 Note 1 The value to be obtained varies depending on the setup of the Amode For more information on the width function see
17. C5006007 Figure B 16 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Source Key for Network Analyzer Source C5006006 Figure B 17 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Source Key for Spectrum Analyzer B 12 Softkey Tree SWEEP Trigger HOLD SINGLE NUMBER of GROUPS CONTINUOUS TRIGGER FREE RUN TRIGGER FREE RUN EXTERNAL I VIDEO MANUAL GATE LEVEL GATE CTL LEVEL EDGE GATE DELAY GATE LENGTH RETURN TRIG EVENT ION SWEEP TRIG PLRTY POS neg RETURN MEASURE RESTART 05006008 Figure B 18 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Key Softkey Tree 13 Marker Block SUB MKR CLEAR SUB MKR PRESET MKRS MKR ON IDATA MKR UNCOUPLE MKR CONT k AMODE MENU Maker Menu Sub Maker Menu Clear Sub Maker Menu MISA FIXED A MKR TRACKING A MKR AMODE OFF A MKR SWP PARAM FIXED A MKR VALUE FIXED 4 MKR AUX VALUE Only for network analyzer RETURN Delta mode Menu C5007017 Figure B 19 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Marker Key B 14 Softkey Tree MKR CENTER START MKR STOP MKR REFERENCE MKR ZOOM PEAK CENTER CROSS CHAN on GFF MORE la MKHS A gt 5 MKRS CENTER ZOOMING APERTURE CROSS CHAN on OFF RETURN
18. Data for each Display Point Internal Complex Use Only 2byte 4byte 2byte 4byte 16 X NOP byte 4byte Analyzer Type 0 Network Analyzer Figure 4 CAL Data Group Structure for the Network Analyzer Ch 1 Hea er Only alyzer Type Internal Use NOP Internal Use Only Integer Only There is no CAL data for the spectrum analyzer yte C50C008 Abyte 2byte Abyte alyzer Type 1 Spectrum Ana Figure C 5 CAL Data Group Structure for the Spectrum Analyzer DATA consists of a header and a data segment by a channel mg MEMORY consists of a header and a data segment by a channel mg DATA TRACE consists of a header and a data segment by a channel Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data 7 m MEMORY TRACE consists of a header and a data segment by a channel Ch 2 Data Segment Internal Us NOP Internal nalyzer Intern e Internal Use Data for Each Display Point Type Only Integer Only Use Only 2byte Abyte 2byte Abyte 16 X NOP byte Network Analyzer Abyte 8 X NOP byte Spectrum Analyzer Analyzer Network Analyzer 1 Spectrum Analyzer CS0C009 Figure C 6 DATA MEMORY DATA TRACE and MEMORY TRACE Data Group Structure m Analyzer is a two byte INTEGER value This shows the analyzer type of each channel 0 is set when the network analyzer is selected and
19. 1 Accuracy enhancement procedures are performed using 85032B 50 Q type N calibration kit Enviromental temperature is 23 C 3 C at calibration 19 from calibration temperature must be maintained for valied measurement calibration 2 With IF bandwidth of 10 Hz 3 With impedace matched load 4 High level noise is the RMS of a continuouse measurement of a short circuit or thru 5 Arrived at by bending 11857D cables out perpendicular to front panel and reconnecting Stability is much better with less flexing 6 Arrived at using 11857D cables and full 2 port calibration Drift is much better without calbes and with 1 port calibration For this case drift typically is 0 1 0 05 xf GHz x A C degrees System Performance 11 21 Table 11 5 Typical System Performance for Devices with 75 0 Type N Connectors 4396B with 85046B or 85044B Test Set 300 kHz to 1 8 GHz Typical Residual after Accuracy Enhancement 2 Symbol Error Terms Uncorrected Response Only Response and Isolation One Port Full two port D Directivity 30 dB 30 dB 44 dB 44 dB 44 dB 3 2 10 2 3 2 10 2 6 8 10 5 6 8 10 5 6 8 10 5 Ms Source Match 16 dB 16 dB 16 dB 85 dB 85 dB 0 16 0 16 0 16 0 018 0 018 Reflection Tracking 1 8 dB 1 5 dB 1 4 dB 0 06 dB 0 0
20. Centronics standard compliant Printer control language PCL3 Printer Control Language Probe Power Output voltage 15 V 300 mA 12 6 V 160 mA GND nominal Specifications When Instrument BASIC Is Operated Keyboard PS 2 style 101 english keyboard Connector mini DIN port 4 bit in 8 bit out port TTL Level IS 00 5012033 Figure 10 10 I O Port Pin Assignments General Characteristics Input and Output Characteristics External reference input Frequency 10 MHz 100 Hz s p c Level gt 6 dBm s p c Input impedance 50 Q nominal Connector BNC female Internal Reference Output Frequency 10 MHz nominal Level 2 dBm s p c Output Impedance
21. Gated Sweep on the Stepped Repetitive Sampling l4 Three Types of Markers Marker Value Marker Time Continuous Discrete Mode Marker on the Data Trace or on the Memory Trace o AMode Marker Search Function Width Function Peak Definition aoaaa Peak Definition for Network Analyzer ee Peak Definition for Spectrum Analyzer MN 222022202 How GPIB Works s c s s r s s s e is s s s t e Talker Listener l l 2 4 4 4 4 s Controller 2 GPIB Requirements 4 ee Analyzer GPIB Bus Mode 2 Setting Addresses Calibration for Network Measurement 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Introduction 2 s sc c st c sc c e os Contents 28 Accuracy Enhancement 2 12 88 Sources of Measurement 12 89 Directivity o 12 39 Source MM 12 40 Load Match 4 c sc a c s n 12 41 Isolation Crosstalk
22. Uncertainty 20 14 REF 10 20 30 40 50 60 7 0 30 98 100 easurement Level dB from REF Figure 11 13 Typical Phase Dynamic Accuracy Error Reference Power Level 20 dB from Full Scale System Performance 11 13 Dynamic Accuracy Error Contribution REF Level 60 dB from Full Scale dB Uncertainty 5 42 1 60 50 44 30 20 10 FEF 10 20 30 40 50 60 easurement Level dB from REF Figure 11 14 Typical Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Error QReference Power Level 60 dB from Full Scale 5 EF Level 60 dB from Full Scale 20 1 D D 5 5 gt D NC yp D 1 O c 3 60 50 40 30 20 10 REF 10 20 30 40 59 60 easurement Level dB from REF Figure 11 15 Typical Phase Dynamic Accuracy Error QReference Power Level 60 dB from Full Scale 11 14 System Performance Effects of Temperature Drift Figure 11 16 to Figure 11 19 are graphs showing the effects of temperature drift on error corrected measurement uncertainty values Values are shown for changes of 1 C 8 and 5 C from the ambient temperature Figure 11 16 and Figure 11 17 show total refle
23. BEEPER MENU LIMIT MENU SERVICE MENU System Menu For Information on Service Menu see Service Manual BEEP FAIL EIMIT EINE on OFF LIMIT TEST on OFF on OFF EDIT LIMIT EINE SEGMENT EDIF DELETE ADD RAM nok BASIC mmk RAM nok BASIC mmk RAM nnk BASIC mmk RAM nnk BASIC DONE CHANGE YE 5 L CANCEL J Memory Partition Menu HH MM SS HOUR MIN SEC ENTER CANCEL DATE DD MMUYY LY MONTH DAY YEAR ENTER CANCEL DATE MODE MonDay Year DayMonYear RETURN Set Clock Menu CLEAR LIST Y CLEAR LIST YE NO DONE LIMIT LINE OFFSETS Y SWP PARAM OFFSET AMPLITUDE OFFSET MARKER AMB OES RETURN RETURN Limit Menu gt SWP PARAM MKR SWP PARAM UPPER LIMIT LOWER LIMIT DELTA LIMIT MIDDLE VALUE MKR MIDDLE DO
24. 10 1 Output 10 1 Receiver Characteristics a a a a a a a a 10 2 Input 10 2 Magnitude Characteristics ll ln 10 3 Phase Characteristics a a a a a 10 5 Group Delay Characteristics 2 2 7 a e a ll a 10 6 Sweep Characteristics 10 6 Spectrum Measurement 7 l4 4 s s sz sc s e e e e o e o o 10 7 Frequency Characteristics 2 a a s s e s e o s o c 10 7 Amplitude Characteristics 2 10 9 Sweep Characteristics a a a a a a a 10 12 Input and Output Characteristics 10 13 Specifications when Option 106 Time Gated spectrum analysis is installed 10 14 Specifications when Option 1D7 50 Q to 75 Q Input Impedance Conversion 10 14 4396B Option 010 Specifications 10 15 Measurement Functions 2 ll a 10 15 Display Formats 10 15 Sweep Parameters 7 10 15 IF Bandwidth 2 2 10 15 Calibration 2 2 2 10 15 Unknown 10 15 Output 2 10 15 External DC Bias 10 16 Measurement Basic Accuracy Supplemental Performance Characteristics 10 16 Z 0 Accuracy
25. 5 17 MEMORY MEME VV 5 18 MEMORY DISP MEMO 5 18 DATA and MEMORY DISP DATM 5 18 DATA MEMORY DATMEM 5 18 DATA HOLD DHOLDOFFIMAX MIN 518 MAX HOLD oaa 5 18 MIN HOLD 5 18 DATA MATH MM 5 18 DATA MATH 1 MATH DATA DMNM DPLM DDVM MEN 5 18 DEFAULT GAIN amp OFS DEFGO 5 18 Contents 4 OFFSET VALUE OFFSET DATOVAL MKR OFFSET MKROFS AUX OFFSET VALUE DATAOVAL GAIN GAIN DATGAIN SPLIT DISPLAY s e e eo e e a a SPLIT DISP ON off SPLD ONIOFF BASIC SCREEN DISPLAY ALLOCATION DISA ALLI HIHB ALLBIBASS TITLE TITLE TITL ADJUST DISPLAY FREQUENCY BLANK FREQUENCY BLANK Adjust display menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer COLOR INTENSITY INTENSITY CINTE BACKGROUND INTENSITY BACI COLOR ADJUST MODIFY COLORS CH1 DATA COLO CH1D CH1 MEM LIMIT LINE COLO CH1M CH2 DATA COLO CH2D CH2 MEM LIMIT LINE COLO CH2M GRATICULE COLO GRAT WARNING COLO WARN TEXT MARKER COLO TEXT IBASIC COLO IBT PEN COLOR PEN 1 COLO PEN1 PEN 2 COLO PEN2 PEN 3 COLO PEN3 PEN 4 COLO PEN4 PEN 5 COLO PEN5 PEN 6 COLO PEN6 DEFAULT COLORS DEFC SAVE COLOR SAVE COLORS SVCO RECALL COLOR RECALL COLORS RECC Color adjust menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer
26. 5 R VIDEO DC OFFSET IF RANGE VIDEO PEAK ATTENUATOR gt TRIGGER IF RANGE ZERO SPAN ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT FILTER DETECTOR ADJUSTMENT VIDEO FILTER F CHAR RAW USER AVERAGING LEVEL DATA LEVEL CORRECTION ARRAYS CORRECTION DATA DATA TRACE gt SCALING ARRAYS ARRAYS GSP FORMAT A DISPLAY gt i Y DATA ME INTERFACE MEMORY MEMORY TRACE gt SCALING ARRAYS ARRAYS Remarks A NORMAL FLOW PROCESS c CONDITIONED FLOW 05012046 Figure 12 3 Data Processing for Spectrum Measurement Decimation Windowing This function reduces the sampling rate to resolve the spectrum closer than the fre quency resolution which is decided by an inherent sampling rate and finite sampling number In other words this process allows any frequency resolution to be set usi ng an inherent sampling rate in FFT Analyzer Features 12 7 Fast Fourier Transform FFT This operation transforms a time domain signal into a frequency domain data using th e Fast Fourier Transform Absolute Squared This calculates the power of the spectrum Video Averaging Video Averaging is one of the noise reduction techniques The
27. Ly LIMIT TEST TABLE CB008020 Figure 8 16 Screen Menu PRINT STANDARD PRINALL Copies one page of the tabular listings to a printer Either STANDARD for a black and white printer or COLOR for a color printer is shown in brackets 1 This identifies which printer is selected as the default in the print setup menu The default setting at power on is standard Default text for a color printer is black COPY ABORT COPA Aborts a print in progress COPY TIME on OFF COPT ON OFF Turns printing time and date on or oFF When you select print the time and date are printed first then the information displayed NEXT PAGE NEXP Displays the next page of information in a tabular listing PREV PAGE PREP Displays the previous page of information in a tabular listing RESTORE DISPLAY RESD Turns off the tabular listing and returns the measurement display to the screen Gave Es RAW on OFF STATE on OFF Save DATA ONLY DATA LY on OFF MEM SAVE BINARY on OFF DATA TRACE SAVE ASCII on OFF DEFINE MEM TRACE SAVE DATA gt RETURN STOR DEV IDISK Define Save Date Menu GRAPHICS file name STATE
28. POWER Modify the list table to change these parameters in the list sweep 988 CAN T CHANGE WHILE DUAL CHAN OFF The Cross channel cannot be turned on when dual channel is off Turn on the dual channel before the cross channel is turned on 82 CAN T CHANGE ANOTHER CONTROLLER ON BUS The analyzer cannot assume the mode of system controller until the active controller is removed from the bus or relinquishes the bus See Chapter 7 of the Programming Guide 134 CAN T COUPLE IN CURRENT INPUTS When one channel measures a ratio measurement and the other one measures an absolute measurement for example A R and B COUPLED CH can not be turned on 114 CAN T SAVE GRAPHICS WHEN COPY IN PROGRESS If you attempt to save graphics when a print is in progress this error message is displayed 1 CAN T SET RBW AUTO IN ZERO SPAN The RBW AUTO mode cannot be selected in the zero span The RBW must be specified manually in the zero span See Bandwidth menu Spectrum Analyzer in Chapter 5 spectrum analyzer mode only 125 CAN T SET SLOPE ON IN POWER SWEEP The slope function can be turned on in frequency sweep Messages 2 127 CAN T SET SWEEP TIME AUTO IN ZERO SPAN The automatic sweep time cannot be in zero span of the spectrum analyzer mode The network analyzer mode allows that the automatic sweep time is turned on 281 Cannot create program Indicates that an attempt to create a program was unsuccessful A reas
29. 12 41 Frequency Response 12 42 Correcting for Measurement Errors l l 2 eee 12 42 Modifying Calibration Kits 12 43 Definitions 2 A 12 43 Define 12 48 Standard Type 2 12 44 Offset and Delay MEE 222222222 0 12 45 Specify Class 2 MEL 12 45 Accuracy Enhancement Fundamentals Characterizing Systematic Errors 12 47 One Port Error Model MV VV 12 47 Measuring reflection coefficient 12 47 Directivity MM 2 12 47 Source match error 12 48 Frequency response error 12 48 How calibration standards are used to quantify these error terms 12 49 Two Port Error Model 12 52 Measuring Transmission 12 52 Load Match 12 52 Isolation Errors 12 53 Error Terms the Analyzer Can 12 53 L OPORT 12 56 Pin Assignment 12 56 Related GPIB 5 12 56 Manual Changes Introduction 2 1 Manual Changes 2 2 1 Serial Number os 2 Changes lA oa aa aa a 2 Page 8 398 2 2 4396A STATE SAVDSTAC A 2
30. 8 14 Limit Line Entry Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer MN S 8 15 SWP PARAM LIMPRM k k e 8 15 MKR SWP PARAM MKRSWPRM 8 15 UPPER LIMIT o c c r s c c i s s ie is it s js js VV 8 15 UPPER LIMIT LIMU ee k c k s k sss 8 15 LOWER LIMIT 2 4 s s s c c RR es 8 15 Contents 20 LOWER LIMIT LIML 8 15 DELTA LIMIT ee 8 16 DELTA LIMIT LIMD e 8 16 MIDDLE VALUE o 8 16 MIDDLE VALUE LIM o 8 16 MKR MIDDLE MKRMIDD 8 16 DONE CLIMSDON 8 16 Local Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer 8 18 SYSTEM CONTROLLER 8 18 SYSTEM CONTROLLER 8 18 ADDRESSABLE ML 8 18 ADDRESSABLE ONLY MEN VV 8 18 GPIB ADDRESS a oo a a a a a 8 18 SET ADDRESSES k t 8 18 ADDRESS 4396 8 18 ADDRESS CONTROLLER ADDRCONT 8 18 Pret 8419 s s s s s st s s s s st s st st st s s st st s s s t t 2 8 20 Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer s sos t osos tos st os ot os t s ot t ot ot ot ot ot ot nos 8 21 PRINT e MM VV 8 21 PRINT STANDARD PRINALL es 8 21 COPY ABORT ee 8 21 COPY ABORT COPA 8 21 COPY SKEY on OFF PRSOFT 1088 k e 8 21 TIME STAMP
31. DONE RESPONSE defined std 1 defined std 2 defined std 3 defined std 4 defined std 5 1 calkits defined std 6 2For type N calkits defined std 7 3 For user calkit RESPONSE Figure 5 23 Response Standard Menu RESPONSE FOR 3 5 MM 7MM CAL KITS SHORT STANA Measures SHORT standard of 7 mm or 3 5 mm cal kit for the response calibration OPEN STANB Measures OPEN standard of 7 mm or 3 5 mm cal kit for the response calibration THRU STANC Measures THRU standard of 7 mm or 3 5 mm cal kit for the response calibration RESPONSE FOR TYPE N CAL KITS SHORT M STANA Measures SHORT standard of type N cal kits connected to the type N male test port connector for the response calibration M indicates that the test port connector is male it does not indicate the connector type of the standard SHORT F STANB Measures SHORT standard of type N cal kits connected to the type N female test port connector for the response calibration F indicates that the test port connector is female it does not indicate the connector type of the standard Measurement Block 5 43 OPEN M STANC Measures OPEN standard of type N cal kits connected to the type N male test port connector for the response calibration M indicates that the test port connector is male it does not indicate the connector type of the standard OPEN F STAND Measures OPEN standard of
32. Q nominal Connector BNC female Reference oven output Option 1D5 Frequency 10 MHz nominal Level 0 dBm s p c Specifications 10 21 Output impedance 50 Q nominal Connector 7 BNC female 2nd IF output Frequency 21 42 MHz nominal output impedance 50 Q nominal Connector 2 4 2 4 BNC female External trigger input Level 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 24 TTL Level Pulse width Tp e 22 us s p c Polarity positive negative selective Connector 2 2 BNC female External program Run Cont input Connector BNC female Level 2 TTL Level Gate output Option 1
33. Table C 5 Data Groups and Data Array Names for the Network Analyzer Mode Data Groups Data Array Names Descriptions Real Part Imaginary Part Raw Data Raw S11 Real Raw S11 Imag Raw data arrays for S11 meas Raw S21 Real Raw S21 Imag Raw data arrays for S21 meas Raw S12 Real Raw S12 Imag Raw data arrays for S12 meas Raw S22 Imag Raw S22 Imag Raw data arrays for S22 meas Calibration Data Cal 1 Real Cal 1 Imag Ex Et 3 Ed 3 4 or Edf Cal 2 Real Cal 2 Imag Et 3 Er Es 4 or Esf Cal 3 Real Cal 3 Imag Er or Erf Cal 4 Real Cal 4 Imag Cal 5 Real Cal 5 Imag 1 6 Real 1 6 Imag Etf Cal 7 Real Cal 7 Imag Cal 8 Real Cal 8 Imag Esr Cal 9 Real Cal 9 Imag 1 10 Real 1 10 Imag 1 11 Real 1 11 Imag Elr Cal 12 Real Cal 12 Imag Data Data Real Data Imag Corrected Data arrays Memory Memory Real Memory Imag Corrected Memory arrays Data Trace Data Trace Real Data Trace Imag Data Trace arrays Memory Trace Memory Trace Real Memory Trace Imag Memory Trace arrays 1 For more information on calibration see Calibration for Network Measurement in Chapter 12 Calibration data is available for only network analyzer mode 2 When response calibration is used 3 When response and isolation calibration are used 4 When 1 port calibration is used 5 When 2 port calibration is used Data Groups of the Spectrum Analyzer Every data group of
34. Dynamic Accuracy The dynamic accuracy value used in the system uncertainty equations is obtained from the analyzer s dynamic accuracy typical values The typical value for magnitude dynamic accuracy is in dB and it must be converted to a linear value to be used in the uncertainty equations In addition the analyzer s dynamic accuracy typical values are given for an input signal level from full scale in dB This must be converted to a relative error relative to the power at which the measurement calibration occurs to be used in the system uncertainty equations t DynAcc dB Dynamic Accuracy linear 10 3 l Dynamic Accuracy dB 20log 1 Dynamic Accuracy linear Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Typical magnitude dynamic accuracy can be expressed the following equations Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Eaim Ed2m Easm Eaim 8 09 x 10 212 Eas 1 73 x 10 3L9221 1 15 x 107 2 92 x 1077 L where L Measurement level linear relative to full scale level Egim Magnitude compression error dominant at high measurement level range Ea m Magnitude residual error dominant at middle measurement level range Easm Magnitude A D converter differential nonlinearity error dominant at low measurement level range Determining Relative Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Error Contribution Typical magnitude dynamic accuracy error contribution to system performance is expressd bellow
35. Wess Conversion Menu CONVERSION S Parameters PARAMETERS ANALYZER Analyzer TYPE Type Menu Figure 5 3 Input Port Menu for Network Analyzer NETWORK A R MEAS AR Calculates and displays the complex ratio of the signal at input to the reference signal at input R B R MEAS BR Calculates and displays the complex ratio of input B to input R R MEAS R Measures the absolute power amplitude at input R MEAS A Measures the absolute power amplitude at input A B MEAS B Measures the absolute power amplitude at input B CONVERSION OFF Displays the conversion menu that converts the measured data to impedance Z or admittance Y When a conversion parameter has been defined it is shown in brackets under the softkey label If no conversion has been defined OFF is shown in brackets S PARAMETERS Displays the S parameter menu that defines the input ports and test set direction for S parameter measurements ANALYZER Displays the analyzer type menu that selects the network or spectrum analyzer mode of operation Measurement Block 5 5 S parameter menu Network Analyzer FWD St A R Trans FWD 21 B R Trans RE EN Conversion Refl REV 522 Menu CONVERSION m INPUT PORTS ANALYZER Analyzer F
36. 12 8 Analyzer Features Data Arrays The results of error correction are stored in the data arrays These arrays are acc essible via GPIB or by using the internal disk drive or the RAM disk memory Memory Arrays If the data to memory operation is performed the data arrays are copied into the memory arrays data trace arrays are also copied into the memory trace arrays at same time See Display in chapter 5 These arrays are accessible using the internal disk drive or the RAM disk memory These arrays are also output via GPIB but data cannot be input into these arrays via GPIB If memory is displayed the data from the memory arrays goes through the same dat a processing flow path as the data from the data arrays Format Unit conversion This converts the measured values dB value to other unit ABV dBuV watt an d volt When noise measurement is selected this divides measured values by the equivalent noise bandwidth to measure noise level directly Data Hold This is the same as the Data Hold in the data processing flow for the network meas urement Data Math This is the same as the Data Math in the data processing flow for the network meas urement Data Trace Array This is the same as the data trace array in the data processing flow for the network measurement Memory Trace Array This is the same as the memory trace array in the data processing flow for the netw ork measurement Scaling This is the same as the s
37. 5 10 Format Menu for Spectrum Analyzer aooaa a 4 5 11 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Display 5 12 Display 5 13 Adjust Display Menu 5 14 Color Adjust Menu 2 1 2 5 15 Letter 5 16 Scale Reference Menu for Network Analyzer 5 17 Scale Reference Menu for Spectrum Analyzer a 5 18 Bandwidth Menu for Network Analyzer ee ee en 5 19 Bandwidth Menu for Spectrum Analyzer 2 2 2 2 2 5 20 Softkey Menus Accessed from the cal Key for Network Analyzer 1 2 5 21 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Key for Network Analyzer 2 2 5 22 Calibration Menu 5 23 Response Standard Menu 0 0 5 24 Response Isolation Menu D 5 25 811 l Port Menu 2 os 5 26 22 l Port Menu 1 2 5 27 Full 2 Port Cal MM 5 28 One Path 2 Port Cal Menu 5 29 Reference Plane Menu o 5 30 Modify Cal Kit Menu 5 31 Specify Offset Menu 5 32 Standard Type 1 1 1 2 do No BO DO BO 5 9 C o do Co Q2 55 OR MO Q i S hdd No
38. amp 49 0 Symbol characters One of the following suffixes or extensions is automatically added to the file name depending on the data group type stored in the file Table C 2 Suffixes and Extensions Added Automatically Data Groups Suffixes for LIF Extensions for DOS Instrument States and Internal Data Arrays STATE 8 5 Internal Data Arrays DATA ONLY binary _D DTA Internal Data Arrays as an ASCII File DATA ONLY ASCII _I TXT Graphics Image as an TIFF File GRAPHICS _T TIF Auto Recall Function When the analyzer is turned on it looks for a file named AUTOREC from the built in flexible disk and if found the analyzer automatically reads the file to retrieve its data Note You must save AUTOREC file into the flexible disk and do not save it into the I RAM disk memory because the RAM disk memory loses data when the power is Y turned off C 4 Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data File Structure File Structure of Internal Data Arrays File for Binary Files Note Binary and ASCII file structures are not compatible When internal data arrays are saved as a binary file the arrays file consists of a file header at the top of the file and the data groups following the file header File Header Every internal data array file begins with a file header Figure C 1 shows the header structure FILE TOP ON Internal U
39. 1 With IF bandwidth of 10 Hz System Performance 11 27 12 Analyzer Features This chapter provides additional information on analyzer features beyond the basic concepts covered in the previous chapters The following subjects are covered is in this chapter m System Overview m Data Processing Flow m Network Analyzer Basic Network Measurement Basic S parameters Conversion Smith Chart Polar Chart Electrical Delay Averaging IF Band Reduction Group Delay Un pectrum Analyzer Basic Detection Mode Swept and FFT Mode Resolution Bandwidth RBw Selectivity of the RBW Noise Measurement Reference Level Calibration Spectrum Monitor at inputs R A and B Measurement and Display Points Channel Coupling m Limit Line Concept Gated Sweep for Spectrum Measurement Repetitive Sampling m Marker m GPIB Calibration for Network Measurement m 1 0 Port Analyzer Features 12 1 System Overview The analyzer has two measurement modes of operation a network analyzer mode and a spectrum analyzer mode Network analyzers measure the reflection and transmission characteristics of devices and networks by applying a known swept signal and measuring the response of the test device The signal transmitted through the device or reflected from its input is compared with the incident signal generated by a swept RF source The signals are applied to a receiver for measurement signal proces
40. 16 dB 36 dB 36 dB 0 16 0 16 0 16 0 016 0 016 Reflection Tracking 1 8 dB 1 5 dB 1 8 dB 0 14 dB 0 14 dB 0 23 0 19 0 16 0 016 0 016 M Load Match 16 dB 16 dB 16 dB 38 dB 0 16 0 16 0 16 0 013 Ti Trans Tracking 1 8 0 2 dB 0 2 dB _ 0 05 dB 0 23 0 023 0 023 5 8 10 5 C Cross Talk 100 dB 100 dB 110 dB 110 dB 110 dB 1 0x1075 1 0x1075 3 2 10 9 3 2 10 9 3 2 10 9 Ry Port1 Connector 70 dB 3 2x107 Repeatability Ra Port1 Trans Connector 70 dB 3 2x107 Repeatability Ri2 Port2 Refl Connector 70 dB 3 2x107 Repeatability Riz Port2 Trans Connector 70 dB 3 2x107 Repeatability N Low Level Noise 2 110 dB from full scale 3 2x 107 Ny High Level Noise 2 4 Magnitude 0 003 dB 3 5x10 Am Ap Dynamic Accuracy Error See Dynamic Accuracy in Chapter 10 Um Up Multiplexer Switching Magnitude 0 0025 dB 2 9 x10 Phase 0 015 degrees Uncertainty Su Portl Cable Trans 0 05 x f GHZ degrees Phase Stability Sa Port1 Cable 70 dB 3 2x107 Stability Sio Port2 Cable Trans 0 05 x f GHZ degrees Phase Stability So Port2 Cable Refl 70 dB 3 2x107 Stability Tha Trans Tracking Drift Magnitude 0 01 dB C 1 1x107 C 0 1 0 15xf GHz degrees C Tra Refl Tracking Drift Magnitude 0 01 dB C 1 1 10 3 9 0 1 0 15xf GHz degrees C Tsw Switch Tracking 0 03 dB
41. 4xphase 8 xphase 16x phase Off Off Analyzer Type Network Spectrum Analyzer type of the active channel before Analyzer type of the active channel when presetting the power is turned OFF SA Detection Positive Negative Sample Positive Positive 1 When an S parameter test set is connected to the analyzer 2 Both channel 1 and Z Format Function Range Preset Value Power ON default NA Format Log mag Phase Delay Smith Polar Lin mag Log mag Log mag SWR Real Imaginary Expand phase Admittance SA Format Spectrum Noise Spectrum Spectrum SA Unit dBm dBu V Watt Volt dBm dBm D 2 Input Range and Default Settings Function Range Preset Value Power ON default Dual Channel On Off Off Off Display Data Memory Data amp Memory Data Data Data Hold Off Max Min Off Off Data Math Data Data Mem Data Mem Data Mem Off Off Gain 100 to 1 1000 1 1 Offset 500 k to 1p 0 0 Aux Offset 500 5 digits 0 0 Display split On Off On On Display Allocation All Instrument Half amp Half All BASIC BASIC No effect No effect Status Title Max 53 characters No effect No title Frequency Blank On can not be turn Off until presetting Off Off Intensity 0 to 100 No effect 83 96 Background Intensity O to 100 No effect 0 96 Ch1 Data color No effect Yel
42. Displays the current time on the active entry area and displays the next page to adjust time HOUR enables changing the hour setting using the knob or the numeric entry keys After you change the hour setting press ENTER to restart the clock MIN enables changing the minute setting using the knob or the numeric entry keys After you change the minute setting press ENTER to restart the clock SEC enables changing the second setting using the knob or the numeric entry keys After you change the second setting press ENTER to restart the clock ENTER restarts the internal clock CANCEL returns to the previous page Pressing this key does not affect the internal clock setting 8 10 Instrument State Block ADJUST DATE DATE FORMAT System DATE MM DD YY SETCDATE Displays the current date on the active entry area to adjust date MONTH DAY YEAR ENTER CANCEL DATE MODE enables changing the month setting using the knob or the numeric entry keys After you change the month setting press ENTER to restart the clock enables changing the day setting using the knob or the numeric entry keys After you change the day setting press ENTER to restart the clock enables changing the year setting using the knob or the numeric entry keys After you change the year setting press ENTER to restart the clock restarts the internal clock returns to the previous page Pressing this key does not affect the intern
43. File Structure of Internal Data Arrays File for Binary Files for more information Graphics image GRAPHICS The analyzer saves the graphics image of the screen as a graphics file in the TIFF Tagged Image File Format format The TIFF format is used in a wide range of drawing software programs in binary format only File Type and Data Group Combinations You can select and save to a disk one of the following four combinations of the two file types and the four data groups m Binary File a Instrument states and internal data arrays STATE Internal data arrays DATA ONLY binary Graphics image GRAPHICS m ASCII File Internal data arrays DATA ONLY ascii Note DATA ONLY does not save instrument settings such as start and stop I frequencies BE CAREFUL Always make sure that you save the existing Y STATE if you want to use the setup again Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data 3 File Names All data saved using the built in disk drive and the RAM disk memory has an identifying file name A file name consists of the lower and upper case alphabet numbers and valid symbol characters Up to 8 characters can be used for a filename The following table shows the valid characters for LIF and DOS file names Table C 1 Valid Characters for File Names Valid Characters Description LIF DOS Format A Z A Z Upper case alphabet 7 7 Lower case alphabet 0 9 0 9 Numeric characters
44. Indicates that measurement accuracy is suspect 104 Data type error The parser recognized an unallowed data element For example numeric or string data was expected but block data was encountered 117 DUPLICATE FILE EXTENSION The extension name entered is already used for other file types Use other extension name 15 EXCEEDED 7 STANDARDS PER CLASS A maximum of seven standards can be defined for any class See Modifying Calibration Kits in the Function Reference 200 Execution error This is the generic syntax error that the analyzer cannot detect more specific errors This code indicates only that an execution error as defined in IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 5 has occurred 123 Exponent too large The magnitude of the exponent was larger than 32000 see IEEE 488 2 7 7 2 4 1 257 File name error Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because the file name on the device media was in error For example an attempt was made to copy to a duplicate file name The definition of what constitutes a file name error is device specific Messages 4 256 File name not found A legal program command could not be executed because the file name on the device media was not found for example an attempt was made to read or copy a nonexistent file 8 FORMAT NOT VALID FOR MEASUREMENT The conversion function except the 1 S and the multiple phase modes is not valid for the Smith admittance and
45. PEN 5 COLO PENS Selects pen 5 for color modification and displays the color adjust menu PEN 6 COLO PEN6 Selects pen 6 for color modification and displays the color adjust menu DEFAULT COLORS DEFC Returns all the color settings back to the factory set default values SAVE COLORS SVCO Saves the modified version of the color set to the non volatile memory RECALL COLORS RECC Recalls the previously saved modified version of the color set from the non volatile memory RECALL COLORS appears only when a color set has been saved Color adjust menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer DATA Display LIMIT LN MORE CH2 DATA ADJUST gt CHS MEM DISPLAY LIMIT LN TINT GRATICULE BRIGHTNESS gt WARNING COLOR gt MORE gt RESET COLOR RETURN MODIFY COLORS gt MORE gt IBASIC MORE MORE MORE MORE MORE MORE MORE MORE gt MORE MORE MORE gt MORE C5005009 Figure 5 14 Color Adjust Menu TINT TINT Adjusts the hue of the chosen attribute BRIGHTNESS CBRI Adjusts the brightness of the color being modified COLOR COLOR Adjusts the degree of whiteness of the color being modified DEFAULT COLOR RESET COLOR RSCO Resets the color being modified to the default color Color consists of the following three parameters Tint Th
46. PERE PEAK DELTA LEFT RETURN PEAK DEF AY PEAK DEF MENU SEARCH TRK on OFF RETURN Peak Definition Menu SEARCH LEFT SUB MKR 1 WIDTHS SEARCH RIGHT SUB MKR SEARCH RETURN RANGE MENU SEARCH on OFF Target Menu Search Menu SEARCH IN PART SHCH SEARCH OUT on OFF WIDTHS MERA gt OFF SEARCH RNG WIDTH VALUE RETURN Sub Maker Menu MKR RNG MKR RIGHT RNG RETURN Width Menu Search Range Menu 25007016 Figure B 22 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Search Key for the Spectrum Analyzer Softkey Tree 17 MKR LIST on OFF STATISTICS on OFF MKR TIME on OFF NOISE FORM on OFF C500T012 Figure B 23 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Utility Key for Spectrum Analyzer MKR LIST on Utility Statistics MKR TIME on GFF SMTH POLAR MENU REAL IMAG LIN MAG PHASE LOG MAG PHASE Bijx GHB SWR PHASE 00 4 25007015 Figure B 24 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Utility Key for Network Analyzer B 18 Softkey Tree Instrument State Block Softkey Tree B 19 f IBASIC MEMORY PARTITION SETOLOGK mmk RAM nnK BASIC BEEPER MENU LIMIT
47. Residual Drift Errors These errors stem from frequency drift and instrumentation drift They affect both kinds of measurements Instrumentation drift is primarily temperature related System Error Model Any measurement result is the vector sum of the actual test device response plus all error terms The precise effect of each error term depends upon its magnitude and phase relationship to the actual test device response When the phase of an error response is not known phase is assumed to be worst case 0 or 180 degrees Random errors such as noise and connector repeatability are generally combined in a root sum of the squares RSS manner The error term related to thermal drift is combined on a typical basis as shown in each uncertainty equation given in the following paragraphs Figure 11 9 shows the error model for the analyzer with the 85046A B S parameter test set This error model shows the relationship of the various error sources in the forward direction and can be used to analyze overall measurement performance The model for signal flow in the reverse direction is similar Note the appearance of the dynamic accuracy noise errors switch errors and connector repeatability terms in both the reflection and transmission portions of the model 11 6 System Performance 1 Tt Tta R tit THR 5 1 Nh 1 A U 1 Tr Tra 1 5 1 Rt2 95102 1 DEVICE UNDER TEST PORT 2 CONNECTOR CONNECTOR AND CABLE AND C
48. Type N female Impedance 50 Q nominal Return loss frequency gt 500 KHz 2 2 2 gt 20 dB 100 kHz lt frequency lt 500 2 gt 12 dB s p c 3 MHz lt frequency lt 50 MHz gt 85 dB s p c Multiplexer switching impedance change lt 1 9 s p c Magnitude Characteristics Absolute amplitude accuracy R B 20 dBm input 29 5 C_ lt 1 5 dB 0 9 dB s p c Ratio accuracy A R B R 20 dBm input 2345 C IFBW lt 3 kHz 100 k lt frequency lt 1 2 x1 dB 0 6 dB s p c frequency gt 1 2 452 2 2 x 0 5 dB 0 8 dB s p c Dynamic accuracy A R B R Input Level Dynamic Accuracy relative to full scale input level 0 dB lt 0 3 dB 10 dB to 70 dB 0 05 dB 80 dB 0 1 dB 90 dB lt 0 3 dB 100 dB 1 0 dB 110 dB lt 0 8 dB s p c 120 dB lt 2 5 dB s p c 1 full scale input level 5 dBm 2 23 5 C IFBW 10 Hz R input 35 dBm Reference power level 35 dBm Specifications 10 3
49. amp 50 Na a a a a a a A a y 5 33 Calibration Menu for Spectrum Analyzer 62 6 1 Softkey Menus Accessed from the 6 2 6 2 Sweep Menu for Network 6 3 6 3 Sweep Menu for Spectrum Analyzer 6 6 6 4 Clear List 6 10 6 5 Segment Menu for Network 2 6 11 6 6 Segment Menu for Spectrum Analyzer 2 2 2 2 2 2 6 18 6 7 Source Menu for Network 6 15 6 8 Source Menu for Spectrum Analyzer 6 17 Contents 32 6 9 6 10 6 11 7 1 1 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 10 7 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 16 7 17 7 18 8 1 8 2 8 8 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 18 8 14 8 15 8 16 8 17 8 18 8 19 8 20 8 21 8 22 8 28 8 24 8 25 10 1 10 2 10 8 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 Trigger Menu a 6 18 Center Menu MEL 6 22 Span Menu MEME 6 24 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Marker 7 2 Marker Menu ee sc 4 4 a 7 3 Delta Mode Menu 7 5 Sub Marker Menu 7 7 Clear Sub Mark
50. 11 7 Ni 11 7 nn RAM mmK BASIC 8 8 NO 8 8 8 39 8 40 NO 6 10 NOISE FMT NOISE 5 15 noise floor 11 7 NOISE FORM on OFF MKRNOI ONJOFF 7 25 noise level 10 2 noise marker 7 25 noise measurement 5 15 12 18 noise sidebands 10 2 10 7 nominal 10 1 non harmonics spurious 10 2 non operation condition 10 23 non volatile memory D 1 NOP 12 19 notations 2 8 number of display points 10 13 NUMBER of GROUPS NUMG 6 18 NUMBER of POINTS POIN 6 3 6 7 6 11 numeric keypad 4 1 OFF CONV OFF 5 0 OFFSET DATOVAL 5 19 offset correction 12 8 offset delay 5 58 OFFSET DELAY OFSD 5 58 offset Delay 12 45 offset loss 5 58 OFFSET LOSS OFSL 5 58 offset Loss 12 45 offset value 5 19 OFFSET ZO OFSZ 5 58 offset Zo 12 45 OMIT ISOLATION OMII 5 49 5 51 NE PATH 2 PORT CALI ONE2 5 38 one path two port calibration 12 42 one port calibration 12 42 one port error model 12 47 on screen dynamic range 10 8 open 5 59 12 44 OPEN STANB 5 42 OPEN F STAND 5 43 OPEN M STANC 5 43 PERATING PARAMETERS OPEP 8 23 operation condition 10 23 Index 9 9 1 option 1D5 2 10 2 11 option 1D6 2 11 10 14 option 1D7 10 14 OUT8IO 12 56 output characteristics 10 1 10 13 over write 8 34 2 8 P 2 8 parallel interface 2 10 Parallel interface 10 21 parameter list 8 28 PART SR
51. 6 15 Source menu Network Analyzer s c s sot e soc tros os s s Sho os 6 15 POWER LEVEL 6 15 Contents 13 POWER POWE SLOPING SLOPE SLOPE SLOPE on OFF SLOP ONIOFF FREQUENCY FOR POWER SWEEP CW FREQ CWFREQ ATTENUATORS ATTENUATOR PORT 1 ATTP1 ATTENUATOR PORT 2 ATTP2 RF OUT ON off CRFOONIOFF Source menu Spectrum Analyzer POWER POWE RF OUT on OFF RFO ON OFF Trigger menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer TRIGGER TYPE SWEEP HOLD HOLD SINGLE SING NUMBER of GROUPS NUMG CONTINUOUS CONT TRIGGER SOURCE TRIGGER FREE RUN TRGS INT EXT VID MAN GAT GATE TRIGGER GATE LEVEL GATCTL LEV EDG GATE DELAY GATDLY GATE LENGTH GATLEN TRIGGER EVENT TRIG EVENT TRGEVE POIN SWE TRIGGER POLARITY TRIG PLRTY POS neg TRGP POS NEG RESTART SWEEP MEASURE RESTART REST Start Stop STAR STOP enter CENT Center menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer CENTER STEP SIZE STEP SIZE AUTO man CNTSAUTO ON OFF CENTER STEP SIZE CNTS MKR CNTR STEP MKRCSTE MKRA CNTR STEP MKRDCSTE MKR CENTER MKRCENT MKRSA CENTER MKRDCENT CENTER PEAKCENT Contents 14 6 15 6 15 6 15 6 15 6 15 6 15 6 15 6 15 6 16 6 16 6 17 6 17 6 17 6 18 6 18 6 18 6 18 6 18 6 18 6 19 6 19 6 19 6 19 6 19 6 19 6 19 6 20 6 20 6 20 6 20 6 20 6 20 6 21 6 22 6 22 6 22
52. 8 32 statistics 7 25 7 26 STATISTICS on OFF MEASTAT ON OFF 7 25 7 26 status notations 2 8 STD DONE DEFINED STDD 5 61 STD NO 1 DEFS 1 5 54 STD NO 2 DEFS 2 5 54 STD NO 3 DEFS 3 5 54 STD NO 4 DEFS 4 5 54 STD NO 5 DEFS 5 5 54 STD NO 6 DEFS 6 5 54 STD NO 7 1 DEFS 7 5 54 STD NO 8 DEFS 8 5 54 STD OFFSET DONE 5 58 STD TYPE OPEN STDT OPEN 5 59 Step 8 5 step key 4 2 STEP SIZE STPSIZE 6 11 STEP SIZE AUTO man CNTSAUTO ON OFF 6 22 Index 13 Stop 8 6 STOP STOP 6 12 6 18 13 stop value 2 7 storage 10 20 storage device 8 35 storage devices C 1 STOR DEV STODDISK STODMEMO 8 33 8 35 8 37 8 38 STOR DEV STODDISK STODMEMO 8 41 8 42 sub marker 7 7 SUB MKR 7 18 7 19 SUB MKR SMKR 1 7 ON 7 3 SUB MKR 1 SMKR1 ON OFF 7 7 7 8 SUB MKR 2 SMKR2 ON OFF 7 7 7 8 SUB MKR SMKR3 ON OFF 7 7 7 8 SUB MKR 4 SMKR4 ON OFF 7 7 7 8 SUB MKR 5 SMKR5 ON OFF 7 7 7 8 SUB MKR 6 SMKR6 ON OFF 7 7 7 8 SUB MKR 7 SMKR7 ON OFF 7 7 7 8 Svc 2 8 we 1 3 sweep block 1 3 sweep characteristics 10 6 10 12 SWEEP HOLD HOLD 6 18 sweep table 8 24 sweep time 6 3 6 6 SWEEP TIME SWET 6 3 6 6 sweep time 2 7 10 12 SWEEP TIME AUTO man SWETAUTO 6 6 sweep type 10 6 10 12 SWEEP TYPE LIN FREQ SWPT LINF 6 7 SWEEP TYPE MENU 6 7 SWEEP TYPE MENU SWPT LINF LOG
53. Adds electrical delay in seconds to extend the reference plane at input R to the end of the cable This is used for all R input measurements including S parameters EXTENSION INPUT A PORTA Adds electrical delay to the input A reference plane for all A input measurements including S parameters EXTENSION INPUT B PORTB Adds electrical delay to the input B reference plane for all B input measurements including S parameters EXTENSION PORT 1 PORT1 Extends the reference plane for measurements of 511 S21 EXTENSION PORT 2 PORT2 Extends the reference plane for measurements of S55 Sis and S4 Measurement Block 5 55 Modify Cal Kit Menu Network Analyzer DEFINE STANDARD 5 56 Measurement Block DEFINE STANDARD Y STD Nou CAL KIT SHORT Lo STD NO 2 OPEN STU NO S LOAD TD NO 4 IBEL THRU Standard Typa STD NO S Menu STO NOG LOAD STD NOT ISHORTI STD NO 8 SPECIFY CLASS SPECIFY SUA Sue SPECIFY 5228 208 5226 MORI E y SPECIFY FWD TRANS i REV TRANS i FWD MATCH T REV MATCH I RES PONSE RESPONSE amp ISO N CLASS DONE SPEC D CLASS DONE PEC D LABEL CLASS Ly LABEL SHA 1 SUB i c LABEL S22A L SB TY LABEL FWD TRANS REV TRANS FWIMATCH REV MATCH RESPONSE
54. DC R A B inputs 21 222 2 2 2 22 2 2 2 2 222 AC Crosstalk S Input input att 10 dB S input to A B inputs 30 dB s p c A B inputs to S input 22 dB s p c Cal output Connector BNC female Impedance 50 Q Output Frequency 20 MHz Output Level 20 dBm 0 4 dB Return Loss 2 26 dB s p c Specifications 10 13 Specifications when Option 106 Time Gated spectrum analysis is installed Gate length Range 2 us to 8 25 Resolution Range of Gate Length Tg Resolution 2 usc Tg 32 ms 0 5 us 32 ms Tg 64 ms lus 64 ms Tg 160 ms 2 5 us 160 ms Tg 320 ms 5 us 320 ms Tg 1 28 s 20 us 1 28 msc T 3 2 s 100 us Gate delay Range 2 2 2 usto 3 2s Resolution Range of Gate Delay T4 Resolution 2 usx Ta lt 32 ms 0 5 us 32 ms Ta 64 ms lus 64 ms T4 160 ms
55. EN 61000 4 3 1996 1 1998 3 Vim 80 AM 80 1000 MHz IEC 61000 4 4 1995 EN 61000 4 4 1995 0 5 kV signal lines 1 kV power lines IEC 61000 4 5 1995 EN 61000 4 5 1995 0 5 kV line line 1 kV line ground IEC 61000 4 6 1996 EN 61000 4 6 1996 3 V 80 AM 0 15 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 11 1994 EN 61000 4 11 1994 1 cycle 10096 Canada ICES 001 Safety IEC 61010 1 1990 A1 1992 A2 1995 EN 61010 1 1993 A2 1995 CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 92 Conformity Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and the Directive 89 336 EEC including 93 68 EEC and carries the CE marking accordingly European Union LEDs in this product are Class 1 in accordance with EN 60825 1 1994 1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Agilent Technologies test systems y a E Kobe Japan Dec 15 2000 Mp the p T y A Date Name Koichi Yanagawa Quality Engineering Manager For further information please contact your local Agilent Technologies sales office agent or distributor Herstellerbescheinigung GERAUSCHEMISSION LpA lt 70 dB am Arbeitsplatz normaler Betrieb nach DIN 45635 T 19 Manufacturer s Declaration ACOUSTIC NOISE EMISSION LpA lt 70 dB operator position normal operation per ISO 7779 Safety Notification This product is tested with stand alone condition or with the combination with the accessories supp
56. MENU SERVICE MENU System Menu For Information on Service Menu see Service Manual LIMIT LINE on OFF LIMIT TEST on OFF BEEP FAIL on OFF EDIT LIMIT EINE SEGMENT mmkK RAM nok BASIC mmk nok BASIC mmi RAM nnk BASIC mmk RAM nnk BASIC DONE y CHANGE YE 5 L CANCEL J Memory Partition Menu TIME EDIF DELETE ADD HH MM SS y HOUR MIN SEC ENTER CANCEL DATE DD MMUYY LY MONTH DAY YEAR ENTER CANCEL DATE MODE MonDay Year DayMonYear RETURN Set Clock Menu CLEAR LIST CLEAR Ll Y mop DA 5 DONE LIMIT LINE OFFSETS Y SWP PARAM OFFSET AMPLITUDE OFFSET MARKER AMB OES RETURN RETURN Limit Menu gt SWP PARAM MKR SWP PARAM UPPER LIMIT LOWER LIMIT DELTA LIMIT MIDDLE VALUE MKR MIDDLE DONE
57. PREV FILES NEXT FILES STOR DEV prem 4 Figure 8 25 Recall Menu file name RECD Selects a file to be loaded and loads the instrument state or data If you change measurement conditions for example START frequency STOP frequency NOP and IFBW of this instrument after recalling a calibration coefficient array that has been saved using the DATA ONLY softkey contents of the recalled calibration coefficient array are destroyed and become invalid If you want to perform in this way use the STATE softkey to save data and recall the saved data PREV FILES Displays the previous set of file names on the softkey label to load data NEXT FILES Displays the next set of file names on the softkey label to load data STOR DEV STODDISK STODMEMO Selects between the flexible disk drive and the RAM disk memory as the storage device DISK shows the built in flexible disk is selected and MEMORY shows the RAM disk memory is selected This setting does not change even when the line power is cycled or the key is pressed Instrument State Block 8 41 AUTO RECALL Auto Recall Function When the analyzer is turned on it looks for a file named AUTOREC from the built in flexible disk and if found the analyzer automatically reads the file to retrieve its data 8 42 Instrument State Block Accessories Options Options Available High Stability Frequency Reference Opt
58. RESPONSE amp BON RETURN LABEL DONE LABEL BONE LABEL KIF KIT BONE MODIFIED Figure 5 30 Modify Cal Kit Menu DEFINE STANDARD Makes the standard number the active function and brings up the define standard number menus The standard number 1 to 8 is an arbitrary reference number used to reference standards when specifying a class Each number is similar to a register in that it holds specific information Each contains the selected type of device OPEN SHORT or THRU and the electrical model for that device The standard numbers for the predefined calibration kits are as follows SPECIFY CLASS 1 SHORT 5 LOAD 2 OPEN 6 LOAD 3 LOAD 7 SHORT 4 DEL THRU 8 OPEN STD NO 1 DEFS 1 Selects standard No 1 as the standard definition STD NO 2 DEFS 2 Selects standard No 2 as the standard definition STD NO 3 DEFS 3 Selects standard No 3 as the standard definition STD NO 4 DEFS 4 Selects standard No 4 as the standard definition STD NO 5 DEFS 5 Selects standard No 5 as the standard definition STD NO 6 DEFS 6 Selects standard No 6 as the standard definition STD NO 7 DEFS 7 Selects standard No 7 as the standard definition STD NO 8 DEFS 8 Selects standard No 8 as the standard definition SPECIFY CLASS Displays softkeys that assign a standard to a standard class
59. 0 0 8 29 Screen Menu 1 ee MM 8 30 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Gave 8 31 Save Menu 8 32 Define Save Data Menu 8 36 Re save file menu o 8 37 Purge File Menu 2 8 38 Purge Yes No Menu 8 39 Initialize Ys No Menu ON 8 40 Letter Menu for Gave Key 8 41 Recall Menu a os 8 42 Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy MM 10 4 Phase Dynamic Accuracy D 10 5 Typical Group Delay Accuracy 10 6 Typical Noise Sidebands with option 1 5 D 10 8 Typical On screen Dynamic Range 222222222 10 9 Typical Dynamic Range at 5 10 10 Typical Dynamic Range at R A B inputs 10 10 Typical Displayed Average Noise Level 10 11 Impedance Measurement 10 17 Contents 33 10 10 I O Port Pin Assignments c 10 21 10 11 Trigger Signal ln 2 ee ss 10 22 10 12 S Parameter Test Set Interface Pin Assignments M 10 23 11 1 Total Reflection Magnitude Uncertainty of One Port Device 11 2 11 2 Total Reflection Phase Uncertainty of One Port Device 11 2 11 3 Total Reflections Magnitude Uncertainty of Two Port Device 11 3 11 4 Total Ref
60. 0 028 5 8 10 2 Cross Talk 110 dB 110 dB 8 2 10 6 3 2x107 Ry Port1 Connector 65 dB 5 6 10 Repeatability Ra Port1 Trans Connector 65 dB 5 6 10 Repeatability Ri2 Port2 Refl Connector 65 dB 5 6x107 Repeatability Riz Port2 Trans Connector 65 dB 5 6x107 Repeatability N Low Level Noise 2 110 dB from full scale 3 2x 107 Ny High Level Noise 2 5 Magnitude 0 003 dB 3 5x10 Am Ap Dynamic Accuracy Error See Dynamic Accuracy in Chapter 10 Um Up Multiplexer Switching Magnitude 0 017 dB 2 0 x10 Phase 0 1 degrees Uncertainty Su Port1 Cable Trans 0 05 x f GHz degrees Phase Stability Sa Port1 Cable 70 dB 3 2 10 Stability Sio Port2 Cable Trans 0 05 x f GHz degrees Phase Stability So Port2 Cable Refl 70 dB 3 2 10 Stability Tha Trans Tracking Drift Magnitude 0 01 dB C 1 1x107 C Phase 0 1 0 15xf GHz degrees C Tra Refl Tracking Drift Magnitude 0 01 dB C 1 1 10 3 9 Phase 0 1 0 15xf GHz degrees C 1 Accuracy enhancement procedures are performed using 85036B 75 Q type N calibration kit Enviromental temperature is 23 C 3 C at calibration 19 from calibration temperature must be maintained for valied measurement calibration 2 With IF bandwidth of 10 Hz 3 Transmission Only 4 f gt 500 kHz 5 High level noise is the RMS of a continuouse measurement of a short circuit or
61. 2byte Abyte 2byte Abyte 16 X NOPIby te Abyte Analyzer Type 0 Network Analyzer C50C005 Figure C 2 RAW Data Group Structure for the Network Analyzer m RAW DATA of the spectrum analyzer consists of a header and a data segment by a channel as shown in Figure C 3 They will follow the file header in this order Ch Ch 2 Header Data Seg Internal Internal Use NOP Int lU mema Data for Each Display Point Only Integer Only Use Only 2byte Abyte 2byte Abyte 8 X NOP byte Analyzer Type 1 Spectrum Analyzer C50C006 Figure C 3 RAW Data Group Structure for the Spectrum Analyzer a CAL of the network analyzer consists of 12 data segments by a channel as shown in Figure C 4 The first half of the segments are for channel 1 and the second half of the segments are for channel 2 The contents of each segment depend on the type of calibration performed See in Chapter 5 CAL data is available for only the network analyzer C 6 Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data C50CO07 Ch 1 Response Calibration Er Header or Et Response amp Isolation Calibratio Ex Et Header or or Ed Er 1 Calibrat Header Ed Es 2 Po Header Elf Ett Header Data Segment Analyze Internal Use NOP Internal Use Type Only Integer Only
62. 5010015 Figure 10 4 Typical Noise Sidebands with option 1D5 Residual FM RBW lt 10 Hz Standard lt 1xf GHz2 Hzpx px in 10 sec s p c frequency GHz lt 1 HZpk pk 5 Option 105 lt 0 1xf GH2 in 10 sec s p c frequency GHz lt 0 1 Hzpx pk 5 RBW lt 1 2 3 in 100 msec s p c On screen dynamic range 1 GHz Center frequency May be limited by average noise level 10 8 Specifications 300K 300 ik 10k 1008 O cn ns 2 E c gt Q Z D D Ll P O 10k 100k 10M Frequency Hz C5010011 Figure 10 5 Typical On screen Dynamic Range Amplitude Characteristics Amplitude range Displayed average noise level to 30 dBm Reference level range 100 dBm to 30 dBm or equivalent in dBuV V W Scale Log 2 2 0 1 dB div to 20 dB div Linear Watt RR 1 0 x 10712 W div ONO RN 1 0 x 107 V div Measurement format SPECTRUM or
63. 8 33 2 4396U upgrade kit 9 1 4xPHASE CONV 4 5 10 5 50 to 75 Q input impedance conversion option 1D7 9 1 54701A active probe 9 2 8 85024A high frequency probe 9 2 85031B 7 mm calibration kit 9 3 85031B 7 mm calibration kit 5 40 85032B 50 type n calibration kit 9 3 85032B 50 type N calibration kit 5 40 85083C 3 5 mm calibration kit 9 3 85033C 3 5 mm calibration kit 5 40 85036B 75 type n calibration kit 9 3 85036B 75 type N calibration kit 5 40 85043B system rack 9 5 85046A B s parameter test set 9 2 86205A 75 Q rf bridges 9 3 86207A 75 Q rf bridges 9 3 87405A preamplifier 9 8 87512A B 12 54 87512A B transmission reflection test set 9 2 8xPHASE CONV 8 5 10 9 92192A micro flexible disks 9 6 92192X micro flexible disks 9 6 Index 1 A MEAS A 5 5 5 7 A 11 7 absolute amplitude accuracy 10 3 absolute squared 12 8 accessory 9 1 active channel 2 5 active channel block 1 1 active channel block 3 1 active entry area 2 9 active probes 9 2 adapter 9 4 adapter kit 9 4 AD converter 12 4 ADD LIMSADD 8 13 ADD SADD 6 4 6 8 additional amplitude error 10 14 address 8 18 ADDRESS 4396 8 18 addressable 8 18 12 36 ADDRESS CONTROLLER ADDRCONT 8 18 adjust date 8 9 ADJUST DISPLAY 5 20 adjust time 8 9 admittance 5 9 admittance chart 5 14 admittance conversion 12 11 ADMITTANCE Re Im F
64. DONE TRAD 5 49 5 51 Trans FWD S21 B R MEAS S21 5 6 TRANS MISSION TRAN 5 51 TRANS MISSION TRANS 5 48 transmission cal 5 48 5 51 transmission coefficient 12 52 transmission reflection test kit 12 54 transmission repeatability 11 7 transmission tracking drift 11 7 transmission tracking 12 53 transmission tracking 12 53 Trans REV 12 B R MEAS S12 5 6 Ta 11 7 TRIG EVENT 1 TRGEVE POIN SWE 6 20 1 8 trigger event 6 20 TRIGGER FREE RUN TRGS INT EXT VID MAN GAT 6 19 trigger input 2 11 trigger polarity 6 20 12 24 trigger polarity 10 22 trigger source 6 19 trigger source 10 6 10 12 trigger type 6 18 trigger type 10 6 10 12 TRIG PLRTY POS neg TRGP POS NEG 6 20 Tew 11 7 T 11 7 Ta 11 7 two port error correction ON C2 2 8 two port error model 12 52 type 12 43 typical 10 1 U U 11 7 Um 11 7 uncertainty 10 12 11 2 unit 5 15 UNIT dBm SAUNIT DBM 5 15 Up 11 7 upgrade kit 9 1 UPPER LIMIT LIMU 8 15 upper limit 8 15 user cal kit 5 39 user defined cal kit 12 43 USER KIT CALK USED 5 39 user level correction 12 8 Vary 1 3 V velocity factor 5 40 12 12 VELOCITY FACTOR VELOFACT 5 40 velocity factor 5 40 VGA 10 23 VIDEO TRGS VID 6 19 video Averaging 12 8 video bandwidth 5 33 video bandwidth 10 7 video bandwidth vbw 2 7 VIDEO BW VBW 5 33 video outpu
65. FFT 12 8 Absolute Squared 2 2 2 2 2525 2252 25252 2D 552 2 12 8 Video Average 12 8 Filter Level 12 8 Video Trigger 12 8 DC Offset Correction 12 8 IF Range Adjustment 12 8 Peak Detector 4 2 12 8 Attenuator and IF Range 12 8 Averaging MM 12 8 Frequency Characteristics Level Correction l l 12 8 Raw Data Arrays s s s s c c t e o s 12 8 User Level Correction 12 8 Data 12 9 Memory ArrayS 12 9 Format Unit conversion s o sos 12 9 Data Hold os t e t 12 9 Data 12 9 Data Trace Array 12 9 Memory Trace 12 9 Sealing e s t o 12 9 Network Measurement 12 10 S parameters 2 12 10 Conversion 12 11 Smith Chat 12 12 Polar 12 12 Electrical Delay 12 12 Averaging 12 12 IF Band Reduction T 2 2 12 13 Contents 27 MM Spectrum Measurement o Detect
66. Figure 10 3 Typical Group Delay Accuracy Sweep Characteristics Sweep type linear frequency log frequency power list frequency Trigger type hold single number of groups continuous Trigger source free run external manual GPIB bus Event trigger On point On sweep 10 6 Specifications Spectrum Measurement Specifications in this section describe the instrument s warranted performance for spectrum measurement using S input except as noted Frequency Characteristics Frequency range 2 Hz to 1 8 GHz Frequency readout accuracy 4 freq readout x freq ref accuracy RBW 5 where means number of display points Frequency reference Accuracy 23 5 C referenced to 239 5 5 ppm year Aging 2 lt 2 5 ppm year s p c Initial achievable accuracy lt 1 ppm s p c Temperature stability 23 5 C referenced to 28 C lt 2 ppm s p c Precision frequency reference option 1D5 Accuracy O0 C to 40 C referenced to 289C_
67. M D M D M Hld 2 8 DATA amp MEMORY DISP DATM 5 18 data only C 2 DATA ONLY 8 82 DATA on OFF SAVDAT ON OFF 8 36 data processing 12 8 DATA MEMORY DATMEM 5 18 data trace array 12 9 data trace arrays 12 6 C 3 DATA TRACE on OFF SAVDTRC ONJOFF 8 36 data transfer formats 10 20 date format 8 10 DATE MM DD YY SETCDATE 8 9 DATE MODE MonDayYear MONDYEAR MonDay Year 8 10 DayMonYear DAYMYEAR 8 10 dByV SAUNIT DBUV 5 15 SAUNIT DBV 5 15 de offset correction 12 8 decimation 12 7 default color 5 24 DEFAULT COLORS DEFC 5 23 DEFAULT GAIN amp OFS 5 18 default setting D 1 DEFAULT SETUP DFLT 8 26 defined std 1 STANA 5 43 defined std 2 STANB 5 43 defined std 3 STANC 5 43 defined std 4 STAND 5 43 defined std 5 STANE 5 43 Index 4 defined std 6 STANF 5 43 defined std 7 STANG 5 43 DEFINE SAVE DATA 8 33 define standard 5 53 DEFINE STANDARD 5 53 Del 2 8 delay 12 44 DELAY FMT DELA 5 13 delay thru 5 60 DELAY THRU STDT DELA 5 60 DELETE LIMSDEL 8 13 DELETE SDEL 6 4 6 8 DELTA LIMIT LIMD 8 16 delta limit 8 16 Amarker 7 5 Amarker funciton 7 11 AMKR DMKR ON 7 5 AMKR SWP PARAM DMKRPRM 7 6 Amode 12 30 AMODE MENU 7 4 AMODE OFF DMKR OFF 7 5 DETECTION 5 7 detection mode 12 16 deviation from linear phase 10 5 differential probe 9 2 digital filter 12 4 dimen
68. MEM 1 DATA MEM DEFAULT GAIN amp OFS OFFSET MKR OFFSET OFFSET AUX OFFSET RETURN GAIN RETURN MORE Y SPLIT DSF ON off DISPLAY ALLOCATION Es ALL INSTRUMENT i HALE INSTR HALF BASIC ALE BASIC BASIC STATUS RETURN Lotter ae ADJUST DISPLAY FREQUENCY Adjust Display BLANK Mona RETURN 5005032 Figure 5 12 Display Menu DUAL CHAN on OFF DUAC ON OFF Toggles between the display of both measurement channels or the active channel only This is used in conjunction with SPLIT DISP ON off to display both channels DUAL CHANNEL DISPLAY DATA DISP DATA Displays the current measurement data trace for the active channel DATA 5 18 Measurement Block MEMORY MAX HOLD MIN HOLD DATA MATH MEMORY DISP Displays the trace memory for the active channel If no data is stored in memory for this channel a warning message is displayed DATA and MEMORY DISP DATM Displays both the current data and the memory traces DATA MEMORY DATMEM Stores the current active measurement data in the memory of the active channel It then becomes the memory trace for use in subsequent math manipulations or display When NOP is changed the memory trace makes be invalid DATA HOLD DHOLD OFF MAX MIN The data hold function keeps the maximum or minimum value at each disp
69. Magnitude dynamic accuracy error Eqimmeas Eaimrer a2mREF EasmMEAS asmnEF where Suffix REF means errors at calibration Suffix MEAS means errors at DUT measurement 11 10 System Performance Phase Dynamic Accuracy Typical phase dynamic accuracy can be expressed by the following equations Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Eaip Earp Ea3p Eaip 0 812 0 15L 0 06 2 5 x 107 Baap UL where L Measurement level linear relative to full scale level Phase compression error dominant at high measurement level range Ear Phase residual error dominant at middle measurement level range Phase A D converter differential nonlinearity error dominant at low measurement level range Determining Relative Phase Dynamic Accuracy Error Contribution Typical dynamic accuracy error contribution to system performance is expressd bellow Phase dynamic accuracy error Eaipmras Eaiprer max Easpmeas Easpmeas EaspREF where Suffix REF means errors at calibration Suffix MEAS means errors at DUT measurement Six example graphs are provided Figure 11 10 and Figure 11 11 show the typical magnitude and phase dynamic accuracy error with a reference power level of full scale Figure 11 12 and Figure 11 18 with a reference power level of 20 dB from full scale and Figure 11 14 and Figure 11 15 with a reference p
70. Page 8 31 8 17 A 2 Page 8 32 Figure 8 18 A 4 2 4 Page 8 38 a a aa A 4 GRAPHICS SAVDTIFF A 4 Miscellaneous Changes aou 2 5 Softkey Tree Measurement Block 2 2 7 ll ll s ls B 1 MEE B 1 220202022 2 2 2 22 2 2 2 2 3 MEL B 4 2202022222 2 2 5 MM VV a B 6 c s isa a a a a cis a B 7 Sweep Block a B 10 MEE B 10 Contents 29 MM M B 10 c c s a M B 11 ON M B 12 M B 13 Marker Block MEL B 14 Maker M B14 MEL ML B 15 MM B 16 c c s a MM B 18 Instrument State Block ML B 19 ML B 19 c s s s c ie s cs es s ts os s t c M B 21 M 22 ML UV B 23 o B 24 C Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data Storage Devices MM 22022222222 1 Disk Requirements MEE C 1 Disk Formats C 1 RAM Disk Memory Capacity C 2 Copy Files Between the RAM Disk and the Flexible Disk C 2 File Types And Data Saved MM 2222 2 Binary Files and ASCII Files C 2 Data Groups ao a a a a
71. RAW on OFF CAL on OFF DATA on OFF MEM on OFF DATA TRACE on OFF MEM TRACE on OFF RETURN file name file name file name file name PREV FILES NEXT FILES STOR DEV DISK Re Save File Menu file name file name file name file name PREV FILES NEXT FILES STOR DEV DISK Purge File Menu Copy File Menu DISK YES NO INITIALIZE Initialize Yes No Menu file name file name file name gt file name PREV FILES f NEXT FILES STOR DEV gt IDISK PURGE YES NO Purge Yes No Menu SELECT LETTER SPACE BACK SPACE ERASE TITLE DONE STOR DEV Disk CANCEL 1 Letter Menu 008036 Figure 8 17 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Save Key Manual Changes A 3 Page 8 32 Figure 8 18 Change the figure as follows STATE DATA ON Y SAVE BINARY SAVE ASCII S DEFINE gt Define Save SAVE DATA Data Menu STOR DEV _ DISK GRAHICS RE SAVE Re Save FILE File Menu FILE PURGE Purge File FILE Menu CREATE _ nn DIRECTORY CHARGE 7 DIRECTORY Copy File gt Lk NITIALIZE P FORMAT Initialize gt STOR DEV
72. There three Amode Amarker normal tracking Amarker and fixed Amarker Marker Value Markers have a sweep parameter value the x axis value in a Cartesian format and a measurement value the y axis value in a Cartesian format In a polar Smith or admittance chart format the second part of a complex data pair is also provided as an auxiliary measurement value The marker can be moved to any point on the trace Its measurement and sweep parameter values are displayed at the top right corner of the graticule for each displayed channel in units appropriate to the display format The displayed marker measurement values are valid even when the measured data is above or below the range displayed on the graticule When marker list is turned on Sweep parameter values and measurement values of all markers are listed on the graticule In a polar Smith or admittance chart format auxiliary measurement values of all markers are also listed Marker Time Mode When marker time mode is turned on the x axis is changed to the time scale The start point of the x axis is 0 seconds and the stop point indicates the sweep time The markers have a time instead of a sweep parameter value Continuous Discrete Mode Marker values of the network analyzer are normally continuous that is they are interpolated between measured points Alternatively they can be set to read only discrete measured points The marker of the spectrum analyzer always reads
73. This capacity includes the directory area The capacity of data area depends on the disk format type Copy Files Between the RAM Disk and the Flexible Disk A copy function is provided to copy files between the RAM disk and the flexible disk FILE UTILITIES in the SAVE menu displays the softkeys used to copy files The GPIB command FILC is also available to copy files Note When you copy files using this function use the same disk format type for both I the RAM disk and the flexible disk This copy function cannot copy files when Y the format of the RAM disk is different from the format of the flexible disk File Types And Data Saved Binary Files and ASCU Files The analyzer supports two file formats binary and ASCII that are used to save data on a disk Binary files are used to save measurement conditions and data using the SAVE function and to retrieve binary data using the RECALL function External controllers and Instrument BASIC can read measurement data from binary data files ASCII measurement data or screen image files can be read by commonly available IBM PC based software for data analysis or other secondary functions The RECALL function cannot read ASCII files Note When saving internal data arrays note that ASCII data files cannot be recalled I on the analyzer If you need to recall the data save the file in binary format Y This binary data can be recalled and saved as an ASCII file at any time Data Grou
74. To reduce potential confusion the only change to product numbers and names has been in the company name prefix where a product number name was HP XXXX the current name number is now Agilent XXXX For example model number HP4294A is now model number Agilent 4294A Fary AE AS CYHP X 7E UE CAT Ea Vv hey A PERSA PVA 2 R Agilent EME 7 7 rY F ZZ 2 AY RASH POE UL C lt 7 Ez V h 2S22 FA CT Lew ps y RE k EL 359 ERO IR EL COREL 57 9 RO ST OBRA UCR ET pil 142 HP 4294A 1 HAZE Agilent 42044 2 L 56007 EF O Copyright 2004 Agilent Technologies DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY According to ISO IEC Guide 22 and CEN CENELEC EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd Manufacturer s Address 1 3 2 Murotani Nishi ku Kobe shi Hyogo 651 2241 Japan Declares that the product Product Name Network Spectrum Impedance Analyzer Model Number 4396B Product Options This declaration covers all options of the above product Conforms with the following product standards EMC Standard Limit IEC 61326 1 1997 A1 1998 EN 61326 1 1997 A1 1998 CISPR 11 1997 EN 55011 1998 AS NZS 2064 1 2 Group 1 Class IEC 61000 4 2 1995 EN 61000 4 2 1995 41 1998 4 kV CD 4 kV AD IEC 61000 4 3 1995
75. defined std 6 defined 7 DONE THRU Thru Standard Menu T For calkits 2 For type N calkits 3 For user calkit Figure B 10 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Cal Key for Network Analyzer 1 2 Softkey Tree x DEFINE STANDARD y STD NO 1 Hy ISHORT STD NOW OFEN et STD NOS LOAD 2 STD NO 4 SPECIFY IBEL THRU OFFSET STD NO 5 LOAD LABEL STD TD NO 6 hora STD DONE STU NO DEFINED SHORT STD NO S OPEN SPECIEY as y OFFSET LABEL SPECIFY STD SA STO DONE SHE DEFINED enc LOAD OBESET SPECIFY Y 522 T SPECIFY TER 5228 OFFSET 8226 LABEL OFFSET MORE iY STD 20 Ol STD OFFSET SPECIFY BONE FWD TRANS 1 REV TRANS MATCH Specify Offset Menu SPECIFY REVIMATCH I RESPONSE LABEL j RESPONSE STD ISO N AD ROME DEFINED CLASS DONE SPEC D ARBITRARY CLASS BONE IMPEDANCE x SPEC DI TERMINAL LABEL IMPEDANCE CLASS LY HT SELECT i LETTER 1 SNC BACK LABEL SPACE 822 ERASE Beeb RETURN TITLE 5226 BONE MORE GANGEL coo FARES Standard Type Menu REVITRANS EWI MATGH Letter Menu REV MATCH RESPONSE RESPONSE amp ISC N RETURN LABEL BONE LABEL DONE LABEL KIT KIT DONE IMOBIFIE
76. edit list table command is received while editing a segment for the list table m When EDITLIML edit limit line command is received while editing a segment for the limit line Send LIMSDON limit segment done or SDON segment done to terminate editing segment 75 COMMAND IGNORED SEGMENT NOT DONE YET The GPIB command the analyzer received is ignored because the segment is editing GPIB only Send LIMSDON limit segment done or SDON segment done to terminate editing segment See GPIB Command Reference 76 SEGMENT START STOP OVERLAPPED Segments are not allowed to be overlapped Reenter appropriate value for start or stop value of segments to avoid that segment is not overlapped Messages 15 MANY SEGMENTS OR POINTS Frequency list mode is limited to 31 segments or 801 points 78 TOO SMALL POINTS OR TOO LARGE STOP STOP SPAN NOP 1 is out of sweep range Increase NOP or change STOP value to lower frequency to avoid this error 82 CAN T CHANGE ANOTHER CONTROLLER ON BUS The analyzer cannot assume the mode of system controller until the active controller is removed from the bus or relinquishes the bus See Chapter 7 of the Programming Guide 8 FORMAT NOT VALID FOR MEASUREMENT The conversion function except the 1 S and the multiple phase modes is not valid for the Smith admittance and SWR formats 84 ANALYZER TYPE MISMATCH The analyzer receives a command that is not available for the current analyz
77. in network analyzer mode When RBW is manually changed is displayed between RBW and RBW value Because IFBW does not have auto mode is not displayed when IFBW is changed Front and Rear Panel 2 7 18 Status Notations Note Y 19 External Reference 2 8 Front and Rear Panel Displays the current status of various functions for the active channel The following notations are used Sweep parameters changed measured data in doubt until a complete fresh sweep has been taken P RF output is OFF only for the network analyzer P RF output is ON spectrum analyzer mode only P RF output level is set over the maximum value of range This notation is displayed when the power slope is turned on and the total output power level of the power slope value and the RF output level are over the maximum output level 51 Power slope is ON network analyzer mode only Cor Error correction is ON network analyzer mode only Level correction is ON spectrum analyzer mode only C2 Two port error correction is ON network analyzer mode only C Sweep parameters have changed and interpolated error correction is ON network analyzer mode only 2 Sweep parameters have changed and interpolated two port correction is ON network analyzer mode only C Sweep parameters have changed and interpolated error correction is NOT available network analyzer mode only 62 Sweep parameters have changed and interpolated two por
78. of SPAN for each condition Analyzer Mode Full Span Spectrum Analyzer 1 8 GHz Network Analyzer frequency sweep 1 7999 GHz Network Analyzer power sweep 0 to 30 1 The maximum range of SPAN in a power sweep depends on the CENTER value ZERO SPAN ZERO SPAN SPAN Sets the SPAN to zero MKRA SPAN MKRDSPAN Changes the SPAN to the difference between the marker and the delta marker values When the CROSS CHAN under is turned ON the SPAN of the inactive channel is changed and key cannot be set zero span Entering the same value into START and STOP never causes Zero Span In this case the SPAN value is set to minimum span value at the current setting not zero 6 24 Sweep Block Zero Span the Spectrum Analyzer Because the spectrum measurement on zero span requires some different settings set the frequency span measurement as follows RBW must be gt 10 kHz When span is set to zero RBW must be greater than or equal to 10 kHz If the RBW is less than 10 kHz it is automatically changed to 10 kHz when the span is set to 0 Detection must be sample mode When span is set to zero the detection mode is automatically changed to the sample detection mode When span is changed from zero to any value except zero the detection mode is automatically set to the positive peak mode Number of Points can be modefied When span is not zero the number of points is automatically set properl
79. s p c Frequency response 23 5 C 10 dB referenced to level at 20 MHz 10 MHz lt frequency lt 1 8 GHz lt 0 5 dB 0 3 dB s p c 2 Hz lt frequency lt 10 2 1 5 dB 0 8 dB s p c Amplitude fidelity Log scale Specifications 10 11 Amplitude Fidelity Amplitude fidelity Amplitude fidelity Range El Hz lt RBW lt 3 kHz 10 lt RBW lt 300 kHz 1 MHz lt RBW lt 3 MHz dB from Ref Level Spec Typical Spec Typical Spec Typical 0 dB gt range gt 30 dB 0 05 dB 0 02 dB 0 3 dB 0 12 dB 1 0 dB 0 4 dB 30 dB gt range gt 40 dB 0 07 dB 0 03 dB 0 3 dB 0 12 dB 1 0 dB 0 4 dB 40 dB gt range gt 50 dB 0 12 dB 0 05 dB 0 4 dB 0 15 dB 1 2 dB 0 5 dB 50 dB gt range gt 60 dB 0 4 dB 0 12 dB 0 7 dB 0 3 1 4 dB 0 6 dB 60 dB gt range gt 70 dB 1 2 dB 0 8 dB 1 5 dB 0 6 dB 2 2 dB 0 8 dB 70 dB gt range gt 80 dB 4 dB 1 dB 4 3 dB 1 2 dB 80 dB gt range gt 90 dB 3 dB 90 dB gt range gt 100 dB 10 dB 1 2345 C 10 dBm gt ref level input att gt 50 dBm except for gain compression For small signal measurement fidelity is degraded by noise floor according to below formula 20 l08 0 1 10725 x 3 5 dB where x is signal to noise flo
80. the class consists of a single standard This does not however mean that all standards in a class must be measured during calibration Only a single standard per class is required Note that it is often simpler to keep the number of standards per class to the bare minimum needed often one to avoid confusion during calibration Standards are assigned to a class simply by entering the standard s reference number established while defining a standard under a particular class Each class can be given a user definable label as described under Modify Cal Kit Menu Network Analyzer in Chapter 5 Note The class assignments table can be displayed on screen I and printed using COPY function See Copy Menu Y Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer in Chapter 8 The standard class assignments of predefined standard kits are shown in Appendix D Note Agilent Technologies strongly recommends that you read application note I 8510 5A before attempting to view or modify calibration standard definitions Y The part number of this application note is 5956 4352 Although the application note is written for the 8510 family of network analyzers it also applies to the analyzer 12 46 Analyzer Features Accuracy Enhancement Fundamentals Characterizing Systematic Errors One Port Error Model In a measurement of the reflection coefficient magnitude and phase of an unknown device the measured data differs from the actual no matt
81. three way power splitters One output arm is used as the reference for the network analyzer in making ratio measurements and the other two output arms are test channels The 11850C has a frequency range of DC to 3 GHz and an impedance of 50 Q The 11850D has a frequency range of DC to 2 GHz and an impedance of 75 0 Three 11852B 50 to 75 0 minimum loss pads are supplied with the 11850D power splitter to provide a low SWR impedance match between the power splitter and the 50 Q ports of the network analyzer 11667A Power Splitter This is a two way power splitter with one output arm used for reference and one for test It has a frequency range of DC to 18 GHz and an impedance of 50 Q 86205A 86207A 50 0 and 75 0 RF Bridges These are high directivity RF Bridges used for general purpose applications The 86205A has a frequency range of 300 kHz to 6 GHz and an impedance of 50 Q The 86207A has a frequency range of 300 kHz to 3 GHz and an impedance of 75 9 The following calibration kits contain the precision standards and the required adapters for the indicated connector types The standards facilitate measurement calibration also called vector error correction Refer to the applicable data sheet and ordering guide for additional information Part numbers for the standards are in their respective manuals 850833C 3 5 mm Calibration Kit 85031B 7 mm Calibration Kit 85032B 50 9 Type N Calibration Kit 85036B 75 9 Type N Calibration Kit
82. 0 14 491 1 3 50 OPEN 3 LOAD 0 1 3 50 BROADBAND 4 DELAY THRU 0 1 3 50 THRU 5 LOAD 0 1 3 50 SLIDING 6 LOAD 0 1 3 50 LOWBAND 7 SHORT 0 1 3 50 SHORT 8 OPEN 79 4 0 40 0 1 3 50 OPEN Table D 2 7 mm Standard Cal Kit OFFSET OFFSET OFFSET STANDARD STANDARD co C1 C2 DELAY LOSS Zo LABEL NO TYPE x10715F x 1027F Hz x10 96F Hz2 ps M s 9 1 SHORT 0 700 50 SHORT 2 OPEN 92 85 0 7 2 0 700 50 OPEN 3 LOAD 0 700 50 BROADBAND 4 DELAY THRU 0 700 50 THRU 5 LOAD 0 700 50 SLIDING 6 LOAD 0 700 50 LOWBAND 7 SHORT 0 700 50 8 OPEN 79 4 0 40 0 700 50 OPEN Table D 3 50 0 Type N Standard Cal Kit OFFSET OFFSET OFFSET STANDARD STANDARD co C1 C2 DELAY LOSS Zo LABEL NO TYPE x10715F x1027F Hz x10 96F Hz2 ps M s 9 1 SHORT 0 700 50 SHORT M 2 OPEN 108 55 130 0 700 50 OPEN M 3 LOAD 0 700 50 BROADBAND 4 DELAY THRU 0 700 50 THRU 5 LOAD 0 700 50 SLIDING 6 LOAD 0 700 50 LOWBAND 7 SHORT 17 544 700 50 SHORT F 8 OPEN 62 17 28 17 544 700 50 OPEN F Input Range and Default Settings 0 13 D 14 Table D 4 75 0 Type N Standard Cal Kit OFFSET OFFSET OFFSET STANDARD STANDARD co C1 C2 DELAY LOSS Zo LABEL NO TYPE 10 15 x 1027 F Hz x 10 F Hz ps M0 s 0 1 SHORT 0 1 13x10 75 SHORT M 2 OPEN 63 5 84 56 0 1 13x10 75 OPEN M 3 LOAD 0 1 13x10 75 BROADBA
83. 0 dBm output 1 0 dB Level accuracy Specifications 10 1 23 5 C 50 MHz O dBm output lt 0 5 dB Level linearity Output Power Linearity 20 dBm lt power lt 20 dBm 0 7 dB 40 dBm lt power lt 20 dBm 1 0 dB 60 dBm lt power lt 40 dBm 1 5 dB 1 28 5 relative to 0 dBm output Spectral Purity Characteristics Harmonics 15 dBm output 222 2 2 2 2 7 2 lt 30 dBc Non harmonics spurious 15 dBm output 80 Noise sidebands SPAN 0 IFBW or RBW lt 3 kHz frequency lt 1 GHz 0710 kHz offset from carrier lt 105 dBc Hz s p c gt 1 MHz offset from carrier lt 110 dBc Hz s p c frequency gt 1 7 Add 20log frequency GHz s p c Impedance 50 Q nominal Return loss lt 0 dBm 100 MHz lt frequency lt 1 8 2 gt 14 dB s p c lt 0 dBm 100 kHz lt frequency lt 100 27 gt 23 dB s p c Connector N female Rec
84. 1 is set when the spectrum analyzer is selected m Number Of Points NOP is a two byte INTEGER value This number is equal to the number of complex or real data that follows the NOP m DATA is a set of the values for each measurement point The values are IEEE 754 double precision floating number When the network analyzer mode is selected the values are two numbers the first value is the real part the second value is the imaginary part The data size in bytes can be determined by 16xNOP When the spectrum analyzer mode is selected the values are one number and the data size in bytes can be determined by 8x NOP C 8 Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data File Structure of Internal Data Arrays File for ASCII File Numerical data and strings in an ASCII data file are separated by a tab and a string is bound by double quotation marks Status Block and Data Block An ASCII data file consists of a status block and data blocks The status block consists of two lines the revision number and the date code The data block consists of three parts the state part the title line and the data part m State The state part consists of the following instrument states Channel number Title on the screen Measurement type Format type and Unit Number of points Sweep time Sweep type Source power or CW frequency IF or RBW and VBW bandwidth m Title The title part consists of the data array names saved Data a
85. 18 Bandwidth Menu for Network Analyzer AVERAGING AVERAGING RESTART AVERREST Resets the sweep to sweep averaging and restarts the sweep count at at the beginning of the next sweep The sweep count for averaging is displayed at the left of the display AVERAGING on OFF AVER ON OFF Turns the averaging function oN or OFF for the active channel When averaging is on Avg is displayed in the status notations area at the left of the display along with the sweep count for the averaging factor Whenever an instrument state change affecting the measured data is made the sweep count for averaging is reset to 1 At the start of averaging or following AVERAGING RESTART averaging starts at 1 and averages each new sweep into the trace until it equals the specified averaging factor The sweep count is displayed in the status notations area below Avg and updated each sweep as it increments When the specified averaging factor is reached the trace data continues to be updated weighted by that averaging factor AVERAGING FACTOR AVERFACT Makes the averaging factor the active function Any value up to 999 can be used Measurement Block 5 31 IF BANDWIDTH GROUP DELAY APERTURE 5 32 Measurement Block IF BW BW Selects the bandwidth value for IF bandwidth reduction Allowed values in Hz are 10 30 100 300 1k 3k 10k and 40 k Any other value will default to the closest allowed value A narrow bandwidth provides be
86. 2 5 us 160 ms T4 320 ms 5 us 320 ms T 1 28 s 20 us 1 28 ms T4 3 2 s 100 us Additional Amplitude Error Log scale Linear scale Gate Control Modes Gate Trigger Input External Trigger Input is used Connector Trigger level Gate Output Connector Output level 2222222 22 2 2 2 2 lt 0 3 dB s p c lt 3 s p c Del e e Edge pos Edge neg or Level BNC female e TTL Level BNC female eee tenets TTL Level Specifications when Option 1D7 50 to 75 Q Input Impedance Conversion All specifications are identical to the standard 4396B except the following items Amplitude range Displayed average noise level gt 10 MHZ Level accuracy 20 MHz after level cal Frequency response input attenuator 10dB 10 14 Specifications Displayed average noise level to 24 dBm lt 148 3f GHz dBm Hz s p c lt 0 4 dB s p c lt 0 5 dB s p c 4396B Option 010 Specifications Measurement Functions Measurement parameters Z Y L C Q R X G B 0 Display para
87. 23 Directiva 12 89 12 24 Source Match 12 40 12 25 Load 12 41 12 26 Sources of Error in a Reflection Measurement 12 47 12 27 Reflection Coefficient 2 12 47 Contents 34 12 28 12 29 12 80 12 81 12 82 12 88 12 84 12 85 12 86 12 87 12 88 12 89 12 40 12 41 1 1 2 B 3 B 4 B 5 B 6 7 B 8 9 10 B 11 B 12 B 13 B 14 B 15 B 16 17 18 19 20 B 21 B 22 B 23 B 24 B 25 B 26 27 28 29 C 1 C 2 C 3 4 C 5 C 6 Effective Directivity Epg 2 2 4 ll A 12 48 Source Match Esp 2 12 48 Reflection Tracking Epp 12 48 Perfect Load Termination 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 5 2 2 5 5 2 12 49 Measured Effective Directivity 12 50 Short Circuit Termination 2 2 2 2 2 22 25 2 524 12 50 Open Circuit Termination 12 51 Measured 5 2 ll ll e s a 12 51 Major Sources of 12 52 Transmission Coefficient 4 ll ll s ls 12 52 Load Match Epp os 12 53 Isolation Exp 12 53 Full Two Port Error Model 12 54 I O Port Pin 12 56 Serial
88. 3 5x 107 Switch Port Match 70 dB 3 2x107 1 Accuracy enhancement procedures are performed using 85033C 3 5 mm calibration kit Enviromental temperature is 238 C 4 9 at calibration 1 C from calibration temperature must be maintained for valied measurement calibration 2 With IF bandwidth of 10 Hz 3 With impedace matched load 4 High level noise is the RMS of a continuouse measurement of a short circuit or thru 5 Arrived at by bending 11857D cables out perpendicular to front panel and reconnecting Stability is much better with less flexing 6 Arrived at using 11857D cables and full 2 port calibration Drift is much better without calbes and with 1 port calibration For this case drift typically is 0 1 0 05 xf GHz x A C degrees 11 20 System Performance Table 11 4 Typical System Performance for Devices with 50 0 Type N Connectors 4396B with 85046A or 85044A Test Set 300 kHz to 1 8 GHz L Typical Residual after Accuracy Enhancement 2 Symbol Error Terms Uncorrected Response Only Response and Isolation One Port Full two port D Directivity 30 dB 30 dB 44 dB 44 dB 44 dB 3 2 10 2 3 2 10 2 6 3 10 2 6 3 10 2 6 3 10 Source Match 16 dB 16 dB 16 dB 35 dB 35 dB 0 16 0 16 0 16 0 018 0 018 Reflection Trac
89. 8 22 COPY TIME on OFF COPT ONJOFF e 8 22 PRINT SETUP eos 8 92 ORIENT PORTRAIT LANDSCAPE ONJOFE ess 8 92 FORM FEED ON off FORMFEEDON OFF 8 22 LISTING o 8 22 LIST VALUES LISV o 8 22 PARAMETER LIST 8 23 OPERATING PARAMETERS OPEP ee t t t t x 8 23 CAL KIT LIST ee 8 24 CAL KIT DEFINITION MN V 8 24 SWEEP TABLE ML 8 24 LIST SWEEP TABLE MEN VV 8 24 LIMIT TABLE ML 8 24 LIMIT TEST TABLE MEN VV 8 24 Print Setup Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer s 7s 55 8 25 PRINT STANDARD PRIS 826 COLOR PRINT 4 4 2 8 25 COLOR PRIC 8595 Contents 21 PRINT COLOR FIXED PRICFIXE PRICVARI DPI DPI TOP MARGIN TMARG LEFT MARGIN LMARG DEFAULT SETUP DFLT Copy Cal Kit Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer STANDARD LIST STANDARD DEFINITION CALS 1 4 CLASS LIST CLASS ASSIGNMENT CALCASSI Copy Limit Test Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer DISPLAY LIST DISLLIST DISP MODE UPR amp LWR DISMAMP UL MID amp DLT DISMAMP MD Copy List Sweep Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer LIST TABLE DISPLAY LIST DISL DISP MODE ST amp SP DISMPRM STSP CTR SPAN DISMPRM CTSP Screen Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer PRINT O PRINT STANDARD PRINALL COPY ABORT COPY ABORT TIME STAMP COPY TIME on OFF COPT ONIOF
90. Accessories and Options 9 3 Cables Adapters 9 4 Accessories and Options The following RF cables are used to return the transmitted signal to the test set when measuring two port devices These cables provide shielding for high dynamic range measurements 11857D 7 mm Test Port Return Cable Set These are a pair of test port return cables for use with the 85046A S parameter test set The cables can be used when measuring devices with connectors other than 7 mm by using the appropriate precision adapters 11857B 75 9 Type N Test Port Return Cable Set These are a pair of test port return cables for use with the 85046B S parameter test set 11851B 50 0 Type N RF Cable Set This kit contains the three phase matched 50 Q type N cables necessary to connect the 87512A B transmission reflection test kits or a power splitter to the analyzer It also contains an RF cable used to return the transmitted signal of a two port device to the network analyzer 11852B 50 0 to 75 0 Minimum Loss Pad DC to 2 GHz This device converts the impedance from 50 Q type N female to 75 Q type N male or from 75 Q to 50 It provides a low SWR impedance match between a 75 Q DUT and the analyzer or a 50 Q measurement accessory An 11852B pad is included with the 87512B 75 Q transmission reflection test kit Three 11852B pads are included with the 11850D 75 power splitter Adapter Kits The following adapter kits contain the connection hardwa
91. B 17 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Key for Spectrum Analyzer B 18 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Key for Network Analyzer B 18 Softkey Menus Accessed from the 20 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Key oaoa B 21 Softkey Menus Accessed from the B 22 Softkey Menus Accessed from the B 23 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Key B 24 File Header Structure 2 RAW Data Group Structure for the Network Analyzer C 6 RAW Data Group Structure for the Spectrum Analyzer C 6 CAL Data Group Structure for the Network Analyzer 2 C 7 CAL Data Group Structure for the Spectrum Analyzer 2 2 C 7 DATA MEMORY DATA TRACE and MEMORY TRACE Data Group Structure C 8 Contents 35 Tables 11 8 List Value Format 2 8 23 Supported Printers and Printing Modes 9 5 Parameters of System error Model 11 7 Typical System Performance for Devices with 7 mm Connectors 4396B with 85046A Test Set 300 kHz to 1 8 GHz s t t t t n t t ng 11 19 Typical System Performance for Devices with 3 5 mm Connectors 4396B with 85046A Test Set 300 kHz to 1 8GHz t t t t t t t t t 11 20 Typical System Performance for Devices with 50 0 Type N Connectors 4396B with 850
92. CALI RESP o 5 37 RESPONSE AND ISOLATION o 5 38 RESPONSE amp ISOL N CALI RAI MEN 5 38 PORT MEL 5 38 511 1 PORT CALI 5111 e 5 38 S22 1 PORT CALI S221 2 02020020222 22220000084 5 38 2 PORT CAL o 5 38 FULL 2 PORT CALI FUL2 e 5 38 ONE PATH 2 PORT 0 2 5 38 RESUME CAL MM VV 5 39 RESUME CAL SEQUENCE RESO MN VV 5 39 CAL KIT o 5 39 CAL KIT 7mm k k c t k a 5 39 CAL KIT Ymm CALK APC7 5 39 3 6mm CALK APC35 5 39 N 50 ohm CALKN50 2 2 0 0 0 s s c sot oe e ee ee eee 5 39 N 75 ohm CALK N75 2 202020202020200020202000 000 0 0 20 2024 5 39 USER CAL KIT s s c r r c et kt s s e it s ts es is t s s es 5 39 Contents 7 USER CALK USED 5 39 SAVE USER KIT SAVEUSEK 0 0 02 02 2 0 0 004 5 39 MODIFY CAL KIT o 5 40 MODIFY MODI1 ee eee ee 540 PORT EXTENSION 5 40 PORT EXTENSIONS s c t t t t s o 5 40 VELOCITY FACTOR a 5 40 VELOCITY FACTOR VELOFACT o 5 40 CHARACTERISTIC IMPEDANCE 5 40 SET ZO SETZ 5 40 Response standard menu Network Analyzer gt ee t t t t t t nos 5 42 RESPONSE FOR 3 5 MM 7MM CAL KITS oe 5 42 SHORT STANA 5 42 OPEN STAN
93. Clear List Menu CLEAR LIST CLEAR LIST YES Clears the entire list NO Cancels the task and returns to the edit list menu 6 10 Sweep Block Segment menu Network Analyzer SEGMENT Sweep SEGMENT MKR STARTI SWEEP TYPE MKR STOP MENU NUMBER of POINTS POWER EDITI LIST gt ADDI IF BW SEGMENT START STOP CENTER SPAN RETURN SEGMENT QUIT SEGMENT DONE CB006004 Figure 6 5 Segment Menu for Network Analyzer SEGMENT MKR START MKRSTAR Sets the sweep parameter start value to the sweep parameter value of the marker MKR STOP MKRSTOP Sets the sweep parameter stop value to the sweep parameter value of the marker NUMBER of POINTS POIN Sets the number of points for the segment The total number of points for all segments cannot exceed 801 STEP SIZE STPSIZE Specifies the segment in frequency steps instead of number of points Changing the start frequency stop frequency span or number of points may change the step size Changing the step size may change the number of points and the stop frequency in the start stop step mode or the frequency span in the center span step mode In each case the frequency span becomes a multiple of the step size POWER POWER Sets t
94. Figure B 9 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Bw Avg Key for Spectrum Analyzer B 6 Softkey Tree CORRECTION en CALIBRATE WENU Y CALIBRATE NONE RESPONSE RESPONSE amp ISOL N 511 Response Isolation Menu PORT 22 IMPORT FULL 2EQRE ONE PATH Z PORT RESUME CAL SEQUENCE CAL KIT mm Y CAL KIT mm 3 6mm N 50 ohn N76 ohm USER Kit SAVE USER KIT MODIFY ram RETURN MORE ly PORT EXTENSIONS VELOCITY FACTOR SET ZO RETURN Calibration EXTENSIONS en GER EXTENSION INPUT R EXTENSION INPUT A EXTENSION INPUT B EXTENSION PORT 1 EXTENSION PORT 2 RETURN Reference Plane Menu 5005036 571 522 One Path 2 Port Mneu RESPONSE ISOEN STD DONE REP ISOL N CAL SHORT El THRU DONE RESPONSE SHORTIMI SHORTI OPENIFI PEI SHORT LOAD DONE SPORT CAL 1 Port Menu THRU DONE S RESPONSE v defined std 1 X defined std 2 defined std 3 defined std 4 Bel SHORT LOAD DONE PORT CAL 1 Port Me REFLECT NA OPEN SHORT LOAD 22 defined std 5 defined sid 6 detined std 7 DONE lt RESPONSE
95. Full one or two port EF 10 20 3 52 a 40 50 60 70 80 30 190 Insertion Loss dB Figure 11 8 Total Transmission Phase Uncertainty of a Wide Dynamic Range Device System Performance 11 5 Types of Residual Measurement Errors Network analysis measurement errors can be separated into three types systematic random and drift errors Measurement errors that remain after measurement calibration are called residual measurement errors See Calibration for Network Measurement in Chapter 12 for a detailed description of the systematic errors corrected by measurement calibration Residual Systematic Errors These errors result from imperfections in the calibration standards connector standards and interface interconnecting cables and instrumentation These are the errors that affect transmission and reflection measurements Transmission Measurements Reflection Measurements Dynamic accuracy Effective switch port match Effective load match Effective source match Switch tracking Multiplexer switching Uncertainty Frequency error Effective crosstalk Effective directivity Effective transmission tracking Effective reflection tracking Cable stability Residual Random Errors These non repeatable errors are due to trace noise noise floor and connector repeatability They affect both transmission and reflection measurements
96. GET Enters the GET command in the BASIC command line The GET command loads a specified ASCII file into the editor memory COMMAND ENTRY System PURGE Enters the PURGE command in the BASIC command line The PURGE command deletes a specified file INITIALIZE Enters the INITIALIZE command in the BASIC command line The INITIALIZE command formats a disk MSI INTERNAL The MSI INTERNAL command specifies a disk device INTERNAL selects the built in flexible disk MEMORY selects the built in RAM disk SCRATCH Enters the SCRATCH command in the BASIC command line Pressing the key after the command deletes a currently edited program from the memory RENumber Enters the RENumber command in the BASIC command line Pressing the key after the command renumbers the line numbers of a program LIST Enters the LIST command in the BASIC command line The LIST command outputs the program list to the screen COMMAND ENTRY Displays the softkeys that are used to enter BASIC commands The active entry area displays the letters digits and some special characters Three sets of letters can be scrolled using the step keys f and 2 SELECT LETTER Selects the character pointed to by T SPACE Inserts a space BACK SPACE Deletes the last character entered ERASE TITLE Deletes all characters entered DONE Terminates command entry and executes the command you entered CANCEL Cancels command and returns to the previou
97. GPENS SAVE SHORT toan defined std d MODIFY EE defined std 2 defied etd 3 SHORT defined std 4 defined std 5 LOAD Mone LY REFLECT defined std 6 DONE defined std 7 jos DONE EXTENSIONS ly BONE MISSION VELOCITY FACTOR FWD TRANS Open Standard Menu SE IRN PAD RETURN aa A REV TRANS SHORTIFI Calibration Menu ien DONE SHORTS TRANS 4 4 DONE ISGLATION IY defined stat ON OMIT defined 19 2 ISOLATION defined std 3 NN defined std 4 REVISOLIN defined std 5 EXTE ISOUN STD defined std 6 ISOLATION defined std 7 EXTENSION DONE R i 2 PORT CAL SHORTS EXTENSION Short Standard Menu INPUT A EXTENSION 2 Port Menu INPUT B REFLECTN M EXTENSION defined std 1 PORT 1 defined std 2 EXTENSION defined etd 3 PORT 2 AD defined std 4 defined std S RETURN REFLECTN defined std 6 defined std 7 Reference Plane Menu ud Done Pt TERG Load Standard Menu FWD MATCH THRU TRANS defined 1 BONE defined std 2 CLATION tY defined std 3 defined std 4 ISOLATION defined std 5 i defined std 6 defined 7 DONE so THRU DONE Thru Standard Menu Z PORT CAL CALIBRATE WENU
98. LEVIEDG 6 19 gate output 2 11 10 14 gate trigger 6 19 gate trigger input 10 14 gate trigger mode 12 24 general characteristics 10 21 GET 8 6 G jB CIRF GB 7 27 G n 4 2 GEO 2 8 GPIB 12 34 GPIB 10 20 GPIB address 8 18 12 37 D 12 GPIB cable 9 5 GPIB interface 2 10 graphics 8 33 GRAPHICS C 3 GRAPHICS SAVDTIFF 8 33 A 4 graphics file C 3 GRATICULE COLO GRAT 5 22 group delay 5 13 12 13 group delay aperture 5 31 group delay characteristics 10 6 GROUP DELY APERTURE GRODAPER 5 31 H handle kit option 1CN 9 1 harmonics 10 2 high level noise 11 7 high stability frequency reference option 1D5 9 1 Hld 2 8 thimis 6 3 6 6 hold ON Max Min 2 8 HP DeskJet 1200 color printer 9 5 HP DeskJet 1600CM color printer 9 5 HP DeskJet 340J color printer 9 5 HP DeskJet 505 printer 9 5 HP DeskJet 560C color printer 9 5 HP DeskJet 850C color printer 9 5 humidity 10 23 I IBASIC 8 4 ibasic 8 4 IBASIC COLO IBT 5 22 IF band reduction 12 13 if bandwidth 5 30 IF Bandwidth IFBW 10 2 IF BW BW 6 11 ifbw 2 7 IF BW BW 5 30 IF gain switching uncertainty 10 12 IF output 2 11 IF range adjustment 12 8 IF range adjustment 12 8 imaginary 5 14 IMAGINARY FMT IMAG 5 14 impedance 5 9 impedance 10 2 10 3 10 18 impedance conversion 12 11 Impedance Measurement Function option 010 9 1 initial achievable accu
99. LOAD Forward Transmission 4 THRU Reverse Transmission 4 THRU Forward Match 4 THRU Reverse Match 4 THRU Response 1 7 2 8 4 RESPONSE Response amp Isolation 1 7 2 8 4 RESPONSE Input Range and Default Settings Error Messages This section lists the error messages that are displayed on the analyzer display or transmitted by the instrument over GPIB Each error message is accompanied by an explanation and suggestions are provided to help in solving the problem Where applicable references are provided to the related chapter of the appropriate manual When displayed error messages are preceded with the word CAUTION That part of the error message has been omitted here for the sake or brevity Some messages without the CAUTION are for information only and do not indicate an error condition The messages are listed first in alphabetical order because the displayed messages do not contain the message number The messages are then listed in numerical order to make them easier to find if they are read over the GPIB In addition to error messages The analyzer s status is indicated by status notations in the left margin of the display Examples Cor and P Sometimes these appear together with error messages A complete listing of status notations and their meanings is provided in Chapter 2 of this manual Error Messages in Alphabetical Order 10 ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED Error correction for the se
100. MKRA SPAN MKRDSPAN 7 11 MKRA CENTER MKRDCEND 7 11 CROSS CHANNEL Ce 7 11 CROSS CHAN on OFF CRSC ON OFF MN 7 11 Search menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer t s s st t t t t t t t t t t oe oon oon 7 14 PEAK SEARCH a 7 15 SEARCH PEAK SEAM PEAK MN 7 15 MAX SEARCH MN 7 15 MAX SEAM s k VV t t t t 7 15 MIN SEARCH MN 7 15 MIN SEAM s VV t t t t t t 7 15 TARGET SEARCH ee 7 15 TARGET SEAM TARG 7 15 MULTIPLE PEAKS 7 15 PEAK ALL Ce 7 15 SEARCH PEAKS ALL SEAM PKSA k e 7 15 PEAKS RIGHT SEAM PKSR 7 15 PEAKS LEFT 1 7 15 PEAK DEF MENU 2 e s t o t t ot ot ot t t t oos 7 16 Contents 16 SEARCH TRACK e SEARCH TRK on OFF TRACK ON OFF WIDTH WIDTHS WIDT ON OFF SIGNAL TRACK SIGNAL TRK on SGTRK ONIOFF SEARCH RANGE MENU Peak menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer PEAK SEAM PEAK NEXT PEAK NEXT SEANPK LEFT PEAK NEXT PEAK LEFT SEANPKL RIGHT PEAK NEXT PEAK RIGHT SEANPKR SIGNAL TRK on OFF SGTRK ON OFF PEAK DEF MENU SUB MKR Target Menu Network Analyzer TARGET SEARCH TARGET SEATARG SEARCH LEFT SEAL SEARCH RIGHT SEAR SUB MKR Widths
101. Menu Network Analyzer PORT EXTENSION EXTENSIONS on OFF PORE ON OFF EXTENSION INPUT R PORTR EXTENSION INPUT A PORTA EXTENSION INPUT B PORTB EXTENSION PORT 1 PORT1 EXTENSION PORT 2 PORT2 Modify Cal Kit Menu Network Analyzer DEFINE STANDARD DEFINE STANDARD STD NO 1 DEFS 1 STD NO 2 1 DEFS 2 STD NO 3 DEFS 3 STD NO 4 DEFS 4 STD NO 5 DEFS 5 STD NO 6 1 DEFS 6 STD NO 7 DEFS 7 STD NO 8 DEFS 8 SPECIFY CLASS SPECIFY CLASS SPECIFY S11A SPECS11A 511 SPECS11B S11C SPECS11C SPECIFY 522 SPECS22A S22B SPECS22B 522 SPECS22C SPECIFY FWD TRANS SPECFWDT REV TRANS SPECREVT FWD MATCH SPECFWDM REV MATCH SPECREVM RESPONSE SPECRESP RESPONSE amp IS0 N SPECRESI CLASS DONE SPEC D CLAD LABEL CLASS LABEL CLASS Contents 10 5 51 5 51 5 51 5 51 5 51 5 52 5 52 5 52 5 52 5 52 5 52 5 52 5 52 5 53 5 53 5 53 5 54 5 54 5 54 5 54 5 54 5 54 5 54 5 54 5 54 5 54 5 54 5 54 5 54 5 55 5 55 5 55 5 55 5 55 5 55 5 55 5 55 5 55 5 55 5 56 5 56 LABEL S11A LABES11A S11B LABES11B 5116 LABES11C LABEL 522 LABES22A 522B LABES22B 522 LABES22C LABEL FWD TRANS LABEFWDT REV TRANS LABEREVT FWD MATCH LABEFWDM REV MATCH LABEREVM RESPONSE LABERESP RESPONSE amp ISO N LABERESI LABEL DONE LABEL CAL KIT LABEL K
102. Number Plate A 2 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Key for Spectrum Analyzer B 1 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Key for Network Analyzer B 2 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Key for Spectrum Analyzer B 3 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Key for Network Analyzer B 3 Softkey Menus Accessed from the B 4 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Scale Ref Key for Network Analyzer B 5 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Key for Spectrum Analyzer B 5 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Bw Avg Key for Network Analyzer B 6 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Bw Avg Key for Spectrum Analyzer B 6 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Key for Network Analyzer 1 2 B 7 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Key for Network Analyzer 2 2 8 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Key for Spectrum Analyzer B 9 Softkey Menus Accessed from the 10 Softkey Menus Accessed from the 10 Softkey Menus Accessed from the 11 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Key for Network Analyzer B 12 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Key for Spectrum Analyzer B 12 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Trigger Key 2 less B 13 Softkey Menus Accessed from the 14 Softkey Menus Accessed from the 15 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Key for the Network Analyzer B 16 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Key for the Spectrum Analyzer
103. ONSgn1 2 6 SIGNAL on OFF SGTRK ON OFF 7 16 7 18 SINGLE SING 6 18 SLOPE SLOPE 6 15 SLOPE on OFF SLOP ON OFF 6 15 sloping 6 15 Slp 2 8 smith chart 5 13 Smith chart 12 12 SMITH Re Im FMT SMITH 5 13 Smp 2 8 SMTH POLAR MENU 7 27 smth polar menu 7 27 1 8 source characteristics 10 1 source crosstalk 10 2 source match 12 39 12 40 12 47 12 48 12 52 source match Esp 12 53 source match Esr 12 53 SPACE 8 7 SPACE 5 25 SPAN SPAN 6 12 6 14 1 8 span value 2 7 s parameter 12 10 s parameter measurement 5 6 S PARAMETERS 5 5 s parameter test set interface 10 22 s parameter test set interface pin assignments 10 23 s p c 10 1 specifications 10 1 specify class 5 54 SPECIFY CLASS 5 54 SPECIFY FWD TRANS SPECFWDT 5 55 SPECIFY OFFSET 5 61 SPECIFY S11A SPECS11A 5 54 SPECIFY S22A SPECS22A 5 55 spectral purity characteristics 10 2 spectrum analyzer 5 8 SPECTRUM ANALYZER SA 5 8 spectrum measurement 5 15 spectrum monitor 12 18 SPECTRUM S MEAS S 5 7 split display 5 19 SPLIT DISP ON off SPLD ONIOFF 5 19 SPLIT DISP ON off 5 17 spurious responses 10 10 Sa 11 7 Si 11 7 Sa 11 7 Ste 11 7 stability 10 5 10 6 standard 12 43 standard class assignment D 15 STANDARD DEFINITION CALS 1 7 8 27 standard list 8 27 1 8 start value 2 7 state C 2 STATE SAVDSTA
104. RETURN Target Menu SEARCH IN SEARCH OUT WIDTHS on OFF WIDTH VALUE RETURN Width Menu Sub Maker Menu Figure 7 8 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Search Key for the Spectrum Analyzer Marker Block 7 13 Search menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer SEARCH MAX MIN TARGET MULTIPLE PEAKS SEARCH PEAKS ALL PEAKS RIGHT PEAKS LEFT PEAK DEF Peak Definition MENU SEARCH TRK on OFF RETURN WIDTHS OFF SEARCH TRK on OFF B SEARCH Search Range RANGE MENU Menu Figure 7 9 Search Menu for the Network Analyzer SEARCH PEAK MAX MIN MULTIPLE PEAKS SEARCH PEAKS ALL PEAKS RIG HT PEAKS LEFT PEAK DEF Peak Definition MENU Menu SEARCH on OFF RETURN SIGANL SEARCH OFF SEARCH Search Range RANGE MENU Menu Figure 7 10 Search Menu for the Spectrum Analyzer 7 14 Marker Block PEAK SEARCH MAX SEARCH MIN SEARCH TARGET SEARCH PEAK ALL SEARCH PEAK SEAM PEAK Moves the marker to the maximum or minimum peak and displays the peak menu that is used to search for the next peak The search function searches for a peak that meets the peak definition specified in the peak define menu See the peak define menu for more information on peak de
105. Response Standard Menu DONE GPENS defined std 1 defined std 2 defined std X SHORT defined std 4 definsd std 6 LOAD REFLECT N DONE TRANSE MISSION Y FWD TRANS THRU PWDE MATCH THRU REV TRANS THRU REV MATCH THRU TRANS DONE ISGEATION Y OMIT ISGLATION FWDJSGEN ISQUN STD REVISGLIN ISQL N STD ISOLATION DONE DONE 2 PORT CAL 2 Port Menu REFLECTN M st defined std 6 defined std 7 DONE OPENS Open Standard Menu NUN Em SHORTIMI SHORT F DONE SHORTS defined std 1 A defined 19 2 defined std 3 defined std 4 defined std S defined std 6 defined std 7 DONE SHORTS Short Standard Menu defined std 1 defined eld 2 OPEN SHORT LOAD detined std 3 REFLEGTN BONE TRANS MISSION Y FWD TRANS defined std 4 defined std S defined std 6 defined std 7 THRU FWD MATCH THRUT TRANS DONE CATION tY OMIT ISOLATION FWDISOLEN ISGEN STD ISOLATION DUNE DONE Z PORT CAL BONE LOADS Load Standard Menu defined 1 defined std 2 defined std 3 defined std 4 defined std
106. SAVE USER KIT SAVEUSEK 5 39 scale 10 9 scale coupling 5 27 5 29 scale div 2 6 SCALE FOR SCAF DATA MEMO 5 28 SCALE FOR DATA SCAF DATA MEMO 5 27 SCALE DIV SCAL 5 26 5 28 Scale Ref 1 2 5 26 scaling 12 6 12 9 scan speed of 31 5 kHz 2 10 scattering parameters 12 10 SCRATCH 8 7 screen display 2 4 search 12 30 Gara 1 3 SEARCH IN WIDSIN 7 20 SEARCH LEFT SEAL 7 19 SEARCH OUT WIDSOUT 7 20 SEARCH PEAK SEAM PEAK 7 15 SEARCH PEAK ALL SEAM PKSA 7 15 search range 7 24 SEARCH RANGE MENU 7 17 SEARCH RIGHT SEAR 7 19 search track 7 16 search tracking ONPeak Max Min Targ PksA PksL PksR 2 6 SEARCH on OFF TRACK ON OFF 7 16 second harmonic distortion 10 10 SEGMENT 6 4 6 8 8 13 segment 6 11 12 21 SEGMENT DONE SDON 6 12 6 14 SEGMENT MKR START MKRSTAR 6 11 6 13 SEGMENT QUIT 5001 6 12 6 14 SEGMENT START STAR 6 12 6 13 selectivity 12 17 selectivity 10 7 SELECT LETTER 8 7 SELECT LETTER 8 41 SELECT LETTER 5 25 serial number A 2 service function 8 4 SERVICE MENU 8 4 SET ADDRESSES 8 18 SET CLOCK 8 4 ERASE TITLE 8 7 set up time 12 26 SET ZO SETZ 5 40 Sgn1 2 6 short 5 60 12 44 SHORT CLASS11B 5 45 5 47 5 50 SHORT CLASS22B 5 46 5 48 SHORT STANA 5 42 SHORT LF STANB 5 42 SHORT M STANA 5 42 SHORT STDT SHOR 5 60 signal track 7 16 signal tracking
107. SWR formats 131 FREQUENCY SWEEP ONLY The sweep type must be frequency sweep when the center step size is set 105 GET not allowed A Group Execute Trigger GET was received within a program message see IEEE 488 2 7 7 240 Hardware error Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because of a hardware problem in the analyzer Definition of what constitutes a hard ware problem is completely device specific This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 241 through 249 21 Hardware missing A legal program command or query could not be executed because of missing analyzer hardware For example an option was not installed 111 Header separator error A character that is not a legal header separator was encountered while parsing the header For example no white space followed the header thus SRE4 is an error 114 Header Suffix out of range The value of a numeric suffix attached to a program mnemonic makes the header invalid 224 Illegal parameter value Used where exact value from a list of possibilities was expected 282 Illegal program name The name used to reference a program was invalid For example redefining an existing program deleting a nonexistent program or in general referencing a nonexistent program 283 Illegal variable name An attempt was made to reference a nonexistent variable in
108. Stability Sta Port2 Cable Trans 0 05 xf GHz degrees Phase Stability4 So Port2 Cable Refl 70 dB 3 2 10 Stability Tia Trans Tracking Drift Magnitude 0 01 dB C 1 1x107 C Phase 0 1 0 15xf GHz degrees C Tra Refl Tracking Drift Magnitude 0 01 dB C 1 1x 10 7 C Phase 0 1 0 15 x f GHz degrees C 1 Accuracy enhancement procedures are performed using 85032B 50 Q type N calibration kit Enviromental temperature is 3 C at calibration 1 C from calibration temperature must be maintained for valied measurement calibration 23 C d 2 With IF bandwidth of 10 Hz 3 High level noise is the RMS of a continuouse measurement of a short circuit or thru 4 Arrived at by bending 11857D cables out perpendicular to front panel and reconnecting Stability is much better with less flexing 5 Arrived at using 11857D cables and full 2 port calibration Drift is much better without calbes and with 1 port calibration For this case drift typically is 0 1 0 05 xf GHz x A C degrees 112 4 System Performance Determining Expected System performance The uncertainty equations dynamic accuracy calculations and tables of system performance values provided in the preceding pages can be used to calculate the expected system performance The following pages explain how to determine the residual errors of a particular system and combine them to obtain total error corrected residual uncertain
109. TIME Swe ep AUTO man SWEEP hums RETURN SAMPLING NORMAL repet NUMBER cf POINTS SWEEP TYPE MENU SWEEP TYPE LIN FREG LIST FREQ EDIT LIST a SEGMENT EDIT DELETE ADD Somoni Men CLEAR LIST LIST DONE RETURN C5006002 Clear List Menu Figure 6 3 Sweep Menu for Spectrum Analyzer SWEEP TIME AUTO man SWETAUTO Toggles between automatic and manual sweep time The automatic sweep time selects the optimum sweep time automatically SWEEP TIME SWET Activates the sweep time function and displays the h m s softkey The sweep time value can not be changed in the stepped FFT mode RBW lt 3 kHz h m s Enters for the manual sweep time entry Sweep time can be set to a faster value than the AUTO mode setting the available range The sweep time AUTO mode sets the fastest sweep time with the maximum number of points NOP When the SPAN RBW ratio is less than a certain value about 200 through 400 the spectrum analyzer can measure the signal with a smaller NOP than the maximum In this case when sweep time is reduced to less than the AUTO mode setting NOP is automatically decreased Note that NOP of the spectrum analyzer cannot be changed directly Entering zero for the sweep time sets the fastest sweep time with fewest NOP because zero is rounded to
110. The error coefficients are computed and stored One path 2 Port menu is displayed with the REFLECT N softkey underlined If this key is pressed without measuring all the required standards the message CAUTION ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED is displayed TRANS MISSION TRAN Starts the transmission calibration and displays the menu that measures frequency response and load match for transmission calibration FWD TRANS THRU FWDT Measures Se frequency response and then the softkey is underlined If the cal kit is user kit and two or more standards are assigned to the forward transmission class this softkey displays the THRU standard menu that selects the THRU standard and measures it FWD MATCH THRU FWDM Measures 511 load match and then the softkey is underlined If the cal kit is user kit and two or more standards are assigned to the forward match class this softkey displays the THRU standard that selects the THRU standard and measures it TRANS DONE TRAD Completes transmission calibration The error coefficients are calculated and stored The one path 2 Port menu is displayed with the TRANSMISSION softkey underlined If this key is pressed without measuring all the required standards the message CAUTION ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED is displayed ISOLATION ISOL Starts the isolation calibration and displays the menu that measures isolation OMIT ISOLATION OMII Omits correction for isolation from
111. Transmission Uncertainty of a Low Loss Device MM 11 4 Transmission Uncertainty of a Wide Dynamic Range Device 22222202 2 11 5 Types of Residual Measurement Errors 11 6 Residual Systematic 0 11 6 Residual Random Errors s s s a 11 6 Residual Drift Errors c c 11 6 System Error Model 11 6 Reflection Uncertainty Equations MEL 11 8 Total Reflection Magnitude Uncertainty MV 11 8 Total Reflection Phase Uncertainty 11 8 Transmission Uncertainty Equations MM 11 9 Total Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty Eu MM 11 9 Total Transmission Phase Uncertainty 11 9 Dynamic Accuracy 111 100 Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy o 11 10 Determining Relative Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Error Contribution o 11 10 Phase Dynamic Accuracy 11 11 Determining Relative Phase Dynamic Accuracy Error Contribution 11 11 Dynamic Accuracy Error Contribution 11 2 Dynamic Accuracy Error Contribution 11 18 Dynamic Accuracy Error Contribution 11 14 Effects of Temperature Drift 11 45 Temperature Drift with 51 One Port Calibration 11 16 Temperature Drift with Full Two Port Calibration 11 17 System performance with Different T
112. VALUE FIXED AMKR AUX VALUE RETURN Only for network analyzer Figure 7 3 Delta Mode Menu AMARKER AMKR ON Puts the delta maker on the current position of the marker FIXED AMKR DMKR FIX Sets a user specified fixed reference marker The sweep parameter and amplitude values can be set arbitrarily and can be anywhere in the display area Unlike other markers the fixed Amarker need not be on the trace The fixed Amarker is indicated by a small triangle A and the marker sweep parameter and measurement values are shown relative to this point The notation AMkr is displayed at the top right corner of the graticule TRACKING AMARKER TRACKING AMKR DMKR TRAC Puts a Amarker at the present active marker position and turns on the tracking Amarker The tracking Amarker tracks the marker when the marker moves In other words the tracking Amarker can be moved using the knob or a marker search function such as SEARCH PEAK AMODE OFF DMKR OFF Turns off the delta marker mode Therefore the values displayed for the marker and sub marker are now absolute values Marker Block 7 5 FIXED AMARKER 7 6 Marker Block AMKR SWP PARAM DMKRPRM Changes the sweep parameter value of the fixed Amarker Fixed Amarker sweep parameter values can be different for the two channels if the channel markers are uncoupled FIXEDAMKR VALUE DMKRVAL Changes the amplitude value of the fixed Amarker In a
113. Yes No DISK Menu RETURN SL STOR DEV L Lefter Menu DISK 2 CB008004 Figure S 18 Save Menu Changes 2 Page 8 88 Change the following description GRAPHICS SAVDTIFF Specifies the file format for saving the screen currently displayed as the TIFF format The traces and background are saved in specified colors Softkeys are also saved A 4 Manual Changes Miscellaneous Changes The option system of the 4396B has changed since May 2003 Apply the following changes New Option Number Old Option Number Remark 706 No Time Gated Spectrum Analysis Standard 1 106 Time Gated Spectrum Analysis same as the left one 800 Standard Frequency Reference Standard 2 105 High Stability Frequency Reference same as the left one 810 Add Keyboard 3 1A2 Delete Keyboard 010 Impedance Measurement Function same as the left one 1D7 50 75 ohm Minimum Loss Pad same as the left one 1CM Rack Mount Kit same as the left one 1CN Handle Kit same as the left one 1CP Rackmount and Handle Kit same as the left one ABA U S English localization 4 ABA U S English localization ABJ Japan Japanese localization 4 ABJ Japan Japanese localization OBW Add Service Manual same as the left number L OBO Delete Operation Manual 5 1 Add Operation Manual 1 In the previous sy
114. a readout of the data in terms of impedance The intersecting lines on the Smith chart represent constant resistance and constant reactance values normalized to the characteristic impedance Zo of the system Reactance values in the upper half of the Smith chart circle are positive inductive reactance and in the lower half of the circle are negative capacitive reactance Polar Chart Each point on the polar format corresponds to a particular value of both magnitude and phase Quantities are read vectorally the magnitude at any point is determined by its displacement from the center which has zero value and the phase by the angle counterclockwise from the positive x axis Magnitude is scaled in a linear fashion with the value of the outer circle usually set to a ratio value of 1 Because there is no frequency axis frequency information is read from the markers Electrical Delay The electrical delay function simulates a variable length lossless transmission line that can be added to or removed from a receiver input to compensate for interconnecting cables etc This function is similar to the mechanical or analog line stretchers of other network analyzers Delay is annotated in units of time with secondary labeling in distance for the current velocity factor An equivalent length of air is added or subtracted according to the following formula Y Frequency MHz x 1 20083 Once the linear portion of the DUT s phase has be
115. acts as the master and can regain active control at any time The analyzer is an active controller when it plots or prints in the addressable mode The analyzer is a system controller when it is in the system controller mode 12 34 Analyzer Features GPIB Requirements Number of Interconnected Devices 15 maximum Interconnection Path Maximum Cable 20 meters maximum or 2 meters per device whichever Length is less Message Transfer Scheme Byte serial bit parallel asynchronous data transfer using a 3 line handshake system Data Rate Maximum of 1 megabyte per second over limited distances with tri state drivers Actual data rate depends on the transfer rate of the slowest device involved Address Capability Primary addresses 31 talk 31 listen A maximum of 1 active talker and 14 active listeners at one time Multiple Controller Capability In systems with more than one controller like the analyzer system only one can be active at any given time The active controller can pass control to another controller but only one system controller is allowed Analyzer GPIB Capabilities As defined by the IEEE 488 1 standard the analyzer has the following capabilities SH1 AH1 T6 TEO L4 LEO SRI RLI PPO DC1 DTI C1 C2 C3 C4 Cll E2 Full source handshake Full acceptor handshake Basic talker answers serial poll unadresses if MLA is issued No talk only mode Does not have extended address of talker
116. between 0 and 5 inches in step of 0 1 inch DEFAULT SETUP DFLT Resets the printing parameters to the following default settings e Printing resolution 75 dpi e Form feed ON e Sheet orientation Portraint e Softkey label printing OFF e Top margin 1 0 inch e Left margin 1 0 inch Copy Cal Kit Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer STANDARD LIST CLASS LIST MORE KIT CAL DEFINITION STANDARD DEFINITION STD NO1 STD NO 2 STD NO 3 STD NO 4 STD NO 5 STD NO 6 STD NO 7 STD NO 8 ASSIGNMENT id RETURN d Figure 8 13 Copy Cal Kit Menu STANDARD DEFINITION CALS 1 7 Displays the menu that selects which standard settings are to be hard copied STD STD STD STD STD STD STD STD NO NO NO NO NO NO NO 7 0 8 These softkeys provide the tabular listing of the standard definitions of the standard number 1 to 8 and provide the screen menu to prepare for hard copy CLASS ASSIGNMENT CALCASSI Shows the tabular listing of the cal kit class assignment and provides the screen menu to prepare for hard copy Instrument State Block 8 27 Copy Limit Test Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer Copy LIST Menu LIMIT TEST DISP MODE TABLE 7 UPR amp LWH MID amp DLT RETURN Figure 8 14 Copy Limit Test Menu DISPLAY LIST DISLLIST Displa
117. cal kit is a 7 mm or 3 5 mm cal kit SHORT measures the short standard and then SHORT is underlined Or SHORT displays the short standard menu that selects a short standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 0 or 75 0 type N LOAD CLASS22C When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3 5 mm cal kit LOAD measures the load standard and then LOAD is underlined Or LOAD displays the load standard menu that selects a load standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 Q or 75 type N DONE 1 PORT CAL SAV1 Completes the 1 port calibration The error coefficients are computed and stored The correction menu is displayed with CORRECTION ON If this key is pressed without measuring all the required standards the message CAUTION ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED is displayed Measurement Block 5 47 Full 2 Port Cal Menu Network Analyzer REFLECTION CAL 5 48 Measurement Block Cal REFLECTING Gu AN Open Slandard x CALIBATION MENU SHORT s a LOAD Short Standard 2 PORT gt Bel Menu SHORT Load Standard LOAD Menu REFLECTN DONE TRANS MISSION Y FWD TRANS Thru Standard xx THRU Menu FWD MATCH THR
118. calibration exists the message CALIBRATION REQUIRED is displayed It is recommended that calibration data be saved on the built in disk using the capabilities described in Save y in Chapter 8 CALIBRATE MENU Displays the menu that provides several accuracy enhancement procedures ranging from a simple frequency response calibration to a full two port calibration At the completion of a calibration procedure correction is automatically turned on and the notation Cor or C2 is displayed at the left of the screen CALIBRATE NONE CALI NONE This softkey is underlined if no calibration has been performed or if the calibration data has been cleared Unless a calibration is saved on the internal disk the calibration data is lost when Preset is pressed power is cycled on and off or if an instrument state is recalled RESPONSE RESPONSE AND ISOLATION 1 PORT CAL RESPONSE CALI RESP Displays the frequency response calibration This is the simplest and fastest accuracy enhancement procedure However it should only be used when extreme accuracy is not required It effectively removes the frequency response errors of the test setup for reflection or transmission measurements For transmission only measurements or reflection only measurements only a single calibration standard is required with this procedure The standard for transmission measurements is a THRU standard and for reflection measureme
119. data is saved C 10 Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data File Structure for Single Channel and Dual Channel If you save an ASCII file when DUAL CHANNEL is turned OFF the ASCII data file consists of the active channel s data If DUAL CHANNEL is turned ON the ASCII data file consists of the data of both channels 1 and 2 The channel 2 data follows the channel 1 data as follows File Structures for Single and Dual Channels Dual Channel OFF Dual Channel ON Status Block Status Block Data Block Data Block of of Active Channel Channel 1 end of file Status Block Data Block of Channel 2 Data Array Names for the Spectrum Analyzer Data array names are used in the title line of the data block Each data array of the spectrum analyzer has one name Table C 4 lists all names Table C 4 Data Groups and Data Array Names for Spectrum Analyzer Data Groups Data Array Names Descriptions Raw Data Raw Raw data array Data Data Corrected Data arrays Memory Memory Corrected Memory arrays Data Trace Data Trace Data Trace arrays Memory Trace Memory Trace Memory Trace arrays Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data C 11 Data Array Names for the Network Analyzer Data array names are used in the title line of the data block Each real and imaginary part of the internal data array of the network analyzer has one name Table C 5 lists all names
120. delay to balance the phase of the DUT This effectively flattens the phase trace around the marker and can measure electrical length or deviation from linear phase Additional electrical delay adjustment is required for DUTs without constant group delay over the measured frequency span Because this feature adds phase to a variation in phase versus frequency it is applicable only for ratioed input ELECTRICAL DELAY ELED Adjusts the electrical delay to balance the phase shift of the DUT PHASE OFFSET PHAO Adds or subtracts a phase offset that is constant with frequency rather than linear This is independent of MARKER DELAY and ELECTRICAL DELAY Scale reference menu Spectrum Analyzer AUTO ATTENUATOR REFERENCE Scale Ref ATTEN AUTO man ATTEN SCALE DIV REFERENCE VALUE MKR REFERENCE SCALE FOR DATA D amp M SCALE COUPLE MAX MIXER LEVEL Figure 5 17 Scale Reference Menu for Spectrum Analyzer ATTEN AUTO man ATTAUTO ON OFF Toggles the spectrum analyzer s input attenuator at input S between automatic and manual When the automatic attenuator is selected the value selected ensures that the level meets the following equation Attnuator value dB Reference value Max mixer level ATTEN ATT Changes the input attenuation when input S is selected Because the attenuators at inputs R A and B are fixed if either R A or B is selected you can enter the value but not c
121. distinguish the true value of the signal reflected by the DUT from the signal arriving at the receiver input due to leakage in the system For both transmission and reflection measurements impedance mismatches within the test setup cause measurement uncertainties that appear as ripples superimposed on the measured data Measurement calibration simulates a perfect analyzer system It measures the magnitude and phase responses of known standard devices and compares the measurement with actual device data It uses the results to characterize the system and effectively remove the system errors from the measurement data of a test device using vector math capabilities internal to the analyzer When measurement calibration is used the dynamic range and accuracy of the measurement are limited only by system noise and stability connector repeatability and the accuracy to which the characteristics of the calibration standards are known 12 38 Analyzer Features Sources of Measurement Errors Network analysis measurement errors can be separated into systematic random and drift errors Correctable systematic errors are the repeatable errors that the system can measure These are errors due to mismatch and leakage in the test setup isolation between the reference and test signal paths and system frequency response The system cannot measure and correct for the non repeatable random and drift errors These errors affect both reflection and transmi
122. m OPEN OPENS assigned a terminal impedance of infinite ohms but delay and loss offsets may still be added For information of the delay and loss offsets see the Offset and Delay paragraph As a reflection standard an OPEN offers the advantage of broadband frequency coverage However an OPEN rarely has perfect reflection characteristics because fringing capacitance effects cause phase shift that varies with frequency This can be observed in measuring an OPEN termination after calibration when an arc in the lower right circumference of the Smith chart indicates capacitive reactance These effects are impossible to eliminate but the calibration kit models include the OPEN termination capacitance at all frequencies for compatible calibration kits The capacitance model is a second order polynomial squared term as a function of frequency where the polynomial coefficients are user definable The capacitance model equation is CG F x where is the measurement frequency m SHORT SHORT are assigned a terminal impedance of 0 Q but delay and loss offsets may still be added m LOAD LOADS are assigned a terminal impedance equal to the system characteristic impedance Zo but delay and loss offsets may still be added If the LOAD impedance is not Zo use the arbitrary impedance standard definition m DELAY THRU DELAY THRUS are assigned a transmission line of specified length for calibrating transmission mea
123. message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specific error 161 Invalid block data A block data element was expected but was invalid for some reason see IEEE 488 2 7 7 6 2 For example an END message was received before the length was satisfied 168 Block data not allowed A legal block data element was encountered but was not allowed by the analyzer at this point in parsing Messages 21 200 Execution error This is the generic syntax error that the analyzer cannot detect more specific errors This code indicates only that an execution error as defined in IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 5 has occurred 210 Trigger error A trigger related error occurred This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 211 through 219 211 Trigger ignored A GET TRG or triggering signal was received and recognized by the analyzer but was ignored because of analyzer timing considerations For example the analyzer was not ready to respond 213 Init ignored A request for a measurement initiation was ignored as another measurement was already in progress 220 Parameter error Indicates that a program data element related error occurred This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 221 through 229 221 Settings conflict A legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed du
124. message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specific error 138 Suffix not allowed A suffix was encountered after a numeric element that does not allow suffixes Messages 11 134 Suffix too long The suffix contained more than 12 characters see IEEE 488 2 7 7 3 4 102 Syntax error An unrecognized command or data type was encountered For example a string was received when the analyzer was not expecting to receive a string 310 System error Some error termed system error by the analyzer has occurred 124 Too many digits The mantissa of a decimal numeric data element contains more than 255 digits excluding leading zeros see IEEE 488 2 7 7 2 4 1 7 TOO MANY SEGMENTS OR POINTS Frequency list mode is limited to 31 segments or 801 points 64 TOO MANY SEGMENTS The maximum number of segments for the limit line table is 18 See Chapter 8 of the 4396B Tusk Reference 223 Too much data legal program data element of block expression or string type was received that contained more data than the analyzer could handle due to memory or related device specific requirements 54 TOO MUCH DATA Either there is too much binary data to send to the analyzer when the data transfer format is FORM 2 FORM 3 or FORM 5 or the amount of data is greater than the number of points 78 TOO SMALL POINTS OR TOO LARGE STOP STOP SPAN NOP 1 is out of sweep range Increase or change STOP va
125. of the DUT or test signal source When a full two port calibration is in use in the network analyzer mode MEASURE RESTART initiates an update of both the forward and reverse S parameter data If the analyzer is measuring a number of groups the sweep counter is reset to 1 If averaging is oN MEASURE RESTART resets the sweep to sweep averaging and is effectively the same as AVERAGING RESTART If the sweep trigger is in the HOLD mode MEASURE RESTART executes a single sweep If DUAL CHAN is on screen displays both measurement channels MEASURE RESTART executes a single sweep of both channels even if COUPLED CH is OFF Gan E San Gop STAR STOP These keys define the start value and the stop value of the frequency range or power range of the sweep parameter When one of these keys is pressed its function becomes the active function The value is displayed in the active entry area and can be changed with the knob step keys or numeric keypad Current sweep parameter values for the active channel are also displayed along the bottom of the graticule In power sweep the sweep parameter value is in dBm The range can be expressed as either start stop or center span Sweep Block 6 21 CENT When this key is pressed CENTER becomes the active function and the following menu is displayed Center menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer STEP SIZE AUTO man CENTER STEP SIZE MKR gt CNIR STEP
126. of this wave can be re reflected to port 2 or part can be transmitted through the device in the reverse direction to appear at port 1 If the DUT has low insertion loss for example a transmission line the signal reflected from port 2 and re reflected from the source causes a significant error because the DUT does not attenuate the signal significantly on each reflection Load match is usually given in terms of return loss in dB therefore the larger the number the smaller the error Port 1 Port 2 Reflected Incident Transmitted 05012038 Figure 12 25 Load Match The error contributed by load match depends on the relationship between the actual output impedance of the test device and the effective match of the return port port 2 It is a factor in all transmission measurements and in reflection measurements of two port devices Load match and source match are usually ignored when the test device insertion loss is greater than about 6 dB This happens because the error signal is greatly attenuated each time it passes through the DUT However load match effects produce major transmission measurement errors for a test device with a highly reflective output port Isolation Crosstalk Leakage of energy between analyzer signal paths contributes to error in a transmission measurement much as directivity does in a reflection measurement Isolation is the vector sum of signals appearing at the analyzer receivers due to crosstalk betwe
127. softkey labels by switching ON OFF COPY TIME on OFF COPT ON OFF Turns the time stamp on or off for a print When you select print the time and date are printed out first followed by the information shown on the display PRINT SETUP Displays the print setup menu This menu allows you to copy the display to a printer capable of graphics or tabular listing For information on compatible printers see Chapter 9 ORIENT PORTRAIT LANDSCAPE ON OFF Specifies the orientation of printer sheets If your printer does not support landscape printing this setting is ignored PORTRALT Portrait orientation LANDSCAPE Landscape orientation FORM FEED ON off FORMFEED ON OFF Specifies whether to deliver a sheet after one screen is printed out by switching on orr When the sheet orientation is specified to LANDSCAPE the FORMFEED setting is ignored and sheets are always ejected after each screen printout LIST VALUES LISV LISTING Displays the screen menu This softkey provides a tabular listing of all the measured data points and their current values When DUAL CHAN and COUPLED CHAN are ON the measured values of both channels are listed at same time When LIMIT LINE and LIMIT TEST are ON the limit information is also listed together with the measured values At the same time the screen menu is displayed to enable hard copy listings and access new pages of the table Table 8 1 shows data liste
128. specified segment If the table is empty a default segment is displayed DELETE LIMSDEL Deletes the segment indicated by the pointer ADD LIMSADD Displays the edit segment menu and adds a new segment to the end of the list The new segment is initially a duplicate of the segment indicated by the pointer gt and selected using SEGMENT If the table is empty a default segment is displayed The maximum number of segments is 18 CLEAR LIST TABLE LIMIT LINE OFFSET Note uy Gen CLEAR LIST LIMCLEL Displays the following softkeys and clears all the segments in the limit test CLEAR LIST YES clears all the segments in the limit line and returns to the previous menu NO cancels clearing the segment and returns to the edit limit menu DONE LIMEDONE Sorts the limit segments and displays them on the display in increasing order of sweep parameter values LIMIT LINE OFFSETS Displays the following three softkeys that offset the complete limit set in either sweep parameter or amplitude value SWP PARAM OFFSET LIMIPRMO Adds to or subtracts an offset from the sweep parameter value This allows limits already defined to be used for testing in a different sweep parameter range AMPLITUDE OFFSET LIMIAMPO Adds or subtracts an offset in amplitude value This allows previously defined limits to be used at a different power level MKR AMP OFS MKRAMPO Move the limits so that they are center
129. storage error occurred This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 257 256 File name not found A legal program command could not be executed because the file name on the device media was not found for example an attempt was made to read or copy a nonexistent file 257 File name error Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because the file name on the device media was in error For example an attempt was made to copy to a duplicate file name The definition of what constitutes a file name error is device specific 280 Program error Indicates that a downloaded program related execution error occurred This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 281 through 289 281 Cannot create program Indicates that an attempt to create a program was unsuccessful A reason for the failure might include not enough memory 282 Illegal program name The name used to reference a program was invalid For example redefining an existing program deleting a nonexistent program or in general referencing a nonexistent program 283 Illegal variable name An attempt was made to reference a nonexistent variable in a program 284 Program currently running Certain operations dealing with programs may be illegal while the program is running For example deleting a runnin
130. sub marker 7 8 CLEAR SUB SMKR 1 7 OFF 7 3 clock 8 4 8 9 close field probe 9 2 coefficient 12 43 COLOR COLOR 5 24 color adjust 5 21 color intensity 5 21 color monitor 2 10 color print 8 25 color printer 8 21 COMMAND ENTRY 8 7 command entry 8 7 connectors 2 9 Continue 8 5 CONTINUOUS CONT 6 19 continuous 7 4 continuous mode 12 29 controller 12 34 control program 8 5 CONVERSION 5 6 CONVERSION OFF 5 5 conversion 12 6 conversion function 12 11 Copy 1 8 8 21 8 30 copy abort 8 21 8 30 COPY FILE FILC 8 34 copy file 8 34 COPY SKEY on OFF PRSOFT ON OFF 8 21 COPY TIME on OFF COPT ON OFF 8 22 8 30 Cor 2 8 correction on off 5 36 COUPLED CH ON off COUC ONIOFF 6 4 coupling 12 20 coupling 10 13 coupling channels 3 1 Cpl 2 6 CREATE DIRECTORY CRED 8 34 cross channel 7 11 cross channel ONXch 2 6 CROSS CHAN on OFF CRSC ON OFF 7 11 crosstalk 10 2 10 13 12 39 12 41 Index 3 ert 2 4 10 20 CTR amp SPAN DISMPRM CTSP 8 29 CW FREQ CWFREQ 6 15 cw frequency 2 7 D D 11 7 data 5 17 data arrays 12 5 12 9 C 2 DATA HOLD DHOLD OFF MAXIMIN 5 18 data hold 12 6 12 9 data math 5 18 DATA MATH MATH DATA DMNM DPLM DDVM 5 18 data math 10 20 12 6 12 9 data math gain ON Gx 2 8 data math offset ON 0 2 8 data math ON D
131. the left side of the display trigger a new sweep by pressing SINGLE SINGLE SING Makes one sweep of data and returns to the hold mode NUMBER of GROUPS NUMG Triggers a user specified number of sweeps and returns to the hold mode If averaging is oN set the number of groups at least equal to the averaging factor selected to allow measurement of a fully averaged TRIGGER SOURCE GATE TRIGGER Note uy Trigger trace Entering the number of groups resets the averaging counter to 1 CONTINUOUS CONT Triggers the sweep automatically and continuously the trace is updated with each sweep This is the standard sweep mode TRIGGER FREE RUN TRGS INT EXT VID MAN GAT Displays the menu used to select the trigger source The trigger source is common to both channels FREE RUN selects the internal trigger EXTERNAL selects the external trigger input from the BNC on the rear panel VIDEO Selects the video trigger only for zero span mode in the spectrum analyzer mode In other condition the analyzer selects the internal trigger MANUAL Selects the manual trigger GATEL 1 Selects the external gate trigger and displays the softkeys used to specify the gate control mode only for the spectrum analyzer mode In zero span or the network analyzer mode the analyzer selects the internal trigger For more information on gate trigger see Gated Sweep in Chapter 12 Option 1D6 only The BUS trigger source ca
132. the test setup transmission return port is never exactly the characteristic impedance some of the transmitted signal is reflected from the test set port 2 and from other mismatches between the test device output and the receiver input to return to the test device A portion of this signal may be re reflected at port 2 thus affecting or part may be transmitted through the device in the reverse direction to appear at port 1 thus affecting S m This error term which causes the magnitude and phase of the transmitted signal to vary as a function of S554 is called load match Figure 12 38 12 52 Analyzer Features SOURCE MATCH Figure 12 38 Load Match The measured value S2im consists of signal components that vary as a function of the relationship between Esp and S114 as well as ELF and S224 so the input and output reflection coefficients of the test device must be measured and stored for use in the S214 error correction computation Thus the test setup is calibrated as described above for the reflection to establish the directivity source match Esp and reflection frequency response Epp terms for the reflection measurements Now that a calibrated port is available for reflection measurements the THRU is connected and load match Err is determined by measuring the reflection coefficient of the THRU connection Transmission signal path frequency response is then measured with the THRU connected T
133. thru 6 Arrived at by bending 11857D cables out perpendicular to front panel and reconnecting Stability is much better with less flexing 7 Arrived at using 11857D cables and full 2 port calibration Drift is much better without calbes and with 1 port calibration For this case drift typically is 0 1 0 05 xf GHz x A C degrees System Performance 11 23 Table 11 7 Typical System Performance for Devices with 75 0 Type N Connectors 4396B with 87512B Test Set 100 kHz to 1 8 GHz Typical Residual after Accuracy Enhancement 2 Symbol Error Terms One Port D Directivity 40 dB 0 01 Ms Source Match 25 dB 0 056 Ty Reflection Tracking 0 83 dB 0 1 M Load Match Tt Trans Tracking _ C Cross Talk 104 dB 6 8 1079 Ra Port1 Connector 65 dB 5 6x107 Repeatability Ra Port1 Trans Connector 65 dB 5 6x107 Repeatability Ri2 Port2 Refl Connector 65 dB 5 6x107 Repeatability Riz Port2 Trans Connector 65 dB 5 6x107 Repeatability N Low Level Noise 2 94 dB from full scale 2 0x10 5 Ny High Level Noise 23 0 003 dB 3 5x107 Am Ap Dynamic Accuracy Error See Dynamic Accuracy in Chapter 10 Um Up Multiplexer Switching Magnitude 0 017 dB 2x10 Phase 0 1 degrees Uncertainty 5 Port1 Cable Trans 0 05 xf GHz degrees Phase Stability4 Sa Port1 Cable 70 dB 3 2 10
134. to learn how to use the analyzer This manual provides simple step by step instructions without concepts Function Reference Agilent Part Number 04396 900x2 1 The Function Reference describes all function accessed from the front panel keys and softkeys It also provides information on options and accessories available specifications system performance and some topics about the analyzer s features Programming Guide Agilent Part Number 04396 900x3 1 The Programming Guide shows how to write and use BASIC program to control the analyzer and describes how Instrument BASIC works with the analyzer GPIB Command Reference Agilent Part Number 04396 900x4 1 The GPIB Command Reference provides a summary of all available GPIB commands It also provides information on the status reporting structure and the trigger system these features conform to the SCPI standard Option 010 Operating Handbook Agilent Part Number 04396 900x6 1 The option 010 Operation Handbook describes the unique impedance measurement functions of the 4396B with option 010 Instrument BASIC Manual Set Agilent Part Number 04155 90151 E2083 90000 The Instrument BASIC User s Handbook introduces you to the Instrument BASIC programming language provide some helpful hints on getting the most use from it and provide a general programming reference It is divided into three books Instrument BASIC Programming Techniques Instrument BASIC Interface Techniques and Instru
135. to perform a high accuracy two port calibration without an S parameter test set This calibration procedure effectively reduces directivity source match load match isolation reflection tracking and transmission tracking errors in one direction only Isolation correction can be omitted for measurements of devices with limited dynamic range The DUT must be manually reversed between sweeps to accomplish measurement of both input and output responses The required standards are a SHORT an OPEN a THRU and an impedance matched LOAD The procedure for performing a one path 2 port calibration is described in the 4396B Task Reference RESUME CAL SEQUENCE RESC Eliminates the need to restart a calibration sequence that was interrupted to access some other menu Goes back to the point where the calibration sequence was interrupted CAL KIT Ymm Displays the menu that selects one of the default calibration kits available for different connector types This in turn displays additional softkeys used to define calibration standards other than those in the default kits see Modifying Calibration Kits in Chapter 12 When a calibration kit has been specified its connector type is displayed in brackets in the softkey label CAL KIT mm CALK APCT Selects the 7 mm cal kit model 3 5mm CALK APC35 Selects the 3 5 mm cal kit model N 50 ohm CALK N50 Selects the 50 Q type N model Note When using the 85032B select USER KIT
136. to the current maker value Displays menus used for searching the trace for a specific amplitude related point and placing the marker on that point Displays a menu used for listing all marker values calculating and displaying statistics values of the display trace and indicating the time elapsed since the sweep started For more information see Chapter 7 INSTRUMENT STATE Block This block provides control of channel independent system functions These include the controller modes real time clock limit line and limit testing Instrument BASIC printing saving instrument states and trace data to a built in disk or memory Provides access to a series of menus used for programming Instrument BASIC controlling the real time clock and the beeper defining the limit line table and performing limit line testing Introduction 1 3 14 Introduction Returns front panel control to the user from an external controller and displays a series of menus used to select the GPIB mode and modify the GPIB addresses Sets the analyzer to the preset state See Appendix D for a listing of the preset values Copy Provides access to the menus used for controlling external printers and defining the print parameters Save Provides access to the menus used for saving the instrument state and data to the flexible disk or RAM disk memory Displays the menu used to recall the contents of disk files or memory back into the analyzer For m
137. value The search functions ignore a peak when the amplitude value is less than the threshold even if the peak polarity is set to negative 5012044 Figure 12 20 Peak Definition for Network Analyzer 12 32 Analyzer Features Peak Definition for Spectrum Analyzer The following parameters are used in the peak definition for the spectrum measurement m AY difference of amplitude between a peak and an adjacent local minimum point m Threshold value The search functions search for a peak where the parameters of the peak match the following conditions AY lt min max Ayr Ayr Where Ayr Ayr are the difference in amplitude value between a peak and the adjacent local minimum point is the difference between a peak and the threshold value That is the search functions search for a peak where the difference of amplitude between the peak and the smaller of the adjacent local minimum points is greater than AY and the difference between the peak and the threshold is greater than AY The peak polarity is always positive for the spectrum analyzer peak search functions Peak Peak ve AY Not Peak Threshold lay Threshold Level Level Example Adjacent Local Minimum Points 5012045 Figure 12 21 Peak Definition for Spectrum Analyzer Analyzer Features 12 33 GPIB The analyzer is factory equipped with a remote programming digital interface using the
138. video bandwidth can be selected to be RBW 1 RBW 3 RBW 10 RBW 100 or RBW 300 Filter Level Correction This correction removes the error caused by the passband ripple of the crystal filter IF filter Video Trigger If SPAN is set to ZERO the video trigger is available This triggers the measurement when the amplitude of signal measured is over the threshold value DC Offset Correction This cancels the de offset generated in the phase detector and sample hold block of the analog circuit IF Range Adjustment This adjustment corrects the value to what it was before being ranged by the IF blo ck Peak Detector This detects the peak value of the displayed points Three detection modes are pro vided the positive negative and sample mode See Detection Mede for information on detection techniques Attenuator and IF Range Adjustment This adjustment corrects the value to what it was before being attenuated and rang ed Averaging This is the same as Averaging in the data processing flow for the network measurem ent Frequency Characteristics Level Correction This process digitally corrects for frequency response errors in the analog down co nversion path Raw Data Arrays These arrays store the results of all the data produced by the peak detector These arrays are directly accessible via GPIB or by using the internal disk drive or the RAM disk memory User Level Correction This correction cancels the offset error level
139. 0 2 3 2 10 2 3 2 10 2 3 2 10 Source Match 16 dB 16 dB 16 dB 40 dB 40 dB 0 16 0 16 0 16 0 01 0 01 Reflection Tracking 1 8 dB 1 5 dB 1 3 dB 0 05 dB 0 05 dB 0 23 0 19 0 16 5 8x 1073 5 8x 107 Load Match 16 dB 16 dB 16 dB 42 dB 0 16 0 16 0 16 7 9 10 Ti Trans Tracking 1 8 0 2 dB 0 2 dB _ 0 03 dB 0 23 0 023 0 023 3 5 10 C Cross Talk 100 dB 100 dB 110 dB 110 dB 110 dB 1 0 1075 1 0 10 9 3 2 10 6 3 2 10 9 3 2 10 6 Ry Port1 Connector 70 dB 3 2 10 Repeatability Rei Port1 Trans Connector 70 dB 3 2 10 Repeatability Port2 Connector 70 dB 3 2 10 Repeatability Riz Port2 Trans Connector 70 dB 3 2 10 Repeatability N Low Level Noise 2 110 dB from full scale 3 2x 107 Ny High Level Noise 2 4 Magnitude 0 003 dB 3 5x10 Am Ap Dynamic Accuracy Error See Dynamic Accuracy in Chapter 10 Um Up Multiplexer Switching Magnitude 0 0025 dB 2 9 x10 Phase 0 015 degrees Uncertainty Su Port1 Cable Trans 0 05 x f GHz degrees Phase Stability Sa Port1 Cable 70 dB 3 2 10 Stability Sio Port2 Cable Trans 0 05 x f GHz degrees Phase Stability So Port2 Cable Refl 70 dB 3 2 10 Stability Tha Trans Tracking Drift Magnitude 0 01 dB C 1 1x107 C 0 1 0 15xf GHz degrees C Tra Refl Tracking Drift Ma
140. 0dB Segment 3 2 HOdB Segment 4 15dB 1 MHz 2 MHz 3 MHz 4 5 MHz START Stimulus Break Points STOP frequency of Limit Lines frequency 05012042 Figure 12 14 The Concept of Segments as a Point between Two Sets of Limit Lines As you can see in Figure 12 14 segments are distinct points that define where limit lines begin or end Limit lines span the distance between segments and represent the upper and lower test limits Figure 12 14 shows another important aspect of limit lines The far left hand side of a set of limit lines will continue from the minimum sweep parameter value START and the far Analyzer Features 12 21 right hand side of a set of limit lines will continue until the maximum sweep parameter value STOP A segment is placed at a specific sweep parameter value a single frequency for example The first segment defines the limit line value from the minimum sweep parameter value Once its sweep parameter value is entered the upper and lower test limit 5 dB and 5 dB for example need to be supplied Defining a second segment defines where the first set of limit lines ends This process is repeated to create different sets of limit lines each having new upper and lower limits Up to 18 segments can be entered Limits can be defined independently for the two channels The example in Figure 12 14 shows a combination of limit lines that change instantly and gradually Segme
141. 1 Where Z is Z accuracy L Accuracy Depends on D Accuracy D lt 0 2 0 2 lt D La La 100 Lal D Where L CB Zi C x Zi x 100 Z 2zf x Lm f is frequency in Hz and Lm is measured L A B and C are obtained from Figure 10 9 C Accuracy Depends on D Accuracy D lt 0 2 0 2 lt D Ca Ca Call D Where Ca A CB Z C x 24 x 100 Z 2 x Cm f is frequency in Hz and Cm is measured C A B and are obtained from Figure 10 9 Specifications 10 19 Common to Network and Spectrum Measurement Display LCD Size Type 8 4 inch color LCD Resolution 640 x 480 Effective Display Area 160 mm x 115 mm 600 x 430 dots Number of display channels ss sss ee 2 Format single dual split or overwrite graphic and tabular Number of traces For 2 4 2 24 4 2 traces For memory 2 2 4 24 4 4 22 222 2 2 traces Data math gain x data offset gain x memory offset gain x data memory offset gain x d
142. 10 14 level cal 5 62 level calibration 12 18 level mode 12 25 lif logical inter change format C 1 limit line 8 12 limit line concept 12 21 limit line offset 8 14 LIMIT LINE OFFSETS 8 14 LIMIT LINE on OFF LIMILINE ON OFF 8 12 LIMIT MENU 8 4 limit table 8 24 limit testing 8 4 8 12 LIMIT TEST on OFF LIMITEST ONJOFF 8 12 LIMIT TEST TABLE 8 24 linear magnitude 5 14 linear phase shift 12 13 linear sweep 6 4 6 7 line switch 2 4 LIN MAG FMT LINM 5 14 LIN MAG PHASE CIRF LIN 7 27 LIST 8 7 LIST DONE EDITDONE 6 5 6 8 listener 12 34 LIST FREQ SWPT LIST 6 8 listing 8 22 Index 7 list sweep 6 4 6 8 LIST SWEEP TABLE 8 24 list table 6 4 6 8 list table 8 29 LIST VALUES LISV 8 22 load 5 60 12 44 LOAD CLASS11C 5 45 5 48 5 50 LOAD CLASS22C 5 46 5 48 LOAD STDT LOAD 5 60 load match 12 39 12 41 12 52 load match Erf 12 53 load match Erg 12 53 load match error 12 52 1 8 local oscillator feedthrough 10 11 log magnitude 5 13 LOG MAG PHASE CIRF LOG 7 27 log sweep 6 4 loss 12 30 LOWER LIMIT LIML 8 15 lower limit 8 15 LVL CAL DATA LVCDT 5 62 M magnitude characteristics 10 3 magnitude dynamic accuracy 11 7 magnitude multiplexer switching uncertainty 11 7 male 5 43 Man 2 8 MANUAL TRGS MAN 6 19 manual changes A 1 marker 12 29 Marker 1 3 marker block 1 3 marke
143. 1B 7 mm calibration kit 85033C 3 5 mm calibration kit 85032B 50 Q type N calibration kit 85036B 75 Q type N calibration kit Cal kits other than those listed can be used For the highest accuracy the more closely the model matches the device the better In addition to the four predefined cal kits a fourth choice is a user kit that is defined or modified by the user This is described under Modifying Calibration Differences between PORT EXTENSIONS and ELECTRICAL DELAY PORT EXTENSIONS The end of a cable becomes the test port plane for all S parameter measurements Main Effect ELECTRICAL DELAY Compensates for the total electrical length of cables for the current type of measurement only m Reflection 2 times cable s electrical length a Transmission 1 times cable s electrical length PORT EXTENSIONS All S parameters Measurements Affected ELECTRICAL DELAY Only the currently selected measurement parameter PORT EXTENSIONS times the cable s electrical delay depending on which S parameter is Electrical Compensation ELECTRICAL DELAY Intelligently compensates for 1 times or 2 Only compensates as necessary for the currently selected measurement parameter computed Purpose and Use of Different Calibration Procedures Calibration Corresponding Errors Reduced Standard Procedure Measurement Devices Response Transmission or reflect
144. 2 512 522 522 Noise floor N High level noise Connector reflection repeatability Ra Ryo Connector transmission repeatability Ra Ria Magnitude drift due to temperature Tia mag Phase drift due to temperature Ti a phase Cable reflection stability Su Sr2 Cable transmission phase stability Su Switch Tracking Tsw Switch Port Match Msw Magnitude Combine Systematic Errors In the space provided enter the appropriate linear values from the list of errors Then combine these errors to obtain the total sum of systematic errors C Tsw T x S21 0 Msw Sa Ms x511 XS21 x x m Msw Sra Mi x821 x82 n Ar Um Subtotal k 1 m n O S Combine Random Errors In the space provided enter the appropriate linear values from the list of errors Then combine these errors in an RSS fashion to obtain a total sum of the random errors N 3x w S21 x x Rea XS21 Ra x811 x82 y X821 Ryo xS22 XS21 z x 22 x x x x R S R Vi Total Magnitude Errors linear Vi Tia mag x S21 x Etm log 20 Log 1 Etm S21 20 Log 1 Etp Arcsin V Am Um x Arcsin y 521 821 Sti Sta t deg Ap Up
145. 201 NA Coupled channel On Off On On NA Sweep type Lin Freq Log Freq List Freq Power Lin Freq Lin Freq NA Frequency list Empty Empty NA List edit mode Start stop Center Span Start stop Start stop sweep range NA List edit mode NOP Step size NOP NOP resolution SA Sweep time mode Auto Man Auto Auto SA NOP for zero 2 to 801 801 801 span SA Frequency offset 8 GHz with 1 mHz resolution 0 0 SA Sweep type Lin Freq Log Freq List Freq Lin Freq Lin Freq SA Frequency list Empty Empty SA List edit mode Start stop Center Span Start stop Start stop 1 NOP is automatically set and can not be changed by user except for ZERO SPAN Source Function Range Preset Value Power ON default NA Power 70 to 20 dBm with 0 1 dB resolution 0 dBm 0 dBm NA Slope 0 to 2 dB GHz with 0 001 dB GHz resolution 0 0 NA Slope On Off Off Off NA Attenuator port 1 Depends on test set used 0 0 NA Attenuator port 2 Depends on test set used 0 0 NA CW frequency 100 kHz to 1 82 GHz 500 MHz 500 MHz NA Power Output On Off ON ON SA Power 70 to 20 dBm with 0 1 dB resolution 0 dBm 0 dBm SA Power OUT On Off Off Off Input Range and Default Settings 0 7 Function Range Preset Value Power ON default Sweep type Hold Single Number of groups Continuos Continuous Continuous Trigger Source Free run External Manual Video Gate GPIB Free run Free run Tr
146. 224 I S228 RETURN TITLE 5226 BONE MORE GANGEL coo FARES Standard Type Menu REV TRANS EWI MATGH Letter Menu REV MATCH RESPONSE RESPONSE amp ISON RETURN LABEL BONE LABEL DONE LABEL KIT KIT DONE IMOBIFIEDE Modify Calkit Menu 5005037 Figure 5 21 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Cal Key for Network Analyzer 2 2 5 36 Measurement Block Calibration menu Network Analyzer CORRECTION on CALIBRATE Response Standard MENU E Menu CALIBRATE NONE Responses olation Menu RESPONSE RESPONSE amp ISOL N st Si One Fort te PORT il 522 SPORT FULL 2 PORT ONE PATH 2 1 Full 2 Port RESUME CAL SEQUENCE GAL KIT 7mm One Path 2 Port Mena CAL KIT mte 3 5mm N 50 ohm N75 ih USER SAVE USER Mop gt Modify Cal Tram Menu RETURN MORE 1 Reference Plan PORT EXTENSIONS Mena VELO CITY FACTOR SET 20 RETURN Figure 5 22 Calibration Menu CORRECTION ON OFF CORRECTION on OFF Turns error correction ON or oFF The analyzer uses the most recent calibration data for the displayed parameter If one of the following sweep parameters has bee
147. 27 5 27 5 28 5 28 5 28 5 28 5 28 5 28 5 28 5 28 5 28 5 29 5 29 5 29 5 29 5 30 Bandwidth menu Network Analyzer e 5 30 AVERAGING a 5 30 AVERAGING RESTART AVERREST MEN 5 30 AVERAGING on OFF AVERONIOFF s 5 30 AVERAGING FACTOR 5 30 IF BANDWIDTH 5 30 IF BW 5 30 GROUP DELAY APERTURE Ce 5 31 GROUP DELY APERTURE GRODAPER e 5 31 Bandwidth menu Spectrum Analyzer 5 32 AVERAGING a 5 32 AVERAGING RESTART AVERREST 122020202 e 5 92 AVERAGING OFF AVERONIOFF 5 32 AVERAGING FACTOR AVERFACT 5 32 RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH a 5 32 RES BW AUTO man BWAUTO ON OFF s k t t k k t t ts s 5 32 RES BW 5 38 RBW SPAN RATIO BWSRAT 5 33 VIDEO BANDWIDTH o 5 33 VBW TYPE VBW o 5 33 VIDEO BW VBW 2 5 33 5 54 Calibration menu Network Analyzer s s t t st st s t t t t 5 5 t t t t t t t 5 36 CORRECTION ON 5 36 CORRECTION on OFF 5 36 CALIBRATE MENU 5 37 CALIBRATE NONE CALI 5 37 RESPONSE o 5 37 RESPONSE
148. 305 269 7500 fax 305 269 7599 Taiwan tel 0800 047 866 fax 0800 286 331 Australia New Zealand tel 61 3 9210 5555 Australia fax 61 3 9210 5899 tel 64 4 939 0636 New Zealand fax 64 4 972 5364 Asia Pacific tel 65 6375 8100 fax 65 6836 0252 Email tm_asia agilent com
149. 4 power sweep linearity 10 1 preamplifier 9 3 precision frequency reference 10 7 Preset D 1 preset 8 19 1 8 2 8 PRESET MKRS PRSMKRS 7 3 preset state D 1 PREV FILES 8 37 8 38 8 42 PREV PAGE PREP 8 30 print 8 21 8 30 PRINT COLOR FIXED PRICFIXE PRICVARI 8 25 printer 9 5 printer control language 10 21 PRINT SETUP 8 22 PRINT STANDARD PRINALL 8 21 8 30 PRINT STANDARD PRIS 8 25 probe power 10 21 probe power connector 2 8 pulse width 10 22 PURGE 8 7 PURGE FILE PURG 8 34 purge file 8 34 PURGE YES 8 39 Q Q 12 30 R R MEAS R 5 5 R MEAS R 5 7 rack mount and handle kit option 1CP 9 1 rack mount kit 1CM 9 1 RAM disk C 1 random error 12 39 random error 11 6 range adjustment 12 5 ratio 12 5 ratio accuracy 10 3 raw data arrays 12 5 12 8 C 2 RAW on OFF SAVRAW ON OFF 8 36 rbw 2 7 RBW filter response time 12 26 RBW SPAN RATIO BWSRAT 5 33 rbw switching uncertainty 10 12 real 5 14 REAL FMT REAL 5 14 REAL IMAG CIRF RI 7 27 rear panel 2 9 13 recall color 5 28 RECALL COLORS RECC 5 23 recall file 8 42 RECALL LINE 8 6 receiver characteristics 10 2 recharge time D 1 reference 5 26 5 28 reference level 2 6 reference level range 10 9 reference oven output 2 11 10 21 REFERENCE POSITION 5 26 REFERENCE VALUE REFV 5 26 5 28 reflection cal 5 47
150. 46A or 85044A Test Set 300 kHz to 1 8 GHz ot o e t o t o t tf t ng ng 11 21 Typical System Performance for Devices with 75 Q Type N Connectors 4396B with 85046B or 85044B Test Set 300 kHz to 1 8 GHz s ot ot ot 11 22 Typical System Performance for Devices with 50 Q Type N Connectors 4396B with 87512A Test Set 100 kHz to 1 8 GHz t t t t t t t t t t 2 2 11 28 Typical System Performance for Devices with 75 0 Type N Connectors 4396B with 87512B Test Set 100 kHz to 1 8 GHz t t t t t t t t t nt n 11 24 Reflection Measurement Uncertainty Worksheet 002 11 26 Transmission Measurement Uncertainty Worksheet 2 11 27 Minimum Gate Length on the Stepped FFT mode 12 27 Standard Definitions 12 44 Standard Class Assignments 12 45 Manual Changes by Serial Number A 1 Manual Changes by Firmware Version e e A 1 Valid Characters for File C 4 Suffixes and Extensions Added Automatically C 4 Contents of ASCII Files 2 5 s a C 10 Data Groups and Data Array Names for Spectrum Analyzer C 11 Data Groups and Data Array Names for the Network Analyzer Mode C 12 Network Measurement Type Versus Raw Data C 18 Calibration Type for Network Measurement Versus CAL Data Sa
151. 5 50 reflection coefficient 12 47 reflection repeatability 11 7 reflection tracking drift 11 7 reflection tracking Epp 12 53 reflection tracking Err 12 53 reflection uncertainty equations 11 8 REFLECT N REFL 5 47 5 50 REFLECT N DONE REFD 5 48 5 50 Refl FWD 511 MEAS S11 5 6 Refl REV 522 A R MEAS S22 5 6 relative permittivity er 12 12 REMOTE indicator 2 2 RENumber 8 7 repetitive sampling 12 28 RE SAVE 8 6 RE SAVE FILE RESAVD 8 34 RES BW BW 6 13 RES BW BW 5 33 RES BW AUTO man BWAUTO ON OFF 5 32 RESET 8 7 RESET COLOR RSCO 5 24 residual crosstalk 11 7 residual fm 10 8 residual load match 11 7 residual measurement error 11 6 residual reflection tracking 11 7 residual response 10 11 residual responses 10 5 residual source match 11 7 residual transmission tracking 11 7 resolution bandwidth 5 32 resolution bandwidth rbw 10 7 response 5 44 RESPONSE CALI RESP 5 37 RESPONSE LABERESP 5 56 RESPONSE RAIRESP 5 44 RESPONSE SPECRESP 5 55 response 5 37 response and isolation 5 38 response and isolation calibration 12 42 RESPONSE amp ISOL N CALI RAI 5 38 RESPONSE amp ISO N LABERESI 5 57 RESPONSE amp 507 SPECRESI 5 55 response calibration 12 42 response for 3 5 mm 7mm cal kits 5 42 response for type n cal kits 5 42 response for user cal kit 5 43 response time 12 26
152. 55 SETCTIME c c t t t t t o x 8 ADJUST DATE 8 DATE MM DD YY SETCDATE 8 DATE FORMAT MEL 8 1 DATE MODE MonDayYear MONDYEAR s 8 10 DayMonYear DAYMYEAR 8 10 Beeper Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer eh e cs s os sos os t oss 8 11 BEEP DONE s ee Co e 8 11 DONE off BEEPDONE ON OFF MN 8 11 BEEP WARNING MEL 8 11 BEEP WARN on OFF BEEPWARN ON OFF 8 11 Limit Line Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer 8 12 LIMIT LINE o 8 12 LIMIT LINE on OFF LIMILINE ON OFF k c t k t o 8 12 LIMIT TESTING 8 12 LIMIT TEST on OFF LIMITEST ON OFF e 8 12 BEEP FAIL 8 18 BEEP FAIL on OFF BEEPFAIL 8 1 EDIT LIMIT TABLE MM VV 8 18 EDIT LIMIT LINE EDITLIML t t k t ke t x 8 13 SEGMENT 8 18 EDIT LIMSEDI 8 13 DELETE LIMSDEL 8 13 ADD LIMSADD ls 8 18 CLEAR LIST TABLE 8 14 CLEAR LIST LIMCLEL e 8 14 DONE LIMEDONE 2 8 14 LIMIT LINE OFFSET 2 2 8 14 LIMIT LINE OFFSETS 2 8 14 SWP PARAM OFFSET 0 8 14 AMPLITUDE OFFSET 0 8 14 MKR AMP OFS MKRAMPO
153. 6 22 6 22 6 22 6 22 6 22 6 22 6 23 Span SPAN 6 24 Span menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer 6 24 FULL SPAN c 775s225 6 24 FULL SPAN FULS k k 2 6 24 ZERO SPAN o 6 24 ZERO SPAN SPAN 0 77s 6 24 MKRA SPAN MKRDSPAN 6 24 7 Marker Block Marker 0 7 2 Marker menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer gt MN 1 8 SUB MKR SKR 1 7 ow 7 3 CLEAR MARKERS a 7 3 CLEAR SUB MKR SMKR 1 7 OFF o 7 3 PRESET MKRS PRSMKRS 7 3 MKR ON 1 MKRODATA MEMO 7 3 MARKER COUPLING o 7 3 MKR 1 MKRCOUP OFFION 7 3 CONTINUOUS 7 4 DISCRETE o 7 4 MKR 1 MKRCONTON OFF 7 4 AMODE MENU 7 4 Delta mode menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer 7 5 AMARKER 122020202202 7 5 AMKR DMKRON 7 5 FIXED AMKR DMKR FIX 7 5 TRACKING AMARKER o 7 5 TRACKING AMKR DMKR TRAC o 7 5 AMODE DEF DMKR OFF 2 20202020222282 2 2 2 02 2 ee 7 5 FIXED AMARKER o 7 6 AMKR SWP PARAM DMKRPRM e 7 6 FIXEDAMKR VALUE DMKRVAL 7 6 FIXEDAMKR AUX VALUE DMKRAUV 0 0 2 04 7 6 Sub marker menu Ne
154. 6 dB 0 23 0 19 0 18 6 9x 1073 6 9x 1073 Load Match 16 dB 16 dB 16 dB 42 dB 0 16 0 16 0 16 7 9x107 Ti Trans Tracking 1 8 0 2 dB 0 2 dB _ 0 05 dB 0 23 0 023 0 023 5 8 10 5 C Cross Talk 94 dB 94 dB 104 dB 104 dB 104 dB 2 0 10 9 2 0 10 9 6 3 10 9 6 3 10 9 6 3 10 9 Rua Portl Connector 65 dB 5 6x107 Repeatability Rei Portl Trans Connector 65 dB 5 6x107 Repeatability Port2 Connector 65 dB 5 6x107 Repeatability Riz Port2 Trans Connector 65 dB 5 6x107 Repeatability N Low Level Noise 94 dB from full scale 2 0x10 5 Ny High Level Noise 2 4 Magnitude 0 003 dB 3 5x10 Am Ap Dynamic Accuracy Error See Dynamic Accuracy in Chapter 10 Um Up Multiplexer Switching Magnitude 0 0025 dB 2 9 x10 Phase 0 015 degrees Uncertainty Su Portl Cable Trans 0 05 x f GHZ degrees Phase Stability Sa Port1 Cable 70 dB 3 2x107 Stability Sio Port2 Cable Trans 0 05 x f GHZ degrees Phase Stability So Port2 Cable Refl 70 dB 3 2x107 Stability Tha Trans Tracking Drift Magnitude 0 01 dB C 1 1x107 C 0 1 0 15xf GHz degrees C Tra Refl Tracking Drift Magnitude 0 01 dB C 1 1 10 3 9 0 1 0 15xf GHz degrees C Tsw Switch Tracking 0 03 dB 3 5x 107 Switch Port Match 70 dB 3 2x107 1 Accuracy enhancement procedures are perfo
155. 945A Close field Probe Set 1141A Differential Probe 10855A Broadband Preamplifier 2 MHz to 1800 MHz Contents 24 8 39 8 39 8 40 8 40 8 40 8 41 8 41 8 41 8 41 8 41 8 41 8 41 8 41 8 41 8 42 8 42 8 42 8 42 8 42 8 42 8 42 cO co co CO OOOO N Ao A P p D D o p o o p P O 10 87405A Preamplifier 10 to 3000 MHz 9 3 Power Splitters and Directional Bridges 22222020222 2 9 3 11850C D Three way Power Splitters 9 3 11667A Power Splitter 22222020222 2 9 3 86205A 86207A 50 Q and 75 Q RF 4 9 8 Calibration Kits 9 8 9 4 11857 7 mm Test Port Return Cable Set 9 4 11857B 75 Q Type N Test Port Return Cable Set 9 4 11851B 50 Q Type N RF Cable 9 4 Adapters 2 9 4 11852B 50 Q to 75 Q Minimum Loss Pad DC to2 GHz 9 4 Adapter Kits 9 4 System accessories available 9 5 System rack 4 4s 9 5 Printer 9 5 GPIB cable 9 5 External Monitors e o 9 5 Disease 9 6 Specifications Network Measurement 10 1 Source Characteristics 2 10 1 Frequency Characteristics
156. A TRACE on OFF SAVDTRC ON OFF Toggles saving or not saving the trace arrays MEM TRACE on OFF SAVMTRC ON OFF Toggles saving or not saving the memory trace arrays For more information on the save function see Appendix C Instrument State Block 8 35 Re Save File Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer 8 36 Instrument State Block file name A file name file name file name PREV FILES NEXT FILES STOR DEV prem 4 Figure 8 20 Re save file menu file name RESAVED Updates the file previously saved with the current instrument states or data The data group to be saved is determined by the file name s extension See File Names in Appendix for more details about file name extensions PREV FILES Displays the previous file names in the softkey label to re save data NEXT FILES Displays the next file names in the softkey label to re save data STOR DEV STODDISK STODMEMO Selects between the flexible disk drive and the RAM disk memory as the storage device DISK shows the built in flexible disk is selected and MEMORY shows the RAM disk memory is selected This setting does not change even when the line power is cycled or the key is pressed Purge File Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer Gave file name FILE file name UTILITIES file name yes No Menu file name PURGE FILE PREV FILES NEXT FILES STO
157. ABLE 5011009 Figure 11 9 4396B 85046A System Error Model Table 11 1 Parameters of System error Model A Dynamic Accuracy U Multiplexer Switching Uncertainty Am Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Um Magnitude Multiplexer Switching Uncertainty Ap Phase Dynamic Accuracy Up Phase Multiplexer Switching Uncertainty Noise Floor Ms Residual Source Match High Level Noise Mj Residual Load Match Tsw Switch Tracking C Residual Crosstalk Msw Switch Port Match Te Residual Reflection Tracking Port 1 Reflection Repeatability Tt Residual Transmission Tracking Rro Port 2 Reflection Repeatability Sri Port 1 Cable Reflection Stability Ra Port 1 Transmission Repeatability Sra Port 2 Cable Reflection Stability Ro Port 2 Transmission Repeatability Sa Port 1 Cable Transmission Stability Tra Reflection Tracking Drift Sita Port 2 Cable Transmission Stability Tea Transmission Tracking Drift D Residual Directivity For measurement of one port devices set the crosstalk C load match Mj transmission tracking T transmission tracking drift T q port 2 connector repeatability 2 and port 2 cable stability 5 2 error terms to zero System Performance 11 7 Reflection Uncertainty Equations Total Reflection Magnitude Uncertainty Erm An analysis of the error model yields an equation for the reflection magnitude uncertainty The equation contains all of the first order ter
158. AREA 20 ACTIVE ENTRY AREA 19 EXTERNAL REFERENCE INDICATOR 22 TITLE 9 PASS FAIL 18 STATUS NOTATIONS CENTER START VALUE SPAN STOP VALUE This area depends on Analyzer type Y Cs For Network Analyzer ew FREQUENCY 14 VIDEO BANDWIDTH 17 RBW IFBW For Spectrum Analyzer C5002002 Figure 2 2 Screen Display Single Channel Cartesian Format 1 Active Channel Displays the number of the current active channel selected with the keys in the active channel block If dual channel is oN with an overlaid display both channel 1 and channel 2 appear in this area Front and Rear Panel 2 5 2 Measured Input s 6 Marker Data Readout 3 Format 4 Scale Div 5 Reference Level Shows the input S parameter or ratio of inputs currently measured as selected using the Meas key This is the display format selected using the Format key Displays the scale selected by the Scale Ref key in units appropriate to the current measurement Displays the value of a reference line in Cartesian formats or the outer circle in polar formats It is selected using the Scale Ref key However the reference line is invisible it is indicated by a small triangle adjacent to the graticule at the left The position of the reference line for the spectrum analyzer is fixe
159. AS A 2 5 7 B MEAS B 2 1 2 5 7 DETECTION 1 2 2 2 5 7 ANALYZER 5 7 Analyzer type menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer s st t st t s t st t t t e 5 8 NETWORK ANALYZER LLLI 5 8 NETWORK ANALYZER QUA MN 5 8 SPECTRUM ANALYZER MM 5 8 SPECTRUM ANALYZER SA MN 5 8 Conversion menu Network Analyzer s st e 5 9 OFF CONV OFF os ce 5 9 IMPEDANCE ee 5 9 Z4 Refl CONV ZREF 7 5 9 Z Yrans CONV ZTRA 5 9 ADMITTANCE o 5 9 Y Refl CONV YREF e 5 9 Y Trans CONV YTRA 5 9 1 8 CON ONEDS 2 5 9 MULTIPLE PHASE o 5 10 AXPHASE CONV MP4 e 5 10 SxPHASE CONV 8 5 10 16xPHASE CONV MP16 2 5 10 Detection menu Spectrum Analyzer s s s st s st e 5 11 POSITIVE a 5 11 POS PEAK DET POS VV 5 11 NEGATIVE PEAK MENU t t s s VV 5 11 NEG PEAK DET NEG MN V 5 11 SAMPLE a 5 11 SAMPLE DET SAM NEN 5 11 Format menu Network Analyzer s s s st t s s t t t 5 t t t t t t t t on 5 18 LOG MAGNITUDE 2 2 5 13 Contents 3 FORMAT LOG MAG FMTLOGM 2 52 5 2 5 13 PHASE MN 5 13 PHASE EMT PHAS o 5 13 GRO
160. ATISTICS MV 1 25 STATISTICS on OFF MEASTAT ON OFF k c t k t o 7 25 MARKER TIME MV 1 25 TIME on OFF MKRTIME ONIOFF 7 25 NOISE FORM MARKER Ce t 7 25 NOISE FORM on OFF MKRNOI ON OFF 7 25 Utility menu Network Analyzer EMEN 1 26 MARKER LIST MM 1 26 MKR LIST on OFF MKRL ON I OFF MEN 1 26 STATISTICS MV 1 26 STATISTICS on OFF MEASTAT ON OFF k c t k t o 7 26 MARKER TIME MV 1 26 TIME on OFF MKRTIME ONIOFF 7 26 SMITH POLAR MENU 2 2 2 2 2 2 7 27 SMTH POLAR MENU o 7 27 SMITH CHART o 7 27 REAL IMAG CIRF e 7 27 POLAR CHART MM VV 7 27 LIN MAG PHASE CIRF LIN Ce t ct c t 7 27 ADMITTANCE CHART e 7 27 LOG MAG PHASE CIRF LOG MN 7 27 TES 7 27 G jB CIRF GB 727 SWR PHASE CIRF SWR 797 Contents 18 8 Instrument State Block System Men Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer 8 4 IBASI oe o 8 4 IBASIC s s s r k r r c s e 8 4 MEMORY 8 4 MEMORY PARTITION 8 4 CLOCK 8 4 SET 8 4 BEEPER s e e a eoe e e a a 8 4 BEEPER MENU 8 4 LIMIT TESTING 4 ee s 4 s 4n 8 4 LIMIT MENU 8 4 SERV
161. After the standards are modified use SPECIFY CLASS to specify that a class consists of specific standards SPECIFY 511 SPECS11A Enters the standard numbers for the first class required for an 511 1 port calibration For predefined cal kits this is OPEN for the 7 mm or OPENS for type N S11B SPECS11B Enters the standard numbers for the second class required for an 511 1 port calibration For predefined cal kits this is SHORT for the 7 mm or SHORTS for the type N Measurement Block 5 57 5 58 Measurement Block S11C SPECS11C Enters the standard numbers for the third class required for an 1 l port calibration For predefined kits this is LOAD SPECIFY 922A SPECS22A Enters the standard numbers for the first class required for an S22 l port calibration For predefined cal kits this is OPEN for the 7 mm or OPENS for the type N 522 SPECS22B Enters the standard numbers for the second class required for an S55 1 port calibration For predefined cal kits this is SHORT for the 7 mm or SHORTS for the type N 522 SPECS22C Enters the standard numbers for the third class required for an S 1 port calibration For predefined kits this is LOAD SPECIFY FWD TRANS SPECFWDT Enters the standard numbers for the forward transmission THRU calibration For predefined kits this is THRU REV TRANS SPECREVT Enters the standard numbers for the reverse transmission THRU calib
162. Agilent 4396B Network Spectrum Impedance Analyzer Function Reference Manual Change Agilent Part No N A Feb 2008 Change 1 Change the specification of L Accuracy Page 11 19 to the following Accuracy D 0 2 0 2 lt D E UA La a La 1 D Copyright 2008 Agilent Technologies ZIP Fry 1 L Accuracy NV 11 19 SLU FCR L C PAU Accuracy D 0 2 0 2 lt D La La 1 41 D Copyright 2008 Agilent Technologies Agilent 4396 Network Spectrum Impedance Analyzer Function Reference Manual Change Agilent Part No N A January 2007 Change 1 Add the following temperature condition to other spurious of the spurious responses on page 10 11 30 dBm mixer input offset 2 1 2 23 55 lt 70 dBc ase ZIP Trz 1 XV 10 11 Z238J LC FAV Sb ESO ddm F gt 1 kHz 23 5 lt 70 dBc Copyright 2007 Agilent Technologies Manual Change Agilent Part No N A August 2004 Printed in Malaysia Change Change the company name from YOKOGAWA HEWLETT PACKARD LTD or its abbreviation HP YHP to Agilent Technologies or Agilent This document may contain references to HP YHP or Yokogawa Hewlett Packard Please note that Hewlett Packard s former test and measurement semiconductor products and chemical analysis businesses are now part of Agilent Technologies
163. B 5 42 THRU STANC 5 42 RESPONSE FOR TYPE N CAL KITS ee ee Assn 5 42 SHORT M 5 5 42 SHORT F 5 5 42 OPEN M STANC 5 43 OPEN F STAND 5 43 THRU STANE 5 48 RESPONSE FOR USER CAL KIT 5 43 defined std 1 STANA 5 43 defined std 2 STANB 5 43 defined std 3 STANC 5 43 defined std 4 STAND 5 43 defined std 5 STANE 5 43 defined std 6 STANF 5 43 defined std Y STANG a 5 43 DONE RESPONSE RESPDONE o oo Lo oo 5 43 Response Isolation Menu Network Analyzer st 5 t t 5 t m n 5 44 RESPONSE e a e 5 44 RESPONSE RAIRESP 0 0 0 2 ll 5 44 ISOLATION 5 44 ISOL N STD RAIISOL 0 0 00 5 44 DONE RESP ISOL N CAL RAID 5 44 S11 l Port Menu Network Analyzer e 5 45 s11 1 PORT CAL o 5 45 S11 OPEN CLASS11A AN 5 45 SHORT CLASS11B 5 45 LOAD CLASS11C 5 45 DONE 1 PORT CAL SAV1 5 45 22 1 Port Menu Network Analyzer s st t st t 2 8 8 t 5 45 Conten
164. Basic listener unadresses if MTA is issued No listen only mode Does not have extended address of listener Complete service request SRQ capabilities Complete remote local capability including local lockout Does not respond to parallel poll Complete device clear Responds to a group execute trigger System controller capabilities in system controller mode Pass control capabilities in addressable mode Tri state drivers Analyzer Features 12 35 Bus Mode The analyzer uses a single bus architecture The single bus allows both the analyzer and the host controller to have complete access to the peripherals in the system 4396B I Select code and GPIB address 800 Internal GPIB Interface ogee gt Select code and GPIB address 717 Select code and GPIB address 721 HP I Select code and GPIB address Computer a Other Instruments CB300103 Figure 12 22 Analyzer Single Bus Concept Two different modes are possible system controller and addressable System This mode allows the analyzer to control peripherals directly in a stand alone Controller environment without an external controller This mode can only be selected manually from the analyzer front panel Use this mode for operation
165. Block Diagram 12 2 12 2 Data Processing for Network Measurement 2 2 2 12 4 12 3 Data Processing for Spectrum Measurement 12 7 12 4 S Parameters of a Two Port Device 12 10 12 5 Reflection Impedance and Admittance Conversions 2 12 11 12 6 Transmission Impedance and Admittance Conversions 12 11 12 7 Constant Group Delay 12 13 12 8 Higher Order Phase Shift 2 7 2 12 14 12 9 Rate of Phase Change Versus Frequency 12 14 12 10 Variations in Frequency 12 15 12 11 Swept Mode and Stepped FFT Mode 12 17 12 12 Resolving Small Adjacent Signal en 12 17 12 13 Measurement Points and Display Points 12 19 12 14 The Concept of Segments as a Point between Two Sets of Limit Lines 12 21 12 15 Edge Mode 2 2 12 25 12 16 Level Mode 2 2 2 25 22 2525252525 5252 5 525252 2525 12 25 12 17 RBW Filter Response 12 26 12 18 Repetitive Sampling a a a a 12 28 12 19 Bandwidth Search Example 12 31 12 20 Peak Definition for Network 2 12 32 12 21 Peak Definition for Spectrum Analyzer 2 2 2 2 5 2 12 33 12 22 Analyzer Single Bus Concept 12 36 12
166. C 2 Instrument States and Internal Data Arrays STATE 2 2 2 C 2 Internal Data Arrays DATA ONLY C 2 Graphics image GRAPHICS MM el C 3 File Type and Data Group Combinations 2 22 C 3 File Names 2 C 4 Auto Recall C 4 File Structure 2 C 5 File Structure of Internal Data Arrays File for Binary Files File Data Group ooa a a a File Structure of Internal Data Arrays File for C 9 Status Block and Data Block C 9 File Structure for Single Channel and Dual Channel C 11 Data Array Names for the Spectrum C 11 Data Array Names for the Network Analyzer C 12 Data Groups of the Spectrum Analyzer l l C 12 Data Groups of the Network Analyzer 2 2 2 C 12 D Input Range and Default Settings Active Channel Block 2 e D 2 2 D 2 Measurement D 2 ML VV VV VV VV VV D 2 Format D 2 ee D 3 MM D 4 Bw Avg D 6 ML VV V VV VV D 6 Sweep Block 2 008484 MM D 7 ee MEL D 7 Contents 30 mn EE 2 j m 5 8 lo Start and Sto
167. CH on OFF PARS ON OFF 7 24 pass fail 2 7 Pause 8 6 P 2 8 PEAK SEAM PEAK 7 18 Peak 2 6 PEAK CENTER PEAKCENT 7 11 peak definition 12 32 PEAK DEF MENU 7 16 peak delta 7 21 PEAK DELTA AX PKDLTX 7 21 PEAK DELTA AY PKDLTY 7 23 PEAK DELTA AY PKDLTY 7 21 peak detector 12 8 PEAK PLRTY POS neg PKPOL POS NEG 7 21 peak polarity 7 21 peak polarity 12 32 peak pulse power 10 11 peaks all 7 15 peak search 7 15 PEAKS LEFT SEAM PKSL 7 15 PEAKS RIGHT SEAM PKSR 7 15 PEAK CENTER PEAKCENT 6 23 PEN 1 COLO PEN1 5 22 PEN 2 COLO PEN2 5 22 PEN 3 COLO PEN3 5 22 PEN 4 COLO PENA 5 22 PEN 5 COLO PENS 5 22 PEN 6 COLO PEN6 5 23 pen color 5 22 performance 10 1 performance test 10 1 phase 5 13 PHASE FMT PHAS 5 13 Index 10 phase characteristics 10 5 phase dynamic accuracy 11 7 phase multiplexer switching uncertainty 11 7 phase offset 5 27 phase offset 12 6 PHASE OFFSET PHAO 5 27 phase shift 12 13 PksA 2 6 PksL 2 6 PksR 2 6 polar chart 5 14 12 12 POLAR Re Im FMT POLA 5 14 port extension 5 40 5 52 port extension 5 41 PORT EXTENSIONS 5 40 positive peak 5 11 POS PEAK DET POS 5 11 POWER POWE 6 15 6 17 POWER POWER 6 11 6 13 power 2 10 power level 6 15 power level 2 7 power range 10 1 power requirements 10 24 power slope ON 51 2 8 power splitter 9 3 power sweep 6
168. Cartesian format this is the y axis value In a polar Smith or admittance chart format in the network analyzer mode this is the first part real part of the complex data pair It applies to a magnitude phase marker a real imaginary marker an R jX marker a G jB marker or an SWR phase marker Fixed Amarker amplitude values are always uncoupled in the two channels FIXEDAMKR AUX VALUE DMKRAUV Changes the auxiliary amplitude value of the fixed Amarker used only with a polar Smith or admittance format in the network analyzer mode This is the second part imaginary part of a complex data pair It applies to a magnitude phase marker a real imaginary marker an R jX marker a G jB marker or an SWR phase marker Fixed Amarker auxiliary amplitude values are always uncoupled in the two channels When the spectrum analyzer mode is selected this softkey does not appear in this menu Marker Sub marker menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer Marker SUB MKR SUB MKR 11 SEARCH ICI SUB TARGET SUB MKR Figure 7 4 Sub Marker Menu SUB MARKER SUB MKR 1 SMKR1 ON 2 SMKR2 ON 3 SMKR3 ON 4 SMKR4 ON 5 SMKR5 ON 6 SMKR6 ON 7 SMKR7 ON These keys put a sub marker at the present marker position Marker Block 7 7 Clear Sub marker menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer SUB MKR 11 CLEAR SUB MKR Fi
169. D AMKR DMKR FIX 7 5 FIXEDAMKR AUX VALUE DMKRAUV 7 6 FIXEDAMKR VALUE DMKRVAL 7 6 fixed Amarker 7 6 flexible disk drive 2 4 FORMAT 1 DISF LIF DOS 8 34 format 2 6 12 6 12 9 Format 1 2 5 12 FORMAT LOG MAG FMT LOGM 5 13 FORMAT SPECTRUM FMT SPECT 5 15 FORM FEED ON off FORMFEED ON OFF 8 22 FREE RUN TRGS INT 6 19 frequency blank 5 20 FREQUENCY BLANK 5 20 frequency characteristics 10 7 frequency characteristics conversion 12 5 frequency characteristics correction 12 5 frequency characteristics level correction 12 8 frequency for power sweep 6 15 frequency range 10 2 10 7 frequency readout accuracy 10 7 frequency reference 10 7 frequency response 10 5 10 11 10 14 12 39 12 42 12 47 12 48 12 52 front panel 2 1 FULL 2 PORT CALI FUL2 5 38 full scale input level 10 2 full span 6 24 FULL SPAN FULS 6 24 full two port calibration 12 42 FWD TSOL N ISOL N STD FWDI 5 49 5 51 FWD MATCH LABEFWDM 5 56 FWD MATCH SPECFWDM 5 55 FWD MATCH THRU FWDM 5 48 5 51 FWD TRANS THRU FWDT 5 48 5 51 G gain 5 19 GAIN DATGAIN 5 19 gain compression 10 11 2 8 GATE TRGS GAT 6 19 gate control mode 10 14 GATE CTL LEVEL GATCTL LEV 6 19 GATE DELAY GATDLY 6 19 gate delay 10 14 gated sweep 12 24 Index 6 gate length 12 24 GATE LENGTH GATLEN 6 19 gate length 10 14 12 27 GATELLEVEL GATCTL
170. D6 Level TTL Level Connector BNC female Positive Trigger Signal Negative Trigger signal C5010014 Figure 10 11 Trigger Signal S parameter test set interface Connector D SUB 25 10 22 Specifications L ATTN 40dB M REV SWEEP DELAY GND LR L REM TRIG L ATTN 200B L ATTN 1098 C5010008 Figure 10 12 S Parameter Test Set Interface Pin Assignments External monitor output Connector D SUB 15 pin HD Display resolution a errorae aarre 640 x 480 VGA Operation Conditions Temperature Disk drive non operating condition 0 to 40 C Disk drive operating condition 10 to 40 Humidity wet bulb temperature lt 29 C without condensation Disk drive non operating condition 15 to 95 RH Disk drive operating condition 15 to 80 RH Altitude 0 to 2000 meters Warm up time
171. DE Modify Calkit Menu C5005037 Figure B 11 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Cal Key for Network Analyzer 2 2 B 8 Softkey Tree EXECUTE LVL CAL LVL CAL DATA INPUT Z C5005030 Figure B 12 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Cal Key for Spectrum Analyzer Softkey Tree 9 Sweep Block Center STEP SIZE AUTO man CENTER STEP SIZE MKR gt CNIR STEP MKRA gt CNTR STEP gt CENTER MKRA CENTER PEAK gt CENTER 5006009 Figure B 13 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Center Key Goan FULL SPAN ZERO SPAN MKRA SPAN Figure B 14 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Key B 10 Softkey Tree Grez SEGMENT gt SWEEP TIME MKR STARTE Sweep gt AUTO man MKR STOP SWEEP TIME D NUMBER of L POINTS hina POWER RETURN RES MORE NORMAL T
172. DEFINITION DEFINITION Y gt PREY LIST SWEEP SIDNO 1 PAGE TABLE STD NO RESTORE LIMIT TEST STD NO 3 DISPLAY TABLE STD STDNO 5 Screen Menu RETURN STD NO 6 STD NO 7 Copy Menu STD NO 8 CLASS ASSIGNMENT RETURN Copy Cal Kit Menu DISPLAY LIST DISP MODE ST amp SP CTR 8 SPAN RETURN Copy List Sweep Menu DISPLAY LIST gt DISP MODE UPR amp LWR MID amp DLT RETURN Copy Limit Test Menu Network Analyzer Only CB008038 Figure 8 10 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Copy key Instrument State Block 8 21 Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer 8 22 PRINT COPY ABORT TIME STAMP Instrument State Block PRINT STANDARD COPY ABORT COPY SKEY on OFF COPY TIME on OFF PRINT Frint Setup Menu SETUP ORIENT PORTRAIT FORM FEED ON off LIST VALUES PARAMETERS Copy Cal Kit Menu CAL KIT DEFINITION LIST SWEEP Copy List Sweep TABLE Menu Copy Limit Test RETURN Menu Network Analyzer Only CB008013 Figure 8 11 Copy Menu PRINT STANDARD PRINALL Causes an exact copy of the display to be printed The softkey label identifies the printer selected in the print setup menu STANDARD COLOR For a color printer For a black and white printer COPY ABORT COPA Aborts a print in progress COPY SKEY on OFF PRSOFT ON OFF Specifies whether to print out
173. Default Settings When the Preset key is pressed or the analyzer is turned ON the analyzer reverts to a known state There are subtle differences between the preset state and the power up state Some power up states are recalled from non volatile memory battery backup memory If power to the non volatile memory is lost the analyzer will have certain parameters set to factory settings Results of Power Loss to Battery Backup Memory Factory Setting lists the factory settings The operating time of the battery backup memory is approximately 72 hours The battery is automatically recharged while the instrument is ON The recharge time time required to fully recharge the battery is approximately 1 hour When line power is cycled the analyzer performs a self test routine Upon successful completion of the self test routine the instrument state is set to the following preset conditions The same conditions are true following a PRES RST command over the GPIB bus Input Range and Default Settings D 1 Active Channel Block Chan 1 and Function Range Preset Value Power ON default Active Channel Chl Ch2 Chl Chl Measurement Block Meas Function Range Preset Value Power ON default NA Input Ports B R A R R A B Ch1 A R Ch2 B R Ch1 A R Ch2 B R NA S parameters 11 821 S12 See 8111 Ch1 S11 2 911 NA Conversion Off Z Ref Z Trans Y Ref Y Trans 1 5
174. EDANCE a TERMINAL IMPEDANCE SPECIFY OFFSET LABEL DEL Letter STU DONE Menu DEFINED C5005028 Figure 5 32 Standard Type Menu OPEN STD TYPE OPEN STDT OPEN Defines the standard type as an OPEN used for calibrating reflection measurements OPENS are assigned a terminal impedance of infinite ohms but delay and loss offsets can still be added Pressing this key also displays a menu for defining the OPEN including its capacitance 5 62 Measurement Block SHORT LOAD DELAY THRU Capacitance model for OPEN termination As a reflection standard an OPEN offers the advantage of broadband frequency coverage However an OPEN rarely has perfect reflection characteristics because fringing capacitance effects cause phase shifts that vary with frequency This can be observed when measuring an OPEN termination after calibration an arc in the lower right circumference of the Smith chart indicates capacitive reactance These effects are impossible to eliminate However the calibration kit models include the OPEN termination capacitance at all frequencies for compatible calibration kits The capacitance model is a second order polynomial squared term as a function of frequency where the polynomial coefficients are user definable The capacitance model equation is C Co Cy x F Cox where F is the measurement frequency The terms in the equation are define
175. ER SWEEP Power sweep mode Used to characterize power sensitive DUTs In this mode power is swept at a single frequency from a start power value to a stop power value Values are selected using the and keys and the entry block EDIT LIST EDITLIST Displays the following softkeys to define or modify the frequency sweep list SEGMENT Determines a segment on the list to be modified Enter the number of a segment in the list or use the step keys to scroll the pointer at the left to the required segment number The indicated segment can then be edited or deleted EDIT SEDI Provides the segment menu for network analyzer The segment indicated by the pointer gt at the left can be modified DELETE SDEL Deletes the segment indicated by the pointer gt ADD SADD Adds a new segment to be defined with the segment menu for network analyzer If the list is empty a default segment is added and the edit segment menu is displayed so it can be modified If the list is not empty the segment indicated by the pointer gt is copied and the edit segment menu is displayed CLEAR LIST CLEL Displays the clear list menu LIST DONE CEDITDONE Defines the frequency sweep list and returns to the sweep type menu Note 1 For information on how to make list table see Chapter 6 of the 4396B Y Task Reference Sweep Block 6 5 Sweep menu Spectrum Analyzer 6 6 Sweep Block SWEEP TIME SWEEP
176. F NEXT PAGE NEXP PREV PAGE PREP RESTORE DISPLAY RESD Save Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer SAVE STATE STATE SAVDSTA SAVE DATA DATA ONLY SAVE BINARY SAVDDAT DEFINE SAVE DATA ASCII SAVE SAVE ASCII SAVDASC Contents 22 8 25 8 25 8 26 8 26 8 26 8 27 8 27 8 27 8 27 8 27 8 28 8 28 8 28 8 28 8 29 8 29 8 29 8 29 8 29 8 30 8 30 8 30 8 30 8 30 8 30 8 30 8 30 8 30 8 30 8 31 8 82 8 82 8 82 8 82 8 82 8 82 8 88 8 88 8 88 DEFINE SAVE DATA STOR DEV STODDISK STODMENO GRAPHICS SAVDTIFF 43964 STATE SAVDSTAC OVER WRITE RE SAVE FILE RESAVD FILE UTILITIES PURGE FILE PURGE FILE PURG DIRECTORY DIRECTORY CRED CHANGE DIRECTORY CHAD COPY FILE COPY FILE FILC INITIALIZE INITIALIZE INID DISK FORMAT e FORMAT DISF 005 STORAGE DEVICE STOR STODDISK STODMEMO Define Save Data Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer RAW on OFF SAVRAW ON OFF CAL on OFF SAVCAL ON OFF DATA on OFF SAVDAT ON OFF MEM on OFF SAVMEM ON OFF DATA TRACE on OFF SAVDTRC ON OFF MEM TRACE on OFF SAVMTRC ON OFF Re Save File Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer file name RESAVED PREV FILES NEXT FILES STOR DEV STODDISK STODMEMO Purge File Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer file name PURG PREV FILES NEXT FILES STOR DEVE STODDISK STODMEMD Purge Y
177. F LIST POWE 6 4 swept Mode 12 16 switch port match 11 7 switch tracking 11 7 SWP PARAM LIMPRM 8 15 SWP PARAM OFFSET LIMIPRMO 8 14 Swr 5 14 SWR FMT SWR 5 14 SWR PHASE CIRF SWR 7 27 Stem 1 3 system accessory 9 5 systematic error 12 39 systematic error 11 6 Index 14 SYSTEM CONTROLLER 8 18 system controller 8 18 12 35 12 36 system error model 11 6 system overview 12 2 system performance 11 1 system rack 9 5 T talker 12 34 Targ 2 6 TARGET SEAM TARG 7 15 TARGET SEATARG 7 19 target search 7 15 7 19 teflon 5 40 temperature 10 23 temperature gt 10 23 temperature drift 10 12 11 15 temperature stability 10 1 10 7 TERMINAL IMPEDANCE TERI 5 61 terminator key 4 2 test set 9 2 test set I O interface 2 11 TEXT MARKER COLO TEXT 5 22 third order inter modulation distortion 10 10 threshold 7 21 7 28 THRESHOLD on OFF PKTHRE ON OFF 7 21 7 28 threshold value 12 32 12 33 THRESHOLD VALUE PKTHVAL 7 21 7 23 thru 12 44 THRU STANC 5 42 THRU STANE 5 43 TIFF C 3 time gated spectrum analyzer option 1D6 9 1 TIME HH MM SS SETCTIME 8 9 time stamp 8 22 8 30 TINT TINT 5 24 title 5 20 title 2 9 TITLE TITL 5 20 TOP MARGIN TMARG 8 26 T 11 7 trace noise 10 5 10 6 tracking 12 39 12 42 12 47 12 48 12 52 TRACKING AMKR DMKR 7 5 tracking Amarker 7 5 TRANS
178. General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB This allows the analyzer to be controlled by an external computer that sends commands or instructions to and receives data from the analyzer using the GPIB In this way a remote operator has the same control of the instrument available to a local operator from the front panel except for the line power switch In addition the analyzer itself can use GPIB to directly control compatible peripherals without the use of an external controller It can output measurement results directly to a compatible printer or plotter This section provides an overview of GPIB operation The 4396B Task Reference provides information on setting up the analyzer as a controller of peripherals It also explains how to use the analyzer as a controller to print and plot GPIB equivalent mnemonics for front panel functions are provided in parentheses throughout this manual More complete information on programming the analyzer remotely over GPIB is provided in GPIB Programming Guide The GPIB Programming Guide includes examples of remote measurements using an HP 9000 series 200 or 300 computer with BASIC programming The GPIB Programming Guide assumes familiarity with front panel operation of the instrument For more information on the IEEE 488 1 standard see IEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation published by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc 345 East 47th Street New York 10017 U
179. Hz 651 ms 300 Hz 1 MHz 3s 100 Hz 100 kHz 14s 30 Hz 100 kHz 3 25 10 Hz 10 kHz 15s 3 Hz 10 kHz 12s 1 Hz 1 kHz lls Zero Span 1 1 See the next item for sweep time at zero span Zero span Normal Zero Span gt 25 us display point Repetitive Zero Span 20 5 us display point Number of display points span zero RBW gt 10 kHz Sweep time auto 24 2 2 801 points fixed Sweep time lt 801 points automatically set RBW lt 3 kHz lt 801 points automatically set SPan Zero 42 24 2 2 to 801 points selectable Input and Output Characteristics RF input Connector Type N female Impedance 50 Q nominal Return Loss S input gt 50 MHz input att gt 104 gt 14 dB s p c lt 50 MHz input att gt 10 gt 25 dB s p c QR A B inputs same as network measurement Coupling Sinput e 1 4 2 4 2 2 2
180. ICE FUNCTION 2 8 4 SERVICE MENU 8 4 Instrument BASIC Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer t s t t s st t t t t 5 eo t t t t t t t t 8 5 CONTROL PROGRAM 8 5 Step aaa 8 5 Continue 8 5 Pause 2 8 6 5 8 6 EDIT PROGRAM 8 6 8 6 SAVE 8 6 RE SAVE 8 6 PURGE a 8 7 INITIALIZE e 8 7 MSI INTERNAL 8 7 SCRATCH ot t o 8 7 RENumber 8 7 LIST _ _ k s k k k t k k k k t t t k t t 8 7 COMMAND ENTRY 8 7 COMMAND ENTRY 1 1 k k t it Ae 8 7 CLEAR 1 0 2 8 7 RESET t t ot o 8 7 Memory Partition Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer 8 8 MEMORY PARTITION ww s s s c k r e e t is s e is s ns 8 8 nn RAM mmK 8 8 DONE 2 8 8 Contents 19 CHANGE YES 8 8 Clock Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer 8 ADJUST TIME MM 8 TIME
181. IST DONE EDITDONE Defines the frequency sweep list and returns to the sweep type menu Number of Points is Automatically Changed in the Spectrum Analyzer Mode The NOP of each segment can be set from 2 through 801 with a resolution of 1 However the following conditions cause the NOP to automatically change to a value the analyzer can set When the frequency step is too narrow and RBW is less than 10 kHz NOP may automatically decrease When the frequency step is too wide NOP is automatically changed SPAN and NOP of each segment must meet the following condition SPAN Fmax x NOP 1 Where Fmax is a constant that depends on the resolution bandwidth Fmax is the maximum frequency step size That is it is the maximum SPAN size at NOP 2 The following table lists the values of Fmax for each resolution bandwidth RBW Hz Fmax Hz RBW Hz Fmax Hz 3M no limit lk 20 446 920 M 1M no limit 300 5 119 921 875 M 300 k no limit 100 1 279 980 468 75 M 100 k 1 088 375 G 30 511 992 187 5 k 30 k 368 634 375 M 10 127 998 046 875 k 10 k 40 959 375 M 3 39 999 389 648 A k 3k 40 959 375 M 1 12 799 804 687 5 k Note I For information on how to make list table see Chapter 6 of the 4396B Y Y Task Reference Sweep Block 6 9 Clear list menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer SWEEP TYPE MENU EDIT LIST CLEAR LIST CLEAR LIST YES NO Figure 6 4
182. IT LABK KIT DONE MODIFIED KITD Specify offset menu Network Analyzer OFFSET DELAY OFFSET DELAY OFFSET LOSS OFFSET LOSS CHARACTERISTIC IMPEDANCE OFFSET ZO OFSZ SID OFFSET DONE Standard Type menu Network Analyzer OPEN STD TYPE OPEN STDT OPEN co CO C1 C1 C2 C2 SHORT eoe e SHORT STDT SHOR LOAD LOAD STDT LOAD DELAY THRU DELAY THRU STDT DELA ARBITRARY IMPEDANCE ARBITRARY IMPEDANCE STDT ARBI TERMINAL IMPEDANCE TERI SPECIFY OFFSET LABEL STANDARD LABEL STD LABS STD DONE DEFINED C STDD Calibration menu Spectrum Analyzer 5 56 5 56 5 56 5 56 5 56 5 56 5 56 5 56 5 56 5 56 5 56 5 57 5 57 5 57 5 57 5 57 5 58 5 58 5 58 5 58 5 58 5 58 5 58 5 58 5 59 5 59 5 59 5 60 5 60 5 60 5 60 5 60 5 60 5 60 5 60 5 60 5 60 5 60 5 61 5 61 5 61 5 61 5 61 5 62 Contents 11 LEVEL CAL A 5 62 EXECUTE LVL CAL LVLCAL 122222 202 2 2 2 7 2 5 62 LVL CAL DATA LVCODT 5 62 INPUT IMPEDANCE 5 62 INPUT Z 2 5 62 6 Sweep Block Sweep menu Network Analyzer SWEEP TIME SWEEP TIME AUTO man SWETAUTO ON OFF SWEEP TIME SWET DISPLAY POINTS a 6 3 NUMBER of POINTS POIN 6 8 CHANNEL COUPLING MEL 6 4 COUPLED CH ON off COUC ON OFF k c t k t o 6 4 SWEEP TYPE
183. IT LIST EDITLIST 6 4 6 8 edit program 8 6 ELEC DELAY MENU 5 27 electrical delay 5 27 12 12 electrical delay 5 41 12 6 ELECTRICAL DELAY ELED 5 27 Err 12 52 emc 10 24 END EDIT 8 6 enter characters 5 25 enter characters 8 41 enter step size 6 22 entry block 1 1 entry block 4 1 4 2 equivalent length 12 12 ERASE TITLE 5 25 Err 12 48 Erm 11 8 Erp 11 8 error 12 39 error correction ON Cor 2 8 error message Messages 1 error model 12 47 12 48 12 53 event trigger 10 6 Exp 12 53 expanded phase 5 14 EXPANDED PHASE FMT EXPP 5 14 EXECUTE LVL CAL LVLCAL 5 62 Ext 2 8 EXTENSION INPUT A PORTA 5 52 EXTENSION INPUT B PORTB 5 52 EXTENSION INPUT R PORTR 5 52 EXTENSION PORT 1 PORT1 5 52 EXTENSION PORT 2 PORT2 5 52 EXTENSIONS on OFF PORE ON OFF 5 52 EXTERNAL TRGS EXT 6 19 external monitor 9 5 external monitor output 10 23 external monitor terminal 2 10 external program run cont input 2 10 10 22 external reference 2 8 external reference input 2 10 10 21 external trigger input 2 11 10 22 F factory setting D 1 D 12 fast fourier transform 12 8 fast sweep indicator 2 8 features 1 1 female 5 48 FFT 12 8 FFT Mode 12 16 file name PURG 8 38 file name RECD 8 42 file name RESAVED 8 37 file name C 4 FILE UTILITIES 8 34 filter level correction 12 8 Index 5 FIXE
184. JPIKE Table A 2 Manual Changes by Firmware Version Version Make Manual Changes 1 00 Changes 1 1 01 Changes 2 Manual Changes 1 Serial Number Agilent Technologies uses a two part nine character serial number that is stamped on the serial number plate see Figure A 1 attached to the rear panel The first four digits and the letter are the serial prefix and the last five digits are the suffix Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd SER NO JP1KG12345 AK MADE IN JAPAN 33 Figure A 1 Serial Number Plate Changes 1 Page 8 33 Delete the following description 4396A STATE SAVDSTAC Saves the instrument state and the internal data arrays in the format so that the 4396B can recall Note Following settings are not saved 1 Printing resolution dpi Y Sheet orientation Form feed Top margin Left margin Softkey label printing Page 8 81 Figure 8 17 Change the figure as follows A 2 Manual Changes STATE DATA wy SAVE BINARY SAVE ASCII DEFINE SAVE DATA STOR DEV DISK GRAHICS RE SAVE Define Save Data Menu FILE FILE UTIL PURGE FILE CREATE DIRECTORY CHARGE DIRECTORY COPY FILE NITIALIZE FORMAT STOR DEV DISK RETURN STOR DEV DISK Save Menu LL y
185. K Save Menu file name file name file name file name PREV FILES NEXT FILES STOR DEV DISK Re Save File Menu file name 4 file name file name file name PREV FILES NEXT FILES STOR DEV DISK rge File Menu file name file name Purge Yes No Menu file name file name PREV FILES NEXT FILES STOR DEV DISK Copy File Menu INITIALIZE DISICYES NO Initialize Yes No Menu SELECT LETTER gt SPACE BACK gt SPACE gt ERASE TITLE gt DONE STOR DEV x IDISK gt CANCEL Letter Menu CB008036 Figure B 28 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Key Softkey Tree 23 Recall file name A file name file name file name PREV FILES NEXT FILES STOR DEV prem 4 Figure B 29 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Recall Key B 24 Softkey Tree Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data This section describes storage devices the save and recall functions and the information you need to save instrument states and data into files Additional information on how to save and recall instrument states is provided in the 4396B Task Reference Note The Save and keys do not access Instrument BA
186. List table list sweep ST amp SP STR amp SPN ST amp SP ST amp SP prmtr List table list points NOP Step size NOP NOP E Input Range and Default Settings D 11 Function Range Preset Value Power ON default Initialize disk format LIF DOS LIF LIF Graphics extension 3 characters ASCII data extension 3 characters TXT TXT Define Save Raw On Off Off Off Define Save Cal On Off Off Off Define Save Data On Off Off Off Define Save Mem On Off Off Off Define Save Trace On Off On On data Define Save Trace On Off On On mem 4 Function Range Preset Value Power ON default GPIB address 0 to 30 No effect No effect GPIB mode System controller Addressable No effect No effect Results of Power Loss to Battery Backup Memory Factory Setting Function Factory Setting GPIB address for 4396B 17 GPIB address for controller 21 Calibration kit definitions Factory set default See the following tables Real time clock date 12 06 1992 Analyser type Network Analyzer mode D 12 Input Range and Default Settings Predefined Calibration Kits Table D 1 3 5 mm Standard Cal Kit OFFSET OFFSET OFFSET STANDARD STANDARD co C1 C2 DELAY LOSS Zo LABEL NO TYPE x10 15F x 10 27 F Hz x10 96F Hz2 ps GQ s 0 1 SHORT 16 695 1 3 50 SHORT 2 OPEN 53 150
187. Loss Width 2 Value 2 Center Center 1 D gt beg ALF ABRE ALF ARF CENTER Frequency CENTER Frequency Fixed AMaker of Sweep Parameter of Sweep Parameter Sweep Parameter Value j 1 D Le At AMaker O At Tracking AMaker Fixed AMaker C5012040 Figure 12 19 Bandwidth Search Example Analyzer Features 12 31 Peak Definition The search function provides the define peak feature which specifies the properties of the peaks searched for by the peak search function The define peak feature also allows the peak search function to discriminate peaks from noise The peak definitions are different for the network analyzer mode and the spectrum analyzer mode Peak Definition for Network Analyzer The following parameters are used in the peak definition for the network measurement Peak polarity positive or negative m AX AY gradient m Threshold value The search functions search for a peak where the parameters of the peak match the following conditions Bray lt min AyL Ayr and Threshold lt Peak Amplitude Value Where Ayr Ayr the difference in amplitude value between a peak and the adjacent measurement points on both sides That is the search functions search for a peak where the gradient is greater than AY AX and the amplitude is greater than the threshold
188. M cos and the second value is the imaginary part M sin where M magnitude LIN MAG PHASE CIRF LIN Displays a readout of the linear magnitude and the phase of the marker Marker magnitude values are expressed in units and phase values in degrees LOG MAG PHASE CIRF LOG Displays the logarithmic magnitude value and the phase of the marker Magnitude values are expressed in dB and phase values in degrees R jX RX Converts the marker values into rectangular form The complex impedance values of the active marker are displayed in terms of resistance reactance and equivalent capacitance or inductance The normalized impedance Zo for characteristic impedance other than 50 can be selected see Calibration menu Network Analyzer In Chapter 5 for more information G jB GB Displays the complex admittance values of the marker in rectangular form The marker values are displayed in terms of conductance in Siemens susceptance and equivalent capacitance or inductance SWR PHASE CIRF SWR Displays the SWR and phase of the marker Magnitude values are expressed in dB and phase values in degrees Instrument State Block Recall The instrument state block keys and associated menus control channel independent system functions These include controller modes analyzer addresses real time clock limit lines and limit testing Instrument BASIC beeper prin
189. MENU SWPT LINF LOGF LISTIPOWE ee 6 4 LINEAR 6 4 LOG SWEEP 2 6 4 LIST SWEEP 6 4 POWER SWEEP 2 6 4 LIST TABLE o 6 4 EDIT LIST EDITLIST o 6 4 SEGMENT 6 4 EDIT SEDI a aaa aaa 2 6 4 DELETE SDEL 2 6 4 ADD AO 6 4 CLEAR LIST 6 5 LIST DONE EDITDONE 6 5 Sweep menu Spectrum Analyzer 6 6 SWEEP TIME 6 6 SWEEP TIME AUTO man SWETAUTO e 6 6 SWEEP TIME 5 6 6 SAMPLING MEL 6 7 SAMPLING NORMAL repet REPTSMP OFFION MN 6 7 DISPLAY POINT MEE VV 6 7 NUMBER of POINTS POIN e 6 7 SWEEP TYPE MENU a 6 7 LINEAR SWEEP MV 6 7 SWEEP TYPE LIN FREQ LINF Ce k k c t t t eee 6 7 LIST SWEEP MM VV 6 8 LIST EREQ SWPT LIST MEN 6 8 LIST TABLE MEE 6 8 EDIT LIST EDITLIST e 6 8 SEGMENT 6 8 Contents 12 EDIT SEDI oe t s ot s ot t oon 6 8 DELETE SDEL oe t s ot s ot t oon 6 8 ADD SADD os otot 6 8 CLEAR LIST CLEL 2 s s s cocoes s osos sos oe se s ee 6 8 LIST DONE EDITDONE 2 2 6 8 Clear list menu Network Analyzer Spect
190. MKRA gt CNTR STEP gt CENTER MKRA CENTER PEAK gt CENTER 5006009 Figure 6 10 Center Menu Toggles CENTER step policy AUTO Sets the step policy to be 1 2 5 step MAN Sets the step policy to linear step frequency sweep only CENTER STEP SIZE CNTS Changes the step size for the center frequency function MKR CNTR STEP MKRCSTE Changes the CENTER step size to the marker s sweep parameter value MKRA CNTR STEP MKRDCSTE Changes the CENTER step size to the difference between the marker and the delta marker values MKR CENTER MKRCENT Changes the CENTER to the marker s sweep parameter value When the CROSS CHAN under is turned ON the CENTER of the inactive channel is changed MKRSA CENTER MKRDCENT Changes the CENTER to the difference between the marker and the delta marker values 6 22 Sweep Block PEAK CENTER PFAKCENT Searches for a peak using the marker and then changes the CENTER to the sweep parameter value of that peak Sweep Block 6 23 5 AN When this key is pressed SPAN becomes the active function and the following menu is displayed Span menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer FULL SPAN ZERO SPAN MKRA SPAN Figure 6 11 Span Menu FULL SPAN FULL SPAN FULS Sets the SPAN to the maximum range The maximum range depends on the analyzer mode The following table shows the maximum range
191. MORE SENT RETURN SP off BENZ 3 Color Adjust DISPLAY PENS J ALLOCATION y rn PEN4 INSTRUMENT PENS HALF INSTR HALF BASIC PEN 6 ALI RETURN BASIC RETURN BASIC LSTATUS RETURN RETURN DEFAULT COLORS ADJUST SAVE L DISPLAY COLORS FREQUENCY RECALE BLANK COLORS RETURN RETURN Display Menu Adjust Display Menu CB005035 Figure B 5 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Display Key B 4 Softkey Tree AUTO SCALE SCALE DIV REFERENCE POSITION REFERENCE VALUE MKR REFERENCE SCALE FOR DATA DAM SCALE COUPLE ELEC DELAY MENU MAKER DELAY ELECTRICAL DELAY PHASE OFFSET RETURN 005011 Figure B 6 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Scale Ref Key for Network Analyzer ATTEN AUTO man ATTEN SCALE DIV REFERENCE VALUE gt REFERENCE SCALE FOR DATA D amp M SCALE COUPLE MAX MIXER LEVEL C5005010 Figure B 7 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Format Key for Spectrum Analyzer Softkey Tree 5 Bw Avg AVERAGING EBAGING AVERAGING on OFF AVERAGING FACTOR IF BW GROUP DELY APERTURE 2 05000508 Figure B 8 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Bw Avg Key for Network Analyzer AVERAGING RESTART AVERAGING OFF on AVERAGING FACTOR HES BW AUTO man RES BW RBW SPAN RATIO VBW TYPE LIN VIDEO BW 250005035
192. MT ADMIT 5 14 aging 10 7 altitude 10 23 Am 11 7 amplitude characteristics 10 9 amplitude fidelity 10 11 AMPLITUDE OFFSET LIMIAMPO 8 14 amplitude range 10 9 10 14 ANALYZER TYPE 5 5 5 6 ANALYZER TYPE 5 7 Ap 11 7 aperture 12 14 arbitrary impedance 5 60 12 44 ARBITRARY IMPEDANCE STDT ARBI 5 60 ascii save 8 33 ATTEN ATT 5 28 ATTEN AUTO man ATTAUTO ON OFF 5 28 attenuator 12 8 attenuator 2 7 ATTENUATOR PORT 1 ATTP1 6 15 ATTENUATOR PORT 2 ATTP2 6 16 attenuators 6 15 auto attenuator 5 28 AUTOREC C 4 Index 2 auto recall C 4 AUTO SCALE AUTO 5 26 auto scaling 5 26 AUX OFFSET VALUE DATAOVAL 5 19 average continuous power 10 11 averaging 5 30 5 32 12 12 averaging 12 5 12 8 AVERAGING FACTOR CAVERFACT 5 30 5 32 averaging ON Avg 2 8 AVERAGING on OFF AVER ON OFF 5 32 AVERAGING on OFF AVER ON OFF 5 30 AVERAGING RESTART AVERREST 5 30 5 32 Avg 2 8 B B MEAS B 5 5 5 7 BACKGROUND INTENSITY BACI 5 21 BACK SPACE 8 7 Back Space 4 2 BACK SPACE 5 25 basic screen 5 19 battery backup D 1 Battery Backup 10 20 beep done 8 11 BEEP DONE ON off BEEPDONE ON OFF 8 11 beeper 8 4 BEEPER MENU 8 4 beep fail 8 13 BEEP FAIL on OFF BEEPFAIL ON OFF 8 13 beep warning 8 11 BEEP WARN on OFF BEEPWARN ONJOFF 8 11 block 1 1 block diagram 12 2 B R MEAS BR 5 5 BRIGHTNESS CBRI 5 24 Bu
193. Main Coupler Coupler Output i Output incident incident Reflected Reflected a Ideal Coupler b Actual Coupler 05012036 Figure 12 23 Directivity Analyzer Features 12 39 However an actual coupler is not perfect Figure 12 23 b A small amount of the incident signal appears at the coupled output due to leakage as well as to reflection from the termination in the coupled arm Also reflections from the main coupler output connector appear at the coupled output adding uncertainty to the signal reflected from the device The figure of merit for how well a coupler separates forward and reverse waves is directivity The greater the directivity of the device the better the signal separation Directivity is the vector sum of all leakage signals appearing at the analyzer receiver input due to the inability of the signal separation device to separate incident and reflected waves and to residual reflection effects of test cables and adapters between the signal separation device and the measurement plane The error contributed by directivity is independent of the characteristics of the test device and it usually produces the major ambiguity in measurements of low reflection devices Source Match Source match is defined as the vector sum of signals appearing at the analyzer receiver input due to the impedance mismatch at the test device looking back into the source Source match is degraded by adapters and extra cables A non perfec
194. Menu Network Analyzer WIDTH FUNCTION SEARCH IN WIDSIN SEARCH OUT WIDSOUT WIDTHS on OFF WIDT ON OFF WIDTH VALUE WIDV Peak definition menu Network Analyzer THRESHOLD THRESHOLD on OFF PKTHRE ON OFF THRESHOLD VALUE PKTHVAL MKR THRESHOLD MKRTHRE PEAK POLARITY PEAK PLRTY POS neg PKPOL POS NEG PEAK DELTA PEAK DELTA AX PKDLTX PEAK DELTA AY PKDLTY DELTA MKRPKD Peak definition menu Spectrum Analyzer THRESHOLD 7 16 7 16 7 16 7 16 7 16 7 16 7 17 7 18 7 18 7 18 7 18 7 18 7 18 7 18 7 18 7 18 7 18 7 18 7 19 7 19 7 19 7 19 7 19 7 19 7 20 7 20 7 20 7 20 7 20 7 20 7 21 7 21 7 21 7 21 7 21 7 21 7 21 7 21 7 21 7 21 7 21 7 23 7 23 Contents 17 THRESHOLD on OFF PKTHREON OFF 7 23 THRESHOLD VALUE PKTHVAL 7 23 MKR THRESHOLD MKRTHRE 7 23 PEAK DEF AY PKDLTY 7 23 Search range menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer s s s s s 5 2 8 7 24 SEARCH RANGE a 7 24 PART SRCH on OFF PARS ON OFF 7 24 MKRA SEARCH RNG 5 5 7 24 MKR LEFT RNG 7 24 MKR RIGHT RNG SEARSTRR 7 24 Utility menu Spectrum Analyzer eee ee 2 7 25 MARKER LIST MM 1 25 MKR LIST on OFF MKRL ON I OFF MEN 1 25 ST
195. N POSITIVE NEG PRAK ANALYZER SAMPLE TYPE RETURN Detection Menu Spectrum Input Port Menu NETWORK ANALYZER SPECTRUM ANALYZER Analyzer Type Menu 05005034 Figure 5 1 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Meas Key for Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Block 5 3 NETWORK ej B R R A B CONVERSION CONVERSION GFF Z Bell ZTS RG 1 5 OFF gt CONVERSI N S PARAMETERS ANALYZER TYPE Nos Network Input Port Menu Refl FWD 511 AIR Trans FWD 521 18 6 Trans REV 512 B R Refi REV 522 A R CONVERSION MORE 4xPHASE S PHASE RETURN RETURN NETWORK ANALYZER SPECTRUM ANALYZER TYPE S Parameters Menu When an S para Test Set is connected ANALYZER Analyzer Type Menu CB005033 Figure 5 2 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Meas Key for Network Analyzer 5 4 Measurement Block Input port menu Network Analyzer NETWORK MEASUREMENT
196. N OFF shows that either ON or OFF can be used as a parameter COUC ON OFF means COUC ON or COUC OFF m 1 7 shows that numerical 1 2 3 4 5 6 and 7 can be used as a parameter SMKR 1 7 ON means SMKR 1 ON SMKR 2 ON SMKR 3 ON SMKR 4 ON SMKR 5 ON SMKR 6 ON and SMKR 7 ON For more information on GPIB commands see the 4396B GPIB Command Reference Sweep Block 6 1 SEGMENT gt SWEEP TIME MKR STARTE Sweep gt AUTO mani STOF SWEEP TIME NUMBER of POINTS hina POWER RETURN RES MORE NORMAL Tepe on L y NUMBER of START POINTS STOP SWEEP TYPE CENTER MEN Y SPAN SWEEP TYPE BE RETURN STEREO SEGMENT E a LIST y SEGMENT EDI Segment Menu DELETE ADD CLEAR LIST LEAR LIST No ONE RETURN Clear List Menu Sweep Menu Softkey Menus for Spectrum Analyzer
197. ND 4 DELAY THRU 0 1 13x10 75 THRU 5 LOAD 0 1 13x 10 75 SLIDING 6 LOAD 0 1 13x 108 75 LOWBAND 7 SHORT 17 544 1 13x10 75 SHORT F 8 OPEN 41 40 5 17 544 1 13x10 75 OPENIF Input Range and Default Settings Predefined Standard Class Assignments Table D 5 Standard Class Assignments Table 7 mm and 3 5 mm CLASS A B D E F G STANDARD CLASS LABEL Sita 2 OPEN S11B 1 SHORT Suc 3 LOAD S224 2 OPEN Soon 1 SHORT S22c 3 LOAD Forward Transmission 4 THRU Reverse Transmission 4 THRU Forward Match 4 THRU Reverse Match 4 THRU Response 1 2 4 RESPONSE Response amp Isolation 1 2 4 RESPONSE Table D 6 Standard Class Assignments Table 50 2 Type N CLASS A B D E F G STANDARD CLASS LABEL S114 2 8 OPENS 117 SHORTS Suc 3 LOAD S224 2 8 OPENS Soop 1 7 SHORTS S22c 3 LOAD Forward Transmission 4 THRU Reverse Transmission 4 THRU Forward Match 4 THRU Reverse Match 4 THRU Response 1 7 2 8 4 RESPONSE Response amp Isolation 1 7 2 8 4 RESPONSE Input Range and Default Settings 0 15 D 16 Table D 7 Standard Class Assignments Table 75 Type N CLASS A B G STANDARD CLASS LABEL Sua 2 8 OPENS Sip 1 7 SHORTS Stic 3 LOAD So2A 2 8 OPENS 522 1 7 SHORTS S220 3
198. NE Limit Line Entry menu IBASIC Menu Step Continue Run Pause Stop Edit q ASSIGN Hp4396 OUTPUT Hp4396 ENTER Hp4396 END GOTO LINE RECALL LINE END EDIT COMMAND ENTRY LY SELECT LETTER SPACE BACK SPACE ERASE TELE DONE CANCEL CAT SAVE RE SAVE PURGE INITIALIZE MSI INTERNAL SCRATCH RENumber LIST COMMAND ENTRY user define user define CLEAR W O RESE BEEP DONE ON off BEEP WARN on OFF RETURN Beeper Menu CB008037 Figure 8 1 Softkey Menus Accessed from the System Key Instrument State Block 8 3 System Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer IBASIC MEMORY PARTITION CLOCK BEEPER LIMIT TESTING SERVICE FUNCTION 8 4 Instrument State Block yo IBASIC da Menu gp o ZEE MEMORY PARTITION Meno SET CLOCK BEEPER MENU LIMIT MENU SERVICE MENU Figure 8 2 System Menu IBASIC Displays the m
199. NOISE HZ Display unit dBm dB V Volts Watts Typical dynamic range Specifications 10 9 Sensitivity Harmonic Distortion Order Inter modulation Distortion 40 50 60 10 80 90 100 Dynamic Range dB 110 Input Attenuator 10dB 10 MHz lt Frequency lt 1 GHz 120 80 0 60 50 40 30 20 10 Input Level dBm 5010907 Figure 10 6 Typical Dynamic Range at S input Sensitivity 2nd Harmonic Distortion 3rd Order Inter modulation Distortion 10 MHz lt Frequency lt 1 GHz 120 70 60 50 40 30 20 0 l L 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 Inout Level dBm C50100912 Figure 10 7 Typical Dynamic Range at R A and B inputs Spurious responses Second harmonic distortion gt 10 MHz 35 dBm mixer 2 lt 70 dBe lt 10 MHz 35 dBm mixer input 60 dBc Third order inter modulation distortion each input mixer level of two tones 30 dBm separation gt 20 kHz 10 10 Specifications gt 10 MHZ ni lt 75 dBc lt 10 MHZ 0 ee e eee e e e e ens 65 dBc Other spurious 2 30 dBm mixer input offset gt 1 2 lt 70 Residual response gt 3 MHz 0 dB attenua
200. PAN 6 24 LIST on OFF MKRL ON OFF 7 25 1 26 MKR ON DATA MKRO DATA MEMO 7 3 MKR REFERENCE MKRREF 7 10 MKR AMP OFS MKRAMPO 8 14 mkr function 7 10 MKRSA CENTER MKRDCENT 6 22 MKR TIME on OFF ON OFF 7 25 7 26 MKR CENTER MKRCENT 6 22 7 10 MKR CNTR STEP MKRCSTE 6 22 MKR DELAY MKRDELA 5 27 MKR LEFT RNG SEARSTRL 7 24 MKR MIDDLE MKRMIDD 8 16 MKR OFFSET MKROFS 5 19 MKR PEAK DELTA MKRPKD 7 21 MKR REFERENCE MKRREF 5 27 5 28 MKR RIGHT RNG SEARSTRR 7 24 MKR START MKRSTAR 7 10 MKR STOP MKRSTOP 6 11 6 13 7 10 MKR SWP PARAM MKRSWPRM 8 15 MKR THRESHOLD MKRTHRE 7 21 7 23 MKR Z00M MKRZM 7 10 M 11 7 4 2 MODIFY MODI1 5 40 modify cal kit 5 40 MODIFY COLORS 5 21 modifying calibration kit 12 43 MORE 6 12 M 11 7 MSI INTERNAL 8 7 11 7 multiple phase 5 10 multiplexer switching uncertainty 11 7 N N 50 ohm CALK N50 5 39 N 75 ohm CALK N75 5 39 Neg 2 8 negative peak 5 11 negative peak detection ON Neg 2 8 NEG PEAK DET NEG 5 11 network analyzer 5 8 NETWORK ANALYZER NA 5 8 NETWORK MEAS AR 5 5 network measurement 5 5 network measurement basics 12 10 NEXT FILES 8 37 8 38 8 42 NEXT PAGE NEXP 8 30 next peak 7 18 NEXT PEAK SEANPK 7 18 NEXT PEAK LEFT SEANPKL 7 18 NEXT PEAK RIGHT SEANPKR 7 18 Nh
201. PRINT STANDARD PRINT COPY ABORT ene COPY SKEY COLOR on OFF PRINT COLOR COPY TIME FIXED on OFF DPI PRINT O TOP MARGIN SETUP LEFT MARGIN ORIENT DEFAULT PORTRAIT SETUP MORE Print Setup Menu 1 UES COPY TIME VALUES Y TIME OPERATING PARAMETERS NENNEN NEXT CAL KIT STANDARD gt DEFINITION DEFINITION Y gt PREV LIST SWEEP STD NO 1 p PAGE TABLE STD NO RESTORE LIMIT TEST STD NO 3 DISPLAY TABLE gt STD NO 4 STD NO 5 Screen Menu RETURN STD NO 6 STD NO 7 Copy Menu STD NO 8 CLASS ASSIGNMENT RETURN Copy Cal Kit Menu DISPLAY LIST DISP MODE ST amp SP CIR amp SPAN RETURN Copy List Sweep Menu DISPLAY LIST DISP MODE UPR 8 LWR MID amp DLT RETURN Copy Limit Test Menu Network Analyzer Only CB008038 Figure B 27 Softkey Menus Accessed from the key B 22 Softkey Tree Save STATE DATA ONLY SAVE BINARY SAVE ASCH DEFINE SAVE DATA STOR DEV DISK GRAPHICS 4396A STATE RE SAVE DATA TRACE on OFF MEM TRACE RAW on OFF CAL on OFF DATA on OFF MEM on OFF on OFF RETURN Define Save Date Menu FILE FILE UTILITIES E PURGE FILE CREATE DIRECTORY CHARGE DIRECTORY COPY FILE INITIALIZE FORMAT STOR DEV DISK RETURN STOR DEV DIS
202. R DEV DISK Figure 8 21 Purge File Menu file name PURG Selects a file to be purge from the disk or the RAM disk PREV FILES Displays the previous file names in the softkey label to purge file NEXT FILES Displays the next file names in the softkey label to purge file STOR DEVI STODDISK STODMEMO Selects between the flexible disk drive and the RAM disk memory as the storage device DISK shows the built in flexible disk is selected and MEMORY shows the RAM disk memory is selected This setting does not change even when the line power is cycled or the Preset key is pressed Instrument State Block 8 37 Purge Yes No Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer Save FILE UTILITIES PURGE Tile name FILE file name Figure 8 22 Purge Yes No Menu PURGE YES Removes the file and returns to the previous menu NO Returns to the previous menu without purging the file 8 38 Instrument State Block Gave Initialize Yes No Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer Save FILE UTILITIES INITIALIZE INITIALIZE DISK YES NO Figure 8 23 Initialize Yes No Menu INITIALIZE DISK YES Initializes the disk or the RAM disk When the flexible disk is selected for initialization DISK is displayed in the softkey label When the RAM disk memory is selected MEMORY is displayed NO Returns to the previous menu without initialize t
203. RANS Thru Standard xx THRU Meng 1 FWD MATCH THR TRANS DONE ISOLATION OMIT ISOLATION FWD ISOL N SOEN STB ISOEATION DONE DONE Only for type N calkits or user calkit 2 PORT CAL Only for user calkit CB005020 Figure 5 28 One Path 2 Port Cal Menu REFLECT N REFL Start the reflection calibration for one path 2 port calibration and displays the menu that measures one port standards for reflection calibration 511 OPEN CLASS11A When the cal kit is a Y mm or 3 5 mm cal kit this softkey measures the OPEN standard and then the softkey label is underlined Or this softkey displays the open standard menu that selects an OPEN standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 Q or 75 Q type N SHORT CLASS11B When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3 5 mm cal kit this softkey measures the short standard and then the softkey label is underlined Or this softkey displays the short standard menu that selects a short standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 Q or 75 type N LOAD CLASS11C When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3 5 mm cal kit this softkey measures the load standard and then the softkey label is underlined Or this softkey displays the load standard menu that selects a load standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 Q or 75 type N TRANSMISSION CAL ISOLATION REFLECT N DONE REFD Completes the reflection calibration for the one path 2 port calibration
204. SA How GPIB Works The GPIB uses a party line bus structure in which up to 15 devices can be connected on one contiguous bus The interface consists of 16 signal lines and 6 grounded lines in a shielded cable With this cabling system many different types of devices including instruments computers plotters and printers can be connected in parallel Every GPIB device must be capable of performing one or more of the following interface functions Talker A talker is a device capable of sending device dependent data when addressed to talk There can be only one active talker at any given time Examples of this type of device are voltmeters counters and tape readers The analyzer is a talker when it sends trace data or marker information over the bus Listener A listener is a device capable of receiving device dependent data when addressed to listen There can be any number of active listeners at any given time Examples of this type of device are printers power supplies and signal generators The analyzer is a listener when it is controlled over the bus by a computer Controller A controller is a device capable of managing the operation of the bus and addressing talkers and listeners There can be only one active controller at any time Examples of controllers include desktop computers and minicomputers In a multiple controller system active control can be passed between controllers but there can only be one system controller that
205. SET DELAY Specifies the one way electrical delay from the measurement reference plane to the standard in seconds s In a transmission standard offset delay is the delay from plane to plane Delay can be calculated from the precise physical length of the offset the permittivity constant of the medium and the speed of light OFFSET LOSS OFFSET LOSS Specifies energy loss due to skin effect along a one way length of coaxial cable offset The value of loss is entered as ohms nanosecond or Giga ohms second at 1 GHz CHARACTERISTIC IMPEDANCE OFFSET ZO OFSZ Specifies the characteristic impedance of the coaxial cable offset Note This is not the impedance of the standard itself Y STD OFFSET DONE Completes procedure to specify offset value of standard Measurement Block 5 61 Standard menu Network Analyzer STD TYPE OPEN 1 C2 SPECIFY OFFSET EABEL STD STD DONE Cal CAL KIT Specity Offset STD Not SPECIFY MODIFY OFFSET STD Ne 2 c MAREL DEFINE gt STD DONE STANDARD STD 3 gt GEFINED STB No 4 LOAD 1 STD 5 gt SPECIFY OFFSET LABEL STD No 6 gt EFG gt STD No gt STD No g gt DELAY SPECIFY OFFSET LABEL STD STD DONE DEFINED ARBITRARY IMP
206. SIC programs I Instrument BASIC has its own menus under the key for accessing the Y built in disk drive and the RAM disk memory See Using HP Instrument BASIC with the 4396B for detail Storage Devices The analyzer supports two storage devices a built in flexible disk drive and a RAM disk memory The flexible disk drive is suited to storing large numbers of files and long term data storage RAM disk is suited to storing tentative data and instrument states and to store or get data quickly Note Use the built in flexible disk to store important data because the RAM disk data I is lost when the power is turned off Disk Requirements The analyzer s disk drive uses a 720 Kbyte or 1 44 Mbyte 3 5 inch micro flexible disk See the System accessories available in Chapter 9 for disk part numbers Disk Formats The analyzer s built in disk drive can access both LIF logical interchange format and DOS formatted disks The disk drive and the RAM disk memory can also initialize a new disk in either LIF or DOS format Note that the analyzer can initalize 1 44 Mbyte disks only The following list shows the applicable DOS formats for the analyzer m 720 Kbyte 80 tracks double sided 9 sectors track m 1 44 Mbyte 80 tracks double sided 18 sectors track Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data 1 RAM Disk Memory Capacity The RAM disk memory capacity is 512 Kbyte The RAM disk memory capacity can be changed
207. STD DONE ISOL N CAL DONE RESPONSE 005016 Figure 5 24 Response and Isolation Menu RESPONSE RAIRESP Displays the response standard menu that measures the standard for response calibration ISUL N STD RAIISOL Displays the menu that performs an isolation measurement calibration DONE RESP ISOL N CAL RAID Completes the response and isolation calibration and computes and stores the error coefficients The correction menu is displayed with CORRECTION ON Measurement Block 5 45 S11 1 Port Menu Network Analyzer S11 1 PORT CAL 5 46 Measurement Block Cal Y CALIBRATION MENU S14 Open Standard OPEN Menu Y 11 1 PORT SHORT 1 PORT CAL Load standard Menu LOAD Short Standard DONE Menu Only for Type N calkits or user calkit Only for user calkit CB005017 Figure 5 25 S11 1 Port Menu 511 OPEN CLASS11A When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3 5 mm cal kit this softkey measures the OPEN standard and then the softkey label is underlined Or this softkey displays the open standard menu that selects an OPEN standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 Q or 75 Q type N SHORT CLASS11B When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3 5 mm cal kit this softkey measures the short standard and then the softkey label is underlined Or t
208. Selects channel 1 memory trace and limit line for color modification and displays the color adjust menu CH2 DATA COLO CH2D Selects channel 2 data trace for color modification and displays the color adjust menu CH2 MEM LIMIT LINE COLO CH2M Selects channel 2 memory and the reference line and limit line for color modification and displays the color adjust menu GRATICULE COLO GRAT Selects the graticule for color modification and displays the color adjust menu WARNING COLO WARN Selects the warning annotation for color modification and displays the color adjust menu TEXT MARKER COLO TEXT Selects all the non data text for color modification for example softkey labels and displays the color adjust menu IBASIC COLO IBT Selects the text on the BASIC screen for color modification and displays the color adjust menu MORE in this menu displays softkeys to select a numbered pen for color modification The pens are used by the Instrument BASIC graphic commands PEN 1 COLO PEN1 Selects pen 1 for color modification and displays the color adjust menu PEN 2 COLO PEN2 Selects pen 2 for color modification and displays the color adjust menu PEN 3 COLO PEN3 Selects pen 3 for color modification and displays the color adjust menu PEN 4 COLO PEN4 Selects pen 4 for color modification and displays the color adjust menu Measurement Block 5 23 SAVE COLOR RECALL COLOR 5 24 Measurement Block
209. T LABEL KIT LABK Displays the letter menu to define a label for a new calibration kit This label appears in the CAL KIT softkey label in the correction menu and the MODIFY label in the select cal kit menu It is saved with calibration data KIT DONE MODIFIED KITD Completes the procedure to define user cal kit Standard Type Coefficient and Class A standard is a specific well defined physical device used to determine systematic errors A standard type is one of five basic types that define the form or structure of the model to be used with that standard for example SHORT or LOAD Standard coefficients are numerical characteristics of the standards used in the model selected A standard class is a grouping of one or more standards that determine which standards are used in a particular calibration procedure For more information on Modifying calibration Kits See Modifying Calibration Kits in Chapter 12 5 60 Measurement Block Specify offset menu Network Analyzer Cal KIT m STB MODIFY STD No 2 ram DEFINE OFFSET STANDARD STD No 3 SHORT SPECIFY OFFSET OFFSET LOSS gt LOAD STD No 5 OFFSET 20 STD No 4 STD No 6 PEUNI STD OFFSET DONE STD No Z ARBITRARY IMPEDANCE STD No 8 Figure 5 31 Specify Offset Menu OFFSET DELAY OFF
210. T PEAK PEAK NEXT PEAK MI NEXT PEAK RIGHT MULTIPLE SIGANL PEAKS E on OFF THRESHOLD SEARCH BEAK DEF on OFF PEAKS ALL MENU THRESHOLD PEAKS SUB MER VALUE RIGHT gt RETURN PEAKS _ THRESHOLD LEFT Peak Menu PEAK PER PEAK DEF MENU RETURN SEARCH TRK Peak Definition Menu RETURN PART SREH on SIGANL TRK on OFF MKRA gt SUB MKR 1 SEARCH RNG SEARCH TRK on OFF MKR LEFT RNG SEARCH RANGE MENU RIGHT RNG RETURN Search Menu Search Range Menu Sub Maker Menu CB007018 Figure 7 7 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Search Key for the Network Analyzer 7 12 Marker Block TARGET MULTIPLE PEAKS SEARCH PEAKS ALL PEAKS RIG PEAKS LEFT PEAK DEF MENU SEARCH TRK on OFF RETURN WIDTHS SEARCH on OFF SEARCH RANGE MENU Search Menu PART SRCH en OFF MKR gt SEARCH ENG MKR gt RNG MKR RIGHT RNG RETURN Search Range Menu C5007016 NEXT PEAK NEXT PEAK LEFT NEXT RIGHT SIGANL TRK eon OFE DEF MENU SUB MKR Peak Menu TARGET SEARCH LEFT SEARCH RIGHT THRESHOLD en GFF THRESHOLD VALUE MKH THRESHOLD PEAK PERTY POS neg PEAK DEF AX PEAK DEF AY MKR PEAK DELTA RETURN Peak Definition Menu SUB MKR 1 SUB MKR
211. TINT TINT 5 19 5 19 5 19 5 19 5 19 5 19 5 19 5 19 5 19 5 19 5 20 5 20 5 20 5 20 5 20 5 21 5 21 5 21 5 21 5 21 5 21 5 21 5 22 5 22 5 22 5 22 5 22 5 22 5 22 5 22 5 22 5 22 5 22 5 22 5 22 5 28 5 28 5 28 5 28 5 28 5 28 5 24 5 24 Contents 5 BRIGHTNESS CBRI COLOR COLOR DEFAULT COLOR RESET COLOR RSCO Letter menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer ENTER CHARACTERS SELECT LETTER SPACE BACK SPACE ERASE TITLE DDNE CANCEL Scale Ref Scale reference menu Network Analyzer AUTO SCALING AUTO SCALE AUTO SCALE DIV SCAL REFERENCE REFERENCE POSITION REFP REFERENCE VALUE MKR REFERENCE MKRREF SCALE FOR SCAF DATA MEMO SCALE COUPLING D amp M SCALE SCAC ELECTRICAL DELAY ELEC DELAY MENU MKR DELAY MKRDELA ELECTRICAL DELAY ELED PHASE OFFSET PHASE OFFSET PHAO Scale reference menu Spectrum Analyzer AUTO ATTENUATOR ATTEN AUTO man ATTAUTO ON OFF ATTEN SCALE DIV SCAL REFERENCE AM REFERENCE VALUE REFV MKR REFERENCE MKRREF SCALE FOR SCAF DATA SCALE COUPLING D amp M SCALE 1 SCAC ONJOFF MAX MIXER LEVEL MIXER LEVEL MAXMLEV Contents 6 5 24 5 24 5 24 5 24 5 25 5 25 5 25 5 25 5 25 5 25 5 25 5 25 5 26 5 26 5 26 5 26 5 26 5 26 5 26 5 26 5 27 5 27 5 27 5 27 5 27 5 27 5 27 5 27 5
212. TRUM NOISE UNIT dBm dBV dBuV WATT VOLT 25005007 Figure B 4 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Format Key for Network Analyzer Softkey Tree B 3 DUAL CHAN SELECT on OFF LETTER Display aon SPACE I BACK am ERASE MEMORY DONE MEMORY DATA HOLD CANCEL OFF Title Menu HOLD OFF MAX INTENSITY RRR RETURN DATA MATH COLORS y DATA MATH CH1DATA DATA MEM MIN DATA MEM GHZ DATA I GAIN amp OFS GRATICULE MER OFESET WARNING UNT OFFSET MORET BRIGHTNESS AUX OFFSET TEXT RETURN MARKER COLOR GAIN m x RESET RETURN BASIC gt COLOR MORE y
213. U REV TRANS THRI REV MATCH THRU ISOLATIO i OMIT ISOLATION FWD ISOL N SOL N STD REV ISOL N SOLN STD ISOLATION DONE gt por EAE Only for type N calkits or user calkit Only for user calkit CB005019 Figure 5 27 Full 2 Port Cal Menu REFLECT N REFL Start the reflection calibration for full 2 port calibration and displays the menu that measures one port standards for reflection calibration 511 OPEN CLASS11A When the cal kit is 7 mm or 3 5 mm cal kit this softkey measures the OPEN standard and then the softkey label is underlined Or this softkey displays the open standard menu that selects an OPEN standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 Q or 75 Q type N SHORT CLASS11B When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3 5 mm cal kit SHORT measures the short standard and then SHORT is underlined Or SHORT displays the short standard menu that selects a short standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 Q or 75 Q type N TRANSMISSION CAL LOAD CLASS11C When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3 5 mm cal kit LOAD measures the load standard and then LOAD is underlined Or LOAD displays the load standard menu that selects a load standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 or 75 type N 522 OPEN CLASS22A When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3 5 mm cal kit this softkey measures the OPEN standard and then softkey label is underlined Or this so
214. U standard menu that selects the THRU standard and measures it FWD MATCH THRU FWDM Measures 511 load match and then FWD MATCH THRU is underlined If the cal kit is a user kit and two or more standards are assigned Measurement Block 5 49 ISOLATION 5 50 Measurement Block to the forward match class FWD MATCH THRU displays the THRU standard menu that selects the THRU standard and measures it REV TRANS THRU REVT Measures 515 frequency response and then REV TRANS THRU is underlined If the cal kit is a user kit and two or more standards are assigned to the reverse transmission class REV TRANS THRU displays the THRU standard menu that selects the THRU standard and measures it REV MATCH THRU REVM Measures Se2 load match and then REV MATCH THRU is underlined If the cal kit is a user kit and two or more standards are assigned to the reverse match class REV MATCH THRU displays the THRU standard menu that selects the THRU standard and measures it TRANS DONE TRAD Completes transmission calibration The error coefficients are calculated and stored Full 2 Port menu is displayed with TRANSMISSION underlined If TRANS DONE is pressed without measuring all the required standards the message CAUTION ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED is displayed ISOLATION ISOL Starts the isolation calibration and displays the menu that measures isolation OMIT ISOLATION OMII Omits correction for isolation from the
215. UBMKR 3 ON SUBMKR 4 ON SUBMKR 5 ON SUBMKR 6 ON and SUBMKR 7 ON For more information on GPIB commands see the 4396B GPIB Command Reference Marker Block 7 1 Make ON SUB MKR CLEAR SUB MKR PRESET MKRS MKR ON IDATA MKR UNCOUPLE MKR CONT k AMODE MENU 1 Maker Menu Sub Maker Menu Clear Sub Maker Menu MKR FIXED AMKR TRACKING A MKR AMODE OFF A MKR SWP PARAM FIXED A MKR VALUE FIXED 4 MKR AUX VALUE Only for network analyzer RETURN Delta mode Menu C5007017 Figure 7 1 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Marker Key 7 2 Marker Block Marker Marker menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer SUB MKR Sub Marker CLEAR SUB PRESET MKRS Clear ON 27 DATA MKR UNCOUPLE MKR ICONT AMODE MENU Only for network analyzer 25007001 Figure 7 2 Marker Menu SUB MKR SKR 1 7 ON Displays the sub marker menu that is used to turn on sub markers CLEAR MARKERS CLEAR SUB MKR SMKR 1 7 OFF Displays the sub marker menu that is used to turn off sub markers PRESET MKRS PRSMKRS Turns off all markers and cancels all setting of the marker functions ON MKRO DATA MEMO Selects a trace from data or memory to be applied for the marker values DATA Shows that the data trace is sel
216. UP DELAY a 5 13 DELAY FMT DELA c t t a 5 13 SMITH CHART a 5 13 SMITH Re Im EMT SMITH MENU 5 13 POLAR CHART e 2 2 5 14 POLAR Re Im FMT POLA MM 5 14 LINEAR MAGNITUDE 4 s s s s c r c c r s e e s s s e es 5 14 LIN MAG FMT LINM 5 14 UR 5 14 SWR FMT SWR 5 14 REAL MM VV 5 14 REAL FMT REAL VV 5 14 IMAGINARY MEE 5 14 IMAGINARY FMT IMAG e 5 14 EXPANDED PHASE 22222202022202 2 2 5 14 EXPANDED PHASE FMT EXPP MEN 5 14 ADMITTANCE CHART MEL 5 14 ADMITTANCE Re Im FMT ADMIT MENU 5 14 Format menu Spectrum Analyzer s s 5 15 SPECTRUM MEASUREMENT MNT 5 15 FORMAT SPECTRUM FMT SPECT ee t t t t x 5 15 NOISE MEASUREMENT s s c t s s a t 5 15 NOISE FMT 5 15 UNIT MM VV 5 15 UNIT dpm SAUNIT DBM s e 5 15 dBV SAUNITDBV 5 15 dB4V SAUNITDBUV 5 15 WATT SAUNITW 5 15 VOLT SAUNITV 5 15 Display menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer s s t s s s t t 5 o 5 t t 5 t n 5 17 DUAL CHANNEL MEL 5 17 DUAL CHAN on OFF DUAC ONOFF o 5 17 DATA a 5 17 DISPLAY DATA DISP DATA
217. WET Activates the sweep time function and displays the h m s softkey h m s Enters for the manual sweep time entry NUMBER of POINTS POIN Sets the number of data points per sweep Using fewer points allows a faster sweep time but the displayed trace shows less horizontal detail Using more points gives greater data density and improved trace resolution but slows the sweep In list frequency sweep the number of points displayed is the total number of frequency points for the defined list COUPLED CH ON off COUC ON OFF Toggles channel coupling of the sweep parameter values With COUPLED CH ON the preset condition both channels have the same sweep parameter values the inactive channel takes on the sweep parameter values of the active channel If the channel s analyzer modes are different the channels cannot be coupled Sweep Block 6 3 LINEAR SWEEP LOG SWEEP LIST SWEEP POWER SWEEP 6 4 Sweep Block LIST TABLE SWEEP TYPE MENU SWPT LINF LOGF LIST POWE Displays the sweep type menu Using the softkeys on this menu one of the following four sweep types can be selected for the network analyzer mode SWEEP TYPE LIN FREQ Linear frequency sweep mode LOG FREQ Logarithmic frequency sweep mode The source is stepped in logarithmic increments and the data is displayed on a logarithmic graticule LIST FREQ Frequency list mode If the list is not defined this softkey performs no function POW
218. Width Function in Chapter 12 Marker Block 7 21 Peak definition menu Network Analyzer THRESHOLD PEAK POLARITY PEAK DELTA 7 22 Marker Block 4 THRESHOLD SEARCH PEAKDEF MENU THRESHOLD VALUE MULTIPLE PEAK DEF MKR PEAKS MENU THRESHOLD PEAK PLRTY POS neg PEAK DEF AX PEAK DEF AY Xe PEAK DELT aum Figure 7 14 Peak Definition Menu for Network Analyzer THRESHOLD on OFF PKTHRE ON OFF Toggles the threshold on and off THRESHOLD VALUE PKTHVAL Sets the threshold values MKR THRESHOLD MKRTHRE Changes the threshold value to the amplitude value of the present marker position PEAK PLRTY POS neg PKPOL POS NEG Selects the peak polarity for the marker search functions PUS Selects a positive peak NEG Selects a negative peak PEAK DELTA AX PKDLTX Sets the peak delta AX value that is used to define the peak PEAK DELTA AY PKDLTY Sets the peak delta AY value that is used to define the peak MKR PEAK DELTA MKRPKD Changes the peak delta value to the smaller value of the difference of amplitude values between the present maker position and both side display points of the marker Search Peak Function Definitions for Network Measurement Peak polarity Detects either the positive or negative peak that is defined by PEAK PLRTY POS neg Threshold Detects a peak whose amplitude value is greater than or equal
219. a program 213 Init ignored A request for a measurement initiation was ignored as another measurement was already in progress Messages 5 141 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY If a lot of tasks is executed at same time memory might be insufficient for a while For example running Instrument BASIC program printing a screen and sending or receiving data array by GPIB are required at same time Please wait until finishing some tasks then execute the next task 161 Invalid block data A block data element was expected but was invalid for some reason see IEEE 488 2 7 7 6 2 For example an END message was received before the length was satisfied 141 Invalid character data Either the character data element contains an invalid character or the particular element received is not valid for the header 121 Invalid character in number An invalid character for the data type being parsed was encountered For example an alpha character in a decimal numeric or a 9 in octal data 101 Invalid character A syntax element contains a character that is invalid for that type For example a header containing an ampersand SENSE amp 154 INVALID DATE The date entered to set the real time clock is invalid Reenter correct date 112 INVALID FILE NAME GPIB only The file name for the RECALL PURGE or RE SAVE function must have a _D or _S extension for LIF format 103 Invalid separator The parser was expect
220. a separator and encountered an illegal character For example the semicolon was omitted after a program message unit RST TRIG 104 Data type error The parser recognized an unallowed data element For example numeric or string data was expected but block data was encountered 105 GET not allowed A Group Execute Trigger GET was received within a program message see IEEE 488 2 7 7 108 Parameter not allowed More parameters were received than expected for the header For example the SRE command only accepts one parameter so receiving SRE 4 16 is not allowed 109 Missing parameter Fewer parameters were received than required for the header For example the SRE command requires one parameter so receiving only SRE is not allowed 110 Command header error An error was detected in the header This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 111 through 119 Messages 19 Header separator error A character that is not a legal header separator was encountered while parsing the header For example no white space followed the header thus SRE4 is an error 112 Program mnemonic too long The header contains more than twelve characters see IEEE 488 2 7 6 1 4 1 113 Undefined header The header is syntactically correct but it is undefined for the analyzer For example XYZ is not defined for the analyzer 114 Header Suffi
221. acks the sweep frequency of the spectrum analyzer Front and Rear Panel 2 3 A 7 Spectrum Analyzer Input S 8 CAL OUT Connector This input receives the signal for the spectrum analyzer mode The input impedance is 50 0 INSTALLATION CATEGORY I This connector provides a calibration signal of Z0 MHz at 20 dBm 9 Built in Flexible Disk Drive 10 LINE Switch Stores the measurement data instrument status list sweep tables and Instrument BASIC programs The applicable disk formats are LIF logical interchange format and DOS disk operating system format Switches the power supply of 4396B ON or OFF Screen display 24 Front and Rear Panel Displays a grid on which the measurement data is plotted the currently selected measurement traces and other information describing the measurement Figure 2 2 shows the locations of the different information labels In addition to the full screen display shown in Figure 2 2 a split display is available see Display in Chapter 5 In this case information labels are provided for each half of the display The screen can also be used as the Instrument BASIC display Instrument BASIC uses either a full screen display or a half screen display below the graticule display as a text screen 5 REFERENCE 7 MARKER STATISTICS 1 ACTIVE 2 MEASURED LEVEL WIDTH VALUE CHANNEL INPUT 6 MARKER 8 SOFTKEY 4 SCALE DIV DATA READOUT LABELS euro bras 21 MESSAGE
222. al clock setting MonDayYear MONDYEAR Changes the displayed date to the month day year format DayMonYear DAYMYEAR Changes the displayed date to the day month year format Instrument State Block 8 11 Beeper Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer BEEPER BEEP WARN on OFF RETURN BEEP DONE ON off Figure 8 6 Beeper Menu BEEP DONE ON off BEEPDONE ON OFF Toggles an annunciator that sounds to indicate the completion of operations such as calibration or instrument state save BEEP DONE BEEP WARN on OFF BEEPWARN ON OFF Toggles the warning annunciator When the annunciator is oN it sounds a warning when a cautionary message is displayed BEEP WARNING 8 12 Instrument State Block System Limit Line Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer LIBET LINE System EH TEST SD OE LIMIT FAL MENU LIMIT LINE SEGMENT DEEE Limit Line Entty Menu ADD CLEAR LIST CLEAR LIST NE NO BONE LIME LINE OFFSETS Y SWE PARA OFFSET OFFSET MER 9 AMECOES RETURN RETURN CB008011 Figure 8 7 Limit Lin
223. alibration kit manuals Y Specify Class Once a standard is specified it must be assigned to a standard class This is a group of from one to seven standards that is required to calibrate for a single error term The standards within a single class are assigned to locations A through G as listed on the Standard Class Assignments Table Table 12 8 A class often consists of a single standard but may be composed of more than one standard Table 12 3 Standard Class Assignments Table CLASS A B D E F G STANDARD CLASS LABEL S114 S11B Sic 8224 S22B S220 Forward Transmission Reverse Transmission Forward Match Reverse Match Response Response amp Isolation Analyzer Features 12 45 The number of standard classes required depends on the type of calibration being performed and is identical to the number of error terms corrected Examples A response cal requires only one class and the standards for that class may include an OPEN or SHORT or THRU A 1 port cal requires three classes A full 2 port cal requires 10 classes not including two for isolation The number of standards that can be assigned to a given class may vary from none class not used to one simplest class to seven When a certain class of standards is required during calibration the analyzer will display the labels for all the standards in that class except when
224. alpha numeric string title defined by you and entered as described in Display in Chapter 5 Rear Panel Features and Connectors Figure 2 3 shows the features and connectors on the rear panel Requirements for the input signals to the rear panel connectors are provided in Chapter 10 3 vineg gt 11 10 08002002 3b F T 7 6 Figure 2 3 Analyzer Rear Panel 9 8 Front and Rear Panel 2 9 1 External Reference Input Connects an external frequency reference signal to the analyzer that is used to phase lock the analyzer for increased frequency accuracy When the analyzer is equipped with the external oven Option 1D5 this connector must be connected to REF OVEN connector The external frequency reference function is automatically enabled when a signal is connected to this input When the signal is removed the analyzer automatically switches back to its internal frequency reference 2 Internal Reference Output Connects to the frequency reference input of an external instrument to phase lock it to the analyzer 3 External Program RUN CONT Input 4 Port 5 Power 6 GPIB Interface Externally triggers RUN or CONT of the Instrument BASIC progra
225. and enter definition of the uy 85032B N 75 ohm CALK N75 Selects the 75 Q type N model USER CAL KIT USER KIT CALK USED Selects a cal kit model defined or modified by the user For information see Modifying Calibration Kits in Chapter 12 SAVE USER KIT SAVEUSEK Stores the user modified or user defined kit into memory after it has been modified MODIFY CAL Kir MODIFY 1 MODI1 Displays the modify cal kit menu where a default cal kit can be user modified PORT EXTENSION PORT EXTENSIONS Goes to the reference plane menu that extends the apparent location of the measurement reference plane or input VELOCITY FACTOR VELOCITY FACTOR VELOFACT Enters the velocity factor used by the analyzer to calculate equivalent electrical length Velocity factor should be less than 1 For example the velocity factor of Teflon Vr is CHARACTERISTIC IMPEDANCE SET ZO SETZ Sets the characteristic impedance used by the analyzer in calculating measured impedance with Smith chart markers and conversion parameters If the test set used is an 85046B test set or an 87512B Transmission Reflection Test Kit set Zo to 75 Q Characteristic impedance must be set correctly before calibration procedures are performed Measurement Block 5 41 available as accessories The models for the Cal Kits correspond to the standard calibration kits 3 5 mm 50 Q Type N 75 Q Type N Kits in Chapter 12 7mm 8503
226. arameter values and amplitude values of all markers In A mode this also lists Amarker STATISTICS on OFF MEASTAT ON OFF Calculates and displays the mean standard deviation and peak to peak values of the section of the displayed trace in the search range If Partial Search is orr the statistics are calculated for the entire trace The statistics are absolute values MKR TIME on OFF MKRTIME ON OFF Sets the x axis units to time the start point is zero and the stop point is the value of the sweep time The marker indicates the elapsed time since the sweep started This function is useful for testing a DUT s time transition characteristics at a certain fixed frequency by setting the span to zero NOISE FORM on OFF MKRNOI ON OFF Toggles the noise marker on and off This marker reads out the average noise level referenced to a 1 Hz noise power bandwidth at the marker position AMarker reads out spectrum value even if the noise form is turned on Utility menu Network Analyzer MARKER LIST STATISTICS MARKER TIME MKR LIST A Utility statisties MKR TIME on SMTH POLAR MENU B REAL IMAG LIN MAG PHASE LOG MAG PHASE Bijx GHB SWR PHASE 00 4 Figure 7 18 Utility Menu for Network Analyzer LIST on OFF MKRL ON OFF Toggles the marker list function on and off This lists the sweep parameter values and amplitude values of all mark
227. are also saved 4396A STATE SAVDSTAC Saves the instrument state and the internal data arrays in the format so that the 4396A can recall Following settings are not saved Printing resolution dpi Sheet orientation Form feed Top margin Left margin Softkey label printing RE SAVE FILE RESAVD Displays the Re save File menu used to update a file that is already saved FILE UTILITIES Displays softkeys that initializes a new disk and purges a file from a disk Instrument State Block 8 33 8 34 PURGE FILE DIRECTORY COPY FILE INITIALIZE DISK FORMAT STORAGE DEVICE Note Instrument State Block uy PURGE FILE PURG Displays the Purge File menu used to remove a file saved on the disk CREATE DIRECTORY CRED Specifies creating a new directory in a DOS format disk This function is not available for LIF files CHANGE DIRECTORY CHAD Specifies changing the current directory of a DOS format disk This function is not available for LIF files COPY FILE FILC Copies files When a file is copied between the flexible disk and the RAM disk memory the disk formats of the disk and the RAM disk memory must be same format INITIALIZE INID Displays the Initialize menu A new disk must be initialized before data is stored on it The disk can be formatted in either LIF or DOS format FORMAT DISF LIF DOS Toggles the disk format between the LIF and DOS formats that are used wh
228. as addressed to talk and an incomplete program message was received by the controller 430 Query DEADLOCKED A condition causing a deadlocked query error occurred see IEEE 488 2 6 3 1 7 For example both input buffer and output buffer are full and the analyzer cannot continue Messages 24 Index Special characters 2 7 2 8 D 4 2 f 4 2 0 2 8 AL F 12 30 AR F 12 30 1 gt 2 8 12 12 Tg 12 14 Amarker 7 5 Amode 12 30 AX 12 32 AY 12 32 12 33 4 2 1 10833A GPIB cable 1 m 9 5 10833B GPIB cable 2 m 9 5 10833C GPIB cable 3 m 9 5 10833D GPIB cable 0 5 m 9 5 10855A broadband preamplifier 9 3 1122A probe power supply 9 3 1141A differential probe 9 2 11667A power splitter 9 8 11850C D three way power splitters 9 8 11851B 50 Q type n rf cable set 9 4 11852B 50 Q to 75 Q minimum loss pad 9 4 11853A 50 Q type n adapter kit 9 4 11854A 50 0 bnc adapter kit 9 4 11855A 75 Q type n adapter kit 9 4 11856A 75 9 bnc adapter kit 9 4 11857B 75 Q type n test port return cable set 9 4 11857D 7 mm test port return cable set 9 4 11940A probe 9 2 11941A probe 9 2 11945A close field probe set 9 2 16xPHASE CONV MP16 5 10 1 MQ input adapter 9 2 1 port cal 5 38 1 8 CONV ONEDS 5 9 2 2nd IF output 2 11 2 port cal 5 38 3 3 5mm CALK APC35 5 39 4 41800A active probe 9 2 41802A 1 MQ input adapter 9 2 4396A STATE SAVDSTAC
229. asured data points If you do not select a sufficient number of points it is possible for a device to be out of specification without a limit test failure indication To avoid this be sure to specify a high enough number of points In addition if specific sweep parameter points must be checked use the list sweep features described in Sweep in Chapter so that the actual measured data points are checked Displaying Printing or Plotting Limit Test Data The list values feature in the copy menu prints or displays a table of each measured sweep parameter value The table includes limit line and limit test information if these functions are turned on If limit testing is on an asterisk is listed next to any measured value that is out of limits If the limit lines are on and other listed data allows sufficient space the following information is also displayed m Upper limit and lower limit m The margin by which the device passes or fails the nearest limit For more information about the list values feature see Copy Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer in Chapter 8 Results of Plotting or Printing the Display with Limit Lines ON If limit lines are on they are shown when you print or plot the display If limit testing 15 ON the PASS or FAIL message is included as well Note An example of a measurement using limit lines and limit testing is provided in I the User s Guide Y Y A sample pr
230. ata memory offset gain x data memory offset Data hold Maximum hold Minimum hold Marker Number of markers Main marker 1 for each channel Sub marker 7 for each channel Amarker 2 1 for each channel Storage 2 Built in flexible disk drive Volatile RAM disk memory Disk format 2 LIF DOS Battery Backup Backup time 72 hours s p c Recharge time hour s p c GPIB Interface IEEE 488 1 1987 IEEE 488 2 1987 IEC 625 and JIS C 1901 1987 standards compatible Interface function SH1 T6 TEO L4 LEO SR1 PPO DTI C2 C3 C4 C11 E2 Data transfer formats ASCII 32 and 64 bit IEEE 754 Floating point format DOS PC format 82 bit IEEE with byte order reversed 10 20 Specifications Parallel interface Interface
231. ata memory the difference data memory or summation data memory when the data math function is selected In addition this function multiplies the ratio difference or summation by a constant or subtracts a constant from them Data Trace Arrays The results are stored in the data trace arrays It is important to note those marker values and marker functions are all derived from the data trace arrays Limit testing is also performed on this array The data trace arrays are accessible via GPIB or using the internal disk drive or the RAM disk memory Memory Trace Arrays If the data to memory operation is performed the data trace arrays are copied into the memory trace arrays data arrays are also copied into the memory array at same time These arrays are accessible using the internal disk drive or the RAM disk memory These arrays are also output via GPIB but data cannot be input into these arrays via GPIB Scaling These operations prepare the formatted data for display on the CRT This is where the appropriate reference line position reference line value and scale calculations are performed See Scale Ref in Chapter 5 in this chapter 12 6 Analyzer Features Data Processing for Spectrum Measurement STEPPET LOCAL FFT s R DECIMATION VIDEO FILTER A n ABS LEVEL B WINDOWING FILTER CORRECTION VBW LOG VIDEO LOG FILTER SWEPT LOCAL
232. c t t e c t o s Terminator Knob 1 2 O KEY 18 KEY 19 5 Measurement Block ee Input port menu Network Analyzer t st t st t st t t t t t t t t t t t t t NETWORK MEASUREMENT st st t st e NETWORK A R MEAS AR BAR MEAS BR R 5 5 B MEASB CONVERSION OFF S PARAMETERS ANALYZER TYPE S parameter menu Network Analyzer e e S PARAMETER MEASUREMENT Refl FWD 511 MEAS 511 Contents 2 I A cO cO 00 00 LS p2 2 N p2 pO DO DO 5 8 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Trans FWD 521 B R MEASS21 5 6 Trans REV 512 B R MEASS12 2 5 6 Refl REV 522 A R MEAS S22 5 6 CONVERSION 5 6 INPUT PORTS 5 6 ANALYZER 5 6 Input port menu Spectrum Analyzer 5 7 INPUT PORTS MEME 5 7 SPECTRUM S MEAS S ll 5 7 R MEAS R _ _ 2 5 7 A ME
233. calibration when it is not required FWD ISOL N ISOL N STD FWDI Measures 8 1 isolation and then FWD ISOL N ISOL N STD is underlined REV ISOL N ISOL N STD REVI Measures isolation and then REV IS0L N ISOL N STD is underlined ISOLATION DONE ISOD Completes isolation calibration The error coefficients are calculated and stored The full 2 port menu is displayed with ISOLATION underlined If ISOLATION DONE is pressed without measuring all the required standards the message CAUTION ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED is displayed DONE 2 PORT CAL SAV2 Completes the full 2 port calibration The error coefficients are computed and stored The correction menu is displayed with CORRECTION ON and the notation C2 is displayed at the left of the screen If DONE 2 PORT CAL is pressed without measuring all the required standards the message CAUTION ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED is displayed Measurement Block 5 51 One Path 2 Port Menu Network Analyzer REFLECTION CAL 5 52 Measurement Block Cal REFEECTN Sam Open Standard OPEN Menu CALIBATION Um MENU SHORT QL Short Standard x LOA Menu REFEECTN DONE Load Standard TRANS Menu MISSION i FWD T
234. caling in the data processing flow for the network measure ment Analyzer Features 12 9 Network Measurement Basics S parameters S parameters scattering parameters are a convention that characterizes the way a device modifies signal flow A brief explanation is provided here of the S parameters of a two port device For additional details see Agilent Technologies Application Notes A N 95 1 and A N 154 S parameters are always a ratio of two complex magnitude and phase quantities S parameter notation identifies these quantities using the numbering convention 5 out in Where the first number out refers to the port where the signal is emerging and the second number in is the port where the signal is incident For example the S parameter S5 identifies the measurement as the complex ratio of the signal emerging at port 2 to the signal incident at port 1 Figure 12 4 is a representation of the S parameters of a two port device together with an equivalent flow graph In the illustration represents the signal entering the device and b represents the signal emerging Note that a and b are not related to the A and B input ports on the analyzer INCIDENT 521 FORWARD TRANSMITTED REFLECTED REFLECTED 522 TRANSMITTED INCIDENT 542 REVERSE Figure 12 4 S Parameters of a Two Port Device S parameters are exactly equivalent to the more common description terms below requiring only that the measurements are take
235. cteristic typically consists of both linear first order and higher order deviations from linear components The linear component can be attributed to the electrical length of the test device and represents the average signal transit time The higher order components are interpreted as variations in transit time for different frequencies and represent a source of signal distortion Figure 12 8 Analyzer Features 12 13 Frequency d in Radians Group Delay do in Radians E To Higher Order gt in Degrees fo SN Phase Shift 2 71 40 0 9 N P f in Hz 02 27tf Linear EN Component 360 df in Hz Phase Shift Component Figure 12 8 Higher Order Phase Shift The analyzer computes group delay from the phase slope Phase data is used to find the phase deviation Ay at the center point of a specified frequency aperture Af to obtain an approximation for the rate of change of phase with frequency Figure 12 9 This value Tg represents the group delay in seconds assuming linear phase change over Af Aperture Frequency 05012003 Figure 12 9 Rate of Phase Change Versus Frequency When deviations from linear phase are present changing the frequency step can result in different values for group delay Note that in this case the computed slope varies as the aperture Af is increased Figure 12 10 A wider aperture results in loss of the fine grain variations in group delay This loss of detail is the reaso
236. ction magnitude and phase uncertainty with temperature drift following an 511 one port calibration Figure 11 18 and Figure 11 19 show total transmission magnitude and phase uncertainty with temperature drift following a full two port error correction The graphs apply to measurements up to 1 8 GHz System Performance 11 15 Temperature Drift with 511 One Port Calibration 45 521 512 REF Level 20 dB from Full Scale 24 s Temperature changes D 4 deg C 3 deg C 5 deg C gt D g 2 p D O c 3 1 22 24 8 1 511 Reflection Coefficient 19 S21 512 REF Level 20 dB from Full Scale 8 A Temperature changes m deg C E 3 deg C gt 5 deg C D E T 4 D O c 3 2 22 24 8 1 511 Reflection Coefficient Figure 11 17 Total Refection Phase Uncertainty QOne Port Cal 11 16 System Performance Temperature Drift with Full Two Port Calibration 20 511 522 1 18 PEF Level 10 dB 5 from Full Scale _ Temperature changes m 2 4 deg C 3 deg C gt 5 deg C c 5 p c e O c _ 1 5 B2 1 10 2 0 30 40 50 Sel Insertion Loss dB Figur
237. d States National Institute of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by the Institution s calibration facility or to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members This Agilent Technologies instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of shipment except that in the case of certain components listed in General Information of this manual the warranty shall be for the specified period During the warranty period Agilent Technologies will at its option either repair or replace products that prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Agilent Technologies Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Agilent Technologies and Agilent Technologies shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to Agilent Technologies from another country Agilent Technologies warrants that its software and firmware designated by Agilent Technologies for use with an instrument will execute its programming instruction when property installed on that instrument Agilent Technologies does not warrant that the operation of the instrument or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free Limitation Of Warranty The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resul
238. d a dashed line just outside the graticule on the left REFERENCE VALUE REFV Changes the value of the reference line moving the measurement trace correspondingly In Smith polar and admittance chart formats the reference value is the same as the scale and is the value of the outer circle Measurement Block 5 27 SCALE COUPLING ELECTRICAL DELAY PHASE OFFSET 5 28 Measurement Block MKR REFERENCE MKRREF Makes the reference value equal to the marker s absolute value regardless of the delta marker value The marker is effectively moved to the reference line position In Smith polar and admittance chart formats this function makes the full scale value at the outer circle equal to the marker response value SCALE FOR SCAF DATA MEMO Selects one of the DATA and MEMORY traces to be scaled by prior functions in this menu The DATA and MEMORY traces are available using the display menu accessed from the Display key D amp M SCALE SCAC ON OFF Couples or uncouples the DATA and MEMORY traces to be scaled by prior functions in this menu This is valid only for those traces obtained by the display menu accessed from the key ELEC DELAY MENU Displays softkeys to add or subtract a linear phase slope relative to frequency or a constant phase MKR DELAY MKRDELA Enters the group delay at the marker point of a fixed frequency aperture 20 of the span to the electrical
239. d and reverse direction The analyzer has several different measurement calibration routines to characterize one or more of the systematic error terms and remove their effects from the measured data The procedures range from a simple frequency response calibration to a full two port calibration that effectively removes all twelve error terms The Response Calibration effectively reduces the frequency response errors of the test setup for reflection or transmission measurements This calibration procedure may be adequate for measurement of well matched low loss devices This is the simplest error correction to perform and should be used when extreme measurement accuracy is not required The Response and Isolation Calibration effectively removes frequency response and crosstalk errors in transmission measurements or frequency response and directivity errors in reflection measurements This procedure may be adequate for measurement of well matched high loss devices 811 and S22 One Port Calibration procedures provide directivity source match and frequency response vector error correction for reflection measurements These procedures provide high accuracy reflection measurements of one port devices or properly terminated two port devices The Full Two Port Calibration provides directivity source match load match isolation and frequency response vector error correction in both forward and reverse directions for transmission and reflec
240. d at the top of the Cartesian format Displays the values of the marker in units appropriate to the current measurement see Chapter 7 The status of the marker is also displayed under the marker values The following status notations are used Cpl Marker couple is tuned on When single channel is displayed this notation is not displayed even if the marker couple is on Xch Cross channel is turned on Sgnl Signal tracking is turned on When both signal tracking and search tracking are turned on only Sgnl is displayed because search tracking is not allowed in this case Peak PEAK search tracking is turned on Max MAX search tracking is turned on Min MIN search tracking is turned on Targ TARGET search tracking is turned on PksA PEAK ALL search tracking is turned on PksL PEAK LEFT ALL search tracking is turned on PksR PEAK RIGHT ALL search tracking is turned on 7 Marker Statistics and Width Value 2 6 8 Softkey Labels 9 Pass Fail Front and Rear Panel Displays the statistical marker values determined by using the menus accessed with the Utility key and the width value determined by using the menus accessed with the Search key See Chapter 7 Displays the menu labels that define the function of the softkeys immediately to the right of the label Indicates the values used for limit testing using limit lines See Limit Line Concept in Chapter 12 10 Sweep Time Displays the sweep time When swee
241. d centers the new span about that value MKR START MKRSTAR Changes the sweep parameter start value of the destination channel to the sweep parameter value of the marker MKR STOP MKRSTOP Changes the sweep parameter stop value of the destination channel to the sweep parameter value of the marker MKR REFERENCE MKRREF Sets the reference value of the destination channel to the marker s amplitude value The reference position is not changed even the network analyzer mode is selected In the polar Smith or admittance chart format of the network analyzer mode the full scale value at the outer circle is changed to the marker amplitude value MKR ZOOM MKRZM Moves the marker to the center and changes the sweep parameter span value of the destination channel to the value specified by the zooming aperture Performing this function is similar to zooming in on the signal in the center of the sweep range ZOOMING AMARKER gt FUNCITON CROSS CHANNEL Marker PEAK CENTER PEAKCENT Changes the sweep parameter center value of the destination channel to the sweep parameter value of the peak ZOOMING APERTURE ZMAPER Sets the zooming aperture value as a percentage of the span MKRA SPAN MKRDSPAN Changes the sweep parameter span value of the destination channel to the difference value between the marker and Amarker values MKRA CENTER MKRDCENT Changes the sweep parameter center value of the desti
242. d on the screen when DUAL CHAN and CDUPLED CHAN are OFF The margin listed is the smaller of the difference values between the measurement value and either the upper or lower limit A plus margin means the test passed and a minus margin means it failed Table 8 1 List Value Format Display Values Listed Format 1st column 2nd column 3rd column 4th column 5th column LOG MAG PHASE DELAY Sweep Measurement Margin Upper Limit Lower Limit Parameter Data Value Value LIN MAG SWR REAL IMAGINARY EXPANDED PHASE SMITH CHART POLAR Sweep Measurement Measurement Upper Limit Lower Limit ADMITTANCE CHART Parameter Data Data Value Value SPECTRUM Sweep Measurement Margin2 Upper Limit Lower Limit NOISE Parameter Datal Value2 Value 1 An is displayed at the left of the measurement value when it fails the limit testing 2 This is listed when the limit test is on Instrument State Block 8 23 Network analyzer can list the values measured on both channels When the dual channel is turned on and both channels are coupled the sweep parameter value is listed in the first column the measurement data of the active channel is listed in the second and third columns and the non active channel data is listed in the fourth and fifth columns The values listed for each channel are the same as the data listed in the second and third columns in Table 8 1 The channel coupling capability is available only when both channels are in the
243. d using the specify open menu CO Enters the term which is the constant term of the quadratic equation and is sealed by 101 Farads C1 Enters the C term expressed in F Hz Farads Hz and scaled by 107 C2 C2 Enters the term expressed in F Hz and scaled by 107 5 SHORT STDT SHOR Defines the standard type as a SHORT for calibrating reflection measurements SHORTS are assigned a terminal impedance of 0 However delay and loss offsets can still be added LOAD STDT LOAD Defines the standard type as a LOAD termination LOADs are assigned a terminal impedance equal to the system characteristic impedance Zo However delay and loss offsets can still be added If the LOAD impedance is not Zo use the arbitrary impedance standard definition DELAY THRU STDT DELA Defines the standard type as a transmission line of specified length for calibrating transmission measurements Measurement Block 5 63 ARBITRARY IMPEDANCE LABEL STANDARD 5 64 Measurement Block ARBITRARY IMPEDANCE STDT ARBI Defines the standard type to be a LOAD with an arbitrary impedance different from system Zo TERMINAL IMPEDANCE TERI Specifies the arbitrary impedance of the standard in ohms SPECIFY OFFSET Displays the specify offset menu that defines offsets in delay loss and standard impedance Zo for each standard type LABEL STD LABS Displays the letter menu to define a label f
244. detection technique for displaying trace information NEGATIVE PEAK NEG PEAK DET NEG Selects negative peak mode for detection technique SAMPLE SAMPLE DET SAM Selects sample mode for detection technique Note For more information on detection techniques see Detection Modes I Y in Chapter 12 5 12 Measurement Block Format Form at Displays the format menu that is used to select the appropriate display format for the measured data and to select the appropriate measurement unit for the spectrum measurement data For network measurements various rectangular and polar formats are available to display magnitude phase real data imaginary data impedance group delay and SWR The units of network measurement are automatically changed to correspond to the displayed format For spectrum measurements spectrum and noise formats are available The various units of spectrum measurement are available to display spectrum and noise dBm dB V Watt and Volt The units of spectrum measurement can also be selected using the softkey menu accessed from key Measurement Block 5 13 Format menu Network Analyzer LOG MAGNITUDE PHASE GROUP DELAY SMITH CHART 5 14 Measurement Block FORMAT LOG MAG PHASE DELAY SMITH CHART POLAR CHART LIN MAG SWR FORMAT REAL IMAGINARY EXPANDED PHASE ADMITTANCE CHART RETURN Figure 5 9 Format Menu fo
245. disk with extensions _D S for LIF format STA or DTA for DOS format 14 CAN T SAVE GRAPHICS WHEN COPY IN PROGRESS If you attempt to save graphics when a print is in progress this error message is displayed 115 LIF DOS COPY NOT ALLOWED If you try to copy a file between the RAM disk and the flexible disk when the format of the RAM disk is different from the format of the flexible disk this message is displayed 116 NO STATE DATA FILES ON MEMORY There are no files on the RAM disk memory with extensions D or _S for LIF format or STA or DTA for DOS format 117 DUPLICATE FILE EXTENSION The extension name entered is already used for other file types Use other extension name 119 NO DATA TRACE DISPLAYED The SCALE FOR DATA is selected when the data trace is not displayed 120 NO MEMORY TRACE DISPLAYED The SCALE FOR MEMORY is selected when the memory trace is not displayed 124 LIST TABLE EMPTY OR INSUFFICIENT TABLE The frequency list is empty To implement the list frequency mode add segments to the list table 125 CAN T SET SLOPE ON IN POWER SWEEP The slope function can be turned on in frequency sweep Messages 17 126 CAN T CHANGE NUMBER OF POINTS The number of points of the spectrum analyzer mode cannot be to change manually except in zero span 127 CAN T SET SWEEP TIME AUTO IN ZERO SPAN The automatic sweep time cannot be in zero span of the spect
246. dwidth VBW Input Attenuator Sweep Parameter Center Start Value CAL OUT Connector Built in Flexible Disk Drive LINE Switch Format Pass Fail do Qo Qo DO S A bo bO bo ro DO ro INNAN NN NIDO Contents 1 17 RBW IFBW 18 Status s 19 External Reference 2 2 2 2 2 2 25 2 25 2 5 20 Active Entry Area 21 Message Area 22 Title Rear Panel Features and Connectors 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 External Reference Input External Program RUN CONT Input 11 Gate Output Option 1D6 Only 12 External Trigger Input 13 2nd IF Output 14 Reference Oven Output Option 1D5 Only 3 Active Channel Block Chan 1 CHAN1 and Chan 2 CHAN2 Coupling Channels 4 Entry Block Internal Reference Output Power GPIB Interface External Monitor Parallel Interface mini DIN Keyboard AN Test Set I O Interface Numeric Keypad 2 7 7 4 4 s s s
247. e Zm is Z measured A B and are obtained from Figure 10 9 Specifications 10 17 0 Accuracy Y accuracy 0 accuracy Where Ym is measured A and are obtained from Figure 10 9 R X Accuracy Y A B x x 100 ba sin Y 100 Depands on D Accuracy D lt 0 2 0 22 lt D lt 5 5 lt D Ra EXm x X 100 Q Raf cos 96 Ra 96 Xa X 96 Xa sin 96 Rm R 100 0 Where D can be caluculated as R X or R 2xf x Ls or Rx 2zf x C 0 can be caluculated as tan X R or tan 27 x L R or tan 1 R x 2x f x C Ra A B Rm C x Rm x 100 Xa A B Xm x X amp x 100 Rm and X4 are the measured R and X respectively A B and are obtained from Figure 10 9 G B Accuracy Depands on D Accuracy D 0 2 0 2 lt D lt 5 5 lt D Ga Bm Ba 100 S 0 Ga 96 Ba Ba 96 Gm G4 100 S Where D can be calculated as G B or x Cp or G x 2af x Lp 0 can be calculated as tan 1 B G or tam l 2zf x Cp G or tan 1 1 G x 2zf x Lj Ga A B G C x G x 100 Ba B B C x Ba x 100 10 18 Specifications Gm By are the measured G and B respectively B and are obtained from Figure 10 9 D Accuracy Accuracy D lt 0 2 0 2 lt D Da Za 100 Za 100 x
248. e 11 18 Total Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty Full Two Port Cal i 511 522 1 REF Level 10 dB 28 from Full Scale 10 Temperature changes gt O deg C 5 3 3 deg C gt 5 deg C D 2 LLI m o yp i 1 O c 2 5 22 1 RE 10 2 0 30 40 50 Sel Insertion Loss dB Figure 11 19 Total Transmission Phase Uncertainty Full Two Port Cal System Performance 11 17 System performance with Different Test Sets and Connector Types The tables in the following pages provides typical system performance for sytems using different test sets and different connector types The values listed are for uncorrected measurements and for corrected measurements after measurement calibration The linear value is shown in parenthesis with the dB value 11 18 System Performance Table 11 2 Typical System Performance for Devices with 7 mm Connectors 4396B with 85046A Test Set 800 kHz to 1 8 GHz L Typical Residual after Accuracy Enhancement 2 Symbol Error Terms Uncorrected Response Only Response and Isolation One Port Full two port D Directivity 30 dB 30 dB 50 dB 50 dB 50 dB 3 2 10 2 3 2 1
249. e Menu LIMIT LINE LIMIT LINE on OFF LIMILINE ON OFF Turns limit lines on or If limits have been defined and limit lines are turned on the limit lines are displayed for visual comparison of the measured data in all Cartesian formats Limit lines can be saved on disk If limit lines are on they can be saved on disk with an instrument state Limit line table can be listed Copy function accessed from Copy key can list a limit line table In a listing of values with limit lines on and limit test on the upper limit and lower limit are listed together with the pass or fail margin as long as other listed data allows sufficient space Turns limit testing oN or OFF When limit testing is on the data is compared with the defined limits at each measured point Limit tests occur at the end of each sweep whenever the data is updated and when limit testing is first turned on Limit testing is available for both magnitude and phase values in Cartesian formats In the polar Smith and admittance chart formats of the network analyzer the value tested depends on the marker mode and is the magnitude or the first value in a complex pair The message NO LIMIT LINES DISPLAYED is displayed in polar Smith and admittance chart formats if limit lines are turned on Instrument State Block 8 13 8 14 BEEP FAIL EDIT LIMIT TABLE Instrument State Block Four different ways to indicate pass or fail
250. e analyzer is in the remote mode when an external computer controls the analyzer Gives access to the GPIB menu that sets the controller mode and to the address menu where the GPIB addresses of peripheral devices are entered The controller mode determines which device controls the GPIB bus the analyzer or computer Only one of them can control the bus at a time 8 18 Instrument State Block Local Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer SYSTEM CONTROLLER ADDRESSABLE GPIB ADDRESS Note uy Local SYSTEM CONTROLLER ADDRESS ABLE ONLY SET ADDRESSES H ADDRESS 4396 ADDRESS CONTROLLER RETURN Figure 8 9 Local Menu SYSTEM CONTROLLER Sets the analyzer as the system controller This mode is used when peripheral devices are to be used and there is no external controller This mode can only be selected manually from the analyzer s front panel and can be used only if no active system controller is connected to the system through GPIB If you try to set system controller mode when another system controller is present the message CAUTION CAN T CHANGE ANOTHER CONTROLLER ON BUS is displayed ADDRESSABLE ONLY Sets the analyzer as addressable only This mode is used when an external controller controls peripheral devices or the analyzer This mode is also used when the external computer passes control of the bus to the analyzer SET ADDRESSES Di
251. e continuum of hues on the color wheel ranging from red through green and blue and back to red Brightness A measure of the brightness of the color Color The degree of whiteness of the color A scale from white to pure color Measurement Block 5 25 Letter menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer Y Display TH TFEE CAL EALKT MODE LABEL Ti gt 116 gt LABEL S22N S228 gt SELECT 522 gt LETTER MORE Eu SPACE REV TRANS BASE WD MATCHHt ERASE REV MATA THLE RESPONSE DONE L__RESOPNSE T CANGEN DEEINE BIDTVPE ABEJ STANDARD Pen T OPEN STD l ARBITARY EABEI MPEDAN STD ELAY CABEL THR STD gt LABEL OBD sty LABEL E STD y 008031 Figure 5 15 Letter Menu ENTER CHARACTERS SELECT LETTER Selects the letter pointed to by the arrow 41 on the screen The arrow can be moved by rotating the knob Three sets of letters can be scrolled using the step keys fr and Q SPACE Inserts a space in the title BACK SPACE Deletes the last character entered ERASE TITLE Deletes the
252. e disk with extensions D or _S for LIF format or STA or DTA for DOS format 116 NO STATE DATA FILES ON MEMORY There are no files on the RAM disk memory with extensions _D or _S for LIF format or STA or DTA for DOS format 34 NO VALID MEMORY TRACE If a memory trace is to be displayed or otherwise used a data trace must first be stored to memory 18 NOT ALLOWED IN LIST SWEEP The level cal cannot be executed in the list sweep The sweep type must be the linear frequency spectrum analyzer mode only See Calibration menu Spectrum Analyzer in Chapter 5 NOT ENOUGH DATA The amount of data sent to the analyzer is less than that expected GPIB only 14 NOT VALID FOR PRESENT TEST SET The calibration requested is inconsistent with the test set present This message occurs in the following situations m full 2 port calibration is requested with a test set other than an S parameter test set m A one path 2 port calibration is requested with an S parameter test set this procedure is typically used with a transmission reflection test set 120 Numeric data error This error as well as errors 121 through 129 are generated when parsing a data element that appears to be numeric including the nondecimal numeric types This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specific error Messages 8 128 Numeric data not allowed A legal nu
253. e to the current device state see IEEE 488 2 6 4 5 3 and 11 5 1 1 5 222 Data out of range A legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed because the interpreted value was outside the legal range as defined by the analyzer see IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 5 223 Too much data legal program data element of block expression or string type was received that contained more data than the analyzer could handle due to memory or related device specific requirements 224 Illegal parameter value Used where exact value from a list of possibilities was expected 225 Data out of memory The analyzer has insufficient memory to perform the requested operation 230 Data corrupt or stale Possibly invalid data New reading started but not completed since last access 231 Data questionable Indicates that measurement accuracy is suspect Messages 22 240 Hardware error Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because of a hardware problem in the analyzer Definition of what constitutes a hard ware problem is completely device specific This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 241 through 249 241 Hardware missing A legal program command or query could not be executed because of missing analyzer hardware For example an option was not installed 250 Mass storage error Indicates that a mass
254. eak def AX 50 GHz 1 MHz 1 MHz NA Peak def AY Depends on format 1 dB 1 dB NA Peak def AY Depends on format 15 dB 15 dB Threshold On Off Off Off NA Threshold value same as the reference value 100 dB 100 dB SA Threshold value The same as the reference value 100 dBm 100 dBm Part search On Off Off Off Function Range Preset Value Power ON default NA Marker list On Off Off Off NA Statistics On Off Off Off NA Marker time On Off Off Off SA Marker list On Off Off Off SA Statistics On Off Off Off SA Marker time On Off Off Off SA Noise form On Off Off Off D 10 Input Range and Default Settings Instrument State Block Function Range Preset Value Power ON default Clock time 0 0 0 to 24 59 59 No effect No effect Clock date Maximu 2099 No effect No effect Date format MonDay Year Day MonYear MonDay Year MonDay Year Beeper done On Off On On Beeper warning On Off Off Off Limit Line On Off Off Off Limit test On Off Off Off Beep Fail On Off Off Off Limit line table No effect Empty Limit line offset 1 9 GHz 0 0 Sweep prmtr Limit line offset Amp 50000 0 0 copy Function Range Preset Value Power ON default Print mode Standard Color Standard Standard Copy time On Off Off Off Print color Fixed Variable Fixed Fixed Limit table list UPR amp LWR MID amp DLT UPR amp LWR UPR amp LWR
255. ected MEM Shows that the memory trace is selected MARKER COUPLING MKR 1 MKRCOUP OFF ON Toggles between the coupled and uncoupled marker mode COUPLE Couples the marker sweep parameter values for the two display channels Even if the sweep parameter is uncoupled and two sets of sweep parameter values are shown the markers track the same sweep parameter values on each channel as long as they are within the displayed sweep parameter range UNCOUPLE Allows the marker sweep parameter values to be controlled independently on each channel Marker Block 7 3 CONTINUOUS Fr MKRCONT ON OFF Toggles between the continuous and discontinuous marker mode This softkey appears only in the network analyzer mode In the spectrum analyzer mode the marker is always in the discontinuous mode DISCRETE DISCRETE Places markers only on the measured trace points as determined by the sweep parameter settings CONT Interpolates between the measured points to allow the markers to be placed at any point on the trace Displayed marker values are also interpolated This is the default marker mode network analyzer only AMODE MENU Displays the delta mode menu that is used to define the difference in values between the marker and a Amarker 74 Marker Block Marker Delta mode menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer FIXED A TRACKING A MKR AMODE OFF AMKR SWP PARAM FIXED AMKR
256. ed an equal amount above and below the marker at that sweep parameter value For information on how to use the limit line and testing function see Chapter 8 of the 4396B Task Reference Instrument State Block 8 15 Limit Line Entry Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer 8 16 UPPER LIMIT LOWER LIMIT Instrument State Block M LIMIT SWP PARAM MENU UPPER EDIT LIMIT LIMIT LINE LOWER LIMIT e SWP panam DELTA LIMIT MIDDLE VALUE MKR MIDDLE pone Figure 8 8 Limit Line Entry Menu SWP PARAM LIMPRM Sets the starting sweep parameter value of a segment using the entry block controls MKR SWP PARAM MKRSWPRM Changes the segment sweep parameter value to the present marker sweep parameter value UPPER LIMIT LIMU Sets the upper limit value for the segment Upper and lower limits must be defined If no upper limit is required for a particular measurement force the upper limit value out of range for example 500 dB When UPPER LIMIT or LOWER LIMIT is pressed all the segments in the table are displayed in terms of upper and lower limits even if they were defined as delta limits and middle value If you attempt to set an upper limit that is lower than the lower limit or vice versa both limits will be automatically set to the same value LOWER LIMIT LIML Sets the lower limit value for the segment Upper and lower limits must be defined If
257. ed mode the following parameters are coupled Frequency Number of points Source power level Number of groups IF bandwidth Sweep time Trigger type Sweep type If both channels also have the same input parameter such as 511 or A R the following parameters are coupled m Correction mode m Calibration coefficient The following parameters are always common to both channels when the analyzer types of both channels are the same even if the sweep parameter mode is not coupled m Trigger source m List sweep table m Calibration kit type and data The following parameters are always set separately for each channel even if the sweep parameter mode is coupled Measurement parameter Display Format Title Traces displayed Scale value Electrical delay Phase offset Averaging on off factor Coupling of sweep parameter values for the two channels is independent of DUAL CHAN on OFF in the display menu and MARKERS UNCOUPLED in the marker mode menu COUPLED CH OFF becomes an alternate sweep function when dual channel display is on In this mode the analyzer alternates between the two sets of sweep parameter values for measurement of data and both are displayed 12 20 Analyzer Features Limit Line Concept These are lines drawn on the display to represent upper and lower limits or device specifications with which to compare the DUT Limits are defined by specifying several segments where each segment is a portion of the s
258. efficients were found when you attempted to turn calibration oN See Tusk Reference for information on how to perform calibration 12 NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS The RESUME CAL SEQUENCE softkey is not valid unless a calibration is in progress Start a new calibration See Cal key in the Function Reference 13 CALIBRATION ABORTED The calibration in progress was terminated due to a change of the active channel or stimulus parameters 14 NOT VALID FOR PRESENT TEST SET The calibration requested is inconsistent with the test set present This message occurs in the following situations m full 2 port calibration is requested with a test set other than an S parameter test set m A one path 2 port calibration is requested with an S parameter test set this procedure is typically used with a transmission reflection test set 15 EXCEEDED 7 STANDARDS PER CLASS A maximum of seven standards can be defined for any class See Modifying Calibration Kits in the Function Reference Messages 13 16 CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET GPIB only Correction is not valid for the selected measurement parameter 17 BACKUP DATA LOST Data checksum error on the battery backup memory has occurred The battery is recharged for approximately 10 minutes after power was turned on 18 NOT ALLOWED IN LIST SWEEP The level cal cannot be executed in the list sweep The sweep type must be the linear frequency spectrum analyzer mode onl
259. eg 110 dB 8 deg s p c 120 dB 25 deg s p c 1 full scale input level 5 dBm 2 28 5 IFBW 10 Hz R input 35 dBm Reference power level 35 dBm 1 E D 1 5 gt Typical O 9 lt 5 5 O T O E mi c l1 gt a 1 a 10 20 30 40 50 ab 94 140 110 120 Input Level dB Figure 10 2 Phase Dynamic Accuracy Specifications 10 5 Trace noise A R B R measurement 10 dBm input IFBW 300 Hz lt 0 04 deg rms s p c Stability 0 1 degC s p c Group Delay Characteristics Accuracy In general the following formula can be used to determine the accuracy in seconds of a specific group delay measurement PhaseAccuracy deg A ove ee ee ee ee ee e ee ese e eee ese n sse s ns PhaseAccur acy deg Depending on the aperture input level and device length the phase accuracy used in either incremental phase accuracy or worst case phase accuracy 1 8GHz with 7mm full 2 port calibration Device electrical length 10m with insertion loss of less than 1 dB O L gt o ky S gt o o lt gt ES o C3 o 2 o c C5 1 Aperture Hz C5010013
260. eiver Characteristics Input Characteristics Frequency range IFBW lt 3 2 2 100 kHz to 1 8 GHz IFBW 10 kHz 40 KHZ 1 MHz to 1 8 GHz Full scale input level R input 2 4 4 4 4 2 2 20 dBm A Binputs 1 2 222 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 224 2 2 2 2 5 dBm IF bandwidth IFBW 10 30 100 300 1 10k 40 kHz Noise level Noise Level Noise Level Frequency Input Port IFBW 10 Hz IFBW 40 kHz 100 k freq 10 MHz R lt 85 dBm 50 dBm 100 k freq 10 MHz A B 110 dBm lt 75 dBm 10 MHz freq R 100 8 1 dBm lt 65 3f dBm 10 MHz lt freq A B lt 125 3f dBm 90 3f dBm 1 fis measurement frequency GHz Input crosstalk 07300 kHz to from B 100 dB Rto A s e e ehe een 120 dB 80 dB Source Crosstalk A 10 2 Specifications 0 gt 300 2 4 0 4 20 124 dB s p c Maximum safe input level 20 dBm or 25 Vdc s p c Connector
261. ements Note 1 4396B comply with INSTALLATION CATEGORY II and POLLUTION Y DEGREE 2 in IEC1010 1 4396B are INDOOR USE product Note LEDs in this product are Class 1 in accordance with IEC825 1 i Y CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT Ground The Instrument To avoid electric shock hazard the instrument chassis and cabinet must be connected to a safety earth ground by the supplied power cable with earth blade DO NOT Operate In An Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gasses or fumes Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard Keep Away From Live Circuits Operating personnel must not remove instrument covers Component replacement and internal adjustments must be made by qualified maintenance personnel Do not replace components with the power cable connected Under certain conditions dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable removed To avoid injuries always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them DO NOT Service Or Adjust Alone Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present DO NOT Substitute Parts Or Modify Instrument Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards do not install substitute parts or perform unauthorized modifications to the instrument Return the instrument to a Agilent Technologie
262. en initializing a new disk This setting does not change even when the line power is cycled or the key is pressed The factory setting is LIF STOR DEV STODDISK STODMEMO Selects between the flexible disk drive and the RAM disk memory as the storage device DISK shows the built in flexible disk is selected and MEMORY shows the RAM disk memory is selected Use the built in flexible disk to store important data because the RAM disk data is lost when the power is turned off The storage selection does not change even when the line power is cycled or the key is pressed For more information on the save function see Appendix C Define Save Data Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer Note uy Gave RAW Save on ad CAL on OFF DATA DEFINE on OFF SAVE DATA MEM on OFF DATA TRACE on OFF MEM TRACE on OFF RETURN ONLY CB008027 Figure 8 19 Define Save Data Menu RAW on OFF SAVRAW ON OFF Toggles saving or not saving the raw data arrays CAL on OFF SAVCAL ON OFF Toggles saving or not saving the calibration coefficients arrays The calibration coefficients arrays are available for only the network analyzer No data is saved when the spectrum analyzer is selected DATA on OFF SAVDAT ON OFF Toggles saving or not saving the data arrays MEM on OFF SAVMEM ON OFF Toggles saving or not saving the memory arrays DAT
263. en removed the equivalent length of air can be read out in the active entry area If the average relative permittivity of the DUT is known over the frequency span the length calculation can be adjusted to indicated the actual length of the DUT more closely This can be done by entering the relative velocity factor for the DUT using VELOCITY FACTOR softkey under Cal key The relative velocity factor for a given dielectric can be calculated by Length meters 1 Velocity factor Ve assuming a relative permeability of 1 Averaging Averaging computes each data point based on an exponential average of consecutive sweeps weighted by a user specified averaging factor Each new sweep is averaged into the trace until the total number of sweeps is equal to the averaging factor for a fully averaged trace Each point on the trace is the vector sum of the current trace data and the data from the previous sweep A high averaging factor gives the best signal to noise ratio but slows the trace update time Doubling the averaging factor reduces the noise by 3 dB The algorithm used for averaging is 1 At 1 X 1 n F where 12 12 Analyzer Features A n current average S n current measurement F average factor IF Band Reduction IF bandwidth reduction lowers the noise floor by reducing the receiver input bandwidth It has an advantage over averaging in reliably filtering out unwanted responses s
264. en the reference and test signal paths including signal leakage within the test set and in both the RF and IF sections of the receiver The error contributed by isolation depends on the characteristics of the DUT Isolation is a factor in high loss transmission measurements However analyzer system isolation is more than sufficient for most measurements and correction for it may be unnecessary For measuring devices with high dynamic range accuracy enhancement can provide improvements in isolation that are limited only by the noise floor Analyzer Features 12 41 Frequency Response Tracking This is the vector sum of all test setup variations in which magnitude and phase change as a function of frequency This includes variations contributed by signal separation devices test cables and adapters and variations between the reference and test signal paths This error is a factor in both transmission and reflection measurements For further explanation of systematic error terms and the way they are combined and represented graphically in error models see the later section titled Accuracy Enhancement Fundamentals Characterizing Systematic Errors Correcting for Measurement Errors There are twelve different error terms for a two port measurement that can be corrected by accuracy enhancement in the analyzer These are directivity source match load match isolation reflection tracking and transmission tracking each in both the forwar
265. ency range of 5 Hz to 100 MHz 54701A Active Probe DC to 2 5 GHz This is a high input impedance probe for in circuit measurements that cover the frequency range up to 2 5 GHz with 100 kQ input impedance The 54701A must be used with the 1143A Probe Offset Control and Power Module 11945A Close field Probe Set This includes both the 11940A and 11941A probes for full coverage from 9 kHz to 1 GHz Option E51 adds the 8447F Option H64 dual preamplifier a 36 in 914 mm Type N cable and a carrying bag for storage and protection of the entire set 1141A Differential Probe This is an FET differential probe with 200 MHz bandwidth and 3000 1 CMRR The 1141A must be used with the 1142A Probe Control and Power Module Preamplifier 10855A Broadband Preamplifier 2 MHz to 1300 MHz This preamplifier provides a minimum of 22 dB gain from 2 MHz to 1300 MHz to enhance measurements of very low level signals The 1 5 dB flat response reduces distortion in non sinusoidal wave forms The 10855A operates with the probe power outlets or with the 1122A Probe Power Supply 87405A Preamplifier 10 MHz to 3000 MHz This preamplifier provides a minimum of 24 dB gain from 10 MHz to 3000 MHz to enhance measurements of very low level signals The 87405A operates with the probe power outlets or with the 11899A Probe Power Supply Power Splitters and Directional Bridges Calibration Kits 11850C D Three way Power Splitters These are four port
266. ent functions directly and others provide access to additional functions available in softkey menus Softkey menus are lists of up to eight related functions that can be displayed in the softkey label area at the right hand side of the display The eight keys to the right of the LCD are the softkeys Pressing one of the softkeys selects the adjacent menu function This either executes the labeled function and makes it the active function causes instrument status information to be displayed or presents another softkey menu Some of the analyzer s menus are accessed directly from front panel keys and some from other menus For example the sweep menu accessed by pressing the Sweep key presents all the sweep functions such as sweep type number of points and sweep time Pressing NUMBER of POINTS allows the required number of points displayed per sweep to be entered directly from the number pad RETURN softkeys return to previous menus DONE indicates completion of a specific procedure and then returns to an earlier menu Usually when a menu changes the present active function is cleared Softkeys that are Joined by Vertical Lines When several possible choices are available for a function the softkeys are joined by vertical lines For example in the spectrum input port menu under the key the available inputs are listed S R A B with a vertical line between them Note that only one softkey can be selected at a time When a selection
267. ent with handles attached in an equipment rack with 482 6 mm 19 inches horizontal spacing Accessories and Options 9 1 Measurement accessories available Test Sets Active Probes 9 2 Accessories and Options 85046A B S Parameter Test Set These test sets contain the hardware required to measure all four S parameters of a two port 50 or 75 Q device An RF switch in the test set is controlled by the analyzer so that reverse measurement can be made without changing the connections to the DUT device under test Each test set also contains two internal dc bias tees for biasing active devices The test port connectors for the 85046A are precision 7 mm connectors and the 85046B test port connectors are 75 Q type N f 87512A B Transmission Reflection Test Set These test sets contain the hardware required to measure simultaneous transmission and reflection characteristics of a 50 or 75 Q device in one direction only The test port connector is 50 Q type N f on the 87512A and 75 Q type N f on the 87512B 85024A High Frequency Probe 300 kHz to 3 GHz This is a high input impedance probe for in circuit measurements that cover the frequency range of 300 kHz to 3 GHz 41800A Active Probe 5 Hz to 500 MHz This is a high input impedance probe for in circuit measurements that cover the frequency range of 5 Hz to 500 MHz 41802A 1 M9 Input Adapter 5 Hz to 100 MHz This adapter allows use of a high impedance probe It has a frequ
268. entire title DONE Terminates the title entry and returns to the display more menu CANCEL Cancels the title entry and returns to the display more menu without any change 5 26 Measurement Block Scale Ref Scale Ref Scale reference menu Network Analyzer AUTO SCALING REFERENCE AUTO SCALE SCALE DIV REFERENCE POSITION REFERENCE VALUE MKR REFERENCE SCALE FOR DATA DAM SCALE COUPLE ELEC DELAY M ENU MAKER DELAY ELECTRICAL DELAY PHASE OFFSET RETURN Figure 5 16 Scale Reference Menu for Network Analyzer AUTO SCALE AUTO Brings the trace data defined by the SCALE FOR key in view on the display with one keystroke Sweep values are not affected only scale and reference values The analyzer determines the smallest possible scale factor that will put all displayed data onto the vertical graticule SCALE DIV SCAL Changes the response value scale per division of the displayed trace In Smith polar and admittance chart formats this refers to the full scale value at the outer circumference and is identical to the reference value REFERENCE POSITION REFP Sets the position of the reference line on the graticule of a Cartesian display with O at the bottom line of the graticule and 10 at the top line It has no effect on a Smith polar or admittance chart format The reference position is indicated with a small triangle an
269. entry area to display the title in the active channel title area on the screen ADJUST DISPLAY Provides a menu for adjusting display intensity colors and accessing save and recall functions for modified display color sets FREQUENCY BLANK Blanks the displayed frequency notation for security purposes Frequency labels cannot be restored except by pressing Preset or by turning the power off and then on Measurement Block 5 21 Adjust display menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer COLOR INTENSITY COLOR ADJUST 5 22 Measurement Block INTENSITY Display BACKGROUND INTENSITY MODIFY MORE COLORS 1 ADJUST DATA DISPLAY carmen L UMIT LN CHO DATA Color Adjust MENU CHS MEM LIMIT LN GRATICULE WARNING MORE RETURN RETURN RETURN DEFAULT COLORS SAVE COLORS RECALL COLORS RETURN 05005031 Figure 5 13 Adjust Display Menu INTENSITY INTE Sets the display intensity as a percentage of the brightest setting BACKGROUND INTENSITY BACI Sets the background intensity of the display as a percentage of the white level MODIFY COLORS Displays the menu used for color modification of the display elements CH1 DATA COLO CH1D Selects channel 1 data trace for color modification and displays the color adjust menu PEN COLOR Display J CH1 MEM LIMIT LINE COLO CH1M
270. enu used to operate Instrument BASIC MEMORY PARTITION Changes the size of memory areas for Instrument BASIC and the RAM Disk SET CLOCK Displays the series of menus that set an internal clock BEEPER MENU Displays the series of menus that set a beeper LIMIT MENU Displays the series of menus that defines limits or specifications used to test a DUT SERVICE MENU Displays the series of service menus described in detail in the Service Manual System Instrument BASIC Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer System Siep Continue Run Pause Stop Edit N ASSIGN Hp4396 OUTPUT Hp4396 ENTER Hp4396 END ONE RECALL LINE END EDIT COMMAND ENTRY Y SELECT LETTER SPACE BACK SPACE ERASE TITLE DONE CANCEL CAT SAVE RE SAVE GET PURGE INITIALIZE MSI INTERNAL SCRATCH RENumber LIST COMMAND ENTRY Y user define BASIC gt user define CLEAR VO RESET CB008008 Figure 8 3 IBASIC Menu CONTROL PROGRAM Step Allows you to execute one program line at a time This is particularly usef
271. epe on L y NUMBER of START POINTS STOP SWEEP TYPE CENTER MEN Y SPAN SWEEP TYPE RETURN STEREO SEGMENT em LIST y SEGMENT EDIT Segment Menu DELETE __ ADO CLEAR LEAR LIST YES us NO ONE RETURN Clear List Menu Sweep Menu Softkey Menus for Spectrum Analyzer SWEEP TIME mal Sweep SWEEP TIME Y gt p MKR STOP NUMBER of RETUR POINTS NUMBER of POWER POINTS COUPLED CH IE EW SWEEP TYPE gt Y MENU Y SEGMENT SWEEP TYPE START LIN FREQ STOP LOG EREG CENTER LISTFREG SPAN SWEEP RETURN ERI SEGMENTI LY Ecco QUII SEGMENT SEGMENT EDIT DONE DELETE ADO CLEAR Segment Menu DAE CLEAR LIST gt YES RETURN NO Sweep Menu Clear List Menu Softkey Menus for Network Analyzer CB006011 Figure B 15 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Sweep Key Softkey Tree B 11 Sou rce POWER SLOPE SLOPE on OFF CW ATTENUATOR PORT 1 ATTENUATOR PORT 2 RF OUT ON off
272. ept Mode and FFT Mode Usually two analyzers are used to analyze waveforms transformed from the time domain test signal to the frequency domain one is a swept spectrum analyzer and the other is an FFT analyzer When measuring signals over a wide frequency span with a wide RBW swept spectrum analyzers are better than FFT analyzers This is true because the FFT analyzer requires a large memory and a fast AD converter to measure the signal and therefore is not practical When measuring signals with narrow RBW FFT analyzers are better than swept spectrum analyzers because the swept spectrum analyzer requires much more time to measure sweep the signal The FFT analyzer can measure the signal in very short time The 4396B analyzer uses both the swept spectrum analyzer and the FFT analyzer modes The two modes swept mode and FFT mode are automatically selected Swept mode is selected if RBW is gt 10 kHz and FFT mode is selected if RBW is lt 3 kHz 12 16 Analyzer Features gt gt 1 iy sweeping stepping lt gt lt gt RBW Effective Bandwidth EBW Swept Mode Stepped FFT Mode RBW gt 10kHz RBW lt 3 kHz 05012032 Figure 12 11 Swept Mode and Stepped FFT Mode Selectivity of the RBW The selectivity of the RBW is the ratio of the 60 dB bandwidth to 3 dB bandwidth RBW of the filter The selectivity defines the shape of the filter This factor is important when resolving small si
273. er POWER POWE Activates the power level function and sets the RF output power level of the analyzer s internal source The allowable range is 70 dBm to 20 dBm RF OUT on OFF RFO ON OFF Toggles the signal output on the RF OUT port ON or OFF In the spectrum analyzer mode if the RF output is turned ON the status notation P is displayed The start frequency must be greater than or equal to 100 kHz when RF out is turned on at the spectrum analyzer because the frequency range of the RF output source starts at 100 kHz Be sure that the characteristics of the RF output source of the spectrum analyzer is different from ones of the network analyzer See Chapter 10 for additional information Sweep Block 6 17 Trigger menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer TRIGGER TYPE 6 18 Sweep Block SWEEP Trigger HOLD SINGLE NUMBER of GROUFS CONTINUOUS TRIGGER FREE RUN TRIGGER FREE RUN EXTERNAL I VIDEO MANUAL GATE LEVEL GATE CTL LEVEL EDGE GATE DELAY GATE LENGTH RETURN TRIG EVENT ION SWEEP TRIG PLRTY POS neg RETURN MEASURE RESTART 05006008 Figure 6 9 Trigger Menu SWEEP HOLD HOLD Freezes the data trace on the display and the analyzer stops sweeping and taking data The notation Hld is displayed at the left of the 9 graticule If the indicator is at
274. er These arrays are accessible using the internal disk drive Analyzer Features 12 5 or the RAM disk memory These arrays are also output via GPIB but data cannot be input into this array via GPIB If memory is displayed the data from the memory arrays goes through the same data processing flow path as the data from the data arrays Electrical Delay and Phase Offset This involves adding or subtracting a linear phase in proportion to frequency This is equivalent to line stretching or artificially moving the measurement reference plane See Electrical Delay for details Conversion Transforms S parameter measurement data into equivalent complex impedance Z or admittance Y values to inverse S parameters 1 S or to phase multiples of 4 8 or 16 See Conversion Function in this chapter Format This converts the complex number pairs into a scalar representation for display according to the selected format This includes group delay calculations These formats are often easier to interpret than the complex number representation Polar and Smith chart formats are not affected by the scalar formatting Note that after formatting it is impossible to recover the complex data See Group Delay for information on group delay principles Data Hold This keeps the maximum or minimum value at each display point when the data hold function is turned oN Data Math This calculates the complex ratio of the two d
275. er Menu 7 8 Marker Menu 1 1 2 7 10 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Search Search Key for the Network Analyzer 7 12 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Search Key for the Spectrum Analyzer 1 18 Search Menu for the Network Analyzer MM 7 14 Search Menu for the Spectrum Analyzer MEE e 7 14 Peak Menu 222020202202 2 7 18 Target Menu aoaaa MM 1 19 Widths Menu 2 2 2 2 2 2 222020202202 2 7 20 Peak Definition Menu for Network Analyzer 7 21 Peak Definition Menu for Spectrum Analyzer a 1 28 Search Range Menu MM 1 24 Utility Menu for Spectrum Analyzer 7 25 Utility Menu for Network Analyzer e 7 26 Softkey Menus Accessed from the System Guster 8 3 System Menu 2 25 25 2 5 25 2 MM o 8 4 IBASIC Menu MM ML 8 5 Memory Partition 2 8 8 Clock Menu 8 9 Beeper 8 11 Limit Line Menu s s s c ia t ce cs s VV 8 12 Limit Line Entry Menu Co a 8 15 Local Menu e 8 18 Softkey Menus Accessed from the 8 20 Copy Menu 2 8 21 Print Setup Menu 1 c a 8 25 Copy Cal Kit Mena 2 2 8 27 Copy Limit Test Menu 2 8 28 Copy List Sweep Menu
276. er Response Time The resolution bandwidth filter requires the set up time to fully charge before the gate comes on Set up time is the length of time that the signal is present and stable before the gate comes on The set up time should be greater than filter charge time which is defined by 2 RBW where RBW is the 3 dB resolution bandwidth being used Signal xternal Trigger nput Gate Output BW Iter Ts must arg Ing grater thang Raw Response Time M 2 Is 7nBw etu p Time Ts C5012030 Figure 12 17 RBW Filter Response Time Video bandwidth VBW can be set without concern for the sate length setting The analyzer implements the video filter using digital processing The video filter of the analyzer requires no settling time for normal operation Therefore it is not affected by the gate length setting 12 26 Analyzer Features Gated Sweep on the Stepped FFT When RBW is less than or equal to 3 kHz the analyzer uses stepped FFT mode Because stepped FFT mode requires sampling time to get data the gate length should be more than the minimum sampling time The sampling time depends on the RBW being used as follows Table 12 1 Minimum Gate Length on the Stepped FFT mode RBW Hz Min Gate Length sec 1 3 10 30 100 300 lk 3k 5 185625 1 6594 518 5625 m 134 5625 m 51 2 m 12 8 m 3 2 m 1 6m Analy
277. er cannot continue 400 Query errors This is the generic query error that the analyzer cannot detect more specific errors This code indicates only that a query error as defined in IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 7 and 6 3 has occurred 4100 Query INTERRUPTED A condition causing an interrupted query error occurred see IEEE 488 2 6 3 2 3 For example a query followed by DAB or GET before a response was completely sent 420 Query UNTERMINATED A condition causing an unterminated query error occurred see IEEE 488 2 6 3 2 2 For example the analyzer was addressed to talk and an incomplete program message was received by the controller 350 Queue overflow A specific code entered into the queue in lieu of the code that caused the error This code indicates that there is no room in the queue and an error occurred but was not recorded 11 RECALL ERROR INSTR STATE PRESET A serious error for example corrupted data is detected on recalling a file and this forced the analyzer to be PRESET Messages 10 19 LIN FREQ ONLY The repetitive sampling is turn on when span must be zero the sweep type must be linear frequency and the trigger source must be EXT or VIDEO only Confirm the analyzer setting and set appropriate setting for the repetitive sampling mode 128 SPAN 0 ONLY The repetitive sampling is turn on when span must be zero the sweep type must be linear frequency and the trigger source must be EXT or VIDEO only Con
278. er how carefully the measurement is made Directivity source match and reflection signal path frequency response tracking are the major sources of error Figure 12 26 ERRORS Directivity eFrequency Tracking Source Match Measured Unknown Data Figure 12 26 Sources of Error in a Reflection Measurement Measuring reflection coefficient The reflection coefficient is measured by first separating the incident signal I from the reflected signal R then taking the ratio of the two values Figure 12 27 Ideally R consists only of the signal reflected by the test device S114 Incident Power l Reflected Power R Unknown Figure 12 27 Reflection Coefficient Directivity error However all of the incident signal does not always reach the unknown see Figure 12 28 Some of may appear at the measurement system input due to leakage through the test set or other signal separation device Also some of 1 may be reflected by imperfect adapters between signal separation and the measurement plane The vector sum of the leakage and miscellaneous reflections is directivity Understandably the measurement is distorted when the directivity signal combines vectorally with the actual reflected signal from the unknown 114 Analyzer Features 12 47 Effective P Directivity EDF Unknown Figure 12 28 Effective Directivity Epr Source match error Because the measurement system test port is never
279. er type Please confirm GPIB command or change analyzer type before sending the command 93 NO DATA TRACE The MARKER ON DATA is selected when the data trace is not displayed 94 NO MEMORY TRACE The MARKER ON MEMORY is selected when the memory trace is not displayed 95 MARKER DELTA SPAN NOT SET The MKRA SPAN softkey requires that delta marker mode be turned ow 9886 MARKER DELTA RANGE NOT SET The MKRA SEARCH RNG softkey requires that delta marker is turned ow 988 ACTIVE MARKER The marker command cannot be execute when no marker is displayed on the screen Turn on the marker before executing the marker commands 988 CAN T CHANGE WHILE DUAL CHAN OFF The Cross channel cannot be turned on when dual channel is off Turn on the dual channel before the cross channel is turned on 100 NO FIXED DELTA MARKER The FIXED AMKR VALUE and FIXED AMKR AUX VALUE softkey requires that fixed delta marker is turned oN Messages 16 110 SAVE ERROR A serious error for example physically damaged disk surface is detected on saving a file 111 RECALL ERROR INSTR STATE PRESET A serious error for example corrupted data is detected on recalling a file and this forced the analyzer to be PRESET 12 INVALID FILE NAME GPIB only The file name for the RECALL PURGE or RE SAVE function must have a _D or _S extension for LIF format 113 NO STATE DATA FILES ON DISK There are no files on the flexible
280. ers In A mode this also lists Amarker STATISTICS on OFF MEASTAT ON OFF Calculates and displays the mean standard deviation and peak to peak values of the section of the displayed trace in the search range If Partial Search is orr the statistics are calculated for the entire trace The statistics are absolute values For Polar Smith and Admittance Chart Formats The statistics are calculated using the absolute value of the complex value A Convenient Use of Statistics The statistics function provides a convenient way to find the peak to peak value of passband ripple without searching separately for the maximum and minimum values MKR TIME on OFF MKRTIME ON OFF Sets the x axis units to time the start point is zero and the stop point is the value of the sweep time The marker indicates the elapsed time since the sweep started This function is useful for testing a DUT s time transition characteristics at a certain fixed frequency by setting the span to zero Marker Block 7 27 SMITH POLAR MENU SMITH CHART POLAR CHART ADMITTANCE CHART 7 28 Marker Block SMTH POLAR MENU Displays softkeys to select a form of complex marker value on Smith polar and admittance chart REAL IMAG CIRF RI Displays the values of the marker on a Smith chart as a real and imaginary pair The complex data is separated into its real and imaginary parts The first marker value given is the real part
281. es No Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer 8 33 8 33 8 33 8 33 8 33 8 34 8 34 8 34 8 34 8 34 8 34 8 34 8 34 8 34 8 34 8 34 8 34 8 34 8 34 8 35 8 35 8 36 8 36 8 36 8 36 8 36 8 36 8 36 8 37 8 37 8 37 8 37 8 37 8 38 8 38 8 38 8 38 8 38 8 39 Contents 23 PURGE YES NO Initialize Yes No Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer INITIALIZE DISK YES NO Letter Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer ENTER CHARACTERS SELECT LETTER SPACE BACK SPACE ERASE TITLE DDNE STOR DEV STODDISK STODMEMO CANCEL Recall Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer file name RECD PREV FILES NEXT FILES STOR DEV STODDISK 5 AUTO RECALL s s 9 Accessories and Options Options Available High Stability Frequency Reference Option 1D5 Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Option 1D6 50 to 75 9 Input Impedance Conversion Option 1D7 Impedance Measurement Function Option 010 Handle Kit Option 1CN Rack Mount Kit 1CM Rack Mount and Handle Kit Option 1CP Measurement accessories available Test Sets 85046 A B S Parameter Test Set 87512A B Transmission Reflection Test Set Active Probes 85024A High Frequency Probe 300 kHz to 3 GHz 41800A Active Probe 5 Hz to 500 2 41802A 1 Input Adapter 5 Hz to 100 MHz 54701A Active Probe DC to 2 5 GHz 11
282. es of menus used to select the analyzer type and the parameters or input ports to be measured Displays the menu used to select the display format of the data Various rectangular and polar formats are available for display of magnitude phase impedance group delay real data imaginary data and standing wave ratio SWR Provides access to a series of menus used for instrument state and active channel display functions These menus include dual channel display overlaid or split definition of the displayed active channel trace in terms of the mathematical relationship between data and trace memory display intensity color selection active channel display title and frequency blanking Scale Ref Displays the menu used to modify the vertical axis scale and the reference line value as well as the electrical length and phase offset Bw Avg Provides access to three different noise reduction techniques sweep to sweep averaging group delay aperture and variable IF bandwidth Provides access to a series of menus that implement the accuracy enhancement procedures Spectrum Analyzer Mode Provides access to a series of menus used to select the analyzer type input ports to be measured and the detection modes Format Displays the menu used to select the display units Provides access to a series of menus used for instrument and active channel display functions These menus include dual channel display overlaid or split definitio
283. esidual measurement uncertainties remain Analyzer Features 12 55 PORT The I O port on the analyzer rear panel communicates with the external devices such as a handler on a production line Pin Assignment The I O port consists of 15 TTL compatible signals which are 8 bit output 4 bit input and ground The pin assignments are shown in Figure 12 41 Mm LO 0 F O OA lt O O O OK 00000000 Figure 12 41 I O Port Pin Assignments The signals carried through each pin are described below OUT 0 thru 7 output signals to external devices and are controlled by two GPIB commands OUT8IO as described below Once 0UT8IO is executed the signal is latched until OUT8IO is executed again IN 0 thru 4 input signals from external devices and are read by the GPIB command INPSIO as described below Related GPIB Commands There are three GPIB commands that directly control an I O port OUTSIO outputs 8 bit data to the OUT 0 thru 7 lines The OUT 0 signal is the LSB least significant bit while the OUT 7 signal is the MSB most significant bit INP810 inputs data from the 4 bit parallel input port to the analyzer and outputs the data to the controller 12 56 Analyzer Features Manual Changes Introduction This appendix contains the information required to adapt this manual to earlier versions or configurations of the analyzer than the current printing date of th
284. est Sets and Connector Types 11 8 Determining Expected System performance 11 25 Procedures 11 25 Contents 26 12 Analyzer Features System Overview 2 12 2 Data processing MM 12 3 Overview 2 4 4 c c es 12 3 Data Processing for Network Measurement 2 2 2 2 12 4 AD converter ADC 12 4 Digital Filter 2 2 12 4 Frequency characteristics conversion l l rl 12 5 Ratio Calculations MN 12 5 Range Adjustment 12 5 Frequency Characteristics Correction 12 5 Averaging 12 5 Raw Data Arrays ee te t ot 12 5 Calibration Coefficient Arrays MV 12 5 Data Arrays 12 5 Memory ArrayS 12 5 Electrical Delay and Phase Offset 12 6 Conversion e e 12 6 Format sc sc c s s t s e e s es ts s t ss 12 6 Data Hold 2 s s s s 12 6 Data 12 6 Data Trace Arrays 4 a a 12 6 Memory Trace Arrays 12 6 Sealing 4 4 4 4 s c s 44s 12 6 Data Processing for Spectrum Measurement 0 12 7 Decimation Windowing o oa a a a 12 7 Fast Fourier Transform
285. exactly the characteristic impedance 50 9 or 75 0 some of the reflected signal is re reflected off the test port or other impedance transitions further down the line and back to the unknown adding to the original incident signal I This effect causes the magnitude and phase of the incident signal to vary as a function of S414 and frequency Leveling the source to produce constant I reduces this error but because the source cannot be exactly leveled at the test device input leveling cannot eliminate all power variations This re reflection effect and the resultant incident power variation are caused by the source match error Esp Figure 12 29 Source Match ESF Unknown Figure 12 29 Source Match Esr Frequency response error Frequency response tracking error is caused by variations in magnitude and phase flatness versus frequency between the test and reference signal paths These are due mainly to imperfectly matched receiver circuits and differences in length and loss between incident and test signal paths The vector sum of these variations is the reflection signal path tracking error Err Figure 12 30 SA Frequency Tracking Figure 12 30 Reflection Tracking Egr 12 48 Analyzer Features How calibration standards are used to quantify these error terms It can be shown that these three errors are mathematically related to the actual data and measured data Siim by the following equation SualE
286. f the present marker position SIGNAL TRK on OFF SGTRK ON OFF Toggles signal tracking on and off When the network analyzer mode is selected this softkey does not appear in this menu PEAK DEF MENU Displays the peak definition menu SUB MKR Displays the sub marker menu that is used to put a sub marker at the marker position Target Menu Network Analyzer TARGET SEARCH Search TARGET SEARCH TARGET LEFT SEARCH RIGHT SUB Sub Marker Menu RETURN Figure 7 12 Target Menu TARGET SEATARG Makes the target value to the active function to enter a value and moves the marker to a specified target point on the trace The target value is in units appropriate to the current format The default target value is 3 dB In delta marker mode the target value is the value relative to the Amarker If no Amarker is on the target value is an absolute value SEARCH LEFT SEAL Searches the trace for the next occurrence of the target value to the left SEARCH RIGHT SEAR Searches the trace for the next occurrence of the target value to the right SUB MKR Displays the sub marker menu that is used to put a sub marker on the present marker position Marker Block 7 19 Widths Menu Network Analyzer WIDTH FUNCTION 7 20 Marker Block SEARCH IN SEARCH OUT WIDTHS WIDTHS OFF on OFF WIDTH VALUE 4 Figure 7 13 Widths Menu
287. file name name RE SAVE FILE file name FILE PREV FILES UTILITIES E NEXT FILES STOR DEV PURGE DISK FILE Re Save File Menu CREATE DIRECTORY E CHARGE file name DIRECTORY file COPY FILE file name INITIALIZE file name FORMA gt PREV FILES Purge Yes No Menu NEXT FILES STOR DEV STOR DEV DISK DISK RETURN Purge File Menu STOR DEV DISK SELECT file name LETTER Save Menu file name gt SPACE file name BACK gt SPACE file name gt ERASE PREV FILES TITLE gt NEXT FILES gt DONE EE STOREY gt STORDEV gt DISK Copy File Menu CANCEL Letter Menu INITIALIZE DISK YES NO Initialize Yes No Menu CB008036 Figure 8 17 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Save K trument State Block 8 31 Save Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer STATE DATA ONLY LY SAVE BINARY SAVE ASCII DEFINE SAVE DATA Date Menu STOR DEV DISK GRAPHICS 4396A STATE RE SAVE Re Save FILE File Menu SN FILE 4 UTILITIES E PE usus BURGE Purge File FILE Menu CREATE DIRECTORY CHARGE E COPY Menu FILE 8 2 INITIALIZE Initialize FORMEI Yes No STOR DEV Menu DISK 4 RETURN Letter Menu STOR DEV DISK Figure 8 18 Save Menu SAVE STATE STATE SAVDSTA Spec
288. finition MAX SEAM MAX Moves the marker to the maximum amplitude point on the trace MIN SEAM MIN Moves the marker to the minimum amplitude point on the trace TARGET SEAM TARG Moves the marker to a specified target point on the trace and displays to the target menu that is used to search right and search left to resolve multiple solutions This softkey appears in the network analyzer mode only MULTIPLE PEAKS Displays softkeys that are used to search multiple peaks SEARCH PEAKS ALL SEAM PKSA Searches for eight maximum or minimum peaks using the marker and the sub markers Each time SEARCH PEAKS ALL is pressed the marker moves to the maximum or minimum peak The sub markers move to the next peaks in the order of amplitude values of the peaks If the number of peaks on the trace is less than eight the sub markers that cannot identify a peak are not turned on PEAKS RIGHT SEAM PKSR Searches to the right of the peak for the nearest seven peaks from the maximum or minimum peak Each time PEAKS RIGHT is pressed the marker moves to the maximum or minimum peak The sub markers move to the next peaks on the right of the marker position The sub markers start at the nearest peak from the marker position PEAKS LEFT SEAM PKSL Searches to the left of the peak for the nearest seven peaks from the maximum or minimum peak Each time PEAKS LEFT is pressed the marker moves to the maximum or minimum peak The sub marke
289. firm the analyzer setting and set appropriate setting for the repetitive sampling mode 130 TRIG EXT or VIDEO ONLY The repetitive sampling is turn on when span must be zero the sweep type must be linear frequency and the trigger source must be EXT or VIDEO only Confirm the analyzer setting and set appropriate setting for the repetitive sampling mode 110 SAVE ERROR A serious error for example physically damaged disk surface is detected on saving a file 76 SEGMENT START STOP OVERLAPPED Segments are not allowed to be overlapped Reenter appropriate value for start or stop value of segments to avoid that segment is not overlapped 330 Self test failed A self test failed Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies office of see the Service Manual for troubleshooting 221 Settings conflict A legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed due to the current device state see IEEE 488 2 6 4 5 3 and 11 5 1 1 5 150 String data error This error as well as errors 151 and 158 are generated when analyzing the syntax of a string data element This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specific error 158 String data not allowed A string data element was encountered but was not allowed by the analyzer at this point in parsing 130 Suffix error This error as well as errors 131 through 139 are generated when parsing a suffix This particular error
290. flection measurement uncertainty Analyzer Features 12 49 Actual Actual Effective of Load Directivity _ Measured Effective Directivity C012 011 Figure 12 32 Measured Effective Directivity Next a SHORT termination whose response is known to a very high degree establishes another condition Figure 12 33 _ SA 1 lt 180 0 Epp Sum EDF Vg C Figure 12 33 Short Circuit Termination The OPEN gives the third independent condition In order to accurately model the phase variation with frequency due to radiation from the OPEN connector a specially designed shielded OPEN is used for this step The OPEN capacitance is different with each connector type Now the values for Epp directivity Esp source match and reflection frequency response are computed and stored Figure 12 84 12 50 Analyzer Features Figure 12 34 Open Circuit Termination Now the unknown is measured to obtain a value for the measured response at each frequency Figure 12 35 EDF ESF Sal ERF 5 1 Sita Stim EDF Figure 12 35 Measured 511 This is the one port error model equation solved for S i14 Because the three errors and Siim are now known for each test frequency can be computed as follows Sum EDF Esr Sium Epr Err For reflection measurements on two port devices the same technique can be applied but the test device outp
291. ftkey displays the OPEN standard menu that selects an the OPEN standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 Q or 75 Q type N SHORT CLASS22B When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3 5 mm cal kit this softkey measures the short standard and then the softkey label is underlined Or this softkey displays the short standard menu that selects a short standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 0 or 75 0 type N LOAD CLASS22C When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3 5 mm cal kit this softkey measures the load standard and then the softkey label is underlined Or this softkey displays the load standard menu that selects a load standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 0 or 75 0 type N REFLECT N DONE REFD Completes the reflection calibration for the full 2 port calibration The error coefficients are computed and stored Full 2 Port menu is displayed with the REFLECT N softkey underlined If this key is pressed without measuring all the required standards the message CAUTION ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED is displayed TRANS MISSION TRANS Starts the transmission calibration and displays the menu that measures frequency response and load match for transmission calibration FWD TRANS THRU FWDT Measures 55 frequency response and then FWD TRANS THRU is underlined If the cal kit is a user kit and two or more standards are assigned to the forward transmission class FWD TRANS THRU displays the THR
292. g program might not be possible 285 Program syntax error Indicates that a syntax error appears in a downloaded program The syntax used when parsing the downloaded program is device specific Messages 23 286 Program runtime error A program runtime error of the Instrument BASIC has occurred To get a more specific error information use the ERRM or ERRN command of the Instrument BASIC 310 System error Some error termed system error by the analyzer has occurred 311 Memory error An error was detected in the analyzer s memory 330 Self test failed A self test failed Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies office of see the Service Manual for troubleshooting 350 Queue overflow A specific code entered into the queue in lieu of the code that caused the error This code indicates that there is no room in the queue and an error occurred but was not recorded 400 Query errors This is the generic query error that the analyzer cannot detect more specific errors This code indicates only that a query error as defined in IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 7 and 6 3 has occurred 4100 Query INTERRUPTED A condition causing an interrupted query error occurred see IEEE 488 2 6 3 2 3 For example a query followed by DAB or GET before a response was completely sent 420 Query UNTERMINATED A condition causing an unterminated query error occurred see IEEE 488 2 6 3 2 2 For example the analyzer w
293. ge The connection allows users to control the test set from the analyzer See Chapter 9 for the test set that can be connected This interface is not used for the transmission reflection test kit If a printer is connected to this interface by mistake it may be damaged Do not connect a printer to this interface 11 Gate Output Option 1D6 Only Outputs a signal that indicates the status of the gate when in the EDGE mode of the gate trigger The signal is TTL compatible High indicates gate on low indicates gate OFF 12 External Trigger Input 13 2nd IF Output Triggers a measurement sweep The positive or negative edge of a pulse more than 20 us wide in the Low or HIGH state starts a measurement The signal is TTL compatible To use this connector set the trigger mode to external using softkey functions see Trigger in Chapter 6 Outputs the 2nd IF signal that is the down converted signal of the input of the analyzer The frequency of IF signal is 21 42 MHz 14 Reference Oven Output Option 1D5 Only Connects to the EXT REF INPUT connector when Option 1D5 is installed Option 1D5 improves the frequency accuracy and stability of the analyzer Front and Rear Panel 2 11 Active Channel Block The analyzer has two active channels Figure 3 1 that provide independent measurement and display of data Two different sets of data can be measured simultaneously for example a spectrum and network measurement
294. gh Table 11 7 depending on the test set and connector type in your system Find the absolute linear magnitude of the remaining error terms Combining Error Terms Combine the above terms using the reflection or transmission uncertainty equation in the worksheets System Performance 11 25 Table 11 8 Reflection Measurement Uncertainty Worksheet In the columns below enter the appropriate values for each term Frequency Error Term Symbol dB Value Linear Value Directivity D Reflection tracking Source match Ms Load match M Dynamic accuracy magnitude 1 Am Dynamic accuracy phase 1 Ap Multiplexer Switching Uncertainty Um magnitude Multiplexer Switching Uncertainty Up phase 511 511 521 521 512 512 Noise floor N High level noise Connector reflection repeatability Rr Rro Connector transmission repeatability Ri Reo Magnitude drift due to temperature T q mag Phase drift due to temperature T a phase Cable reflection stability Su S Cable transmission phase stability 5 1 Sto Switch Tracking Tsw Switch Port Match Msw Magnitude Combine Systematic Errors In the space provided enter the appropriate linear values from the list of errors Then combine these errors to obtain the total sum of systematic errors
295. gment by segment The allowable range is 70 dBm to 20 dBm RES BW BW Sets the resolution bandwidth segment by segment MORE Displays the next page of the menu SEGMENT START STAR Sets the START frequency of a segment STOP STOP Sets the stop frequency of a segment Sweep Block 6 13 6 14 Sweep Block CENTER CENT Sets the CENTER frequency of a segment SPAN SPAN Sets the frequency sPAN of a segment about a specified center frequency SEGMENT QUIT SQUI Returns to the previous softkey menu without saving the modified segment SEGMENT DONE SDON Saves the modified segment and returns to the previous softkey menu Source Source menu Network Analyzer POWER LEVEL SLOPING POWER SLOPE SLOPE on OFF CW FREQ ATTENUATOR PORT 1 ATTENUATOR PORT 2 RE OUT ON off Figure 6 7 Source Menu for Network Analyzer POWER POWE Activates the power level function SLOPE SLOPE Compensates for power loss versus the frequency sweep by sloping the output power upwards proportionally to the frequency Use this softkey to enter the power slope in dB per GHz of sweep The slope must be set so that the maximum RF output level is in the range of the RF power source That is the RF output level at the stop frequency must be less than or equal to 20 dBm SLOPE on OFF SLOP ON OFF Toggles the power slope function ON or OFF With slope ON the o
296. gnal that is adjacent to a large signal The small adjacent signal is hidden by the large signal even when the resolution bandwidth is set to smaller than the difference of frequency between the signals To resolve small adjacent signals the resolution bandwidth must be set so that the small signal is not hidden by the large signals as shown in Figure 12 12 RBW 30kHz RBW 10KHz MEME p BEEN The large signal EN 100 2 4OOkHz hides this small signal mE ECTIVITY _ 50kHz C5012025 Figure 12 12 Resolving Small Adjacent Signal Analyzer Features 12 17 Because the analyzer uses a digital filter technique the selectivity of the analyzer is better smaller than a conventional spectrum analyzer which uses analog filter technique This means the analyzer can detect a small signal that cannot be detected by a conventional spectrum analyzer Especially in the stepped FFT mode RBW lt 3 kHz the selectivity of the analyzer is less than one third of one at the swept mode RBW gt 10 kHz Noise measurement Noise Format and Marker Noise Form When a spectrum analyzer measures noise the power shown by an analyzer is in proportion to RBW because spectrum analyzers measure total power coming thorough RBW For noise measurement the measurement value is usually normalized by an equivalent noise bandwidth of an RBW filter frequency The noise format automatically normalizes noise power by
297. gnitude 0 01 dB C 1 1 10 Phase 0 1 0 15xf GHz degrees Tsw Switch Tracking 0 03 dB 3 5x107 Switch Port Match 70 dB 3 2 10 1 Accuracy enhancement procedures are performed using 85031B 7 mm calibration kit Enviromental temperature is 23 C 2 With IF bandwidth of 10 Hz 3 With impedace matched load 4 High level noise is the RMS of a continuouse measurement of a short circuit or thru 3 C at calibration 1 C from calibration temperature must be maintained for valied measurement calibration 5 Arrived at by bending 11857D cables out perpendicular to front panel and reconnecting Stability is much better with less flexing 6 Arrived at using 11857D cables and full 2 port calibration Drift is much better without calbes and with 1 port calibration For this case drift typically is 0 1 0 05 xf GHz x A C degrees System Perf ormance 11 19 Typical System Performance for Devices with 3 5 mm Connectors Table 11 3 4396B with 85046A Test Set 300 kHz to 1 8 GHz Typical Residual after Accuracy Enhancement 2 Symbol Error Terms Uncorrected Response Only Response and Isolation One Port Full two port D Directivity 30 dB 30 dB 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB 3 2 10 2 3 2 10 2 0 01 0 01 0 01 Ms Source Match 16 dB 16 dB
298. gure 7 5 Clear Sub Marker Menu CLEAR SUB MARKER SUB MKR 1 SMKR1 OFF 2 SMKR2 OFF 3 SMKR3 OFF 4 SMKR4 OFF SMKR5 OFF 6 SMKR6 OFF T SMKRT OFF These keys turn a sub marker orr 7 8 Marker Block Marker arker gt The Marker key activates the marker if it is not already active and provides access to the marker functions The marker functions change the sweep parameter and amplitude values to make them equal to the current marker or peak value Use the knob or the numeric keypad to move the marker to the desired position on the trace and then press the appropriate softkey to set the specified parameters to that trace value When the values are changed the marker can again be moved within the range of the new parameters When the cross channel function is on the active channel is changed to the inactive channel after a marker function is performed Marker Block 7 9 Marker menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer MKR FUNCTION 7 10 Marker Block MKR CENTER START MKR STOP MKR REFERENCE MKR ZOOM PEAK CENTER CROSS CHAN on GFF MORE la MKHS A gt 5 MKRS CENTER ZOOMING APERTURE CROSS CHAN on OFF RETURN Figure 7 6 Marker Menu MKR CENTER MKRCENT Changes the sweep parameter center value of the destination channel to the sweep parameter value of the marker an
299. han required for the header For example the SRE command requires one parameter so receiving only SRE is not allowed 988 NO ACTIVE MARKER The marker command cannot be execute when no marker is displayed on the screen Turn on the marker before executing the marker commands 12 NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS The RESUME CAL SEQUENCE softkey is not valid unless a calibration is in progress Start a new calibration See Cal key in the Function Reference 119 NO DATA TRACE DISPLAYED The SCALE FOR DATA is selected when the data trace is not displayed 93 NO DATA TRACE The MARKER ON DATA is selected when the data trace is not displayed 0 No error The error queue is empty Every error in the queue has been read OUTPERRO query or the queue was cleared by power on or the CLS command 100 NO FIXED DELTA MARKER The FIXED AMKR VALUE and FIXED AMKR AUX VALUE softkey requires that fixed delta marker is turned oN Messages 7 96 MARKER DELTA RANGE NOT SET The MKRA SEARCH RNG softkey requires that delta marker is turned on 95 NO MARKER DELTA SPAN NOT SET The MKRA SPAN softkey requires that delta marker mode be turned on 120 NO MEMORY TRACE DISPLAYED The SCALE FOR MEMORY is selected when the memory trace is not displayed 94 MEMORY TRACE The MARKER ON MEMORY is selected when the memory trace is not displayed 113 NO STATE DATA FILES ON DISK There are no files on the flexibl
300. hange it SCALE DIV SCAL Changes the response value scale per division of the displayed trace REFERENCE VALUE REFV Changes the value of the reference line moving the measurement trace correspondingly MKR REFERENCE MKRREF Makes the reference value equal to the marker s absolute value regardless of the delta marker value The marker is effectively moved to the reference line position SCALE FOR 1 SCAF DATA MEMO Selects one of the DATA and MEMORY traces to be scaled by prior functions in this menu The DATA and MEMORY traces are available using the display menu accessed from the key Measurement Block 5 29 SCALE COUPLING MAX MIXER LEVEL 5 30 Measurement Block D amp M SCALE SCAC ON OFF Couples or uncouples the DATA and MEMORY traces to be scaled by prior functions in this menu This is valid only for those traces obtained by the display menu accessed from the key MAX MIXER LEVEL MAXMLEV Changes the maximum input mixer level The mixer level is less than or equal to the reference level minus the attenuator setting As the reference level changes the input attenuator setting is changed to keep the power levels less than the selected level at the input mixer when attenuator mode is auto Bandwidth menu Network Analyzer AVERAGING EBAGING AVERAGING on OFF AVERAGING FACTOR IF BW GROUP DELY APERTURE 2 Figure 5
301. has been made from the listed alternatives that selection is underlined until another selection is made Softkeys That Toggle On or Off Some softkey functions can be toggled on or for example averaging This is indicated in the softkey label The current state on or OFF is capitalized in the softkey label Example AVERAGING ON off The word on is capitalized showing that averaging is currently on AVERAGING on OFF The word off is capitalized showing that averaging is currently off Softkeys that Show Status Indications in Brackets Some softkey labels show the current status of a function in brackets These include simple toggle functions and status only indicators An example of a toggled function is the PRINT STANDARD or PRINT COLOR softkey The DATA MATH softkey is an example of a status only indicator where the selected equation of the data math function is shown in brackets in the softkey label 2 GPIB REMOTE Indicator 3 Preset This lights when the analyzer is in the remote state This key returns the instrument to a known standard preset state from any step of any manual procedure A complete listing of the instrument preset conditions is provided in Appendix D 4 PROBE POWER Connector This connector fused inside the instrument supplies power to an active probe for in circuit measurements of AC circuits Applicable active probes are described in Chapter 9 A 5 Network Analyzer In
302. he data is corrected for source and load match effects then stored as transmission frequency response Isolation Errors Isolation Exr represents the part of the incident signal that appears at the receiver without actually passing through the test device Figure 12 39 Isolation is measured with the test set in the transmission configuration and with terminations installed at the points where the test device will be connected Isolation Exp e JI d 7 1 1 1 1 PORT PORT 1 2 C5012018 Figure 12 39 Isolation Exp Error Terms the Analyzer Can Reduce Thus there are two sets of error terms forward and reverse with each set consisting of six error terms as follows m Forward a Directivity Epr o Isolation Exp Source Match Esp Load Match Erf o Transmission Tracking Erp Reflection Tracking Erf Analyzer Features 12 53 m Reverse Directivity Epp o Isolation Exn Source Match Esr Load Match Erg Transmission Tracking Err a Reflection Tracking Eng The 87511A B S parameter Test sets can measure both the forward and reverse characteristics of the test device without the need to manually remove and physically reverse it With these test sets the full two port error model illustrated in Figure 12 40 effectively removes both the forward and reverse error terms for transmission and reflection measurements The 87512A B Transmission Reflection Test kits cannot switch be
303. he edge mode allows you to position the gate relative to either the rising or falling edge of a TTL trigger signal The edge initiates the gate delay For the edge mode the gate sweep is controlled by the following factors m Trigger polarity which selects the edge positive or negative to initiate the start point of the gate sweep At the start point the edge initiates the gate delay m Gate Delay which determines how long after the trigger signal the gate actuarially becomes active m Gate Length which determines how long the gate is on 12 24 Analyzer Features Signa easured External Positive Trigger Input Negative Gate Output Gate Length Tg i Gate Delay Td C5012028 Figure 12 15 Edge Mode Level Mode The level mode allows the external trigger signal to open and close the gate directly without a programmed gate length The level mode also provides the gate delay For the level mode the gate sweep is controlled by the following factors m Trigger polarity which selects the polarity of TTL the level 5 or 0 to open gate m Gate Delay which determines how long after the trigger signal the gate becomes active HF Signal Measured Poistive Externa Trigger Input Negative Gate Delay Td Gate Output C5012027 Figure 12 16 Level Mode Analyzer Features 12 25 RBW Filt
304. he flexible disk or the RAM disk memory Instrument State Block 8 39 Letter Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer ENTER CHARACTERS 8 40 Instrument State Block STATE SELECT Save Jj LETTER DATA ONLY 7 gt SAVE BINARY 4 SPAGE SAVE ASCII gt BACK SPACE GRAPHICS ERASE EN CREATE TITLE DIRECTORY DONE UTILITIES 7 CHANGE STOR DEV DIRECTORY IDISK COPY FILE file name CANCEL file name CB008032 Figure 8 24 Letter Menu for Key SELECT LETTER Selects the letter pointed to by the arrow 41 on the screen The arrow can be moved by rotating the knob SPACE Inserts a space in the title BACK SPACE Deletes the last character entered ERASE TITLE Deletes the entire title DONE Terminates the title entry and returns to the display more menu STOR DEV STODDISK STODMEMO Selects between the flexible disk drive and the RAM disk memory as the storage device DISK shows the built in flexible disk is selected and MEMORY shows the RAM disk memory is selected This setting does not change even when the line power is cycled or the key is pressed CANCEL Cancels the title entry and returns to the display more menu without any change Recall Gl Recall Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer Note name A file name file name file name
305. he power level segment by segment The allowable range is 70 dBm to 20 dBm Sweep Block 6 11 6 12 Sweep Block IF BW BW Sets the IF bandwidth segment by segment MORE Displays the next page of the menu SEGMENT START STAR Sets the START frequency of a segment STOP STOP Sets the stop frequency of a segment CENTER CENT Sets the CENTER frequency of a segment SPAN SPAN Sets the frequency sPAN of a segment about a specified center frequency SEGMENT QUIT SQUI Returns to the previous softkey menu without saving the modified segment SEGMENT DONE SDON Saves the modified segment and returns to the previous softkey menu Segment menu Spectrum Analyzer SEGMENT Sweep E MKR gt START MKR STOP NUMBER of SWEEP POINTS MENU POWER RES BW EB MORE LIST SEGMENT START STOP CENTER SPAN RETURN SEGMENT QUIT i SEGMENT DONE CB006003 Figure 6 6 Segment Menu for Spectrum Analyzer SEGMENT MKR START MKRSTAR Sets the sweep parameter start value to the sweep parameter value of the marker MKR STOP MKRSTOP Sets the sweep parameter stop value to the sweep parameter value of the marker POWER POWER Sets the power level se
306. hen both channels are in the network analyzer mode measurement markers can have the same stimulus values for the two channels or they can be uncoupled for independent control in each channel See Chapter 7 for more information about markers When either or both channels are in the spectrum analyzer mode the sweep parameter values and the markers cannot be coupled Entry Block The ENTRY block Figure 4 1 contains the numeric and unit s keypad the knob and the step keys These controls are used in combination with other front panel keys and softkeys to modify the active entry to enter or change numeric data and to change the value of the marker In most cases the keypad knob and step keys can be used interchangeably Before a function can be modified it must be made the active function by pressing a front panel key or softkey It can then be modified directly with the knob the step keys or the digits keys and a terminator Numeric Keypad Units Terminater Keys Step Keys Entry Off Key Back Space Key 25004001 Figure 4 1 Entry Block Entry Block 4 1 Numeric Keypad Terminator Keys Knob D and W 4 2 Entry Block The numeric keypad selects digits decimal point and minus sign for numerical entries A unit s terminator is required to complete the entry The unit s termina
307. his softkey displays the short standard menu that selects a short standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 Q or 75 type N LOAD CLASS11C When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3 5 mm cal kit LOAD measures the load standard and then LOAD is underlined Or LOAD displays the load standard menu that selects a load standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 Q or 75 type N DONE 1 PORT CAL SAV1 Completes the 1 port calibration The error coefficients are computed and stored The correction menu is displayed with CORRECTION ON If this key is pressed without measuring all the required standards the message CAUTION ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED is displayed S22 1 Port Menu Network Analyzer S22 1 PORT CAL Cal Y CALIBRATION MENU 15221 Open Standard OPEN Menu Y 22 1 PORT SHORT LOAD Short Standard 7 DONE Menu zs PORT CAL Load Standard Menu Only for Type N calkits or user calkit Only for user calkit CB005018 Figure 5 26 S22 1 Port Menu 822 OPEN CLASS22A When the cal kit is a 7 mm or 3 5 mm cal kit this softkey measures the OPEN standard and then the softkey label is underlined Or this softkey displays the open standard menu that selects an OPEN standard and measures the standard when the cal kit is 50 Q or 75 Q type N SHORT CLASS22B When the
308. ifies saving the instrument states the calibration coefficients and measurement data SAVE DATA DATA ONLY Displays the menu used to save data 1 DATA ONLY does not save instrument settings such as start and stop Y frequencies BE CAREFUL Always make sure that you save the existing STATE if you want to use the setup again Note SAVE BINARY SAVDDAT DEFINE SAVE DATA Displays the define save data menu that selects the applicable data arrays to be saved 8 32 Instrument State Block ASCII SAVE Note uy Note OVER WRITE Gave SAVE ASCII SAVDASC Specifies saving the internal data arrays as an ASCII file The arrays saved are defined by the DEFINE SAVE DATA key DEFINE SAVE DATA Displays the define save data menu that selects the applicable data arrays to be saved STOR DEV STODDISK STODMEMO Selects between the flexible disk drive and the RAM disk memory as the storage device DISK shows the built in flexible disk is selected and MEMORY shows the RAM disk memory is selected GRAPHICS SAVDTIFF Specifies the file format for saving the screen currently displayed as the TIFF format A display image is saved according to the color setup you have done on the print setup menu Copy PRINT SETUP You can choose from PRINT STANDARD black and white PRINT COLOR FIXED color against white background and PRINT COLOR VARIABLE color against black background Softkeys
309. igger event On point On sweep On sweep On sweep Trigger polarity Positive Negative Positive Positive Gate type Level Edge level Level Gate delay 2 0 us to 3 2 s with 0 5 usec minimum 10 us 10 usec resolution Gate lengh 2 0 us to 3 2 s with 0 5 usec resolution 10 us 10 usec Video trigger level 0 0 to 100 of span with 0 01 resolution 50 96 50 96 Center Function Range Preset Value Power ON default NA Center Frequency 100 kHz to 1 8199999999 GHz 900 05 MHz 900 05 MHz SA Center Frequency 0 Hz to 1 819999999902 GHz 900 MHz 900 MHz NA Step Size mode Auto Man Auto Auto SA Step Size mode Auto Man Man Man Center step size 0 to 1 8 GHz with 1 mHz resolution 1 MHz 1 MHz Function Range Preset Value Power ON default NA Span Frequency 0 to 1 8199 GHz with 1 mHz resolution 1 7999 GHz 1 7999 GHz NA Span power 0 to 30 dB 30 dB 30 dB SA Span Frequency 0 to 1 8 GHz with 1 mHz resolution 1 8 GHz 1 8 GHz Start and Stop D 8 Input Range and Default Settings Function Range Preset Value Power ON default SA Start Frequency 0 Hz to 1 82 GHz with 1 mHz resolution 0 Hz 0 Hz NA Start Frequency 0 Hz to 1 82 GHz with 1 mHz resolution 100 kHz 100 kHz Stop Frequency 0 kHz to 1 82 GHz with 1 mHz resolution 1 8 GHz 1 8 GHz Start power 70 to 20 dBm with 0 1 dBm resolution 60 dBm 60 dBm NA Stop power 70 to 20 dBm
310. igure 5 4 S parameter Menu for Network Analyzer S PARAMETER MEASUREMENT 5 6 Measurement Block Refl FWD S11 MEAS 511 Configures the S parameter test set to measure 511 the complex reflection coefficient magnitude and phase of the DUT input Trans FWD S21 B R MEAS 521 Configures the S parameter test set for measurement of S5 the complex forward transmission coefficient magnitude and phase of the DUT Trans REV S12 B R MEAS 12 Configures the S parameter test set to measure 51 the complex reverse transmission coefficient magnitude and phase of the DUT Refl REV 822 A R MEAS S22 Defines the measurement as S22 the complex reflection coefficient magnitude and phase of the output of the DUT CONVERSION Displays the conversion menu that converts the measured data to impedance Z or admittance Y or multiplies phase data When a conversion parameter has been defined it is shown in brackets under the softkey label If no conversion has been defined the softkey label reads CONVERSION OFF INPUT PORTS Displays the input ports menu that is used to define a ratio or single input measurement rather than an S parameter measurement Meas ANALYZER Displays the analyzer type menu that selects the network or spectrum analyzer mode of operation Measurement Block 5 7 Input port menu Spectrum Analyzer INPUT PORTS 5 8 Measurement Block SPECTRUM De
311. in Figure 11 9 yields an equation for the transmission magnitude uncertainty The equation contains all of the first order terms and some of the significant second order terms The error term related to thermal drift is combined on a worst case basis with the total of systematic and random errors The four terms under the radical are random in character and are combined on an RSS basis The terms in the systematic error group are combined on a worst case basis In all cases the error terms are treated as linear absolute magnitudes Etm linear V Sa T d magnitude and Etm Eim og 20log 1 where V yW X2 Y 7 S systematic error C Tsw T Se1 Mss Ms Sra S11 S21 Msw M Sr2 S21 S22 Am Um S21 W random low level noise 3N X random high level noise 1 Y random portl repeatability R 1921 T Rri S118211 Z random port2 repeatability R 2921 T R 2S52S21 Total Transmission Phase Uncertainty Transmission phase uncertainty is calculated from a comparison of the magnitude uncertainty with the test signal magnitude The worst case phase angle is computed This result is combined with the error terms related to phase dynamic accuracy cable phase stability thermal drift of the total system and phase multiplexer switching uncertainty VW Am Um S21 S21 Ep aresin Tra phase Sti So Ap Up System Performance 11 9
312. ing a separator and encountered an illegal character For example the semicolon was omitted after a program message unit RST TRIG 151 Invalid string data A string data element was expected but was invalid for some reason see IEEE 488 2 7 7 5 2 For example an END message was received before the terminal quote character 131 Invalid suffix The suffix does not follow the syntax described in IEEE 488 2 7 7 3 2 or the suffix is inappropriate for the analyzer 115 LIF DOS COPY NOT ALLOWED If you try to copy a file between the RAM disk and the flexible disk when the format of the RAM disk is different from the format of the flexible disk this message is displayed Messages 6 14 LIST TABLE EMPTY OR INSUFFICIENT TABLE The frequency list is empty To implement the list frequency mode add segments to the list table 250 Mass storage error Indicates that a mass storage error occurred This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 257 51 MEASUREMENT INVALID AT f lt 1MHZ IFBW gt 10KHZ This message will displayed when whole frequency measured is less than or equal to 1 MHz and IFBW is set to 10 kHz or 40 kHz because the network measurement performance is not warranted at frequency lt 1 MHz with 10 kHz or 40 kHz IFBW 311 Memory error An error was detected in the analyzer s memory 109 Missing parameter Fewer parameters were received t
313. ion 1D5 This option a 10 MHz crystal in temperature stabilized oven improves the source signal frequency accuracy and stability This option can be retrofitted using the 4396U Upgrade Kit Option 1105 Time Gated Spectrum Analyzer Option 1D6 This option allows the capability of intermittent or burst signal spectrum measurement This option can be retrofitted using the 4396U Upgrade Kit Option 1D6 50 to 75 Q Input Impedance Conversion Option 1D7 This option offers 75 input impedance for the spectrum measurement The 11852B option C04 50 to 75 Q minimum loss pads and 50 Q to 75 Q BNC adapters are furnished and the supplemental characteristics are supplied with this option This option can be retrofitted using the 4396U Upgrade Kit Option 107 Impedance Measurement Function Option 010 This option allows the capability of impedance measurement function This option can be retrofitted using the 43961A Impedance Test Kit Handle Kit Option 1CN This option is a rack mount kit containing a pair of handles and the necessary hardware to mount the instrument Rack Mount Kit 1CM This option is a rack mount kit containing a pair of flanges and the necessary hardware to mount the instrument with handles detached in an equipment rack with 482 6 mm 19 inches horizontal spacing Rack Mount and Handle Kit Option 1CP This option is a rack mount kit containing a pair of flanges and the necessary hardware to mount the instrum
314. ion Modes 2 MEL Positive and Negative Peak Modes 2 2 2 2 2 2 Sample Mode Swept Mode and FFT Selectivity of the Noise measurement Noise Format and Marker Noise Form 22022202222 22 22 Sample Detection Mode for Noise Measurement 2 Reference Level Calibration 2 2 2 2 2 2 252542 5 Spectrum Monitor at inputs R A and B aaa a a Measurement Points and Display Points Channel Coupling Limit Line Concept 4 o t s How Limit Lines are Entered a a a Turning Limit Lines Limit Testing On and Off Segments Entering Order Needs Notice Saving the Limit Line Table Offsetting the Sweep Parameter or Amplitude of the Limit Lines Supported Display Use a Sufficient Number of Points or Errors May Displaying Printing or Plotting Limit Test Data Results of Plotting or Printing the Display with Limit Lines ON Gated Sweep 2 2 Trigger Polarity 0a a a a Gate Trigger Edge Mode Level Mode RBW Filter Response Time 2
315. ion measurement Freq response THRU for trans OPEN when the highest accuracy is not required or SHORT for reflection Response amp Transmission of high insertion loss devices Frequency response plus Same as response plus isolation or reflection of high return loss devices isolation in transmission or isolation std LOAD Not as accurate as 1 port or 2 port directivity in reflection calibration 511 1 port Reflection of any one port device or well Directivity source match SHORT and OPEN and terminated two port device frequency response LOAD Soo 1 port Reflection of any one port device or well Directivity source match freq SHORT and OPEN and terminated two port device response LOAD Full 2 port Transmission or reflection of highest Directivity source match load SHORT and OPEN and accuracy for two port devices 85046A B match isolation frequency LOAD and THRU 2 S parameter Test Set is required response forward and reverse LOADSs for isolation One path Transmission or reflection of highest Directivity source match load SHORT and OPEN and 2 port accuracy for two port devices Reverse match isolation frequency LOAD and THRU DUT between forward and reverse response forward direction measurements only 5 42 Measurement Block Response standard menu Network Analyzer CALIBRATION RESPONSE MENU RESPONSE 2 ISOL N RESPONSE SHORTIM SHORTIF OPENIM OPENIF THRU
316. ires high speed throughput the following limits apply when using this function m Signal tracking is available only in the spectrum analyzer mode m Search tracking is not performed even if it is turned on Search tracking starts when the signal tracking is turned off if the search tracking is still turned on m The peak definition of the marker search function is not affected during signal tracking Signal tracking searches for the nearest positive peak from the marker m Partial search range is not available during signal tracking is turned on When CROSS CHAN is turned on The signal tracking function searches the active channel for the signal and changes the CENTER value of the inactive channel 7 16 Marker Block SEARCH RANGE MENU Displays the search range menu Marker Block 7 17 Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer NEXT PEAK LEFT PEAK RIGHT PEAK 7 18 Marker Block PEAK NEXT PEAK NEXT PEAK LEFT NEXT PEAK RIGHT SIGANL TRK on OFF PEAK DEF Peak Definition M E NU Meng Menu X RETURN Spectrum Analyzer Only Figure 7 11 Peak Menu PEAK SEAM PEAK Moves the marker to the maximum or minimum peak NEXT PEAK SEANPK Moves the marker to the next peak NEXT PEAK LEFT SEANPKL Moves the marker to the peak on the left of the present marker position NEXT PEAK RIGHT SEANPKR Moves the marker to the peak on the right o
317. is manual The information in this manual applies directly to the 4396B Network Spectrum Analyzer serial number prefix listed on the title page of this manual Manual Changes To adapt this manual to your 4396B see Table A 1 and Table A 2 and make all the manual changes listed opposite your instrument s serial number and firmware version Instruments manufactured after the printing of this manual may be different from those documented in this manual Later instrument versions will be documented in a manual changes supplement that will accompany the manual shipped with that instrument If your instrument s serial number is not listed on the title page of this manual or in Table A 1 it may be documented in a yellow MANUAL CHANGES supplement In additions to change information the supplement may contain information for correcting errors Errata in the manual To keep this manual as current and accurate as possible Agilent Technologies recommends that you periodically request the latest MANUAL CHANGES supplement For information concerning serial number prefixes not listed on the title page or in the MANUAL CHANGE supplement contact the nearest Agilent Technologies office Turn on the line switch or execute the IDN command by GPIB to confirm the firmware version See the GPIB Command Reference manual for information on the IDN command Table A 1 Manual Changes by Serial Number Serial Prefix or Number Make Manual Changes
318. king 1 8 dB 1 5 dB 1 4 dB 0 06 dB 0 06 dB 0 23 0 19 0 18 6 9x 1073 6 9x 107 Load Match 16 dB 16 dB 16 dB 42 dB 0 16 0 16 0 16 7 9 10 Ti Trans Tracking 1 8 0 2 dB 0 2 dB _ 0 05 dB 0 23 0 023 0 023 5 8 10 C Cross Talk 100 dB 100 dB 110 dB 110 dB 110 dB 1 0 10 9 1 0 10 9 3 2 10 9 3 2 10 9 3 2 10 6 Ry Port1 Connector 65 dB 5 6 10 Repeatability Ra Port1 Trans Connector 65 dB 5 6 107 Repeatability Port2 Connector 65 dB 5 6x107 Repeatability Riz Port2 Trans Connector 65 dB 5 6x107 Repeatability N Low Level Noise 2 110 dB from full scale 3 2x 107 Ny High Level Noise 2 4 Magnitude 0 003 dB 3 5x10 Am Ap Dynamic Accuracy Error See Dynamic Accuracy in Chapter 10 Um Up Multiplexer Switching Magnitude 0 0025 dB 2 9 x10 Phase 0 015 degrees Uncertainty Su Port1 Cable Trans 0 05 x f GHz degrees Phase Stability Sa Port1 Cable 70 dB 3 2 10 Stability Sio Port2 Cable Trans 0 05 x f GHz degrees Phase Stability So Port2 Cable Refl 70 dB 3 2 10 Stability Tha Trans Tracking Drift Magnitude 0 01 dB C 1 1x107 C 0 1 0 15xf GHz degrees C Tra Refl Tracking Drift Magnitude 0 01 dB C 1 1 10 3 9 0 1 0 15xf GHz degrees C Tsw Switch Tracking 0 03 dB 3 5x107 Switch Port Match 70 dB 3 2 10
319. lation calibration It is the most accurate calibration procedure for reflection only measurements Three standard devices are required a SHORT an OPEN and an impedance matched LOAD The procedure for performing an 51 one port calibration is described in the 4396B Tusk Reference 22 1 PORT CALI 5221 This softkey is similar to 11 1 PORT Itis used for reflection only measurements of one port devices or properly terminated two port devices in the reverse direction that is for devices connected to port 2 of the S parameter test set Measurement Block 5 39 2 PORT CAL RESUME CAL CAL KIT 5 40 Measurement Block FULL 2 PORT CALI FUL2 Displays the series of menus used to perform a complete calibration to measure all four S parameters of a two port device This is the most accurate calibration for measurements of two port devices It effectively reduces all correctable systematic errors directivity source match load match isolation reflection tracking and transmission tracking in both the forward and the reverse direction Isolation correction can be omitted for measurements of devices with limited dynamic range The standards required for this procedure are a SHORT an OPEN a THRU and an impedance matched LOAD two LOADS if isolation correction is required An S parameter test set is required The procedure is described in the 4396B Tusk Reference ONE PATH 2 PORT CALI ONE2 Displays the series of menus used
320. lay point Displays the following three softkeys HOLD OFF Turns off the hold function MAX Holds the maximum values at each display point MIN Holds the minimum values at each display point When the format is Smith polar or admittance chart format the data hold function keeps the maximum or minimum absolute value DATA MATH MATH DATA DMINM DPLM DDVM Displays the following softkeys and the OFFSET softkey to define the Offset value using the data math function The data math function selected is shown in brackets DATA shows that the data math function selected DATA DATA Turns off all data math functions DATA MEM Adds the memory to the data DATA MEM Subtracts the memory from the data DATA MEM Divides the data by the memory DEFAULT GAIN amp OFS DEFGO Returns gain and offset value back to the default values gain 1 Offset 0 Measurement Block 5 19 OFFSET VALUE GAIN SPLIT DISPLAY BASIC SCREEN 5 20 Measurement Block OFFSET DATOVAL Displays the menu used to define the offset value and activates the offset value When using Smith Polar and admittance chart format OFFSET defines the real part of the offset value MKR OFFSET MKROFS Enters the marker s amplitude value into the offset value AUX OFFSET VALUE DATAOVAL Defines the imaginary part of the offset value when using the Smith Polar and admittance chart format If the format is not one of the above f
321. lected calibration class cannot be computed until all the necessary standards have been measured 84 ANALYZER TYPE MISMATCH The analyzer receives a command that is not available for the current analyzer type Please confirm GPIB command or change analyzer type before sending the command 17 BACKUP DATA LOST Data checksum error on the battery backup memory has occurred The battery is recharged for approximately 10 minutes after power was turned oN 160 Block data error This error as well as errors 161 and 168 are generated when analyzing the syntax of a block data element This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specific error 168 Block data not allowed A legal block data element was encountered but was not allowed by the analyzer at this point in parsing Messages 1 13 CALIBRATION ABORTED The calibration in progress was terminated due to a change of the active channel or stimulus parameters 11 CALIBRATION REQUIRED No valid calibration coefficients were found when you attempted to turn calibration on See Task Reference for information on how to perform calibration 126 CAN T CHANGE NUMBER OF POINTS The number of points of the spectrum analyzer mode cannot be to change manually except in zero span 133 CAN T CHANGE ON LIST SWEEP When list sweep is selected the following parameters are not allowed to be changed CENTER SPAN START STOP NOP IFBW or RBW
322. lection Phase Uncertainty of Two Port Device o 11 3 11 5 Total Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty of a Low Loss Device o 11 4 11 6 Total Transmission Phase Uncertainty of a Low Loss Device 11 4 11 7 Total Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty of a Wide Dynamic Range Device 11 5 11 8 Total Transmission Phase Uncertainty of a Wide Dynamic Range Device 11 5 11 9 4396B 85046A System Error Model MM 11 7 11 10 Typical Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Error Reference Power Level Full Scale MM 11 12 11 11 Typical Phase Dynamic Accuracy Error Reference Power Level Full Scale MM 11 12 11 12 Typical Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Error Reference Power Level 20 dB from Full Scale 11 13 11 13 Typical Phase Dynamic Accuracy Error Reference Power Level 20 dB from Full Scale 11 13 11 14 Typical Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Error Reference Power Level 60 dB from Full Scale 11 14 11 15 Typical Phase Dynamic Accuracy Error Reference Power Level 60 dB from Full Scale 11 14 11 16 Total Reflection Magnitude Uncertainty One Port Cal 11 16 11 17 Total Refection Phase Uncertainty One Port Cal 11 16 11 18 Total Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty Full Two Port Cal 11 17 11 19 Total Transmission Phase Uncertainty Full Two Port 11 17 12 1 Analyzer Simplified
323. lied by Agilent Technologies against the requirements of the standards described in the Declaration of Conformity If it is used as a system component compliance of related regulations and safety requirements are to be confirmed by the builder of the system Caution A Do not exceed the operating input power voltage and current level and signal type appropriate for the instrument being used refer to your instrument s Function Reference N Electrostatic discharge ESD can damage the highly sensitive microcircuits in your instrument ESD damage is most likely to occur as the test fixtures are being connected or disconnected Protect them from ESD damage by wearing a grounding strap that provides a high resistance path to ground Alternatively ground yourself to discharge any static charge built up by touching the outer shell of any grounded instrument chassis before touching the test port connectors 4396B Agilent 4396B Network Spectrum Impedance Analyzer Function Reference SERIAL NUMBERS This manual applies directly to instruments which have the serial number prefix JPIKE For additional important information about serial numbers read Serial Number in Appendix A of this Manual P Agilent Technologies Agilent Part No 04396 90072 May 2003 Seventh Edition Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice This document contains proprietary information that is pr
324. lock Print Setup Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer COLOR PRINT Note uy PRINT STANDARD COLOR PRINT COLOR FIXED DPI PRINT SETUP TOP MARGIN LEFT MARGIN DEFAULT SETUP RETURN CB008014 Figure 8 12 Print Setup Menu PRINT STANDARD PRIS The analyzer prints a hard copy with monochrome COLOR PRIC Sets the print command to a default of color The PRINT COLOR command does NOT work with a black and white printer PRINT COLOR FIXED PRICFIXE PRICVARI Toggles the printing color between FIXED and VARIABLE If FIXED is selected the analyzer prints a hard copy with default colors If VARIABLE is selected the analyzer prints a hard copy with colors as similar as possible to the display colors that can be adjusted See Display in Chapter 5 for display colors adjustment Because of the limited number of printer ink colors the printed color is not always the same as the displayed color DPI DPI Specifies the resolution of a printer used for printing by dpi The range of settable resolution is between 75 and 600 dpi TOP MARGIN TMARG Specifies the top margin of printing by inch The settable margin range is between 0 and 5 inches in step of 0 1 inch Instrument State Block 8 25 8 26 Instrument State Block LEFT MARGIN LMARG Specifies the left margin of printing by inch The settable margin range is
325. logies office One or more power is failed nnn is one of 5 V 15 V 5 V 15 V 65 V and PostRegHot It shows that which power line is failed When this error occurs the system halts so a controller cannot read this error by GPIB 28 PRINTER not on not connected out of paper The printer does not respond to control Check the supply to the printer online status sheets and so on Messages 9 284 Program currently running Certain operations dealing with programs may be illegal while the program is running For example deleting a running program might not be possible 280 Program error Indicates that a downloaded program related execution error occurred This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 281 through 289 112 Program mnemonic too long The header contains more than twelve characters see IEEE 488 2 7 6 1 4 1 286 Program runtime error A program runtime error of the Instrument BASIC has occurred To get a more specific error information use the ERRM or ERRN command of the Instrument BASIC 285 Program syntax error Indicates that a syntax error appears in a downloaded program The syntax used when parsing the downloaded program is device specific 430 Query DEADLOCKED A condition causing a deadlocked query error occurred see IEEE 488 2 6 3 1 7 For example both input buffer and output buffer are full and the analyz
326. low Chl Memory color No effect Green Ch2 Data color No effect Cyan Ch2 Memory color No effect Salmon Pink Graticule color No effect Gray Warning color No effect Red Text color No effect White IBASIC text color No effect Green Pen 1 color No effect White Pen 2 color No effect Red Pen 3 color No effect Yellow Pen 4 color No effect Green Pen 5 color No effect Cyan Pen 6 color No effect Modified Blue Input Range and Default Settings 0 3 Function Range Preset Value Power ON default Scale Div NA Log mag 0 001 to 500 10 10 NA Phase 10x107 to 500 90 90 NA Delay 10 10 15 to 10 10x10 10x10 NA Smith 10x10712 to 10x10 1 1 NA Polar 10x10712 to 10x 10 1 1 NA LinMag 10x10712 to 10x10 100 10 2 100x107 NA SWR 10x10712 to 10x10 1 1 NA Real 10 10 12 to 10x10 200 1073 200 1073 NA Imag 10x10712 to 10x10 200 1073 200 1073 ExpPhase 10x1071 to 10x 10 90 90 NA Admit 10x10712 to 10x10 1 1 SA Unit dBm 0 1 to 20 10 10 Function Range Preset Value Power ON default Reference Value NA LogMag 500 0 0 5 x 10 0 0 NA Delay 500x 1073 0 0 NA Smith 10 10712 to 500 1 1 NA Polar 10 10712 to 500 1 1 NA LinMag 5 x 108 0 0 NA SWR 5 x 10 1 1 NA Real 5 x 10 0 0 NA Imag 5 x 10 0 0 NA ExpPhase 5 x 108 0 0 NA Admit 10 10712 to 500 1 1 SA Unit dBm 100 to 30 0 0 D 4 Input Range and Default Setting
327. lta value specified by PEAK DELTA A The peak delta function is used to reject small peaks Note 1 For more information on peak definition see Peak Definition in Y Chapter 12 7 24 Marker Block Search range menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer SEARCH RANGE PART SRCH on OFF SEARCH MKRA RANGE MENU SEARCH RNG MKR LEFT RNG MKR RIGHT RNG RETURN Figure 7 16 Search Range Menu PART SRCH on OFF PARS ON OFF Turns partial search oN or orr The search range is displayed by two small triangles A at the bottom of the graticule If no search range is defined the search range is the entire trace MKRA SEARCH RNG SEARSTR Sets the partial search range to the range between the marker and Amarker MKR LEFT RNG SEARSTRL Sets the left lower border of the partial search range at the current position of the marker MKR RIGHT RNG SEARSTRR Sets the right higher border of the partial search range at the current position of the marker Marker Block 7 25 Utility menu Spectrum Analyzer MARKER LIST STATISTICS MARKER TIME NOISE FORM MARKER 7 26 Marker Block MKR LIST on OFF STATISTICS on OFF MKR TIME on OFF NOISE FORM on OFF Figure 7 17 Utility Menu for Spectrum Analyzer LIST on OFF MKRL ON OFF Toggles the marker list function on and off This lists the sweep p
328. lue to lower frequency to avoid this error 210 Trigger error trigger related error occurred This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 211 through 219 211 Trigger ignored GET TRG or triggering signal was received and recognized by the analyzer but was ignored because of analyzer timing considerations For example the analyzer was not ready to respond 113 Undefined header The header is syntactically correct but it is undefined for the analyzer For example XYZ is not defined for the analyzer Messages 12 19 UNEXPECTED DATA DETECTED CAL ABORTED The signal measured for the level cal is not adequate for the calibration signal spectrum analyzer mode only See Calibration menu Spectrum Analyzer in Chapter 5 Error Messages in Numerical Order 0 No error The error queue is empty Every error in the queue has been read OUTPERRO query or the queue was cleared by power on or the CLS command 1 CAN T SET RBW AUTO IN ZERO SPAN The RBW AUTO mode cannot be selected in the zero span The RBW must be specified manually in the zero span See Bandwidth menu Spectrum Analyzer in Chapter 5 spectrum analyzer mode only 10 ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED Error correction for the selected calibration class cannot be computed until all the necessary standards have been measured 11 CALIBRATION REQUIRED No valid calibration co
329. m The positive edge of a pulse more than 20 wide in the Low state triggers RUN or CONT The signal is TTL compatible Connects to external devices such as a handler on a production line See I O PORT in Chapter 12 for additional information This is input for the main power cable Insert the main power cable plug only into a socket outlet that has a protective ground contact Connects the analyzer to an external controller and other instruments in an automated system This connector is also used when the analyzer itself is the controller of compatible peripherals See GPIB in Chapter 12 7 External Monitor Terminal 8 Parallel Interface This terminal outputs measurement results to an external color monitor Color monitors supporting VGA scan speed of 31 5 kHz can be connected to this terminal This interface enables the output of displayed results to a printer It complies with the Centronics parallel interface standard See Printer in Chapter 9 for supported printers 9 mini DIN Keyboard Connector Note 2 10 Front and Rear Panel uy Connect a mini DIN keyboard to this connector usually when using Instrument BASIC Keyboards that are not specified may operate incorrectly Be sure to use the specified PS 2 101 English keyboard Test Set I O Interface Caution This interface enables the connection between the analyzer and the test set using the cable included in the S parameter test set packa
330. ment BASIC Language Reference Performance Test Manual Agilent Part Number 04396 901x0 1 The Performance Test Manual explains how to verify conformance to published specifications Service Manual Agilent Part Number 04396 901x1 1 The Service Manual explains how to adjust troubleshoot and repair the instrument This manual is option OBW only 1 The number indicated by x in the part number of each manual is allocated for numbers increased by one each time a revision is made The latest edition comes with the product Contents 1 Introduction Analyzer s Features Front and Rear Panel ACTIVE CHANNEL Block ENTRY Block MEASUREMENT Block Network Analyzer Mode Spectrum Analyzer Mode SWEEP Block MARKER Block INSTRUMENT STATE Block 2 Front and Rear Panel Front Panel 1 Softkeys that are Joined by Vertical Lines Softkeys That Toggle On or Off Softkeys that Show Status Indications in Brackets 2 3 Preset 4 6 Front Panel Keys and Softkeys GPIB REMOTE Indicator PROBE POWER Connector 5 Network Analyzer Inputs R A and B RF OUT Connector N 7 Spectrum Analyzer Input S 8 9 10 Screen display Active Channel Measured Input s Scale Div Reference Level Marker Data Readout Marker Statistics and Width Value Softkey Labels Sweep Time Sweep Parameter Span Stop Value Power Level CW Frequency Video Ban
331. meric data element was received but the analyzer does not accept it in this position for a header 146 ON POINT NOT ALLOWD FOR THE CURRENT TRIG The trigger event mode cannot be changed to the ON POINT mode because the current trigger source setting does not allow the ON POINT mode The trigger event ON POINT mode is available for only MANUAL EXTERNAL and BUS trigger sources of the network analyzer mode 56 OPTION NOT INSTALLED This error occurs when an GPIB command which is optional command is sent and the analyzer is not installed the option GPIB only Please confirm options installed to the analyzer using OPT command see GPIB Command Reference 4 OVERLOAD ON INPUT A 44 OVERLOAD ON INPUT B 46 OVERLOAD ON INPUT R 47 OVERLOAD ON INPUT S The power level at one of the four receiver inputs exceeds a certain level greater than the maximum input level 220 Parameter error Indicates that a program data element related error occurred This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 221 through 229 108 Parameter not allowed More parameters were received than expected for the header For example the SRE command only accepts one parameter so receiving SRE 4 16 is not allowed 4 PHASE LOCK LOOP UNLOCKED Sever error Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies office 48 POWER FAILED ON nnn Sever error Contact your nearest Agilent Techno
332. meters Z 0 R X Y 0y G 64 Tx Ty Cs Lp Ls Rp Rs D Q Display Formats m Vertical lin log scale m Complex plane m Polar Smith admittance chart Sweep Parameters m Linear frequency sweep m Logarithmic frequency sweep m List frequency sweep m Linear power sweep dBm IF Bandwidth 10 30 100 300 1k 3k 10k 40k Hz Calibration OPEN SHORT LOAD 8 term calibration m Fixture compensation Port extention correction Unknown Port mg APC 7 connector Output Characteristics Frequency range 2 2224 100 kHz to 1 8 GHz Frequency resolution 5 2 2 e ea 1 mHz Output Level 60 to 20 dBm OUT port Note Signal level at the measurement port is 6 dB lower than the RF OUT port when the measurement port is terminated by 50 Q Output level accuracy 22 A B 6 dB x F 1 8 x 10 Where A 2 dB 5 C B 0 dB OSC lt 0 dBm or 1 dB 40 lt OSC lt 0 dBm or 2 dB 60 lt OSC lt 40 dBm Specifications 10 15 F is output frequency Output level resolution 2 2 2 24 2 22 222 ee 0 1 dB Measurement port impedance Nominal 50 Q External DC Bias Input Maximum voltage
333. ms and the significant second order terms The error term related to thermal drift is combined on a worst case basis with the total of systematic and random errors The four terms under the radical are random in character and are combined on an RSS basis The terms in the systematic error group are combined on a worst case basis In all cases the error terms and the S parameters are treated as linear absolute magnitudes En linear Vr Sii Tra magnitude Erm Em log 20108 1 S where V S W2 X2 Y 7 S systematic error 1 T4 XD S4 Tow T Sii Mow Ms S4 85 Mi 5 5 Msw S21512 Am Um Sii W random low level noise 9Ni X random high level noise 3NnS1 Y random portl repeatability R4 281911 RS random port2 repeatability Rr2S21 919 N lI Total Reflection Phase Uncertainty Erp Reflection phase uncertainty is determined from a comparison of the magnitude uncertainty with the test signal magnitude The worst case phase angle is computed This result is combined with the error terms related to thermal drift of the total system port 1 cable stability phase dynamic accuracy and phase multiplexer switching uncertainty VW Am Um S11 S1 Epp aresin Tra phase 2811 Ap Up 11 8 System Performance Transmission Uncertainty Equations Total Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty Etm An analysis of the error model
334. n Segments Entering Order Needs Notice Generally the segments do not have to be entered in any particular order The analyzer automatically sorts them and lists them on the display in increasing order of sweep parameter value One exception is when two segments have the same sweep parameter value as described in Figure 12 14 If the same sweep parameter values exist the analyzer draws the limit lines according to entered segment order For example in Figure 12 14 segment 1 should be entered in advance of segment 2 12 22 Analyzer Features Saving the Limit Line Table Limit line information is lost if the LINE switch is turned off However the Gave and Recall keys can save limit line information along with all other current analyzer settings Limit line table information can be saved on a disk Offsetting the Sweep Parameter or Amplitude of the Limit Lines All limit line entries can be offset in either sweep parameter or amplitude values The offset affects all segments simultaneously Supported Display Formats Limit lines are displayed only in Cartesian format In polar and Smith chart formats limit testing of one value is available The value tested depends on the marker mode and is the magnitude or the first value in a complex pair The message NO LIMIT LINES DISPLAYED is shown on the display in polar and Smith formats Use a Sufficient Number of Points or Errors May Occur Limits are checked only at the actual me
335. n analog to digital converter apc From this point on all further signal processing is performed mathematically by the analyzer microprocessor and digital signal processor The following paragraphs describe the sequence of math operations and the resulting data arrays as the information flows from the ADC to the display They provide a good foundation for understanding most of the measurement functions and the order in which they are performed The analyzer has two data processing flow paths One is for network analyzer mode and the other is for spectrum analyzer mode The data flow is automatically changed when analyzer mode is changed Additionally the data flow of the spectrum analyzer mode has two flow paths One is for stepped FFT mode RBW lt 3 kHz and the other is for swept mode RBW gt 10 kHz For more information on stepped FFT and swept mode see Swept Mode and FFT Mode in this chapter Figure 12 2 and Figure 12 3 are data processing flow diagrams that represent the flow of numerical data from IF detection to display The data passes through several math operations shown as single line boxes Most of these operations can be selected and controlled by the front panel MEASUREMENT block menus The data is also stored in data arrays shown as double line boxes These arrays are places in the flow path where the data is accessible via GPIB or using the internal disk drive or the RAM disk memory Note While only a single flo
336. n changed correction is automatically turned oFF m Input measurement port is changed m Calibration type is changed Measurement Block 5 37 5 38 Measurement Block When C or C2 is displayed at the left of the screen If one of the following sweep parameters has been changed interpolated correction is automatically turned on and the status notation is changed to C or C2 see Screen display in Chapter 2 m Sweep range is changed to fall inside the calibrated range Sweep type is changed m Number of points is changed m Power level is changed IFBW is changed m Sweep time is changed When or C2 is displayed at the left of the screen If one of the following sweep parameters has been changed the status notation is changed to or C2 see Screen display in Chapter 2 In this status error corrections at a sweep point will be done using the calibration coefficient at the nearest calibrated frequency point or at the CW frequency m Sweep range is changed to fall outside the calibrated range m Sweep type is changed from the power sweep If the span is zero and the measurement frequency is equal to the CW frequency of the power sweep the status is not changed m Sweep type is changed to power sweep and CW frequency is out of the calibration range calibration must be performed before correction can be turned on If no valid
337. n of the displayed active channel 1 2 Introduction trace in terms of the mathematical relationship between data and trace memory display intensity color selection active channel display title and frequency blanking Scale Ref Displays the menu used to modify the vertical axis scale and the maximum mixer level and to control the input attenuator Bw Avg Provides access to three different noise reduction techniques sweep to sweep averaging video bandwidth and variable resolution bandwidth Displays the menu used for level calibration SWEEP Block This block defines the range to sweep the control trigger function and the source RF OUT signal Sweep Provides access to a series of menus used for selecting the sweep type editing the list sweep table specifying the number of points to be displayed and modifying the sweep time Displays the menu used to control the RF OUT signal Trigger Provides access to a series of menus used for selecting trigger mode and trigger source Start Stop Center and Used to specify sweep range For more information see Chapter 6 MARKER Block This block displays the marker on the screen and controls the marker function Marker Displays the marker and provides access to a series of menus used for selecting the marker mode and displaying the sub markers and the Amarker Marker Provides access to a series of menus used for changing selected measurement parameters
338. n only be selected by using the GPIB command TRGS BUS GATE LEVEL GATCTL LEV EDG Displays the menu used specify the gate trigger mode the gate delay and the gate length To select the gate trigger mode the following two softkeys are provided Option 1D6 only GATE CTL LEVEL Selects the level gate trigger mode EDGE Selects the edge gate trigger mode GATE DELAY GATDLY Sets the gate delay Option 1D6 only GATE LENGTH GATLEN Sets the gate length Option 1D6 only For more information on the gate trigger see Gated Sweep in Chapter 12 Sweep Block 6 19 TRIGGER EVENT TRIGGER POLARITY RESTART SWEEP 6 20 Sweep Block TRIG EVENT TRGEVE POIN SWE Toggles the trigger event mode This function is available in the network analyzer mode only When in the spectrum analyzer mode this softkey does not appear on the menu DN POINT Shows the analyzer triggers each data point in a sweep ON SWEEP Shows the analyzer triggers a sweep TRIG PLRTY POS neg TRGP POS NEG Selects the trigger signal polarity of an externally generated signal connected to the rear panel EXT TRIGGER input POS neg Shows the sweep is started with a low to high transition of a TTL signal pos NEG Shows the sweep is started with a high to low transition of a TTL signal MEASURE RESTART REST Aborts the sweep in progress and then restarts the measurement This can be used to update a measurement following an adjustment
339. n that in any comparison of group delay data it is important to know the aperture used to make the measurement 12 14 Analyzer Features Frequency Frequency Reduce Nois Larger S N Miss Fine Variations In Phase Linearity 5012004 Figure 12 10 Variations in Frequency Aperture In determining the group delay aperture there is a tradeoff between resolution of fine detail and the effects of noise Noise can be reduced by increasing the aperture but this will tend to smooth out the fine detail More detail will become visible as the aperture is decreased but the noise will also increase possibly to the point of obscuring the detail A good practice is to use a smaller aperture to assure that small variations are not missed then increase the aperture to smooth the trace Analyzer Features 12 15 Spectrum Measurement Basics Detection Modes The analyzer displays the value measured at the display point specified by NOP However analyzer sweeps with the resolution specified by RBW Detection chooses one level measured between display points for displaying the trace One of three detection modes can be selected Positive and Negative Peak Modes Positive and negative peak modes store signal maximums and minimums between the display points respectively in a data array Sample Mode In the sample mode the signal value at the display point is placed in a data array Sample mode is used to measure noise level Sw
340. n with all DUT ports properly terminated 12 10 Analyzer Features S Parameter Definition Test Set Description Direction 511 21 laz o Input reflection Coefficient FWD S21 22 a 0 Forward gain FWD Sie 21 lay 0 Reverse gain REV S22 2 la 0 Output reflection coefficient REV Conversion Function This function converts the measured reflection or transmission data to the equivalent complex impedance Z or admittance Y values This is not the same as a two port Y or Z parameter conversion as only the measured parameter is used in the equations Two simple one port conversions are available depending on the measurement configuration An 611 or S s trace measured as reflection can be converted to an equivalent parallel impedance or admittance using the model and equations shown in Figure 12 5 Figure 12 5 Reflection Impedance and Admittance Conversions In a transmission measurement the data can be converted to its equivalent series impedance or admittance using the model and equations shown in Figure 12 6 Figure 12 6 Transmission Impedance and Admittance Conversions Avoid using Smith chart SWR and delay formats for displaying Z and Y conversions as these formats are not easily interpreted Analyzer Features 12 11 Marker values are impedance values in Q units for Z conversions or admittance values in S units for Y conversions in any format Smith Chart A Smith chart is used in reflection measurements to provide
341. nation channel to the difference value between the marker and Amarker values CROSS CHAN on OFF CRSC ON OFF Selects the destination channel of the marker functions When the eross channel is turned off a marker function changes the sweep parameter or the amplitude value of the active channel When the eross channel is turned on a marker function changes the parameters of the inactive channel ON Selects the current inactive channel as the destination channel OFF Selects the current active channel as the destination channel The active channel is NOT changed to the destination channel after a marker function is performed even when the cross channel is turned on The cross channel can be turned on when the dual channel is turned on Marker Block 7 11 The Search key activates the marker if it is not already active and provides access to the marker search functions The marker search functions can quickly search the trace for specified information PEAK SEARCH NEX
342. nd B Input 5 is usually used for the spectrum measurement However the analyzer can also select input A B or R for spectrum monitoring Note that because inputs R A and B are provided for network measurements the input attenuators of these inputs are fixed The spectrum monitor at inputs A B and R can be used to observe the input signal during network measurement See the User s Guide for a typical application measurement using the spectrum monitor 12 18 Analyzer Features Measurement Points and Display Points In a network measurement the analyzer measures at only the display points specified by NOP In a spectrum measurement the analyzer measures all the frequencies between the display points except for sampling detection mode This is done so that the analyzer can detect spectrums existing between the display points Display Points SA gt Measurement Points Measurement Points Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer are spectrum anabzer at sample detection at positive negative detection 05012039 Figure 12 13 Measurement Points and Display Points Analyzer Features 12 19 Channel Coupling When the analyzer type of both channels is the network analyzer mode the sweep parameters can be coupled But when one channel measures a ratio measurement and the other one measures an absolute measurement for example A R and B sweep parameters can not be coupled In the sweep parameter coupl
343. network analyzer mode List values converted to impedance or admittance LIST VALUES lists log magnitude values when the log magnitude format is selected as the display format even if impedance Z trans Z refl or admittance Y trans Y refl is displayed using the Conversion function and the markers show the absolute values PARAMETER List OPERATING PARAMETERS OPEP Displays the screen menu Provides a tabular listing on the display of the key parameters for both channels The screen menu is presented to allow hard copy listings and access new pages of the table Parameters listed by OPERATION PARAMETERS The following operating parameters are listed in four pages Number of points Sweep time Source power Port 1 and 2 attenuator Bandwidth Averaging factor Averaging switch Group delay aperture Calibration kit Zo Calibration type Sweep conditions when the calibration was performed Phase offset Port 1 and 2 extension Input R A and B extension Velocity factor CAL KIT LIST CAL KIT DEFINITION Displays the copy cal kit menu that prints the calibration kit definitions SWEEP TABLE LIST SWEEP TABLE Displays the copy list sweep menu that can display a tabular listing of the list sweep table and print it LIMIT TABLE LIMIT TEST TABLE Displays the copy limit test menu that can display a tabular listing of the limit value for limit testing and print it 8 24 Instrument State B
344. ng factor 1 999 16 16 Group delay 0 25 to 20 of span 1 1 aperture SA Band width Auto 1 3 10 30 100 300 1 k 3k 10k 30 k 100 k 300k 1 M 3 M Auto 8 MHz Auto 8 MHz SA Averaging On Off Off Off SA Averaging factor 1 to 999 16 16 SA RBW SPAN ratio 0 01 to 10 of span 0 15 96 0 15 96 SA Video Band Width RBW RBW 3 RBW 10 RBW 30 RBW 100 RBW RBW RBW 300 e Function Range Preset Value Power ON default NA Correction On OFF Off Off NA Calibration Type None Response 511 1port 522 lport Full None None 2port One path Zport Calibration Kit 7 mm 3 5 mm N50 Q N75 Q User kit mm mm N System 1 m2 to 5x 10 50 50 Impedance NA Velocity factor 0 0 to 10 0 with 1 0x1071 resolution 1 1 NA Portl extension 10 with 1 0 10719 resolution 0 0 NA Port2 extension 10 with 1 0 10 1 resolution 0 0 NA Input R extension 10 with 1 0 10 1 resolution 0 0 NA Input A extension 10 with 1 0x1071 resolution 0 0 NA Input B extension 10 with 1 0 10 1 resolution 0 0 SA Correction On Off Off Off SA Input Z 50 75 50 50 D 6 Input Range and Default Settings Sweep Block se Function Range Preset Value Power ON default NA Sweep time mode Auto Man Auto Auto NA NOP 2 to 801 201
345. nnectors to control the analyzer from an external device or to control external devices from the analyzer For more information see Chapter 2 The Analyzer has two digital channels for independent measurement and display of data This block has two keys that select the active channel Once an active channel is selected you can control it using the front panel keys and display its trace and data annotations If you want to change the active channel you must select the new channel before you make any other changes For more information see Chapter 3 Introduction 1 1 ENTRY Block This block provides the numerical and units keypad the knob and the step keys These controls are used in combination with other keys to enter or change numeric data For more information see Chapter 4 MEASUREMENT Block This block controls the measurement and display functions Each key provides access to softkey menus Because measurement functions are different for network and spectrum measurements the menus displayed by pressing a key in this block are different for each mode of operation except for the Display key Note al When you press Meas the analyzer displays the ANALYZER TYPE Y softkey for the selected mode of operation either network or spectrum analyzer mode If you want to change the mode of operation press ANALYZER TYPE softkey For more information see Chapter 5 Network Analyzer Mode Provides access to a seri
346. no lower limit is required for a particular measurement force the lower limit value out of range for example 500 dB DELTA LIMIT MIDDLE VALUE Gen DELTA LIMIT LIMD Sets the limits an equal amount above and below a specified middle value instead of setting upper and lower limits separately This is used in conjunction with MIDDLE VALUE or MARKER MIDDLE to set limits for testing a device that is specified at a particular value plus or minus an equal tolerance When DELTA LIMITS or MIDDLE VALUE is pressed all the segments in the table are displayed in these terms even if they were defined as upper and lower limits MIDDLE VALUE LIMM Sets the midpoint for DELTA LIMITS It uses the entry controls to set a specified amplitude value vertically centered between the limits MKR MIDDLE MKRMIDD Sets the midpoint for DELTA LIMITS using the marker to set the middle amplitude value of a limit segment Move the limits so that the limits are automatically set an equal amount above and below the present marker amplitude value DONE LIMSDON Terminates a limit segment definition and returns to the last menu Instrument State Block 8 17 This key performs the following functions Returns front panel control to the user The analyzer ignores all front panel keys except the local key when under the control of an external computer The analyzer is in local mode when the user has front panel control Th
347. nput port is changed the analyzer automatically selects the level cal data that is set when the input port is selected Measurement Block 5 65 Sweep Block Note Source Trigger em E Center Spas uy The sweep block keys and associated menus provide control of the sweep trigger and source functions The following list shows the functions controlled by each key in the sweep block Controlling sweep time Selecting Sweep type Editing table for list sweep Selecting sampling mode for zero span spectrum analyzer only Selecting channel coupling network analyzer only Controlling RF output signal source Setting CW frequency for power sweep Controlling attenuator of an S parameter testset network analyzer only Selecting trigger mode Selecting trigger source Selecting external trigger signal Selecting event caused by trigger Restarting measurement Setting start value of sweep parameter Setting start value of sweep parameter Setting center value of sweep parameter Setting span of sweep parameter Some settings will not be initiated immediately until the measurement is triggered When a setting change is not initiated an indication appears on the left side of the LCD The GPIB programming command is shown in parenthesis following the key or softkey Characters following the program code separated by a space are parameters of the command For example O
348. nt If the marker is placed in the noise the rms noise level is read out normalized to a 1 Hz noise power bandwidth unrr UNIT dBm SAUNIT DBM Selects dBm as amplitude unit SAUNIT DBV Selects dBV as amplitude unit dBuV SAUNIT DBUV Selects dBuV as amplitude unit WATT SAUNIT W Selects watt as amplitude unit VOLT SAUNIT V Selects volt as amplitude unit 5 16 Measurement Block Provides access to the data math functions and other display functions including dual channel display data hold display allocation active channel display title frequency blanking display intensity background intensity and color selection DUAL CHAN on OFF DISPLAY DATA MEMORY DATA and MEMORY DATA MEMORY DATA HOLD GEF RETURN DATA MATH y DATA MATH DATA DATA MEM DEFAULT GAIN amp OFS OFFSET MKR gt OEFSET OFFSET AUX OFFSET RETURN GAN RETURN MORE y SPLIT DISP ON off DISPLAY ALLOCATION E ALL INSTRUMENT HALF INSTR HALF BASIC ALL BASIC BASIC ESTATUS RETURN
349. nt 1 is at 2 MHz and has an upper and lower limit of 5 and 5 dB respectively Notice the upper and lower limit lines start at the START frequency 1 MHz and end at segment 1 Segment 2 is also at 2 MHz with different upper and lower limits of 10 dB and 10 dB changing the limit values instantly Segment 3 is at 3 MHz with the same limit value as segment 2 to obtain a flat limit lines Segment 4 is at 4 MHz with upper and lower limit values of 15 dB and 15 dB changing the limit values gradually Notice the upper and lower limit lines start at the segment and continue until the stop frequency 5 MHz Note Limit lines cannot be cut Therefore when limit lines are needed partially I along the sweep parameter axis the non limit testing portion must also be Y entered Set the non limit testing portion by forcing the upper and lower limit values out of range 500 dB and 500 dB for example Both an upper limit and a lower limit or delta limits must be defined If only one limit is required for a particular measurement force the other limit out of range 500 dB or 500 dB for example Turning Limit Lines Limit Testing On and Off Limit lines and limit testing features are off unless explicitly turned on by the user After entering the limit line information you can turn on the limit line feature and optionally the limit testing features Turning these features orr has no effect on the entered limit line informatio
350. nto error terms which are later reduced during error correction Most of the differences are due to systematic errors repeatable errors introduced by the analyzer test set and cables which are correctable However the difference between the standard s mathematical model and its actual performance has an adverse affect it reduces the system s ability to remove systematic errors and thus degrades error corrected accuracy Therefore in addition to the default cal kit models a user kit is provided that can be modified to an alternate calibration standards model Several situations exist that may require a user defined cal kit m You use a connector interface different from the four built in cal kits Examples SMA or BNC You are using standards or combinations of standards that are different from the predefined cal kits For example using three offset SHORTS instead of an OPEN SHORT and LOAD to perform a 1 port calibration You want to improve the built in standard models for predefined kits Remember that the more closely the model describes the actual performance of the standard the better the calibration Example The 7 mm LOAD is determined to be 50 4 Q instead of 50 0 0 Unused standards for a given cal type can be eliminated from the default set to eliminate possible confusion during calibration Example A certain application requires calibrating a male test port The standards used to calibrate a female tes
351. nts it can be either an OPEN or a SHORT standard If more than one device is measured only the data for the last device is retained The procedures for response calibration for a reflection measurement and a transmission measurement are described in the 4396B Task Reference RESPONSE amp ISOL N CALI RAI Displays the menus used to perform a response and isolation measurement calibration used to measure devices with wide dynamic range This procedure effectively reduces the same errors as the response calibration In addition it effectively reduces the isolation crosstalk error in transmission measurements or the directivity error in reflection measurements In addition to the devices required for a simple response calibration an isolation standard is required The standard normally used to correct for isolation is an impedance matched LOAD usually 50 or 75 Q standard Response and directivity calibration procedures for reflection and transmission measurements are provided in the 4396B Tusk Reference 511 1 PORT CALI 5111 Provides a measurement calibration for reflection only measurements of one port devices or properly terminated two port devices at port 1 of an S parameter test set or the test port of a transmission reflection test kit This procedure effectively reduces the directivity source match and frequency response errors of the test setup It provides a higher level of measurement accuracy than the response and iso
352. ogram performing a limit test using GPIB commands is provided in the GPIB Programming Guide Analyzer Features 12 23 Gated Sweep The gated sweep function can be used to measure any one of several signals separated in time for example burst modulated pulsed RF and time multiplexed Using the gated sweep function allows the analyzer to measure the spectrum of a specific part of the signal or separate signals and mask out interfering or transient signals In the gated sweep mode the analyzer is triggered to start and interrupt sweep selectively by an external trigger signal By controlling the external trigger signal the analyzer measures only the signals that are present when the analyzer sweeps The gate sweep is controlled by the following factors m Trigger polarity which determines which positive or negative edge level causes triggering m Gate trigger mode which selects one of two modes EDGE or LEVEL m Gate Delay which determines how long after the trigger signal the gate actuarially becomes active m Gate Length which determines how long the gate is on Trigger Polarity The analyzer can select the external trigger polarity positive and negative When POSITIVE is selected the analyzer starts the sweep when the external trigger signal is a positive edge or level Gate Trigger Mode Two gate trigger modes EDGE and LEVEL are provided for the gate trigger to match the trigger signal used Edge Mode T
353. on To avoid premature wearing out of the output power switch and input attenuator switch change trigger type to HOLD SINGLE or NUMBER of GROUP to hold sweep after measurement required Or turn off the dual channel or set the power level and the input attenuator of both channels to the same setting 51 MEASUREMENT INVALID AT f lt 1MHZ IFBW gt 10KHZ This message will displayed when whole frequency measured is less than or equal to 1 MHz and IFBW is set to 10 kHz or 40 kHz because the network measurement performance is not warranted at frequency 1 MHz with 10 kHz or 40 kHz IFBW 54 TOO MUCH DATA Either there is too much binary data to send to the analyzer when the data transfer format is FORM 2 FORM 3 or FORM 5 or the amount of data is greater than the number of points 5 NOT ENOUGH DATA The amount of data sent to the analyzer is less than that expected GPIB only 66 OPTION NOT INSTALLED This error occurs when an GPIB command which is optional command is sent and the analyzer is not installed the option GPIB only Please confirm options installed to the analyzer using OPT command see GPIB Command Reference 64 TOO MANY SEGMENTS The maximum number of segments for the limit line table is 18 See Chapter 8 of the 4396B Task Reference 74 CURRENT EDITING SEGMENT SCRATCHED The current editing segment for the list table and the limit line is scratched when the following cases occur GPIB only m When EDITLIST
354. on for the failure might include not enough memory 140 Character data error This error as well as errors 141 through 148 are generated when analyzing the syntax of a character data element This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specific error 148 Character data not allowed legal character data element was encountered where prohibited by the analyzer 14 Character data too long The character data element contains more than twelve characters see IEEE 488 2 7 7 1 4 100 Command error This is a generic syntax error that the analyzer cannot detect more specific errors This code indicates only that a command error as defined in IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 4 has occurred 110 Command header error An error was detected in the header This error message is used when the analyzer cannot detect the more specific errors described for errors 111 through 119 J COMMAND IGNORED SEGMENT NOT DONE YET The GPIB command the analyzer received is ignored because the segment is editing GPIB only Send LIMSDON limit segment done or SDON segment done to terminate editing segment See GPIB Command Reference 50 CONT SWITCHING MAY DAMAGE MECH SWITCH RF output power switch or input attenuator switch at input S is switching sweep by sweep because RF power level or the input attenuator setting is different between two channels and the dual channel is turn on To avoid prema
355. only the discrete measured point Marker on the Data Trace or on the Memory Trace If both data and memory are displayed you can select which marker values apply to the data trace or the memory trace If data or memory is displayed not both the marker values apply to the trace displayed In a data math display data memory data memory or data memory the marker values apply to the trace resulting from the memory math function Analyzer Features 12 29 AMode With the use of a delta marker a delta marker mode is available that displays both the sweep parameter and measurement values of the marker relative to the reference Any position on the trace or a fixed point can be designated as the delta marker The Amarker can be put on a current position of the marker If the delta reference is the fixed Amarker both its sweep parameter value and its magnitude value y axis value can be set arbitrarily anywhere in the display area not necessarily on the trace If the delta marker is the tracking Amarker its sweep parameter value can be controlled and its measurement value is the value of the trace at that sweep parameter value Marker Search Function Markers can search for the trace maximum minimum mean point any other point peak maximum minimum or peak to peak value of all or part of the trace The marker and sub markers can be used together to search for specified bandwidth cutoff points and calculate the bandwidth Statistical analy
356. or each standard STD DONE DEFINED STDD Terminates the standard definition Press this after each standard is defined including offsets Calibration menu Spectrum Analyzer EXECUTE LVL CAL LVL CAL DATA INPUT Z C5005030 Figure 5 33 Calibration Menu for Spectrum Analyzer LEVEL CAL EXECUTE LVL CAL LVLCAL Measures the CAL OUT signal 20 MHz 20 dBm at the input port selected by the input port menu accessed using automatically sets the level cal data After executing this function the instrument state is returned to the state that existed before executing EXECUTE LVL CAL and cor is displayed at the left on the screen If the CAL OUT signal is not correctly injected to the input port or if the analyzer is not set to measure the CAL OUT signal the level cal data is automatically set to 0 LVL CAL DATA LVCDT Set LVL CAL DATA to the level cal data adds an offset value to the measured value INPUT IMPEDANCE INPUT 2 INPZ Set the input impedance to either 50 Q or 75 Q The sweep type must be the linear frequency sweep when the analyzer measures the CAL OUT The analyzer is not allowed to measure the cal out in the list sweep If you press LVL CAL DATA in the list sweep an error occurs and an error message is displayed Level Cal data can be set to each input port independently The level cal can be performed at input R A or B as well as input S When the i
357. or one measurement with two different frequency spans The data can be displayed separately or simultaneously The GPIB programming command is shown in parenthesis following the key or softkey CHANN 9 9 O CB003001 Figure 3 1 Active Channel Keys CHAN1 and Chan 2 CHAN2 The Chan 1 and Chan 2 keys select which channel is the active channel This is the channel currently controlled by the front panel keys The active channel trace and data annotations are displayed on the display All the channel specific functions that are selected apply to the active channel The current active channel is indicated by an amber LED adjacent to the corresponding channel key The analyzer has dual trace capability so that both the active and inactive channel traces can be displayed either overlaid or on separate graticules split display The dual channel and split display features are available in the display menus Active Channel Block 3 1 Coupling Channels 3 2 Active Channel Block When both channels are in the network analyzer mode the sweep parameter values can be coupled or uncoupled between the two channels independent of the dual channel and split display functions See Channel Coupling in Chapter 12 for a listing of the sweep parameter that are coupled in the channel couple mode Another coupling capability is coupled markers W
358. or ratio in dB This fidelity error can be reduced by narrower video bandwidth or sweep averaging Linear scale 23 5 C 10 dBm gt ref level input att gt 50 dBm except for gain compression QRBW lt 300 2 2 2 2 4 420002 RBW gt 1 2 4242 4 4 IF gain switching uncertainty input att fixed referenced to 20 dBm ref level input att Input attenuator switching uncertainty 20 dB to 40 dB referenced to 10 dB 50 dB to 60 dB referenced to 10 dB RBW switching uncertainty SPAN lt 100 x RBW for RBW gt 10 kHz 234 Temperature drift S input lt 3 of reference level lt 10 of reference level 5 C referenced to 10 kHz RBW lt 0 5 dB MM 0 05 s p c A Binputs 2 2 2 4 2 2 2 0 1 2 s p c Sweep Characteristics Sweep type linear zero span list Trigger type Trigger source Sweep time 10 12 Specifications hold single number of groups continuous free run external video manual gate RBW SPAN Typical Sweep Time 3 MHz 1 8 GHz 40 ms 1 MHz 1 GHz 60 ms 300 kHz 1 GHz 340 ms 100 kHz 100 MHz 100 ms 30 kHz 100 MHz 460 ms 10 kHz 10 MHz 400 ms 3 kHz 10 MHz 2 45 1 kHz 1 M
359. ore information see Chapter 8 Front and Rear Panel Front Panel This chapter describes the features of the front and rear panels of the analyzer It provides illustrations and descriptions of the front panel features the LCD display and its labels and the rear panel features and connectors Analyzer functions are activated from the front panel Figure 2 1 by using the front panel hardkeys or softkeys In this manual all front panel hardkeys and softkey labels are shown as Hardkey and Softkey respectively 1 IK AALY JAGTIVE GHANHEL 1 lt Bogo 2 Ses e ao ui m E E El EE Dtm e J J e e 0000 0000 d 10 9 8 7 6 08002001 Figure 2 1 Analyzer Front Panel Front and Rear Panel 2 1 1 Front Panel Keys and Softkeys 2 2 Front and Rear Panel Some of the front panel keys change instrum
360. ormats this softkey performs no function GAIN DATGAIN Defines the gain value for the data math function The data math functions displays the result of the following calculations m GAIN x DATA OFFSET m GAIN x MEMORY OFFSET m GAIN x DATA OFFSET m GAIN x DATA MEMORY OFFSET m GAIN x DATA MEMORY OFFSET SPLIT DISP ON off SPLD ON OFF Toggles between a full screen single graticule display of one or both channels and a split display with two half screen graticules one above the other The split display can be used in conjunction with DUAL CHAN ON to show the measured data of each channel simultaneously on separate graticules DISPLAY ALLOCATION DISA ALLI HIHB ALLB BASS Displays the following menu to allocate the BASIC screen area on the display ALL INSTRUMENT Selects a full screen single screen or two half screen graticules HALF INSTR HALF BASIC Selects two half screens one graticule display above the Instrument BASIC display ALL BASIC Selects a full screen single Instrument BASIC display BASIC STATUS Selects a full screen graticule and three status lines for Instrument BASIC under the graticule Y TITLE Note FREQUENCY BLANK For more information on Instrument BASIC see Using HP Instrument BASIC with the 4396B TITLE TITL Displays the title menu in the softkey labels and the character set in the active
361. ort a 2 4 5 8 1 511 Reflection Coefficient S21 5102 0 REF Level 2 dB from Full Scale Uncorrected Response Response amp Isolation Full one or two port a 2 4 5 8 1 511 Reflection Coefficient Figure 11 2 Total Reflection Phase Uncertainty of One Port Device System Performance Reflection Uncertainty of a Two Port Device Sel 512 5 REF Level 20 dB from Full Scale 4 E Uncorrected 2 Response 3 Response amp Isolation Lot Full one or two port gt p c m p p c m c 3 a 2 4 5 8 1 511 Reflection Coefficient 35 Sel 512 5 REF Level 20 dB 25 from Full Scale m Uncorrected n 20 Response Z Response amp Isolation _ gt Full one or two port m c 15 o P lt D o l c gt a 2 4 5 8 1 511 Reflection Coefficient Figure 11 4 Total Reflection Phase Uncertainty of Two Port Device System Performance 11 3 Transmission Uncertainty of a Low Loss Device 511 522 1 18 REF Level 10 dB 5 from Full Scale Uncorrected m Response 1 Response amp Isolation gt Full one or
362. otected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of the Agilent Technologies Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd Component Test PGU Kobe 1 3 2 Murotani Nishi ku Kobe shi Hyogo 651 2241 Japan Copyright 1997 1998 2000 2002 2003 Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd Manual Printing History The manual printing date and part number indicate its current edition The printing date changes when a new edition is printed Minor corrections and updates that are incorporated at reprint do not cause the date to change The manual part number changes when extensive technical changes are incorporated March 1997 July 1997 September 1997 September 1998 March 2000 November 2002 May 2003 First Edition part number Second Edition part number Third Edition part number Fourth Edition part number Fifth Edition part number Sixth Edition part number Seventh Edition part number 04396 90020 04396 90032 04396 90042 04396 90052 04396 90052 04396 90062 04396 90072 Certification Warranty Agilent Technologies certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Agilent Technologies further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the Unite
363. ow Avg and updated every sweep as it increments When the specified averaging factor is reached the trace data continues to be updated weighted by that averaging factor AVERAGING FACTOR AVERFACT Makes averaging factor the active function Any value up to 999 can be used Toggles between automatic and manual resolution bandwidth The automatic resolution bandwidth specifies the resolution bandwidth from SPAN and RBW SPAN ratio When the automatic resolution bandwidth is selected changing SPAN can change the resolution bandwidth If you enter a value as resolution bandwidth manually the resolution bandwidth is automatically set to manual mode The automatic resolution bandwidth cannot be selected in the zero span Measurement Block 5 33 VIDEO BANDWIDTH 5 34 Measurement Block RES BW 1 BW Selects the bandwidth value for resolution bandwidth reduction Allowed values in Hz 1 10 30 100 300 1 3 k 10 k 30 100 300 1 M and 3 M Any other value will default to the closest allowed value A narrow bandwidth provides better signal to noise ratio The selected bandwidth value is shown in brackets in the softkey label RBW SPAN RATIO BWSRAT Makes the RBW SPAN ratio the active function The RBW SPAN ratio specifies resolution bandwidth in AUTO mode VBW TYPE VBW Selects one of the Linear and logarithm types of VBW LIN The Linear type of VBW is selected The analyzer enters the
364. owed A suffix was encountered after a numeric element that does not allow suffixes 140 Character data error This error as well as errors 141 through 148 are generated when analyzing the syntax of a character data element This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specific error 141 Invalid character data Either the character data element contains an invalid character or the particular element received is not valid for the header 14 Character data too long The character data element contains more than twelve characters see IEEE 488 2 7 7 1 4 148 Character data not allowed legal character data element was encountered where prohibited by the analyzer 150 String data error This error as well as errors 151 and 158 are generated when analyzing the syntax of a string data element This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specific error 151 Invalid string data A string data element was expected but was invalid for some reason see IEEE 488 2 7 7 5 2 For example an END message was received before the terminal quote character 158 String data not allowed A string data element was encountered but was not allowed by the analyzer at this point in parsing 160 Block data error This error as well as errors 161 and 168 are generated when analyzing the syntax of a block data element This particular error
365. ower level of 60 dB from full scale System Performance 11 11 Dynamic Accuracy Error Contribution dB Uncertainty 5 42 1 3 50 easurement Level 4 5 6 7 Cd 8 3 Figure 11 10 B from R 100 1 120 Typical Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Error Reference Power Level Full Scale EF Level from Full EF Level deg Uncertainty 3 4 5 easurement Level Cd Figure 11 11 100 1 120 from Full dB Scale dB Scale Typical Phase Dynamic Accuracy Error Power Level Full Scale 11 12 System Performance Dynamic Accuracy Error Contribution 20 REF Level 20 dB from Full Scale 1a dB Uncertainty 5 42 1 20 14 REF 1 20 30 40 50 60 7 0 30 98 100 easurement Level dB from REF Figure 11 12 Typical Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy Error Reference Power Level 20 dB from Full Scale 50 REF Level 20 dB from Full Scale 20 18 deg
366. p 22 Marker Block 0 51 alla z ent State Block 3 o r lt TE 3 3 llo lt lls Results of Power Loss to Battery Backup Memory Factory Setting Predefined Calibration Kits ML Predefined Standard Class Assignments Messages Error Messages in Alphabetical Order Error Messages in Numerical Order Index D 7 D 8 D 8 D 8 D 8 D 9 D 9 D 10 D 10 D 10 D 11 D 11 D 11 D 11 D 12 D 12 D 13 D 15 Messages 1 Messages 13 Contents 31 Figures 2 1 Analyzer Front Panel 7 7 7 s a 2 1 2 2 Screen Display Single Channel Cartesian Format o 2 5 2 8 Analyzer 1 2 9 3 1 Active Channel Keys 3 1 4 1 Entry 4 1 5 1 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Meas Key for Spectrum Analyzer 5 3 5 2 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Meas Key for Network Analyzer 5 4 5 3 Input Port Menu for Network 5 5 5 4 S parameter Menu for Network Analyzer 4 5 6 5 5 Input Port Menu for Spectrum 2 D 5 7 5 6 Analyzer Type 5 8 5 7 Conversion Menu 5 9 5 8 Detection Menu 5 9 Format Menu for Network Analyzer
367. p time is manually changed is displayed between SWP and the sweep time value 11 Sweep Parameter Span Stop Value 12 Power Level 13 CW Frequency Displays the stop frequency of the sweep range in frequency domain measurements or the upper limit of a power sweep only in the network analyzer mode When the sweep parameter is in center span mode the span is shown in this space The sweep parameter values can be blanked see Display in Chapter 5 Displays the power level of RF output when the sweep parameter is frequency This is network analyzer mode only When the power sweep is selected this area is blank Displays the measurement frequency when the power sweep is selected network analyzer mode only When the frequency sweep is selected this area is blank 14 Video Bandwidth VBW 15 Input Attenuator Displays the video bandwidth spectrum analyzer mode only Displays the input attenuator value at the input S spectrum analyzer mode only 16 Sweep Parameter Center Start Value 17 RBW IFBW Displays the start frequency of the sweep range in frequency domain measurements or the lower power value in power sweep network analyzer mode only When the sweep parameter is in center span mode the center stimulus value is shown in this space For power sweep measurements the CW frequency is displayed centered between the start and stop power values Displays the RBW in spectrum analyzer mode or IFBW
368. power linear value to be measured to the post detection filter In other words the analyzer calculates logarithms of power after the post detection filter LOG The logarithm type of VBW is selected The analyzer enters the logarithm value of power to be measured to the post detection filter as same as a conventional analog spectrum analyzer which uses a log amplifier The analyzer calculates logarithms of power before the post detection filter The logarithm VBW makes measurement result 2 5 dB lower than the actual value VIDEO BW VBW Changes the spectrum analyzer s post detection filter The allowable value of video bandwidth depends on the current value of resolution bandwidth and are 1 1 1 8 1 10 1 30 1 100 and 1 300 of the current value of the resolution bandwidth SHORT CORRECTION RESPONSE G OFF THRU iSGEN STO RESPONSE ly DONE REP M ISGUN CAL e Vormm gt Response Isolation Menu SHORT i OPENIM RESPONSE RU 511 A PORT SHORT PONE das LOAD Ma RESPONSE IMPORT PORT CAL FULL defined gt 2 PORT defined std 2 ONESPATH 571 1 Port Menu ct defined std 4 m Mies ins letined CAL KIT SHOR detined std 7 t LOAD Y DONE DONE ASPORT CAL lt RESPONSE CAL KIT S22 1 Port Me Hesponse Standard Menu NSO ohn WE REFLECT N si DONE USER KIT di
369. ps Instrument States and Internal Data Arrays STATE This group consists of the instrument states that include raw calibration coefficients network analyzer only the data arrays and the memory arrays Binary Files Only Internal Data Arrays DATA ONLY The internal data arrays that are stored in the analyzer s memory consists of the following six data arrays See Data processing in Chapter 12 for complete information on each data array and their relationships Binary and ASCII Files m Raw data arrays contain raw uncalibrated measurement data m Calibration Coefficients arrays contain the expanded calibration coefficients obtained by calibration of the network analyzer m Data arrays contain the calibrated data obtained using the calibration coefficients m Memory arrays contain the memory data arrays obtained using the DATA MEM operation C 2 Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data a Data Trace arrays contain the formatted data m Memory Trace arrays contain the formatted data of the memory arrays These arrays can be saved selectively to suit the application For example when measuring several devices with the same measurement settings you may need to save only the trace arrays for each device Saving only the necessary arrays reduces the disk space required and the disk access time In addition saving internal data also allows the analysis of the measurement results using an external controller See
370. puts R A and B Note A Note A 5 6 RF Connector In the network analyzer mode these inputs receive signals from a test set source or device under test DUT The R input is used as the reference input The input impedance of each input is 50 0 In the spectrum analyzer mode these inputs can monitor the spectrum of the input signals INSTALLATION CATEGORY I A Do not exceed the operating input power voltage and current level and signal type appropriate for the instrument being used refer to your instrument s operation manual A Electrostatic discharge ESD can damage the highly sensitive microcircuits in your instrument ESD damage is most likely to occur as the test fixtures are being connected or disconnected Protect them from ESD damage by wearing a grounding strap that provides a high resistance path to ground Alternatively ground yourself to discharge any static charge built up by touching the outer shell of any grounded instrument chassis before touching the test port connectors Connects the RF output signal from the analyzer s internal source to a test set or power splitter The output impedance at this connector is 50 Q When the spectrum analyzer mode is selected the RF output is automatically turned off If RF output signal is to be used for the spectrum analyzer you must turn it on The frequency of the output signal is equal to the frequency at the spectrum measurement point and tr
371. r Network Analyzer FORMAT LOG MAG FMT LOGM Displays the log magnitude format PHASE FMT PHAS Displays a Cartesian format of the phase portion of the data measured in degrees This format displays the phase shift versus frequency DELAY FMT DELA Selects the group delay format Activated markers give values in seconds SMITH Re Im FMT SMITH Displays a Smith chart format The Smith chart is most easily understood with a full scale value of 1 0 If the scale per division is less than 0 2 the format switches automatically to polar If the characteristic impedance of the system is not 50 0 modify the impedance value recognized by the analyzer using the SET 70 softkey in the calibration menu see Calibration menu POLAR CHART LINEAR MAGNITUDE SWR REAL IMAGINARY EXPANDED PHASE ADMITTANCE CHART Format POLAR Re Im FMT POLA Displays a polar format LIN MAG FMT LINM Displays the linear magnitude format This is a Cartesian format used for unitless measurements such as reflection coefficient magnitude p or transmission coefficient magnitude and for linear measurement units It is used for display of conversion parameters SWR FMT SWR Reformats a reflection measurement into its equivalent SWR standing wave ratio value SWR is equivalent to 1 p A p where p is the reflection coefficient REAL FMT REAL Displays only the real resistive po
372. r couple ONCp1 2 6 marker coupling 7 3 marker data readout 2 6 marker list 7 25 7 26 Marker ON 7 2 marker search 12 30 marker statistics 2 6 marker time 7 25 7 26 marker time mode 12 29 Mere 1 3 Max 2 6 MAX SEAM MAX 7 15 Max 2 8 max hold 5 18 maximum hold ON Max 2 8 maximum safe input level 10 3 10 11 max mixer level 5 29 Index 8 MAX MIXER LEVEL MAXMLEV 5 29 max search 7 15 eas 1 2 5 3 measured input 2 6 measurement basic 12 10 measurement basic accuracy supplemental performance characteristics 10 16 measurement block 1 2 measurement block 5 1 measurement error 12 39 measurement format 10 9 measurement points 12 19 MEASURE RESTART REST 6 20 MEM on OFF SAVMEM ON OFF 8 36 memory 5 18 MEMORY DISP MEMO 5 18 memory arrays 12 5 12 9 C 2 MEMORY PARTITION 8 4 memory partition 8 4 8 8 memory trace array 12 9 memory trace arrays 12 6 C 3 MEM TRACE on OFF SAVMTRC ON OFF 8 36 menu 2 2 message area 2 9 MID amp DLT DISMAMP MD 8 28 MIDDLE VALUE LIMM 8 16 middle value 8 16 MIN SEAM MIN 7 15 Min 2 6 2 8 min hold 5 18 minimum hold ON Min 2 8 min search 7 15 MKR CONT MKRCONT ON OFF 7 4 MKR UNCOUPLE MKRCOUP OFF ON 7 3 MKRA CENTER MKRDCENT 7 11 MKRA SEARCH RNG SEARSTR 7 24 MKRA SPAN MKRDSPAN 7 11 MKRA CNTR STEP MKRDCSTE 6 22 MKRA SPAN MKRDS
373. r of points displayed is the total number of frequency points for the defined list SWEEP TYPE MENU Displays the sweep type menu Using the softkeys on this menu one of the following two sweep types can be selected for spectrum analyzer mode SWEEP TYPE LIN FREQ SWPT LINF Activates a linear frequency sweep mode Sweep Block 6 7 6 8 Sweep Block LIST SWEEP LIST TABLE LIST FREQ SWPT LIST Activates the frequency list mode If the list is not defined this softkey performs no function EDIT LIST EDITLIST Displays the following softkeys to define or modify the frequency sweep list SEGMENT Determines a segment on the list to be modified Enter the number of a segment in the list or use the step keys to scroll the pointer gt at the left to the required segment number The indicated segment can then be edited or deleted EDIT SEDI Displays the segment menu for spectrum analyzer The segment indicated by the pointer gt at the left can be modified DELETE SDEL Deletes the segment indicated by the pointer gt ADD SADD Adds a new segment to be defined with the segment menu for spectrum analyzer If the list is empty a default segment is added and the edit segment menu is displayed so it can be modified If the list is not empty the segment indicated by the pointer gt is copied and the edit segment menu is displayed CLEAR LIST CLEL Displays the clear list menu L
374. racy 10 1 10 7 initialize D 1 INITIALIZE 8 7 INITIALIZE INID 8 34 initialize 8 34 INITIALIZE DISK YES 8 40 8 0 12 56 input attenuator 2 7 10 11 input attenuator switching uncertainty 10 12 input characteristics 10 2 10 13 input crosstalk 10 2 input impedance 5 62 input ports 5 7 INPUT PORTS 5 6 input 5 2 3 inputs R A and 2 3 INPUT Z INPZ 5 62 Instrument data arrays C 2 instrument state block 1 3 Instrument states and internal data arrays C 2 INTENSITY INTE 5 21 interface function 10 20 internal reference output 2 10 10 21 interpolated error correction ON C C27 2 8 introduction 1 1 i o port 2 10 10 21 12 56 i o port pin assignments 10 21 isolation 5 44 5 49 5 51 ISOLATION ISOL 5 49 5 51 isolation 12 39 12 41 12 52 ISOLATION DONE ISOD 5 49 5 51 isolation error 12 53 isolation Exp 12 53 isolation Exp 12 53 ISOL N STD RAIISOL 5 44 K keyboard connector 2 11 10 21 KIT DONE MODIFIED CKITD 5 57 4 2 knob 4 2 L label cal kit 5 57 label class 5 56 LABEL CLASS 5 56 LABEL DONE 5 57 LABEL FWD TRANS LABEFWDT 5 56 LABEL KIT LABK 5 57 LABEL S11A LABES11A 5 56 LABEL 522 LABES22A 5 56 label standard 5 61 LABEL STD LABS 5 61 ORIENT PORTRAIT LANDSCAPE ON OFF 8 22 LEFT MARGIN LMARG 8 26 left peak 7 18 level accuracy 10 1 10 11
375. ration For predefined kits this is THRU FWD MATCH SPECFWDM Enters the standard numbers for the forward match THRU calibration For predefined kits this is THRU REV MATCH SPECREVM Enters the standard numbers for the reverse match THRU calibration For predefined kits this is THRU RESPONSE SPECRESP Enters the standard numbers for a response calibration This calibration corrects for frequency response in either reflection or transmission measurements depending on the parameter being measured when a calibration is performed For predefined kits the standard is either OPEN or SHORT for reflection measurements or THRU for transmission measurements RESPONSE amp ISO N SPECRESI Enters the standard numbers for a response and isolation calibration This calibration corrects for frequency response and directivity in reflection measurements or frequency response and isolation in transmission measurements Note al Y LABEL CLASS CLASS DONE SPEC D CLAD Completes the class assignment and stores it The letter menu is described in the Display key section See Letter Menu LABEL CLASS Displays softkeys that give the class a meaningful label for future reference These labels become softkey labels during a measurement calibration A label can be up to ten characters long LABEL S114 LABES114 Displays the letter menu to define the label for the first class required for an 51 1 po
376. re required for making measurements on devices of the indicated connector type 11853A 50 Q Type N Adapter Kit 11854A 50 BNC Adapter Kit 11855A 75 Q Type N Adapter Kit L L L m 11856A 75 Q BNC Adapter Kit System accessories available System rack Printer The 85048 system rack is a 124 cm 49 inch high metal cabinet designed to rack mount the analyzer in a system configuration The rack is equipped with a large built in work surface a drawer for calibration kits and other hardware a bookshelf for system manuals and a locking rear door for secured access Lightweight steel rails support the instrument along their entire depth Heavy duty casters make the cabinet easily movable even with the instruments in place Screw down lock feet permit leveling and semi permanent installation The cabinet is extremely stable when the lock feet are down Power is supplied to the cabinet through a heavy duty grounded primary power cable and to the individual instruments through special power cables included with the cabinet The analyzer can output displayed measurement results directly to supported peripherals not using external computers Supported printers are as follows Table 9 1 Supported Printers and Printing Modes Printer HP DeskJet 340J HP DeskJet 505 HP DeskJet 560C HP DeskJet 850C HP DeskJet 1200 HP DeskJet 1600CM Monochrome Printing Fixed Color Printing Variable Color Printing
377. restart sweep 6 20 RESTORE DISPLAY RESD 8 30 resume cal 5 39 RESUME CAL SEQUENCE RESC 5 39 return loss 10 2 10 3 10 13 REV ISOL N ISOL N STD REVI 5 49 5 51 REV MATCH LABEREVM 5 56 REV MATCH SPECREVM 5 55 REV MATCH THRU REVM 5 49 Index 11 REV TRANS LABEREVT 5 56 REV TRANS SPECREVT 5 55 REV TRANS THRU REVT 5 48 rf input 10 13 rf out connector 2 3 RF OUT on OFF RFO ONIOFF 6 16 6 17 rf output OFF P 2 8 rf output ON P 2 8 right peak 7 18 R jX CIRF RX 7 27 Ra 11 7 R 11 7 Ra 11 7 Rig 11 7 Run 8 6 run cont input 2 10 10 22 S 11 1 PORT CALI S111 5 38 s11 1 port cal 5 45 11 LABES11B 5 56 11 SPECS11B 5 54 11 LABES11C 5 56 11 SPECS11C 5 54 11 one port calibration 12 42 S11 OPEN CLASS114 5 45 5 47 5 50 22 1 PORT CALI S221 5 38 s22 1 port cal 5 46 522 LABES22B 5 56 S22B SPECS22B 5 55 S22C LABES22C 5 56 22 SPECS22C 5 55 one port calibration 12 42 5221 OPEN CLASS22A 5 46 5 48 sample 5 11 SAMPLE DET SAM 5 11 sample detection mode 12 18 sample mode 12 16 sample peak detection ON Smp 2 8 sampling 6 7 sampling rate 12 28 sampling time 12 27 SAVE 8 6 Save 1 3 SAVE ASCII SAVDASC 8 33 SAVE BINARY SAVDDAT 8 32 save color 5 23 SAVE COLORS SVCO 5 23 Index 12 save data 8 32 save state 8 32
378. rmed using 85036B 75 Q type N calibration kit Enviromental temperature is 23 C 3 C at calibration 1 C from calibration temperature must be maintained for valied measurement calibration 2 With IF bandwidth of 10 Hz 3 With impedace matched load 4 High level noise is the RMS of a continuouse measurement of a short circuit or thru 5 Arrived at by bending 11857D cables out perpendicular to front panel and reconnecting Stability is much better with less flexing 6 Arrived at using 11857D cables and full 2 port calibration Drift is much better without calbes and with 1 port calibration For this case drift typically is 0 1 0 05 xf GHz x A C degrees 11 22 System Performance Table 11 6 Typical System Performance for Devices with 50 0 Type N Connectors 4396B with 87512A Test Set 100 kHz to 1 8 GHz L Typical Residual after Accuracy Enhancement 2 Symbol Error Terms Uncorrected Response Only Response and Isolation One Port Full two port D Directivity 40 dB 0 01 Source Match 24 dB 24 dB 24 dB 25 dB 25 dB 0 063 0 063 0 063 0 056 0 056 Reflection Tracking _ _ _ 0 83 dB 0 83 dB 0 1 0 1 Load Match 22 dB 22 4 22 40 0 079 0 079 0 079 0 01 Ti Trans Tracking 0 8 0 2 0 2 0 05 0 096 0 028
379. rr 1 EspSuA If the value of these three E errors and the measured test device response were known for each frequency the above equation could be solved for S114 to obtain the actual test device response Because each of these errors changes with frequency their values must be known at each test frequency These values are found by measuring the system at the measurement plane using three independent standards whose S114 is known at all frequencies Sum Epr The first standard applied is a perfect load that makes S 4 0 and essentially measures directivity Figure 12 31 Perfect load implies a reflectionless termination at the measurement plane All incident energy is absorbed With S144 0 the equation can be solved for Epr the directivity term In practice of course the perfect load is difficult to achieve although very good broadband LOADs are available in the 4296A compatible calibration kits 0 Epp Sum EDF Vg O Figure 12 31 Perfect Load Termination Because the measured value for directivity is the vector sum of the actual directivity plus the actual reflection coefficient of the perfect load any reflection from the termination represents an error System effective directivity becomes the actual reflection coefficient of the perfect load Figure 12 32 In general any termination having a return loss value greater than the uncorrected system directivity reduces re
380. rray names are described in the next section m Data The data part consists of sweep parameter and numerical data of data arrays Table C 3 shows an example of an ASCII data file Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data C 9 Table C 3 Contents of ASCII Files Block Names Contents Status Block 4396B REV1 00 DATE mmm dd yyyy State CHANNEL 1 TITLE This is a title MEAS A R FORMAT TYPE LOG MAG NUMBER of POINTS 201 Data Block SWEEP TIME 12 2 ms SWEEP TYPE LIST FREQ SOURCE POWER 0 dBm 3 BANDWIDTH 4 kHz Title Frequency Raw S11 Real Raw S11 Imag Data 3 00000Ec5 8 20007E 1 4 09729E 1 1 52238E 7 59 32143E 1 4 1914E 2 1 4 5 1 This is the date when the file is saved 2 This line is listed when the title is defined displayed 3 Shows the power level of the source for a frequency sweep If power sweep is selected the CW frequency is listed for example CW FREQ 100 MHz 4 gt means tab code Data is separated by the tab code 5 This line lists the names of the data array saved in this file Titles used in the ASCII files are shown in Table C 4 through Table C 7 6 Each line lists the measurement data at each measurement point The number of lines in the data block is the same as the number of points 7 In the network analyzer mode complex data is saved In the spectrum analyzer mode only real
381. rs move to the next peaks on the left of the marker position The sub markers start at the nearest peak from the marker position PEAK DEF MENU Displays the peak definition menu Marker Block 7 15 Toggles the search tracking This is used in conjunction with other search features to track the search of each new sweep ON Makes the analyzer search every new trace for the specified target value and puts the active marker on that point OFF When the target is found on the current sweep it remains at the same sweep parameter value regardless of changes in trace amplitude values in subsequent sweeps wipra WIDTHS WIDT ON OFF Displays the menu that is used to define the start and stop points for a bandwidth search in the network analyzer mode and to turn bandwidth search on and orr OFF Shows the bandwidth search is turned off TON Shows the bandwidth search is turned on WIDTHS is displayed in the network analyzer mode only When the spectrum analyzer mode is selected SIGNAL TRK on OFF is displayed in this position Toggles signal tracking on and off TON Moves the signal that is nearest to the marker to the center of the screen and keeps the signal there OFF Turns off the signal tracking SIGNAL TRK on OFF is displayed in the spectrum analyzer mode only When the network analyzer mode is selected WIDTHS 1 is displayed in this position Signal Tracking Limits Because signal tracking requ
382. rt calibration S11B LABES11B Displays the letter menu to define the label for the second class required for S l port calibration S11C LABES11C Displays the letter menu to define the label for the third class required for an 51 1 port calibration LABEL 522 LABES22A Displays the letter menu to define the label for the first class required for an S5 l port calibration 522 LABES22B Displays the letter menu to define the label for the second class required for an S l port calibration 522 LABES22C Displays the letter menu to define the label for the third class required for an S5 l port calibration LABEL FWD TRANS LABEFWDT Displays the letter menu to define the label for the forward transmission THRU calibration REV TRANS LABEREVT Displays the letter menu to define the label for the reverse transmission THRU calibration FWD MATCH LABEFWDM Displays the letter menu to define the label for the forward match THRU calibration Measurement Block 5 59 REV MATCH LABEREVM Displays the letter menu to define the label for the reverse match THRU calibration RESPONSE LABERESP Displays the letter menu to define the label for the response calibration RESPONSE amp ISO N LABERESI Displays the letter menu to define the label for the response and isolation calibration LABEL DONE Completes the procedure to define labels and store them LABEL CAL KI
383. rtion of the measured data on a Cartesian format This is similar to the linear magnitude format but can show both positive and negative values IMAGINARY FMT IMAG Displays only the imaginary reactive portion of the measured data on a Cartesian format This format is similar to the real format except that reactance data is displayed on the trace instead of impedance data EXPANDED PHASE FMT EXPP Displays the phase plot over 360 When this is turned on the analyzer avoids the phase plot wrap around every 360 ADMITTANCE Re Im FMT ADMIT Displays an admittance Smith chart format and displays the circle data menu This used in reflection measurement to provide a readout of the data in terms of admittance When absolute measurement is selected that is A B or R is selected in the input port menu only LOG MAG LIN MAG or SWR can be used as the measurement format Measurement Block 5 15 Format menu Spectrum Analyzer FORMAT SPECTRUM NOISE UNIT dBm dBV dBuV WATT VOLT Figure 5 10 Format Menu for Spectrum Analyzer SPECTRUM MEASUREMENT FORMAT SPECTRUM FMT SPECT Activates a spectrum measurement If the noise level is activated this softkey disables the noise level The amplitude unit for the reference level display trace and marker is selected by softkeys in this softkey menu NOISE MEASUREMENT NOISE FMT NOISE Activates a noise level measureme
384. rum Analyzer 6 10 CLEAR LIST 6 10 CLEAR LIST YES 6 10 0 6 10 Segment menu Network Analyzer s ee se e toc soc t oe ot 6 11 SEGMENT s e e ee mmo ss 6 11 SEGMENT MKR START 5 6 11 MKR STOP MKRSTOP 6 11 NUMBER of POINTS POIN 6 11 STEP SIZE STPSIZE 6 11 POWER POWER 6 11 IE BW BW e 6 11 t ot t 6 12 SEGMENT START STAR 6 12 STOP STOP 6 12 CENTER CENT oaa a a 6 12 SPAN SPAN 6 12 SEGMENT QUIT SQUI 6 12 SEGMENT DONE SDON 6 12 Segment menu Spectrum Analyzer s e e e e e e ho em o ot t 6 13 SEGMENT MKR START 5 6 13 MKR STOP MKRSTOP 6 18 POWER 6 18 RES BW BW 6 13 MORE 2 2 ll c st s s sus a 6 15 SEGMENT START STAR 6 13 STOP STOP 6 13 CENTER CENT 6 13 SPAN SPAN 6 14 SEGMENT QUIT SQUI 6 14 SEGMENT DONE SDON 6 14 Source
385. rum analyzer mode The network analyzer mode allows that the automatic sweep time is turned on 128 SPAN 0 ONLY The repetitive sampling is turn on when span must be zero the sweep type must be linear frequency and the trigger source must be EXT or VIDEO only Confirm the analyzer setting and set appropriate setting for the repetitive sampling mode 128 LIN FREQ ONLY The repetitive sampling is turn on when span must be zero the sweep type must be linear frequency and the trigger source must be EXT or VIDEO only Confirm the analyzer setting and set appropriate setting for the repetitive sampling mode 130 TRIG EXT or VIDEO ONLY The repetitive sampling is turn on when span must be zero the sweep type must be linear frequency and the trigger source must be EXT or VIDEO only Confirm the analyzer setting and set appropriate setting for the repetitive sampling mode 131 FREQUENCY SWEEP ONLY The sweep type must be frequency sweep when the center step size is set 132 COUPLED CHAN BETWEEN NA NA ONLY The analyzer types of both channels must be the network analyzer mode when the coupled channel is turned on 133 CAN T CHANGE ON LIST SWEEP When list sweep is selected the following parameters are not allowed to be changed CENTER SPAN START STOP NOP IFBW or RBW POWER Modify the list table to change these parameters in the list sweep 134 CAN T COUPLE IN CURRENT INPUTS When one channel meas
386. s Function Range Preset Value Power ON default Reference Position NA LogMag 0 to 10 with 0 01 resolution 5 5 NA Phase 0 to 10 with 0 01 resolution 5 5 NA Delay 0 to 10 with 0 01 resolution 5 5 NA Smith 0 to 10 with 0 01 resolution 5 5 NA Polar 0 to 10 with 0 01 resolution 5 5 NA LinMag 0 to 10 with 0 01 resolution 0 0 NA SWR 0 to 10 with 0 01 resolution 1 1 NA Real 0 to 10 with 0 01 resolution 5 5 NA Imag 0 to 10 with 0 01 resolution 5 5 NA ExpPhase 0 to 10 with 0 01 resolution 5 5 NA Admit 0 to 10 with 0 01 resolution 5 5 Spectrum 10 fixed 10 10 Noise 10 fixed 10 10 Function Range Preset Value Power ON default NA Scale for Data Memory Data Data NA Scale Couple On Off On On NA Electrical delay 10 sec 0 0 NA Phase offset 360 0 0 SA Attenuator mode Manual Auto Auto Auto SA Attenuator at S 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 dB 10 dB 10 dB input SA Attenuator at R 30 dB fixed 30 dB 30 dB input SA Attenuator at A 6 dB fixed 6 dB 6 dB and B inputs SA Scale for Data Memory Data Data SA Scale Couple On Off On On SA Max mixer level 100 to 10 dBm with 10 dB resolution 10 0 10 0 Input Range and Default Settings D 5 Bw Avg Function Range Preset Value Power ON default Band width 10 30 100 300 1 k 3 k 10 k 40 kHz 3 kHz 3 kHz Averaging On Off Off Off NA Averagi
387. s 2 8 BW 12 30 Bw Avg 1 2 5 30 C 11 7 C 2 8 5 37 2 8 C 5 37 CO 5 60 C1 C1 5 60 2 2 5 60 C2 2 8 C2 2 8 5 37 C2 2 8 5 37 cable 9 4 cable reflection stability 11 7 cable transmission stability 11 7 Cal 5 34 12 CALIBRATE MENU 5 37 CALIBRATE NONE CALI NONE 5 37 calibration 12 38 calibration coefficient arrays 12 5 calibration coefficients arrays C 2 calibration kit 9 3 D 13 calibration kit 5 40 calibrator accuracy 10 11 cal kit 5 39 CAL 7mm 5 39 CAL KIT Ymm CALK APC7 5 39 CAL KIT DEFINITION 8 24 cal kit list 8 24 CAL on OFF SAVCAL ON OFF 8 36 cal out connector 2 4 cal output 10 13 CANCEL 8 7 8 41 CANCEL 5 25 CAT 8 6 cent 12 30 CENTER CENT 6 12 6 13 1 3 CENTER STEP SIZE CNTS 6 22 center value 2 7 CH1 DATA COLO CH1D 5 21 CH1 MEM LIMIT LINE COLO CH1M 5 22 CH2 DATA COLO CH2D 5 22 CH2 MEM LIMIT LINE COLO CH2M 5 22 CHAN1 3 1 CHAN2 3 1 CHANGE DIRECTORY CHAD 8 34 CHANGE YES 8 8 channel coupling 6 4 12 20 characteristic impedance 5 40 5 58 class 12 43 class assignment D 15 CLASS ASSIGNMENT CALCASSI 8 27 CLASS DONE SPEC D CLAD 5 55 class list 8 27 CLEAR 1 0 8 7 clear list 6 10 CLEAR LIST CLEL 6 5 6 8 CLEAR LIST LIMCLEL 8 14 clear list table 8 14 CLEAR LIST YES 6 10 clear markers 7 3 clear
388. s menu CLEAR 1 0 Enters the CLEAR I O command in the BASIC command line The CLEAR I O command causes the execution of an I O related command to pause Press Continue to resume the execution Instrument State Block 8 7 RESET Enters the RESET command in the BASIC command line The RESET command terminates program execution without confirmation 8 8 Instrument State Block Memory Partition Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer MEMORY PARTITION System System mu K BASIC MEMORY mm K RAM PARTITION no K BASIC mm K RAM nak BASIC anak RAM nn K BASIC mm K RAM BASIC DONE CHANGE YES NO CANCEL d Figure 8 4 Memory Partition Menu nn K RAM mmK BASIC Selects memory partition so that mm Kbyte is used for ram disk and nn Kbyte is used for Instrument BASIC DONE Displays CHANGE YES and NO softkey to execute or cancel the change CHANGE YES Change the memory partition to the one selected NO Cancels the change to the memory partition and returns to the previous softkey menu Instrument State Block 8 9 Clock Menu Network Analyzer NX Ta Spectrum Analyzer vo HOUR SET CLOCK MIN SEC ENTER CANCEL DATE DD MM YY 1 MONTH DAY YEAR ENTER CANCEL DATE MODE MonDayYear DayMonYear RETURN Figure 8 5 Clock Menu ADJUST TIME TIME HH MM SS SETCTIME
389. s Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained vi Dangerous Procedure Warnings Warning Warnings such as the example below precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed Dangerous voltages capable of causing death are present in this instrument Use extreme caution when handling testing and adjusting this instrument vii Safety Symbols General definitions of safety symbols used on equipment or in manuals are listed below Instruction manual symbol the product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instruction manual Alternating current P Direct current On Supply Off Supply In position of push button switch Out position of push button switch Frame or chassis terminal A connection to the frame chassis of the equipment which normally include all exposed metal structures Warning This Warning sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice condition or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in injury or death to personnel o to a procedure practice condition or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product Caution This Caution sign denotes a hazard It calls a
390. s of twenty data arrays The data arrays saved depend on the calibration type used Table C 7 lists the CAL data arrays that are saved for each calibration type selected Table C 7 Calibration Type for Network Measurement Versus CAL Data Saved Calibration Type CAL Data Saved Error Terms 1 Response Cal 1 Real Cal 1 Imag Er or Et Response and Isolation Cal 1 Real Cal 1 Imag Ex or Ed Cal 2 Real Cal 2 Imag Et or Er 1 port Calibration Cal 1 Real Cal 1 Imag Ed Cal 2 Real Cal 2 Imag Es Cal 3 Real Cal 3 Imag Er 2 port Calibration Cal 1 Real Cal 1 Imag Edf Cal 2 Real Cal 2 Imag Esf Cal 3 Real Cal 3 Imag Erf Cal 4 Real Cal 4 Imag Exf Cal 5 Real Cal 5 Imag Elf Cal 6 Real Cal 6 Imag Etf 1 7 Real Cal 7 Imag Edr Cal 8 Real Cal 8 Imag Esr Cal 9 Real Cal 9 Imag Err Cal 10 Real Cal 10 Imag Exr Cal 11 Real Cal 11 Imag Elr Cal 12 Real Cal 12 Imag Etr 1 For more information on error terms refer to Calibration for Network Measurement in Chapter 12 DATA of the network analyzer consists of two data arrays MEMORY of the network analyzer consists of two data arrays DATA TRACE of the network analyzer consists of two data arrays MEMORY TRACE of the network analyzer consists of two data arrays Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data C 13 Input Range and
391. s on the raw data arrays contain all four S parameter measurements required for accuracy enhancement When the channels are uncoupled coupled channels orr there may be as many as eight raw data arrays These arrays are directly accessible via GPIB or using the internal disk drive or the RAM disk memory Note that the numbers here are still complex pairs Calibration Coefficient Arrays When a measurement calibration has been performed and correction is turned on error correction removes the repeatable systematic errors stored in the calibration coefficient arrays from the raw data arrays This can vary from simple vector normalization to full 12 term error correction See Cal in Chapter 5 and Calibration for Network Measurement for details The calibration coefficient arrays themselves are created during a measurement calibration using data from the raw data arrays These are subsequently used whenever correction is on and are accessible via GPIB or using the internal disk drive or the RAM disk memory Data Arrays The results of error correction are stored in the data arrays as complex number pairs These arrays are accessible via GPIB or by using the internal disk drive or the RAM disk memory Memory Arrays If the data to memory operation is performed the data arrays are copied into the memory arrays data trace arrays are also copied into the memory trace array at same time See Display in Chapter 5 in this chapt
392. se Only bytes Data Switches 6 bytes nternal Use Only 4 roa aAA a AA aM a MEMORY MEMORY TRACE C50C010 Figure C 1 File Header Structure Six data switches define the data sroups that follow the file head Each one byte switch is either 1 or decimal value if the applicable data group exists or not respectively The data group to be followed is in the same order of these switches For example when the data switches RAW DATA and DATA TRACE are 1 oN while the others are orff only the RAW DATA and DATA TRACE in this order groups will follow the header Data Group Data group of each channel begins with a header and consists of the same structured data segments The number of data segments depends on the data group type as follows m RAW DATA of the network analyzer consists of a header and four data segments per channel as shown in Figure C 2 They will follow the file header in this order Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data C 5 Ch 1 Ch 2 12 4 06 4 Ces AZ AXCOXNOP Hbyte Data Group Su Sa S22 Header byte 7 2 16xNOP 4byte Uo 16xNOP 4 byte MEXNOP 4 byte MIEXNOP 4 byte Data Group Header Data Segment Analyzer Internal Use NOP Internal Use Data for Each Display Point Internal Use Only Type Only Integer Only Complex
393. sing and display A network analyzer system consists of a source signal separation devices a receiver and a display Spectrum analyzers measure the amplitude and frequency of a signal spectral line by sweeping the tuning frequency of the receiver The test signal is applied to a receiver through an input attenuator A spectrum analyzer consists of an input attenuator a receiver and a display Figure 12 1 is a simplified block diagram of the analyzer A detailed block diagram of the analyzer is provided in the Service Manual together with a complete theory of system operation TEST INPUT FOR SIGNAL SPECTRUM SOURCE ATTNUATOR ANALYZER INPUT SYNTHESIZED _ SOURCE EST SET NETWORK ANALYZER RECEIVER DISPLAY INTERNAL BLOCKS OF 4396B EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT and DUT 5012026 Figure 12 1 Analyzer Simplified Block Diagram 12 2 Analyzer Features Data processing Overview The analyzer s receiver converts the R A B or S input signals into useful measurement information This conversion occurs in two main steps First the high frequency input signal is translated to fixed low frequency IF signals using analog mixing techniques See the Theory of Operation in the Service Manual for details Second the IF signals are converted into digital data by a
394. sions 10 24 directional bridge 9 3 directivity 12 39 12 47 directivity Epp 12 53 directivity Epp 12 53 disc 9 6 discrete 7 4 discrete mode 12 29 disk capacity C 1 disk drive non operating condition 10 23 disk drive operating condition 10 23 disk format 8 34 10 20 C 1 Display 5 16 display 2 4 10 20 Display 1 2 DISPLAY ALLOCATION DISA ALLI HIHB ALLB BASS 5 19 DISPLAY DATA DISP DATA 5 17 displayed average noise level 10 11 10 14 DISPLAY LIST DISL 8 29 DISPLAY LIST DISLLIST 8 28 display point 6 7 display points 6 3 12 19 display unit 10 9 DISP MODE ST amp SP DISMPRM STSP ST and SP 8 29 DISP MODE UPR amp LWR DISMAMP UL 8 28 D M 2 8 D M 2 8 D M 2 8 D amp M SCALE SCAC ONJOFF 5 29 D amp M SCALE COUPLE SCAC ON OFF 5 27 DONE 8 7 8 8 DONE 5 25 DONE 1 PORT CAL SAV1 5 45 5 46 DONE 2 PORT CAL SAV2 5 49 5 51 DONE LIMEDONE 8 14 DONE LIMSDON 8 16 DONE RESP ISOL N CAL RAID 5 44 DONE RESPONSE RESPDONE 5 43 DPI DPI 8 25 drift error 12 39 drift error 11 6 dual channel 5 17 DUAL CHAN on OFF DUAC ON OFF 5 17 dynamic accuracy 11 7 11 10 dynamic accuracy a r b r 10 3 10 5 dynamic range 10 9 E Epr 12 47 EDGE GATCTL EDG 6 19 edge mode 12 24 Edit 8 6 EDIT LIMSEDI 8 13 EDIT SEDI 6 4 6 8 EDIT LIMIT LINE CEDITLIML 8 13 edit limit table 8 13 ED
395. sis uses markers to provide a readout of the mean standard deviation and peak to peak values of all or part of the trace Width Function The bandwidth search feature analyzes a bandpass or band reject trace and calculates the center point bandwidth and Q quality factor for the specified bandwidth These parameters depend on the Amarker mode The following table shows how each parameter is determined for each Amarker mode Parameter TrackingAMarker FixedAMarker BW Displays the bandwidth value set by WIDTH VALUE Center Displays the center sweep parameter value between the cutoff points this is marked by sub marker 1 Q Displays the Q value cent BW of the trace Insertion Loss Displays the absolute value of the marker Displays the difference between the marker and the fixed Amarker AF left Displays the sweep parameter value difference Displays the sweep parameter value difference between marker 2 and the center frequency between marker 2 and the fixed Amarker specified by the Center key AF right Displays the sweep parameter value difference Displays the sweep parameter value difference between marker 3 and center frequency between marker 3 and the fixed Amarker specified by the Center key Figure 12 19 shows an example of the bandwidth search feature 1233D Analyzer Features Fixed A Maker OdB Tracking AMaker nsertion Loss Insertion Insertion
396. splays the following softkeys ADDRESS 4396 Sets the GPIB address of the analyzer using the entry controls There is no physical address switch to set in the analyzer ADDRESS CONTROLLER ADDRCONT Sets the GPIB address the analyzer will use to communicate with the external controller The analyzer keeps the setting of the GPIB mode and GPIB addresses in the battery backup memory even if the analyzer is turned off Instrument State Block 8 19 8 20 Instrument State Block Preset key presets the instrument state to the preset default value The preset default values are listed in Appendix D Preset has no effect on the following states Analyzer Type Display Allocation Display Adjustment Color Adjustment Clock Time Date Limit Line Table GPIB Address GPIB Mode system controller and addressable User Cal Kit Definition PRINT STANDARD EM PRINT COPY ABORT STANDARD COPY SKEY COLOR on OFF PRINT COLOR COPY TIME FIXED on OFF DPI PRINT gt TOP MARGIN SETUP LEFT MARGIN ORIENT DEFAULT PORTRAIT SETUP on MORE Print Setup Menu 1 COPY ABORT UES COPY TIME VALUES gt Y TIME OPERATING PARAMETERS NEXT CAL KIT STANDARD gt
397. ssion measurements Random errors are measurement variations due to noise and connector repeatability Drift errors include frequency drift temperature drift and other physical changes in the test setup between calibration and measurement The resulting measurement is the vector sum of the DUT response plus all error terms The precise effect of each error term depends upon its magnitude and phase relationship to the actual test device response In most high frequency measurements the systematic errors are the most significant source of measurement uncertainty Because each of these errors can be characterized their effects can be effectively removed to obtain a corrected value for the test device response For the purpose of vector accuracy enhancement these uncertainties are quantified as directivity source match load match isolation crosstalk and frequency response tracking Each of these systematic errors is described below Random and drift errors cannot be precisely quantified so they must be treated as producing a cumulative uncertainty in the measured data Directivity Normally a device that can separate the reverse from the forward traveling waves a directional bridge or coupler detects the signal reflected from the DUT Ideally the coupler would completely separate the incident and reflected signals and only the reflected signal would appear at the coupled output Figure 12 23 a Coupled Coupled Output Output gt
398. status When limit testing is ON the following five different indications of pass or fail status are provided e A PASS or FAIL message is displayed at the right of the display e The limit fail beeper sounds if it is turned on e Ina listing of values using the copy menu an asterisk is shown next to any measured point that is out of limits e A bit is set in the GPIB status byte BEEP FAIL on OFF BEEPFAIL ON OFF Turns the limit fail beeper oN or OFF When limit testing is on and the fail beeper is oN a beep is emitted each time a limit test is performed and a failure detected The limit fail beeper is independent of the warning beeper and the operation complete beeper both of which are described in Beeper Menu EDIT LIMIT LINE EDITLIML Displays a table of limit segments on the lower half of the display The edit limits menu is displayed so that limits can be defined or changed SEGMENT Specifies which limit segment in the table to edit A maximum of eight sets of segment values are displayed at one time and the list can be scrolled up or down to show other segment entries The pointer gt shows the segment that can be edited or deleted The pointer can be moved using the entry block If the table of limits is designated EMPTY new segments can be added using ADD or EDIT EDIT LIMSEDI Displays the limit line entry menu that defines or modifies the sweep parameter value and limit values of a
399. stem an option for the Time Gated spectrum analysis was available only for Add option In the new option system it is available for the Add and No requiring the customer to select either of them 2 In the previous system an option for the frequency reference was available only for the high stability frequency reference In the new option system it is available for the high stability and standard references requiring the customer to select either of them 3 In the previous option system the keyboard comes as one of standard accessories In the new option system it will be attached only when you choose option 810 4 In the previous system the option number is used to choose the language of the operation manual set standard accessory In the new option system it is used to add an operation manual set optional accessory of the language the customer desires 5 No selection of addition deletion is required for the operation manual set because it is only available as an optional accessory in the new option system Manual Changes 5 Softkey Tree Measurement Block Meas SPECTRUM R DETECTION POS DETECTION POSITIVE NEG SAMPLE RETURN ANALYZER TYPE Detection Menu Spectrum Input Port Menu NETWORK ANALYZER SPECTRUM ANALYZER Analyzer Type Menu 05005034 Fig
400. surements m ARBITRARY IMPEDANCE 12 44 Analyzer Features ARBITRARY IMPEDANCESs are assigned a standard type LOAD but with an arbitrary impedance different from system Zo Offset and Delay Offsets may be specified with any standard type This means defining a uniform length of transmission line to exist between the standard being defined and the actual measurement plane For reflection standards the offset is assumed to be between the measurement plane and the standard one way only For transmission standards the offset is assumed to exist between the two reference planes in effect the offset is the THRU Three characteristics of the offset can be defined its delay length loss and impedance m Offset Delay specifies the one way electrical delay from the measurement reference plane to the standard in seconds s In a transmission standard offset delay is the delay from plane to plane Delay can be calculated from the precise physical length of the offset the permittivity constant of the medium and the speed of light m Offet Loss specifies energy loss due to skin effect along a one way length of coaxial cable Offset The value of loss is entered as ohms nanosecond or Giga ohms second at 1 GHz Offset Zo specifies the characteristic impedance of the coaxial cable offset This is not the impedance of the standard itself Note Numerical data for most Agilent Technologies calibration kits is provided in the I c
401. t correction is NOT available network analyzer mode only Del Electrical delay port extension or phase offset has been added or subtracted network analyzer mode only Neg Negative peak detection is ON spectrum analyzer mode only Smp Sample detection is ON spectrum analyzer mode only Avg Sweep by sweep averaging is ON The averaging count is shown below Max Maximum hold is ON Min Minimum hold is ON Gx Data math Gain is ON 0 Data math Offset is ON G amp Data math Gain and Offset are ON D M Data math Data Trace Memory Trace is ON D M Data math Data Trace Memory Trace is ON D M Data math Data Trace Memory Trace is ON Hld Hold sweep 1 Fast sweep indicator Ext Waiting for external trigger BNC in rear panel Man Waiting for manual trigger Bus Waiting for GPIB trigger A service mode is turned If this notation is shown the measurement data will be out of specifications See Performance Test Manual No status notation is displayed when Gate trigger and Video trigger are used ExtRef is displayed when an external reference signal is connected to the external reference input on the rear panel even if phase is not locked 20 Active Entry Area 21 Message Area 22 Title Displays the active function and its current value Displays prompts or error messages See Error Messages for more information on error messages Displays a descriptive
402. t port can be eliminated from the set and will not be displayed during calibration Definitions The following are definitions of terms m standard is a specific well defined physical device used to determine systematic errors m A standard type is one of five basic types that define the form or structure of the model to be used with that standard for example a SHORT or a LOAD m Standard coefficients are numerical characteristics of the standards used in the model selected m A standard class is a grouping of one or more standards that determines which standards are used in a particular calibration procedure Define Standard Standard definition is the process of mathematically modeling the electrical characteristics delay attenuation and impedance of each calibration standard These electrical characteristics coefficients can be mathematically derived from the physical dimensions and material of each calibration standard or from its actual measured response The parameters of the standards can be listed in Standards Definitions Table 12 2 Analyzer Features 12 43 Table 12 2 Standard Definitions OFFSET OFFSET OFFSET STANDARD STANDARD C1 C2 DELAY LOSS Zo LABEL NO TYPE x107 x 107 F Hz x19 9F Hz ps M s Q Each standard must be identified as one of five types OPEN SHORT LOAD DELAY THRU or arbitrary impedance Standard Type
403. t source match leads to mismatch uncertainties that affect both transmission and reflection measurements Source match is most often given in terms of return loss in dB therefore the larger the number the smaller the error m In a reflection measurement the source match error signal is caused by some of the reflected signal from the DUT being reflected from the source back toward the DUT and re reflected from the DUT Figure 12 24 m In a transmission measurement the source match error signal is caused by reflection from the test device that is re reflected from the source Coupled Main Coupler DUT Output Reflected Re reflected from the Reflected source Incident C5012037 Figure 12 24 Source Match The error contributed by source match is a mismatch error caused by the relationship between the actual input impedance of the test device and the equivalent match of the source It is a factor in both transmission and reflection measurements Mismatch uncertainty is particularly a problem in measurements where there is a large impedance mismatch at the measurement plane 12 40 Analyzer Features Load Match Load match error results from an imperfect match at the output of the test device It is caused by impedance mismatches between the test device output port and port 2 of the measurement system As illustrated in Figure 12 25 some of the transmitted signal is reflected from port 2 back to the test device A portion
404. t terminal 2 10 video signal 2 10 video trigger 12 8 VOLT SAUNIT V 5 15 W warm up time 10 1 10 23 WARNING COLO WARN 5 22 WATT SAUNIT W 5 15 weight 10 24 width 7 16 width function 7 20 WIDTHS 1 WIDT ON OFF 7 16 width search 12 30 WIDTHS on OFF WIDT ONIOFF 7 20 WIDTH VALUE WIDV 7 20 width value 2 6 windowing 12 7 X Xch 2 6 Y Y conversion 12 11 Y Refl CONV YREF 5 9 Y Trans CONV YTRA 5 9 Z Z conversion 12 11 zero span 6 24 ZERO SPAN SPAN 0 6 24 zooming 7 11 ZOOMING APERTURE ZMAPER 7 11 Z Refl CONV ZREF 5 9 Z Trans CONV ZTRA 5 9 Index 15 REGIONAL SALES AND SUPPORT OFFICES For more information about Agilent Technologies test and measurement products applications services and for a current sales office listing visit our web site http www agilent com find tmdir You can also contact one of the following centers and ask for a test and measurement sales representative 21 01 2004 United States Test and Measurement Call Center tel 1 800 452 4844 fax 1 888 900 8921 Canada Test and Measurement Call Center tel 1 877 894 4414 fax 1 888 900 8921 China tel 800 810 0189 fax 800 820 2816 Europe tel 31 20 547 2323 fax 31 20 547 2390 Japan Call Center tel 0120 421 345 tel 81 426 56 7832 fax 81 426 56 7840 Korea tel 82 2 2004 5004 fax 82 2 2004 5115 Latin America tel
405. tection DETECTION Mem POSITIVE ANALYZER Analyzer TYRE Type Menu Figure 5 5 Input Port Menu for Spectrum Analyzer SPECTRUM S MEAS S Measures the spectrum at input S R MEAS R Measures the spectrum at input R A MEAS A Measures the spectrum at input A B MEAS B Measures the spectrum at input B DETECTION Displays the detection menu that is used to select the type of detection mode positive negative or sample mode The detection mode defined is shown in brackets under the softkey label ANALYZER Displays the analyzer type menu that selects the network or spectrum analyzer mode of operation Analyzer type menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer NETWORK ANALYZER SPECTRUM ANALYZER Wess NETWORK ANALYZER SPECTRUM ANALYZER 1 Figure 5 6 Analyzer Menu NETWORK ANALYZER NA Selects the network analyzer mode as the analyzer type When the analyzer type is changed all parameters of the active channel are preset SPECTRUM ANALYZER SA Selects the spectrum analyzer mode as the analyzer type When the analyzer type is changed all parameters of the active channel are preset Measurement Block 5 9 Conversion menu Network Analyzer IMPEDANCE ADMITTANCE 5 10 Measurement Block
406. that represent both the magnitude and phase of the IF signal The filter shape can be altered 1244 Analyzer Features by selecting the IF bandwidth in Hz from the 10 30 100 300 1 10k and 40 choices Changing the filter shape is a highly effective technique for noise reduction Frequency characteristics conversion This process digitally corrects for frequency response errors in the analog down conversion path Ratio Calculations These calculations are performed if the selected measurement is a ratio of two inputs for example A R or B R This is simply a complex divide operation If the selected measurement is absolute for example A or B no operation is performed The R A and B values are also split into channel data at this point Range Adjustment This corrects the value to what it was before being ranged The correction is required because the input signal is ranged before it is input to the apc Frequency Characteristics Correction This corrects the frequency response for absolute measurement value If the selected measurement is ratio for example A R or B R no operation is performed Averaging This is one of the noise reduction techniques This calculation involves taking the complex exponential average of up to 999 consecutive sweeps See Averaging in this chapter Raw Data Arrays These arrays store the results of all the preceding data processing operations When full 2 port error correction i
407. the equivalent noise bandwidth and displays the trace on the screen The marker noise form also reads out the noise level normalized even if the format is the spectrum Sample Detection Mode for Noise Measurement For noise measurement the sample detection mode is best Because the power of noise is uniformly distributed over frequency it is not necessary to measure all the frequencies between the display points It is sufficient to measure only the display points Reference Level Calibration Spectrum measurement level calibration is an accuracy enhancement procedure that reduces the system error caused by uncertainty when switching the analyzer and temperature drift It reduces the error by measuring a known calibrator s signal the analyzer uses a 20 dBm 20 MHz signal Spectrum measurement level accuracy is decided by the following error items Calibrator signal level accuracy Frequency response Amplitude fidelity IF gain switching uncertainty Input attenuator switching uncertainty RBW switching uncertainty Temperature drift When level calibration is performed and reference level input attenuator RBW and temperature are not changed the three switching uncertainties and temperature drift are removed The error factors are then only the calibrator signal level accuracy frequency response and scale fidelity For specifications or typical values of these error factors see Chapter 10 Spectrum Monitor at inputs R A a
408. the calibration when it is not required FWD ISOL N ISOL N STD FWDI Measures isolation and then the softkey label is underlined REV ISOL N ISOL N STD REVI Measures isolation and then the softkey label is underlined Measurement Block 5 53 5 54 Measurement Block ISOLATION DONE ISOD Completes isolation calibration The error coefficients are calculated and stored One path 2 port menu is displayed with the ISOLATION softkey underlined If this key is pressed without measuring all the required standards the message CAUTION ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED is displayed DONE 2 PORT CAL SAV2 Completes the one path 2 port calibration The error coefficients are computed and stored The correction menu is displayed with CORRECTION ON and the notation C2 is displayed at the left of the screen If this key is pressed without measuring all the required standards the message CAUTION ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED is displayed Reference Plane Menu Network Analyzer PORT EXTENSION EXTENSIONS on OFF EXTENSION MORE INPUT EXTENSION INPUT A PORT EXTENSION EXTENSION INPUT B EXTENSION PORT 1 EXTENSION PORT 2 RETURN Figure 5 29 Reference Plane Menu EXTENSIONS on OFF PORE ON OFF Toggles the reference plane extension mode When this function is oN all extensions defined below are enabled when none of the extensions are enabled EXTENSION INPUT R PORTR
409. the nominal S parameter data of the device under test Comparison of Typical Error Corrected Measurement Uncertainty Figure 11 1 through Figure 11 8 are examples of the measurement uncertainty data that can be calculated using the information provided in this section These figures compare the reflection and transmission measurement uncertainty of a 7 mm system using different levels of error correction Each figure shows uncorrected values and residual uncertainty values after response calibration response and isolation calibration and full one or two port calibration The data applies to a frequency range of 300 kHz to 1 8 GHz with a stable temperature no temperature drift using compatible 7 mm calibration devices from the 85031B calibration kit The results shown in Figure 11 1 through Figure 11 8 can be obtained using the 85046A Different measurement calibration procedures provide comparable measurement improvement for the following compatible connector types and test sets using the compatible calibration kits m 3 5 mm connectors m 85046A and 87512A with 50 type N connectors m 85046B and 87512B with 75 Q type N connectors System Performance 11 1 Reflection Uncertainty of a One Port Device linear Uncertainty deg Uncertainty 11 2 30 25 20 S21 512 0 REF Level 20 dB from Full Scale Uncorrected Response Response amp Isolation Full one or two p
410. the smallest value in SAMPLING Note Y DISPLAY POINT LINEAR SWEEP SAMPLING NORMAL repet REPTSMP OFF ON Toggles between normal and repetitive sampling mode for zero span When sampling is selected to repetitive mode will be displayed next to the SWP sweep time Zero Span is required for the repetitive sampling mode The sampling mode can be set to repetitive mode only when the instrument state meets the following conditions m Analyzer Type Spectrum m Sweep Type Linear Sweep m SPAN 0 m Trigger Source External or Video If the instrument state does not meet these conditions the sampling mode cannot be changed to the repetitive mode and a caution is displayed Normal Sampling and Repetitive Sampling The normal sampling rate is 25 this means that the analyzer needs 25 ys interval between each measurement point Since the repetitive sampling rate is equivalently 0 5 us the repetitive sampling may get faster signal For more information on the repetitive sampling mode see Repetitive Sampling in Chapter 12 NUMBER of POINTS POIN Displays the current number of data points NOP per sweep You can not enter a value to NOP in the spectrum analyzer mode except for zero span mode and list frequency sweep The analyzer automatically set In the zero span mode this softkey sets the number of data points per Sweep In list frequency sweep the numbe
411. the spectrum analyzer consists of one data array Data Groups of the Network Analyzer Every data group of the network analyzer consists of data arrays The number of data arrays depends on the data group types The saved data arrays RAW and CAL depend on the instrument state mg RAW DATA of the network analyzer consists of eight data arrays The data arrays saved depend on the calibration type and the measurement type If RAW DATA is saved in an ASCII data file when 2 port calibration is used all eight RAW data arrays will be saved in the ASCII data file for any measurement type If another calibration type is used the data arrays saved depend on the measurement type Table C 6 lists the RAW data array combinations that are saved for each measurement type selected C 12 Saving and Recalling Instrument States and Data Table C 6 Network Measurement Type Versus Raw Data Saved Measurement Type Raw Data Arrays Saved A R B R A B A B R 511 512 521 522 511 Real Raw S11 Imag 521 Real Raw S21 Imag 512 Real Raw S12 Imag 511 Real Raw S11 Imag 521 Real Raw S21 Imag 512 Real Raw S12 Imag 511 Real Raw S11 Imag 512 Real Raw S12 Imag 521 Real Raw S21 Imag Raw S22 Real Raw S22 Imag 1 When 2 port calibration is turned ON all Raw Data is saved m CAL DATA of the network analyzer consist
412. ting saving instrument states and trace data on a built in disk and preset state The following list shows the functions controlled by each key in the instrument state block Controlling Instrument BASIC Adjusting the internal real time clock that is used to print the current time and date on the head of a hard copy Toggling Beeper ON OFF Making Limit Lines and executing Limit Testing Service Menu used for testing See the Service Manual for more information Setting GPIB mode and addresses Presetting State Printing screen image listing measurement data and operating parameters calibration kit parameters list sweep table and limit test table Saving instrument states and saving to built in disk Recall of instrument state and data from built in disk drive The GPIB programming command is shown in parenthesis following the key or softkey Characters following the program code separated by a space are parameters of the command For example ON OFF shows that either ON or OFF can be used as a parameter COUC ON OFF means COUC ON or COUC OFF m 1 7 shows that numerical 1 2 3 4 5 6 and 7 can be used as a parameter SMKR 1 7 ON means SMKR 1 ON SMKR 2 ON SMKR 3 ON SMKR 4 ON SMKR 5 ON SMKR 6 ON and SMKR 7 ON Instrument State Block 8 1 8 2 Instrument State Block System SETOLOGK f IBASIC MEMORY PARTITION mmk RAM nnK BASIC
413. ting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance No other warranty ts expressed or implied Agilent Technologies specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and Jilmess for a particular purpose Exclusive Remedies The remedies provided herein are buyer s sole and exclusive remedies Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages whether based on contract tort or any other legal theory Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Agilent Technologies products For any assistance contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office Addresses are provided at the back of this manual Safety Summary The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this instrument Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific WARNINGS elsewhere in this manual may impair the protection provided by the equipment In addition it violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended use of the instrument The Agilent Technologies assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requir
414. tion measurements of two port devices This calibration provides the best magnitude and phase measurement accuracy for both transmission and reflection measurements of two port devices and requires an S parameter test set The One Path Two Port Calibration provides directivity source match load match isolation and frequency response vector error correction in one direction It is used for high accuracy transmission and reflection measurements using a transmission reflection test kit such as the 87512A B The DUT must be manually reversed between sweeps to accomplish measurements in both the forward and reverse directions All the calibration procedures described above are accessed from the CAL key and are described in the al in Chapter 5 12 42 Analyzer Features Modifying Calibration Kits For most applications use the default cal kit models provided in the select cal kit menu described in Cal in Chapter 5 Modifying calibration kits is necessary only if unusual standards are used or the very highest accuracy is required Unless a cal kit model is provided with the calibration devices used a solid understanding of error correction and the system error model are essential to making modifications Read all of this section During measurement calibration the analyzer measures actual well defined standards and mathematically compares the results with ideal models of those standards The differences are separated i
415. to the threshold even if the peak polarity is negative Threshold is used in order to reject the noise floor Peak Delta Detects a peak whose differences of amplitude values between the peak and both side display points of the peak are greater than or equal to the peak delta value specified by PEAK DELTA The peak delta function is used to reject small peaks For more information on peak definition see Peak Definition in Chapter 12 Note al 5 Marker Block 7 23 Peak definition menu Spectrum Analyzer THRESHOLD SEARCH PEAKDEF on OFF PEAK MENU THRESHOLD VALUE MULTIPLE PEAK DEF MKR PEAKS MENU THRESHOLD AY k RETURN 25007014 Figure 7 15 Peak Definition Menu for Spectrum Analyzer Toggles the threshold on and off THRESHOLD VALUE PKTHVAL Sets the threshold values MKR THRESHOLD MKRTHRE Changes the threshold value to the amplitude value of the present marker position PEAK DEF AY PKDLTY Sets the peak delta AY value that is used to define the peak Search Peak Function Definitions for Spectrum Measurement Threshold Detects a peak whose amplitude value is greater than or equal to the threshold Threshold is used in order to reject the noise floor Peak Delta Detects a peak whose differences of amplitude values between the peak and both side local minimum points of the peak are greater than or equal to the peak de
416. tor 100 dBm 1 kHz lt frequency lt MHz 0 dB attenuator lt 90 dBm See EMC under Others in Common to Network and Spectrum Measurement Local oscillator feedthrough lt 25 dBm input mixer level equivalent s p c Gain compression gt 10 MHz input mixer level 10 dBm 0 3 dB s p c Displayed average noise level frequency 10 MHz ref level lt 40 dBm att 20 dB 150 3fGHz dBm Hz 10 kHz lt frequency 10 MHz ref level lt 40 dBm att 20 dB 125 dBm Hz Ref Level lt 40dBm Input Attenuator N I E m D gt E o 2 o z Oo S gt 10k 100k 1M 10M 100M 161 86 Frequency Hz C5010005 Figure 10 8 Typical Displayed Average Noise Level Maximum safe input level Average continuous power 30 dBm 1W Peak pulse power pulse width lt 10 ys duty cycle lt 1 input attenuator gt 30 dB 50 dBm 100 W dc voltage 0 Vdc Input attenuator Range 0 dB to 60 dB 10 dB step Level accuracy Calibrator accuracy 20 dBm 20MHZ lt 0 4 dB 0 2 dB
417. tor keys are the four keys in the right hand column of the keypad These specify units of numerical entries from the keypad and also terminate the entries A numerical entry is incomplete until a terminator is entered When a terminator is required the data entry arrow points at the last entered digit in the active entry area When the unit s terminator key is pressed the arrow is replaced by the units selected The units are abbreviated on the terminator keys as follows G n G N KEY 35 Giga nano 10 1079 M j U KEY 34 Mega micro 10 10 9 k m K M KEY 33 kilo milli 10 1073 x1 KEY 32 basic units dB dBm degrees seconds Hz or dB GHz may be used to terminate unitless entries such as averaging factor No GPIB commands are required The knob adjusts the current values continuously for functions such as scale reference level and others If a marker is on and no other function is active the knob can adjust the marker position Values changed by the knob are effective immediately and require no terminator The ID KEY 16 and fj KEY 17 keys step the current value of the active function up or down Except for the CENTER value the steps are predetermined and cannot be altered The CENTER step size can be entered in the CENTER menu under Center No unit s terminator is required with these two keys 18 Clears and turns off the active entry area and any displa
418. ts 8 522 PORT CAL 322 OPEN CLASS22A SHORT CLASS22B LOAD CLASS22C DONE 1 PORT CAL SAV1 Full 2 Port Cal Menu Network Analyzer REFLECTION CAL REFLECT N REFL S11 OPEN CLASS11A SHORT CLASS11B LOAD CLASS11C 522 OPEN CLASS22A SHORT CLASS22B LOAD CLASS22C REFLECT N DONE TRANSMISSION CAL 222 TRANS MISSION TRANS FWD TRANS THRU FWDT FWD MATCH THRU FWDM REV TRANS THRU REVT REV MATCH THRU REVM TRANS DONE TRAD ISOLATION 222222 ISOLATION ISOL OMIT ISOLATION OMII EWD ISUL N ISOL N STD FWDI REV ISOL N ISOL N STD REVI ISOLATION DONE ISOD DONE 2 PORT CAL SAV2 One Path 2 Port Menu Network Analyzer REFLECTION CAL REFLECT N REFL S11 OPEN CLASS114A SHORT CLASS11B LOAD CLASS11C REFLECT N DONE REFD TRANSMISSION CAL TRANS MISSION TRAN FWD TRANS THRU FWDT FWD MATCH THRU FWDM TRANS DONE TRAD ISOLATION 222222 ISOLATION ISOL 5 46 5 46 5 46 5 46 5 46 5 47 5 47 5 47 5 47 5 47 5 48 5 48 5 48 5 48 5 48 5 48 5 48 5 48 5 48 5 48 5 49 5 49 5 49 5 49 5 49 5 49 5 49 5 49 5 49 5 50 5 50 5 50 5 50 5 50 5 50 5 50 5 51 5 51 5 51 5 51 5 51 5 51 5 51 Contents 9 OMIT ISOLATION OMII EWD ISOL N ISOL N STD FWDI REV ISOL N ISOL N STD REVI ISOLATION DONE ISOD DONE 2 PORT CAL SAV2 Reference Plane
419. ttention Note This Note sign denotes important information It Y calls attention to a procedure practice condition or the like which is essential to highlight Affixed to product containing static sensitive devices 2 use anti static handling procedures to prevent electrostatic discharge damage to component viii Typeface Conventions Bold Italics Computer HARDKEYS SOFTKEYS Boldface type is used when a term is defined For example icons are symbols Italic type is used for emphasis and for titles of manuals and other publications Italic type is also used for keyboard entries when a name or a variable must be typed in place of the words in italics For example copy filename means to type the word copy to type a space and then to type the name of a file such as filet Computer font is used for on screen prompts and messages Labeled keys on the instrument front panel are enclosed in Softkeys located to the right of the CRT are enclosed in Documentation The following manuals are available for the analyzer User s Guide Agilent Part Number 04396 900x1 1 The User s Guide walks you through system setup and initial power on shows how to make basic measurements explains commonly used features and typical application measurement examples After you receive your analyzer begin with this manual Task Reference Agilent Part Number 04396 900x0 1 Task Reference helps you
420. tter signal to noise ratio The selected bandwidth value is shown in brackets in the softkey label GROUP DELY APERTURE GRODAPER Sets the aperture for the group delay measurements as a percentage of the span A frequency aperture Af at the active marker is displayed under the percentage value when the format is DELAY See Group Delay in Chapter 12 for basic theory of group delay Bandwidth menu Spectrum Analyzer AVERAGING RESTART AVERAGING on OFF AVERAGING FACTOR RES BW AUTO man RES BW RBW SPAN RATIO VBW TYPE LIN VIDEO BW Figure 5 19 Bandwidth Menu for Spectrum Analyzer AVERAGING AVERAGING RESTART AVERREST Resets the sweep to sweep averaging and restarts the sweep count at 1 at the beginning of the next sweep The sweep count for averaging is displayed at the left of the display AVERAGING on OFF AVER ON OFF Turns the averaging function ON or for the active channel When averaging is on Avg is displayed in the status notations area at the left of the display along with the sweep count for the averaging factor Whenever an instrument state change affecting the measured data is made the sweep count for averaging is reset to 1 At the start of averaging or following AVERAGING RESTART averaging starts at 1 and averages each new sweep into the trace until it equals the specified averaging factor The sweep count is displayed in the status notations area bel
421. ture wearing out of the output power switch and input attenuator switch change trigger type to HOLD SINGLE or NUMBER of GROUP to hold sweep after measurement required Or turn off the dual channel or set the power level and the input attenuator of both channels to the same setting 132 COUPLED CHAN BETWEEN NA amp NA ONLY The analyzer types of both channels must be the network analyzer mode when the coupled channel is turned on 74 CURRENT EDITING SEGMENT SCRATCHED The current editing segment for the list table and the limit line is scratched when the following cases occur GPIB only Messages 3 m When EDITLIST edit list table command is received while editing a segment for the list table m When EDITLIML edit limit line command is received while editing a segment for the limit line Send LIMSDON limit segment done or SDON segment done to terminate editing segment 16 CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET GPIB only Correction is not valid for the selected measurement parameter 230 Data corrupt or stale Possibly invalid data New reading started but not completed since last access 225 Data out of memory The analyzer has insufficient memory to perform the requested operation 222 Data out of range A legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed because the interpreted value was outside the legal range as defined by the analyzer see IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 5 231 Data questionable
422. tween forward and reverse directions so the reverse error terms cannot be automatically measured Therefore with the one path two port calibration the forward error terms are duplicated and used for both forward and reverse measurements by manually reversing the test device FORWARD REVERSE 5012019 Figure 12 40 Full Two Port Error Model The following equations show the full two port error model equations for all four S parameters of a two port device Note that the mathematics for this comprehensive model use all forward and reverse error terms and measured values Thus to perform full error correction for any one parameter all four S parameters must be measured Cete ens eene 1 Segen Esn Euge Err Ern 114 12 54 Analyzer Features e on Esn Eur Supo taz E Sara Esr Sito ac Pr sig Err Ern 5 Esr _ rn Sua taz 124 too Ese ME sage S62 Err Ern S22M E Siiw E Sai E S224 Suite se Sito Euge In addition to the errors removed by accuracy enhancement other systematic errors exist due to limitations of dynamic accuracy test set switch repeatability and test cable stability These combined with random errors also contribute to total system measurement uncertainty Therefore after accuracy enhancement procedures are performed r
423. two port 5 o P DS 2 o S 1 05 042 B1 RE 10 20 30 40 50 S21 Insertion Loss dB Figure 11 5 Total Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty of a Low Loss Device 511 522 1 REF Level dB 28 A A O O A from Full Scale B Uncorrected i Response 3 Response amp Isolation _ LL Full or two port gt p 2 P lt D 1 c B gt 5 2 1 REF 10 20 30 740 50 S21 Insertion Loss dB Figure 11 6 Total Transmission Phase Uncertainty of a Low Loss Device 11 4 System Performance Transmission Uncertainty of a Wide Dynamic Range Device dB Uncertainty REF Level dB from Full Scale Uncorrected Response Response amp Isolation Full one or two port la5 2 Bl EF 10 20 3 52 a 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Insertion Loss dB Figure 11 7 Total Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty of a Wide Dynamic Range Device deg Uncertainty 50 S11 522 1 REF Level dB from Full Scale Uncorrected Response Response amp Isolation
424. twork Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer 7 7 SUB MARKER MEME 7 7 SUB MKR 1 SMKR1 0M 0 0 0 0 0 e 7 7 2 5 2 00 7 7 3 SMKR3 00 7 7 4 SMKRA ON 2 2 2 s s s e ee 2 7 7 SMKR5 7 7 6 SMKR6 0 7 7 Contents 15 7 SMKR7 07002 7 7 Clear Sub marker menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer s s s s ee e 7 8 CLEAR SUB MARKER s s s s t ee t 7 8 SUB MKR 1 SMKR1 OFF 7 8 2 SMKR2 OFF 7 8 5 OFF 7 8 4 SMKR4 OFF 7 8 SMKRB OFF 7 8 6 SMKR6 DEF 7 8 T SMKR7 OFF 7 8 Marker menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer s t st t s st st st t e 7 10 MKR FUNCTION o 7 10 MKR CENTER MKRCENT 2 2 7 10 MKR START MKRSTAR 7 10 MKR STOP 5 0 7 10 MKR REFERENCE MKRREF 7 10 MKR ZOOM MKRZM 7 10 PEAK CENTER PEAKCENT 7 11 ZOOMING a 7 11 ZOOMING APERTURE ZMAPER 7 11 AMARKER FUNCITON 2 2 7 11
425. ty values using worksheets provided The uncertainty graphs at the beginning of this System performance section are examples of the results that can be calculated using this information Procedures Table 11 8 is a worksheet used to calculate the residual uncertainty in reflection measurements Table 11 9 is a worksheet for residual uncertainty in transmission measurements Determine the linear values of the residual error terms and the nominal linear S parameter data of the device under test as described below and enter these values in the worksheets Then use the instructions and equations in the worksheets to combine the residual errors for total system uncertainty performance S parameter Values Convert the S parameters of the test device to their absolute linear terms Noise Floor See the Receiver Noise Level Performance Test in the Performance Test Manual to determine the actual noise floor performance of your measurement setup Crosstalk See the Input Crosstalk Performance Test Connect an impedance matched load to each of the test ports and measure S or S after calibration Turn on the marker statistics function see Chapter 7 and measure the mean value of the trace Use the mean value plus one standard deviation as the residual crosstalk value of your system Dynamic Accuracy Determine the absolute linear magnitude dynamic accuracy as described under Dynamic Accuracy In this chapter Other Error Terms See Table 11 2 throu
426. type N cal kits connected to the type N female test port connector for the response calibration EF indicates that the test port connector is female it does not indicate the connector type of the standard THRU STANE Measures THRU standard of type N cal kits for the response calibration RESPONSE FOR USER CAL KIT 5 44 Measurement Block defined std 1 STANA defined std 2 STANB defined std 3 STANC defined std 4 STAND defined std 5 STANE defined std 6 STANF defined std 7 STANG These softkeys measure the standard defined by the user for the response calibration When only one standard is assigned to the response calibration this softkey menu is not displayed and the standard is measured immediately DONE RESPONSE RESPDONE Completes the response calibration and computes and stores the error coefficients The correction menu is displayed with CORRECTION ON M and F indicate the test port connector type By convention when the connector type is provided in parentheses for a calibration standard it refers to the connector type of the test port connector not the connector type of the standard For example SHORT M indicates that the test port connector is male not the SHORT connector Response Isolation Menu Network Analyzer RESPONSE ISOLATION Cal Y CALIBRATION MENU Y RESPONSE amp ISOUN gt RESPONSE ISOL N
427. uch as spurs odd harmonics higher frequency spectral noise and line related noise Sweep to sweep averaging however is better at filtering out very low frequency noise A tenfold reduction in IF bandwidth from 200 Hz to 20 Hz for example lowers the measurement noise floor by about 10 dB Another difference between sweep to sweep averaging and variable IF bandwidth is the sweep time Averaging displays the first complete trace faster but takes several sweeps to reach a fully averaged trace IF bandwidth reduction lowers the noise floor in one sweep but the sweep time may be slower Group Delay For many networks the amount of insertion phase is not as important as the linearity of the phase shift over a range of frequencies The analyzer can measure this linearity and express it in two different ways directly as deviation from linear phase or as group delay a derived value See the SCALE REF key description in this chapter for information on deviation from linear phase Group delay is the measurement of signal transmission time through a test device It is defined as the derivative of the phase characteristic with respect to frequency Because the derivative is the instantaneous slope or rate of change of phase with frequency a perfectly linear phase shift results in a constant slope and therefore a constant group delay Figure 12 7 Frequency Figure 12 7 Constant Group Delay Note however that the phase chara
428. ul for debugging Continue Resumes program execution from the point where it paused Instrument State Block 8 5 8 6 EDIT PROGRAM Instrument State Block Run Starts a program from its beginning Pause Pauses program execution after the current program line is executed Stop Stops program execution after the current line To restart the program press Run Edit Enters into the EDIT mode In the EDIT mode the following softkeys are displayed on the softkey menu area ASSIGN Hp4396 Produces the command ASSIGN Hp4396 TO 800 at the cursor s current position OUTPUT Hp4396 Produces the command OUTPUT CHp4396 at the cursor s current position ENTER 0Hp4396 Produces the command ENTER Hp4396 at the cursor s current position END Produces the command END COTO LINE Allows you to move the cursor to any line number or to a label After pressing GOTO LINE type line number or a label and then press Return The cursor moves to the specified line or label RECALL LINE Recalls the last deleted line END EDIT Exits the edit mode CAT Enters the CAT command in the BASIC command line The CAT command displays the list of files on a disk SAVE Enters the SAVE command in the BASIC command line The SAVE command saves a program as an ASCII file RE SAVE Enters the RE SAVE command in the BASIC command line The RE SAVE command overwrites an old file with a new one using the same file name
429. undamentals of accuracy enhancement and the sources of measurement errors It describes the different measurement calibration procedures available in the analyzer which errors they correct and the measurements for which each should be used The later part of this section provides further information on characterizing systematic errors and using error models to analyze the overall measurement performance Accuracy Enhancement If it were possible for a perfect measurement system to exist it would have infinite dynamic range isolation and directivity characteristics no impedance mismatches in any part of the test setup and flat frequency response Vector accuracy enhancement also known as measurement calibration or error correction provides the means to simulate a perfect measurement system In any high frequency measurement there are measurement errors associated with the system that contribute uncertainty to the results Parts of the measurement setup such as interconnecting cables and signal separation devices as well as the analyzer itself all introduce variations in magnitude and phase that can mask the actual performance of the DUT For example crosstalk due to the channel isolation characteristics of the analyzer can contribute an error equal to the transmission signal of a high loss test device For reflection measurements the primary limitation of dynamic range is the directivity of the test setup The measurement system cannot
430. ure B 1 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Meas Key for Spectrum Analyzer Softkey Tree 1 NETWORK AIR B R R A B CONVERSION CONVERSION N OFF ZiRett ZTS 1 5 OFF gt CONVERSI N S PARAMETERS ANALYZER TYPE Network Input Port Menu Refl FWD 511 AIR Trans FWD 21 B Trans REV 512 B Refi REV 522 A R CONVERSION MORE 4xPHASE S PHASE RETURN RETURN NETWORK ANALYZER SPECTRUM ANALYZER TYPE S Parameters Menu When an S para Test Set is connected ANALYZER Analyzer Type Menu CB005033 Figure B 2 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Meas Key for Network Analyzer B 2 Softkey Tree LOG MAG PHASE DELAY SMITH CHART POLAR CHART LIN MAG SWR FORMAT REAL IMAGINARY EXPANDED PHASE ADMITTANCE CHART RETURN 8005008 Figure B 3 Softkey Menus Accessed from the Format Key for Spectrum Analyzer FORMAT SPEC
431. ures a ratio measurement and the other one measures an absolute measurement for example A R and B COUPLED CH can not be turned on 141 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY If a lot of tasks is executed at same time memory might be insufficient for a while For example running Instrument BASIC program printing a screen and sending or receiving data array by GPIB are required at same time Please wait until finishing some tasks then execute the next task Messages 18 146 ON POINT NOT ALLOWD FOR THE CURRENT TRIG The trigger event mode cannot be changed to the ON POINT mode because the current trigger source setting does not allow the ON POINT mode The trigger event ON POINT mode is available for only MANUAL EXTERNAL and BUS trigger sources of the network analyzer mode 154 INVALID DATE The date entered to set the real time clock is invalid Reenter correct date 100 Command error This is a generic syntax error that the analyzer cannot detect more specific errors This code indicates only that a command error as defined in IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 4 has occurred 101 Invalid character syntax element contains a character that is invalid for that type For example a header containing an ampersand SENSE amp 102 Syntax error An unrecognized command or data type was encountered For example a string was received when the analyzer was not expecting to receive a string 103 Invalid separator The parser was expecting
432. ut port must be terminated in the system characteristic impedance This termination should be at least as good have as low a reflection coefficient as the LOAD used to determine directivity The additional reflection error caused by an improper termination at the test device output port is not incorporated into one port error model 114 Analyzer Features 12 51 Two Port Error Model The error model for measurement of the transmission coefficients magnitude and phase of two port device is derived in a similar manner The major sources of error are frequency response tracking source match load match and isolation Figure 12 36 These errors are effectively removed using the full two port error model MEASUREMENT ERRORS Tracking Measured Value solation e Directivity Unknown C5012015 Figure 12 36 Major Sources of Error Measuring Transmission Coefficient The transmission coefficient is measured by taking the ratio of the incident signal I and the transmitted signal T Figure 12 37 Ideally consists only of power delivered by the source and T consists only of power emerging at the test device output 1 gt Forward 95 S21A ETF lt lt Reverse 52 e S12A ETR Figure 12 37 Transmission Coefficient Load Match Error As in the reflection model source match can cause the incident signal to vary as a function of test device S114 Also because
433. utput power increases with frequency starting at the selected power level FREQUENCY FOR POWER SWEEP ATTENUATORS CW FREQ CWFREQ Sets the frequency for the power sweep ATTENUATOR PORT 1 ATTP1 Controls the attenuation at port 1 of an S parameter test set that is connected to the analyzer The attenuator range is 0 to 70 dB controllable in 10 dB steps The S parameter test set must be connected to the analyzer by the test set interconnect cable for the attenuator control signal to be enabled Note that no message is given if the test set is not connected or if it has no programmable attenuator Sweep Block 6 15 6 16 Sweep Block ATTENUATOR PORT 2 ATTP2 Serves the same function as ATTENUATOR PORT 1 for the attenuation at port 2 of the S parameter test set The same attenuator value is used for both channels The analyzer does not allow channel 1 and 2 to be set to different attenuator values This is necessary because the same attenuator is used for both channels and is mechanically switched between them To prevent excessive wear continuous switching of the attenuator values between channels is not allowed RF OUT ON off RFO ON OFF Toggles the signal output on the RF OUT port ON or OFF In the network analyzer mode if the RF output is turned OFF the status notation P is displayed Source menu Spectrum Analyzer Source Figure 6 8 Source Menu for Spectrum Analyz
434. ved C 18 3 5 mm Standard Cal Kit lll a D 13 T mm Standard Cal D 13 50 Q Type N Standard Cal Kit llle D 13 75 Q Type N Standard Cal Kit 2 2 e D 14 Standard Class Assignments Table 7 mm 3 5 mm D 15 Standard Class Assignments Table 50 0 D 15 Standard Class Assignments Table 75 Q Type N 2 css D 16 Contents 36 Introduction This chapter provides an overview of the main features of the analyzer These features include the front and rear panels and the six key blocks The front and rear panel section provides information on the input output connectors the LCD and other panel features The six key block sections describe the keys and their associated menus and how they function together Analyzer s Features Front and Rear Panel ACTIVE CHANNEL Block The following paragraphs describe the analyzer s features Individual chapters describe each block of controls in more detail Analyzer functions are activated from the front panel by using front panel hardkeys or softkeys Measurement results are displayed on the LCD which also displays the measurement conditions and the instrument status The front panel has input and output ports to connect to the device under test DUT or test signal source and a flexible disk drive to store data and instrument status The rear panel has input and output co
435. w path is shown two identical paths are available that I correspond to channel 1 and channel 2 When the channels are uncoupled Y each channel can be independently controlled so that the data processing operations for one can be different from the other Analyzer Features 12 3 Data Processing for Network Measurement DIGITAL F CHAR RANGE CONVERSION FLITER A B ADJUSTMENT CALIBRATION COEFFICIENT DATA ARRAYS ARRAYS 1 12 ELECTRICAL DELAY DATA gt MEM PHASE OFFSET CONVERSION FREQUENCY ERROR MEMORY CHARACTERRISTICS AVERAGING CORRECTION CORRECTION ARRAYS DATA gt SCAUNG TRACE GSP FORMAT i DATA ME INTERFACE MEMORY gt SCALING TRACE Remarks NORMAL FLOW PROCESS ao CONDITIONED FLOW 5012020 Figure 12 2 Data Processing for Network Measurement AD converter ADC The apc converts an analog signal which is already down converted to a fixed low frequency IF into digital data Digital Filter The digital filter detects the IF signal by performing a discrete Fourier transform DFT on the digital data The samples are converted into complex number pairs real plus imaginary R jD
436. weep parameter span Each limit segment has an upper and a lower starting limit value Limits can be defined independently for the two channels with up to 18 segments for each channel a total of 36 for both channels These can be in any combination of the two limit types Limit testing compares the measured data with the defined limits and provides pass or fail information for each measured data point An out of limit test condition is indicated in the following ways m Displaying a FAIL message on the screen m Emitting a beep m Displaying an asterisk in tabular listings of data m Writing a bit into GPIB event status register Limits are entered in tabular form Limit lines and limit testing can be either on or oFF while limits are defined As new limits are entered the tabular columns on the display are updated and the limit lines if on are modified to the new definitions The complete limit set can be offset in either sweep parameter or amplitude value How Limit Lines are Entered Before limit lines can be explained the concept of segments must be understood A segment is the node of two limit lines See Figure 12 14 If Segments are defined as follows Limit lines are set like this START 1MHz Limit lines start at the START STOP 5MHz Segmenti4 frequency Stimulus Upper Segment Break Point Limit Limit lines continue until th STOP Segment 1 frequency 2MHz 508 Segment 1 2MHz 1
437. when no computer is connected to the analyzer Printing and plotting use this mode Addressable This is the traditional programming mode in which the computer is involved in all peripheral access operations When the external controller is connected to the analyzer through GPIB as shown in Figure 12 22 this mode allows you to control the analyzer over GPIB in the talker mode in order to send data and in the listener mode to receive commands It also allows the analyzer to take or pass control in order to plot and print The 4396B Tusk Reference provides information on setting the correct bus mode Programming information for the addressable mode is provided in the GPIB Programming Guide 12 36 Analyzer Features Setting Addresses In GPIB communications each instrument on the bus is identified by an GPIB address This address code must be different for each instrument on the bus See Appendix D for information on default addresses and on setting and changing addresses These addresses are not affected when you press Preset or cycle the power Analyzer Features 12 37 Calibration for Network Measurement Introduction Network measurement calibration is an accuracy enhancement procedure that effectively reduces the system errors that cause uncertainty in measuring a DUT It measures known standard devices and uses the results of these measurements to characterize the system This section explains the theoretical f
438. with 0 1 dBm resolution 30 dBm 30 dBm Marker Block Marker Function Range Preset Value Power ON default Marker position START to STOP CENTER CENTER Number of Marker 1 Off Off Number of 7 All OFF All OFF Sub marker Delta marker Amarker FixedAmarker Off Off Marker on Data Memory Data Data Marker coupled On Off Off Off NA Marker mode Cont Disc Cont Cont NA FixedAmkr START to STOP START START position Sweep prmtr NA FixedAmkr The same as the reference value 0 0 position Value NA FixedAmkr The same as the reference value 0 0 position AUX value SA FixedAmkr The same as the reference value 0 0 position Sweep prmtr SA FixedAmkr The same as the reference value 0 0 position Value 1 Zero will be returned if the marker postion is read using GPIB command after presetting and before the marker turn to ON Input Range and Default Settings D 9 Function Range Preset Value Power ON default Destination channel Ch1 Ch2 Chl Chl Zooming aperture 0 01 to 50 of SPAN 10 10 Gaa Function Range Preset Value Power ON default Search range START to STOP Full SPAN Full SPAN NA Peak polarity Positive Negative Positive Positive NA Width On Off Off Off NA Width value 500 dB 3 dB 3dB Signal track On Off Off Off NA P
439. x out of range The value of a numeric suffix attached to a program mnemonic makes the header invalid 120 Numeric data error This error as well as errors 121 through 129 are generated when parsing a data element that appears to be numeric including the nondecimal numeric types This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specific error 121 Invalid character in number An invalid character for the data type being parsed was encountered For example an alpha character in a decimal numeric or a 9 in octal data 123 Exponent too large The magnitude of the exponent was larger than 32000 see IEEE 488 2 7 7 2 4 1 124 Too many digits The mantissa of a decimal numeric data element contains more than 255 digits excluding leading zeros see IEEE 488 2 7 7 2 4 1 128 Numeric data not allowed legal numeric data element was received but the analyzer does not accept it in this position for a header 130 Suffix error This error as well as errors 131 through 139 are generated when parsing a suffix This particular error message is used if the analyzer cannot detect a more specific error 131 Invalid suffix The suffix does not follow the syntax described in IEEE 488 2 7 7 3 2 or the suffix is inappropriate for the analyzer 134 Suffix too long The suffix contained more than 12 characters see IEEE 488 2 7 7 3 4 Messages 20 138 Suffix not all
440. y See Calibration menu Spectrum Analyzer in Chapter 5 13 UNEXPECTED DATA DETECTED CAL ABORTED The signal measured for the level cal is not adequate for the calibration signal spectrum analyzer mode only See Calibration menu Spectrum Analyzer in Chapter 5 26 PRINTER not on not connect wrong address The printer does not respond to control Check the supply to the printer online status sheets and so on 34 NO VALID MEMORY TRACE If a memory trace is to be displayed or otherwise used a data trace must first be stored to memory 44 OVERLOAD ON INPUT B 45 OVERLOAD ON INPUT A 46 OVERLOAD ON INPUT R 47 OVERLOAD ON INPUT S The power level at one of the four receiver inputs exceeds a certain level greater than the maximum input level 48 PHASE LOCK LOOP UNLOCKED Sever error Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies office 49 POWER FAILED ON nnn Sever error Contact your nearest Agilent Technologies office One or more power is failed nnn is one of 5 V 15 V 5 V 15 V 65 V and PostRegHot It shows that which power line is failed When this error occurs the system halts so a controller cannot read this error by GPIB Messages 14 50 CONT SWITCHING MAY DAMAGE MECH SWITCH RF output power switch or input attenuator switch at input S is switching sweep by sweep because RF power level or the input attenuator setting is different between two channels and the dual channel is turn
441. y and you cannot specify it However in zero span you can specify the number of points Changing the number of points causes changing sweep time The number of points is not changed when sweep time is changed Sweep Block 6 25 Marker Block The marker block keys and associated menus provide control of the marker function The following list shows the functions controlled by each key in the maker block Marker Controlling the marker sub markers and delta marker Setting range for the marker search function gt Changing sweep parameter and amplitude values the current marker s value Zooming traces Search Searching for peak maximum minimum or point specified by amplitude value Setting peak definition Tracking signal spectrum analyzer only Searching bandwidth network analyzer only Utility Listing marker values Calculating statistics value Displaying marker time Calculating noise value spectrum analyzer only Selecting marker form for Smith polar and admittance chart The GPIB programming command is shown in parenthesis following the key or softkey Characters following the program code separated by a space are parameters of the command For example ON OFF shows that either ON or OFF can be used as a parameter COUC ON OFF means COUC ON or COUC OFF m 1 7 shows that numerical 1 2 3 4 5 6 and 7 can be used as a parameter SUBMKR 1 7 ON means SUBMKR 1 ON SUBMKR 2 ON S
442. yed prompts error messages or warnings Use Entry Off to clear the display before plotting This key also prevents active values from being changed by accidentally moving the knob The next function selected turns the active entry area back on Back Space KEY 1 9 Deletes the last entry or the last digit entered from the numeric keypad Entry Block 4 3 Measurement Block Wie Format Scale Ref CTET E Note Y The measurement block keys and associated menus provide control of analyzer type measurement parameter input port display resolution or IF bandwidth averaging and calibration The following list shows the functions controlled by each key in the measurement block Selecting analyzer type network and spectrum analyzer Selecting input port Selecting S parameter to be measured network analyzer only Converting measurement data to equivalent impedance or admittance network analyzer only Multiplying phase network analyzer only Selecting detection mode spectrum analyzer only Selecting display format Measuring noise form spectrum analyzer only Selecting measurement unit spectrum analyzer only Selecting display trace data and memory Storing data trace to memory trace Holding maximum or minimum value Selecting display mode m Dual Single channel m Split Override Allocating screen between analyzer and Instrument BASIC option 1062 only Performing trace math Displa
443. ying titles Erase frequency display Adjusting display color and intensity Scaling trace Controlling group delay and phase offset network analyzer only Controlling input attenuator spectrum analyzer only Selecting value of RBW or IFBW Setting group delay aperture network analyzer only Controlling averaging function Controlling video bandwidth spectrum analyzer only Performing calibration measurement network analyzer only Defining standard kits for Calibaration network analyzer only Performing level calibration spectrum analyzer only Some settings will not be initiated immediately until the measurement is triggered When a setting change is not initiated an indication appears on the left side of the LCD Measurement Block 5 1 5 2 Measurement Block The GPIB programming command is shown in parenthesis following the key or softkey Characters following the program code that are separated by a space are parameters of the command For example m ON OFF shows that either ON or OFF can be used as a parameter COUC ON OFF means COUC ON or COUC OFF m 1 7 shows that numerical 1 2 3 4 5 6 and 7 can be used as a parameter SMKR 1 7 ON means SMKR 1 ON SMKR 2 ON SMKR ON SMKR 4 ON SMKR 5 ON SMKR 6 ON and SMKR 7 ON For more information on GPIB commands see the 4396B GPIB Command Reference ies SPECTRUM R DETECTION POS DETECTIO
444. ys the limit testing table and the screen menu to prepare for hard copy DISP MODE UPR amp LWR DISMAMP UL Selects the upper and lower formats that display the upper limit and lower limit values MID amp DLT DISMAMP MD Selects the middle and delta formats that display the middle value and the maximum deviation limit value from the middle value 8 28 Instrument State Block List Sweep Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer Copy LIST SWEEP TABLE DISPLAY LIST DISP ST amp SP CTR amp SPAN RETURN Screen Menu Figure 8 15 Copy List Sweep Menu LIST TABLE DISPLAY LIST DISL Displays the limit testing table and leads to the screen menu to prepare for hard copy DISP MODE ST amp SP DISMPRM STSP Selects the start stop format to list the sweep parameter CTR amp SPAN DISMPRM CTSP Selects the center span format to list the sweep parameter Instrument State Block 8 29 Screen Menu Network Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer PRINT COPY ABORT TIME STAMP 8 30 Instrument State Block Copy List gt VALUE OPERATION PRINT ARAMETERS STANDARD CAL KIT GLASS COPY ABORT COPY TIME OFF NEXT PAGE PREV PAGE RESTORE DISPLAY MORE DEFINITION STANDARD DEFINITION STR Non I LISTSWEEP_ DISPLAY TABLE LIST DISPLAY LIST
445. zer Features 12 27 Repetitive Sampling The analyzer provides a normal sampling mode and a repetitive sampling mode for zero span The normal sampling mode samples the signal at a 25 us sampling rate The repetitive sampling mode can measure faster signals because the sampling rate of the repetitive mode is 0 5 ys Because the repetitive sampling mode needs an interval time 725 after every sampling the signal being measured must be a repetitive signal Also it takes a longer time to sweep than the sweep time displayed See Figure 12 18 lt 0 5 usec 25 psec Delay 2 Sampling N Results Sampling Data 0 5 psec Trace Image j Sweep Time Display Time for a Sweep 05012041 Figure 12 18 Repetitive Sampling 12 28 Analyzer Features Markers Three Types of Markers Three types of markers are provided for each channel The first is the movable marker that is displayed on the screen as 57 when Marker Maker Search or Utility is pressed When a marker is turned on and no other function is active the marker can be controlled with the knob or the step keys The second is the sub markers that appear at the present marker position when a softkey in the sub marker menu is pressed The seven sub markers can be displayed for each channel at same time a total of 14 The third is the Amarker that defines a reference position of the delta mode

Agilent 4396B Network/Spectrum/Impedance Analyzer Function

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents